diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-01-21 17:56:21 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-01-21 17:56:21 -0800 |
| commit | 8c4566d4e4bff107cfda5fffe222ec8ffefb5dcc (patch) | |
| tree | 1e94f74ce9390e30b29b214f3b4564415ab84e0f | |
| parent | 79b9ddba3d76a92ba079c008a5966da32ea6caa4 (diff) | |
159 files changed, 17 insertions, 20724 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4889319 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #68466 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/68466) diff --git a/old/68466-0.txt b/old/68466-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index c5f0ebd..0000000 --- a/old/68466-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9545 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook of Building a championship football team, -by Paul W. Bryant - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you -will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before -using this eBook. - -Title: Building a championship football team - -Author: Paul W. Bryant - -Contributor: Lloyd Gregory - -Release Date: July 6, 2022 [eBook #68466] - -Language: English - -Produced by: Tim Lindell and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at - https://www.pgdp.net (This book was produced from images - made available by the HathiTrust Digital Library.) - -*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BUILDING A CHAMPIONSHIP -FOOTBALL TEAM *** - - - - - - - _Building a_ - CHAMPIONSHIP - _Football Team_ - - PAUL W. “BEAR” BRYANT - - _Athletic Director and - Head Football Coach, - University of Alabama_ - - Englewood Cliffs, N.J. - PRENTICE-HALL, INC. - - © 1960, BY - PRENTICE-HALL, INC. - Englewood Cliffs, N.J. - - ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THIS BOOK - MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FORM, BY MIMEOGRAPH - OR ANY OTHER MEANS, WITHOUT PERMISSION - IN WRITING FROM THE PUBLISHER. - - LIBRARY OF CONGRESS - CATALOGUE CARD NUMBER: 60-53173 - - Eighth Printing February, 1968 - - PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA - - 08605—BC - - - - -Dedication - - -To a few close associates who were genuinely dedicated to the game of -football. These men were not only great assets to the game; they also -exemplified the true American way of life. Had it not been for men like -these, many of us would have fallen by the wayside. To them, I am forever -grateful. - - ROBERT A. COWAN - FORDYCE, ARKANSAS - - FRANK W. THOMAS - UNIVERSITY OF ALABAMA - - W. A. ALEXANDER - GEORGIA TECH - - H. R. “RED” SANDERS - U. C. L. A. - - CHARLES CALDWELL - PRINCETON UNIVERSITY - - HERMAN HICKMAN - YALE UNIVERSITY—_Sports Illustrated_ - - JIM TATUM - UNIVERSITY OF NORTH CAROLINA - - G. A. HUGUELETT - UNIVERSITY OF KENTUCKY - - HERMAN L. HEEP - TEXAS A & M - - REX ENRIGHT - UNIVERSITY OF SOUTH CAROLINA - - - - -Acknowledgment - - -This book would not have been possible had it not been for the untiring -efforts of Eugene Stallings, co-captain Texas A & M 1956, All Conference -SWC End, and assistant football coach, University of Alabama. “Bebes” -Stallings exemplifies the true meaning of football, both as a player and -as a coach. - - - - -A Real Competitor - - “Fight on, my men,” Sir Andrew says, - “A little I’me hurt, but yett not slaine; - “I’le but lye downe and bleede awhile, - “And then I’le rise and fight againe.” - - “Sir Andrew Barton,” Part 2, St. 16 - (PERCY’S RELIQUES, Series II, Book II) - - -If Sir Andrew were coaching football today, he would be accused of -teaching “hard-nosed football,” for his battlecry “I’ll rise and -fight again” is that of Paul “Bear” Bryant, author of this book and -self-acknowledged teacher of hard-nosed or all-out football. - -Paul Bryant is one of the ablest, most colorful, most controversial -mentors. Fans either love Bear Bryant or despise him—which makes him -excellent box office. - -Competitive fires flame high in Coach Bryant. Legend has it he once -played an entire game with a broken leg, believable when one considers -the all-out effort he demands of himself and his players. Deep down, he -is a sentimentalist who leaves a heavy imprint on his players. John David -Crow, All-American back and Heisman Trophy winner under Bryant at Texas A -& M, and now a National Football League star, says, “Coach Paul Bryant is -the greatest coach in America. He made a man out of me.” - -Paul Bryant is a builder. When he came to Texas A & M in 1954, Aggie -fortunes were at a low ebb. In four years, Bryant’s Aggies won 25, lost -14, tied 2, and nine of those losses were in his first year. - -As a sports writer and television commentator, this observer has watched -Southwest Conference football since 1915, the first year a grid champion -was crowned. The conference’s best job of coaching was Bryant’s, -beginning in 1954. His outstanding player walked out of the Junction, -Texas training camp, and Bryant would _not_ let him return. In their -first game, the Aggies lost to Texas Tech 9 to 41. The Aggies dropped all -six conference games, but only Baylor was able to achieve a two-touchdown -margin. In 1956, Bryant built an unbeaten team, with “my Junction boys” -the nucleus. - -There was something almost mystical about Bryant’s story of why he was -leaving Texas A & M for his alma mater, the University of Alabama: “As a -small boy, I sometimes would play until after dark, and then, from afar -off, I’d hear my beloved mother calling, ‘Paul, come home.’ I’d run as -fast as my legs would carry me.” - -Some cynics sneer at Paul Bryant’s explanation. But the many sportsmen -who hold for him lasting respect and affection know this warm-hearted man -is telling the truth. - - LLOYD GREGORY - HOUSTON, TEXAS - - - - -Table of Contents - - - _Chapter_ _Page_ - - 1. WHY FOOTBALL? 1 - - 2. THE THEORY OF WINNING FOOTBALL 8 - - 3. MAKING THE MOST OF THE COACHING STAFF 18 - - 4. DEFENSE—OUR KIND OF FOOTBALL 24 - - 5. PASS DEFENSE—OBJECTIVES AND TACTICS 62 - - 6. OUR KICKING GAME TECHNIQUES 111 - - 7. OUR OFFENSIVE RUNNING GAME 140 - - 8. OUR OFFENSIVE PASSING GAME TECHNIQUES 176 - - 9. TRAINING THE QUARTERBACK 186 - - 10. PLANNING FOR A GAME 203 - - 11. OUR DRILLS 215 - - 12. THOSE WHO STAY WILL BE CHAMPIONS 231 - - INDEX 235 - - - - -Building a CHAMPIONSHIP Football Team - - - - -CHAPTER 1 - -Why Football? - - -Have you ever wondered about football? Why it’s only a game which is as -fundamental as a ball and a helmet. But the sport is a game of great -importance. If you take all of the ingredients that go into making up the -game of football and put them into a jar, shake well and pour out, you’ve -got a well-proportioned phase of the American way of life. - - -FOOTBALL IS MORE THAN A GAME - -Football is the All-American and the scrub. It’s the Rose Bowl with -102,000 cheering fans, and it’s the ragged kids in a vacant lot using a -dime-store ball. It’s a field in Colorado ankle-deep in snow, and one in -Florida sun-baked and shimmering. - -Leaping cheerleaders, a brassy band, and the Dixie Darlings are a part of -the wonderful game of football. It’s a rich guy being chauffeured to the -stadium gate, and a frightened boy shinnying the fence and darting for -the end zone seats. It’s a crowd which has gone crazy as it rips down the -goal posts. And it’s a nation stunned and wet-eyed at the news of Knute -Rockne’s death. - -Football is drama, music, dignity, sorrow. It’s exhilaration and shock. -It is also humor and, at times, comedy. It’s a referee sternly running -the game. It’s an inebriated character staggering onto the field and -trying to get into the action. - -Football is the memory of Red Grange, the Four Horsemen, and the Seven -Blocks of Granite. It’s a team’s traditional battle cry, such as, “War -Eagle,” in the middle of the summer. It’s a crisp fall day, traffic -jams, portable radios and hip flasks. It’s train trips, plane flights -and victory celebrations. It’s the losers moaning, “You were lucky, just -wait’ll next year!” - -Names are football, such as Bronco, Dixie, Night Train, The Horse, -Hopalong, Bad News, The Toe, and Mr. Outside. - - -FOOTBALL IS THE GREAT AMERICAN NOVEL - -For four quarters, football is the Great American Novel, with chapters -from Frank Merriwell, the Bible, Horatio Alger, the life of Lincoln and -Jack the Giant-Killer. - -Newspaper photos, arguments, Mr. Touchdown USA, yellowed clippings, the -Hall of Fame, The Star-Spangled Banner—they’re all football. - -It’s a game of young men with big shoulders and hard muscles. It’s also a -game of old pros, such as, 38-year-old Charlie Conerly quarterbacking the -New York Giants to a football championship. - -Football is popcorn, cokes, banners and cigaret smoke. It’s people -standing for the kick-off, lap blankets, pacing coaches, penalties and -melodious alma maters. - -Football is a game of surprises. The big guy everybody picks in -pre-season as All-American fizzles out. But a kid nobody ever heard of -scores the winning touchdown and a star is born. It’s Tennessee going -17 games without being scored on. It’s also tiny Chattanooga upsetting -mighty Tennessee, making a coach’s dream come true. - -It’s the pro halfback who is a movie star. And the water boy who got into -a game at Yale. It’s Bronco Nagurski butting down a sandbag abutment, -and dwarfish Davey O’Brien disappearing from sight behind an array of -250 pound linemen. It’s Harry Gilmer jumping high to pass, and Coach Jim -Owens proving that nice guys finish first. - -Football is Bud Wilkinson, whose Sooners are 40 points ahead, walking up -and down the sideline like a caged lion. It’s 35-year-old Paul Dietzel -and 90-year-old Amos Alonzo Stagg. It’s 6′8″ Gene “Big Daddy” Lipscomb -and 5′6″ Eddie LeBaron. - -Women who don’t know a quick kick from a winged-T cheer every move on the -field, waving pennants, purses and even mink stoles. That’s football. -So is the pressbox with its battery of clattering typewriters. And the -oldtimer who claims they played a better game in his day is a part of -football, too. - -It’s Ray Berry, who wears contact lenses, making unbelievable catches for -the Baltimore Colts. And after the game, when he dons his thick glasses, -he looks the part of a studious school teacher—which he is after football -season terminates. - -It’s a scramble for tickets, playing parlays, wide-eyed youngsters -getting autographs, a fist fight in the stands, second guessing, -banquets, icy rains, color guards, fumbles, goal line stands, homecoming -queens, and the typical mutt running onto the field attracting everyone’s -attention. - -Football is Tommy Lewis jumping off the bench in the Cotton Bowl game and -tackling a touchdown-bound Rice runner simply because, “I’ve got too much -Alabama in me, I guess.” It’s the quivering voice of a dying George Gipp -telling his Notre Dame teammates, “Win one for the Gipper.” - -It’s New Year’s, Christmas and the Fourth of July rolled into one. It’s -VJ Day, the Declaration of Independence, Haley’s comet and Bunker Hill. -It’s tears and laughter, pathos and exuberance. - -Football is a game that separates the men from the boys, but also it’s a -game that makes kids of us all. - -Most of all it’s a capsule of this great country itself.[1] - - [1] The author extends sincerest thanks to Clettus Atkinson, - Assistant Sports Editor, Birmingham Post-Herald, for - contributing his fine depiction to the meaning of football. - - -FOOTBALL IS THE AMERICAN WAY OF LIFE - -Football, in its rightful place, can be one of the most wholesome, -exciting and valuable activities in which our youth can possibly -participate. It is the only sport I know of that teaches boys to have -complete control of themselves, to gain self-respect, give forth a -tremendous effort, and at the same time learn to observe the rules of -the game, regard the rights of others and stay within bounds dictated by -decency and sportsmanship. - -Football in reality is very much the American way of life. As in life, -the players are faced with challenges and they have an opportunity to -match skills, strength, poise and determination against each other. The -participants learn to cooperate, associate, depend upon, and work with -other people. They have a great opportunity to learn that if they are -willing to work, strive harder when tired, look people in the eye, and -rise to the occasion when opportunity presents itself, they can leave -the game with strong self-assurance, which is so vitally important in -all phases of life. At the same time they are developing these priceless -characteristics, they get to play and enjoy fellowship with the finest -grade and quality of present day American youth. - - -_The Game’s Intrinsic Values_ - -Not only is football a great and worthwhile sport because it teaches fair -play and discipline, but it also teaches the number one way of American -life—to win. We are living in an era where all our sympathy and interest -goes to the person who is the winner. In order to stay abreast with the -best, we must also win. The most advantageous and serviceable lesson that -we can derive from football is the intrinsic value of winning. It is not -the mere winning of the game, but it is teaching the boys to win the -hectic battle over themselves that is important. Sure, winning the game -is important, and I would be the last to say that it wasn’t, but helping -the boy to develop his poise and confidence, pride in himself and his -undertakings, teaching him to give that little extra effort are the real -objectives of teaching winning football. - -If I had my choice of either winning the game or winning the faith of a -boy, I would choose the latter. There is no greater reward for a coach -than to see his players achieve their goals in life and to know he had -some small part in the success of the boys’ endeavors. - -Boys who participate in football, whether in high school or college, are -in their formative years. It is every coach’s responsibility to see that -each boy receives the necessary guidance and attention he so rightly -deserves. I would be deeply hurt and embarrassed if I learned a boy -wasn’t just a little better person after having played under my guidance. -If we, as coaches, lose the true sense of the value of football and get -to a point where we cannot contribute to a boy progressing spiritually, -mentally, and physically, we will be doing this wonderful game of -football a great injustice by remaining in coaching. - -The coaching profession is honorable and dignified and we football -coaches are in a position to contribute to the mental development and -desirable attitudes which will remain with the boys throughout their -lives. We have the opportunities to teach intangible lessons to our -players that will be priceless to them in future years. We are in a -position to teach these boys intrinsic values that cannot be learned at -home, church, school or any place outside of the athletic field. Briefly, -these intangible attributes are as follows: (1) Discipline, sacrifice, -work, fight, and teamwork; (2) to learn how to take your “licks,” and -yet fight back; (3) to be so tired you think you are going to die, but -instead of quitting you somehow learn to fight a little harder; (4) when -your team is behind, you learn to “suck up your guts” and do whatever -it takes to catch up and win the game; and (5) you learn to believe in -yourself because you know how to rise to the occasion, and you know you -will do it! The last trait is the most important one. - - -_The Greatest Display of Courage_ - -One personal reference will illustrate the intangible attributes that -football teaches. We have all seen or heard someone tell about the -greatest display of courage a team has ever shown. When a team you coach -has had such an experience, it makes you exceedingly happy and proud of -your position and the team. While I have never been ashamed of any of -my football clubs, I will always have a soft spot in my heart for one -of my teams in particular. I think my 1955 Texas A & M team displayed -the greatest courage, rose to the occasion better, and did more of what -I call “sucking up their guts and doing what was required of them” in a -particular game than any other team with which I’ve ever been associated. - -We were playing Rice Institute in Houston on a hot, humid afternoon. Our -play was very sluggish and before we fully realized it, the game was -almost over, and we were behind 12-0. We were leading the Conference race -up to this point, but it was beginning to look as if we were going to be -humiliated before 68,000 people. Having become disgusted with my starting -unit’s ineffective play, I withdrew the regulars from the game early -in the fourth quarter. With approximately four minutes left to play, I -decided to send the regulars back in. I told them they still had time to -win the game if it meant enough to them to do so. - -The first unit went on to the field and immediately called time out. I -later found out they vowed to each other they were going to do whatever -it took to win the game. We eventually got possession of the football -on our own 42-yard line, and the clock showed 2:56 remaining to play. -Again the boys called time out, giving each man a few seconds to make up -his mind just exactly what he was going to do. On the first play from -scrimmage, Lloyd Taylor, a little halfback from Roswell, New Mexico ran -58 yards around left end for a touchdown. He kicked the extra point and -the score was 12-7, with 2:08 remaining in the game. We tried an on-side -(short) kick, and Gene Stallings recovered the ball on Rice’s 49-yard -line. Our quarterback, Jimmy Wright, then threw a 49-yard pass to Lloyd -Taylor who made a beautiful catch as he crossed the goal line. Taylor -scored his fourteenth point as he kicked his second point-after-touchdown -placement. With the score 14-12, we lined up and kicked the ball deep to -Rice. Forcing Rice to gamble since they were behind, they attempted a -deep pass which our great fullback, Jack Pardee, intercepted and returned -40 yards to the 3-yard line. On the next play Don Watson carried the ball -across for a touchdown, making the final score 20-12 in our favor. - -After the game in our dressing room when everyone was congratulating each -other, and everything was in a state of confusion, Lloyd Taylor suggested -we thank the Master for giving us the courage to make the great comeback. -From that game on we have always said a prayer of gratitude after the -game, win, lose, or draw. - -The particular incident cited was the greatest display I have ever seen -of boys reaching back and getting that little extra, showing their true -colors, and rising to the occasion and putting into practice the thing -that we preach and believe in. - -What do we get out of coaching? There is nothing in the world I would -swap for the associations with those boys, and the other fine men I have -coached, and the self satisfaction of knowing I’ve helped many boys to -find themselves. In my estimation, football is truly a way of life. - - - - -CHAPTER 2 - -The Theory of Winning Football - - -Every football team has a slogan, and each coach has his own theory as to -what makes a winning team. We are no exception. Our slogan is, “Winning -is not everything, but it sure beats anything that comes in second.” -Our theory on how to develop a winning team is very simple—WORK! If the -coaches and players will work hard, then winning will be the result. - -We want to win. We play to win. We are going to encourage, insist and -demand that our players give a 100% effort in trying to win. Otherwise we -would be doing them a great injustice. It is very important for the boys -to have a complete understanding of what they must do in order to win. - -When a boy has completed his eligibility or has played four years under -our guidance, I like to believe he will graduate knowing how to suck up -his guts and rise to the occasion, and do whatever is required of him to -get his job done. If our boys are willing to work hard, and we give them -the proper leadership and guidance, then they will graduate winners and -our athletic program will be a success. - - -HOW TO START BUILDING A WINNER - -Building a winning football team is something that cannot be accomplished -overnight, or even in a year or two, if the program is starting from -scratch. I believe, irrespective of the time element involved, a football -program has little chance of succeeding unless the following “musts” are -adhered to: - - 1. The coach _must_ have a definite plan in which he believes, - and there _must_ be no compromise on his part. - - 2. The football coach _must_ have the complete cooperation - and support of the administrators and the administration, who - _must_ believe in the head coach, his staff, and his plan. - - 3. The coach _must_ have a long term contract. - - 4. The coach _must_ not only be dedicated to football, but he - _must_ be tough mentally. - - 5. The head coach _must_ have the sole responsibility and - authority of selecting his staff of dedicated men, who _must_ - believe in the head coach and his plan. - - -_The Administration Must Believe in Your Plan_ - -It is vitally important that a coach build a solid foundation for his -program. In order to do this he must have complete cooperation from -every member of the school’s administration. In many cases the school -officials will not have a complete and thorough understanding of your -athletic program. It is important that you explain to them just what you -are trying to accomplish, how long it will take, and why you are doing -it in your particular manner. The administrators and the administration -must understand the value the program has for each boy who participates, -and the ways the program can benefit the entire school system. Therefore, -before a coach accepts a particular position he should give considerable -thought to the administration’s philosophy, attitude or point-of-view -toward the football program. If the school president or principal -is skeptical, consider the position seriously before accepting it. -Building a championship team is difficult enough with full cooperation -from everyone, but it is an impossible coaching situation without the -administration’s full support and confidence. - - -_The Coach Must Have a Long Term Contract_ - -If a college coach is going to build a team, it is an absolute must -that he have a long term contract. There is little use in believing or -thinking any other way. It is very possible, and highly probable, it will -take at least four or five years to shape a ball club into winning form. -Without the security of a long term contract, a coach can be forced to -concentrate on winning a certain number of games each year, and it is -possible this can completely disrupt or disorganize a rebuilding program. -I am not saying that a coach should not try to win every game, because -he obviously should strive to win ’em all. I merely want to point out -the fact that without the security of a job for a period of years, he -might be forced to revert to certain practices which he knows are not -sound principles on which to build a winning program. As an illustration, -he might have to revert to such a practice as playing individuals of -questionable character because of their immediate ability, rather than -weeding them out and concentrating on the solid citizens. The latter -group will stay with you and will eventually be winners, if you are given -job security and adequate time to work with them. - - -_The Coach Must Be Dedicated and Tough Mentally_ - -Unless a person is dedicated to his chosen trade or profession, -regardless of his field of endeavor, he is never going to be highly -successful. Building a winning football team is no exception. The head -coach, as well as his assistants, must be dedicated to football. All of -them must be tough mentally, too. - -Many times a coach’s job is unpopular and unrewarding. From time to time -a coach must make decisions that are unpleasant. He cannot compromise, -however, if he expects to build a winner. He must be tough mentally in -order to survive. - -In addition, a coach must be tough mentally in another sense. He -must be able to spend numerous hours studying football all ways and -always. A coach who hopes to be successful must drive himself and be so -dedicated to his job that he puts it ahead of everything else in his -life, with the exception of his religion and his family. One can have a -tremendous knowledge of the game, but he cannot possibly make the grade -unless he can stand up to the long hours and the trying times. It is -not an absolute necessity for a coach to be exceptionally smart or a -brilliant strategist, but he must be a hard worker, mentally tough, and -dedicated to the game of football. One can only be honest with himself in -determining whether or not he has these qualifications. - - -_You Must Have a Definite Plan_ - -As head football coach, you must give leadership and direction to your -program if you expect it to be successful. Therefore, you must have a -definite plan in which you and your assistants believe. In order to -build winners you cannot deviate from your plan, and there cannot be any -compromises. - -Many factors go into the plan, such as organizing the program and the -type of boys whom you have on your squad, both of which will have a great -deal to do with your ultimate success or failure. These and other phases -of the plan will be discussed in detail shortly, and in later chapters in -this book. - - -_You Must Have a Good Staff_ - -In order to build winners, the head coach must surround himself with a -dedicated staff of hard working coaches. While I have touched on this -point briefly already, this particular _must_ will be discussed in -greater detail in Chapter 3, “Making the Most of Your Coaching Staff.” - - -THE TYPE OF BOY = SUCCESS OR FAILURE - -The team with the best athletes will usually win the tough ball games, -other things being equal. It is a well recognized fact that a coach is -no better than his material. Therefore we must have the best material -available in order to be a winner. I tell my coaches if they can recruit -the best athletes to our school, then I can coach them. If they recruit -mediocre athletes, then the assistants will have to coach them. - -There are a number of qualifications that we look for in our athletes, -and some of these are _musts_ if the boys are to become champions. -Football is nothing more than movement and contact. If a player has -excellent movement but won’t make contact, he will never be a winner. -Conversely, if a boy is mean, loves body contact, and likes to hit -people, but is so slow he never gets to the ball carrier, then he will -never make a winner either. There are ways to improve an individual’s -quickness, but if a boy refuses to make contact, there is nothing that I -know of to correct it. - -The type of boy you select to play on your football team has a great deal -to do with your ultimate success or failure. In order for our program to -be successful, we try to select the boy with the following traits: - - 1. He must be dedicated to the game of football. - - 2. He must have the desire to excel and to win. - - 3. He must be tough mentally and physically. - - 4. He must be willing to make personal sacrifices. - - 5. He must put team glory first in place of personal - glorification. - - 6. He must be a leader of men both on and off the field. - - 7. He should be a good student. - - -_The Players Must Be Dedicated_ - -A player must be dedicated to the game to the extent he is willing to -work, sacrifice, cooperate and do what he possibly can to aid the team -in victory. It is our duty as coaches to explain and show our boys the -advantages of being winners, and to impress upon them the absolute -necessity of it so they will put forth the much needed effort to -accomplish the objective. It is important for the players to understand -that football is not an easy game; nor is achieving fame an easy task. -However, anything worth doing, is worth doing right. Therefore let’s do -it right and be winners. - -We refer to “the little extras” a boy must give in order to be a winner. -These little extras really make the difference between good and great, -whether it be on an individual or a team basis. When a boy puts into -practice what you have been preaching about giving that extra effort when -he is dog tired, going harder, rising to the occasion and doing what is -necessary to win, then you are making progress and he is on the way to -becoming a winner both individually and for his team. - -There is nothing else I would rather see than when our boys are in their -goal line defense, and they have supreme confidence they will keep the -opposition from scoring. Every boy is taking it upon himself personally -to do what is necessary to stop the ball carrier from scoring. When a -coach has a team thinking like this, he will have a winner, and the boys -will be winners when they get out of school. - - -_Our Boys Must Have the Desire to Excel_ - -We talk about the importance of particular aspects of coaching, such -as full cooperation, long contracts, and other phases connected with -coaching, but in the final analysis the success or failure of your -program depends on the performance of the boys on the playing field. -The game is generally won by the boys with the greatest desire. The -difference in winning and losing is a very slight margin in a tough ball -game. The same applies to two players of equal ability, except that one -is great and the other is average. What is this slight margin? It’s the -second and third effort, both individually and as a team. The boy who -intercepts a pass or blocks a punt, or who gets his block then goes and -knocks down another opponent is the individual who wants to excel. He -will make the “big play” when it counts the most. He and others will give -us “the winning edge.” These are the deciding factors in a tough ball -game. - - -_You Must Beat Your Opponent Physically_ - -The teams that win consistently are the ones in the best physical -condition. As a result they can play better football than their -opposition in the fourth quarter. We also believe and teach our boys they -must be more aggressive and “out-mean” our opponents if they expect to -win consistently. - -We may not be as smart and as tricky as our opposition, so we have to -out-work ’em. If our boys are in top physical condition, if we “out-mean” -and physically whip our opponents by hard blocking and tackling, and we -are consistent in doing it, we’ll win a lot of football games. Football -is a contact sport, and we must make the initial contact. In order to be -a winner a boy must whip his man individually, and the team must beat the -opponent physically. - - -_Genuine All-Out Desire for Team Victory_ - -Unity is the sound basis for any successful organization, and a football -team is no exception. Without team unity you cannot have winners. We -believe and coach team victory. Our goal is to win every game we play. We -go into every game believing we will win it. Obviously we don’t win all -of them, but we never go into a game believing we cannot come out of it -the winner. - -In order to have a winner, the team must have a feeling of unity; every -player must put the team first ahead of personal glory. The boy who plays -for us must be willing to make sacrifices. Victory means team glory for -everyone. Individual personal glory means little if the team loses. - - -_Must Be a Leader and a Good Student_ - -In order to have winners your boys must be leaders both on and off the -field. They should be good students, too. As was indicated previously, -if your contract will give you sufficient time to work with the “solid -citizens,” they will stay with you even if the going gets tough, and -eventually they will be winners. - - -_You Can’t See Into the Heart of a Boy_ - -Most coaches take pride in their ability to pick out boys with athletic -ability. I am no exception. However, you can never be absolutely certain -about a boy because you cannot see what is inside of his heart. If we -could do this, we would never make a mistake on a football player. We -have seen it occur frequently where a player was pitiful in his freshman -year, and the coaches almost give up on his ever improving. However, -through determination, hard work, pride and desire the boy would finally -develop and would play a lot of football before he graduated. - -My assistant coaches have a favorite story they like to tell about a -player we had at the University of Kentucky. We had started our first -practice session in the fall of 1948 when a youngster walked out on the -field. His appearance literally stopped practice. He had on a zoot suit -with the trouser legs pegged so tightly I am certain he had difficulty -squeezing his bare feet through the narrow openings. His suspenders drew -up his trousers about six inches above his normal waist line. His long -zoot coat extended almost to his knees. His “duck tail” hair style -looked quite unusual. He was standing in a semi-slump, and twirling a -long chain around his finger when one of my assistants walked over and -asked him if he wanted someone. His answer, “Yeah. Where’s the Bear?” - -He found me in a hurry. Our first impression was that he would never -be a football player, but he was issued a uniform anyway. I figured he -wouldn’t have the heart for our type of football and would eliminate -himself quickly from the squad. To help him make up his mind in a hurry I -instructed one of the coaches assisting me to see that he got plenty of -extra work after practice. The boy’s name was difficult to pronounce, so -we started calling him “Smitty.” - -Despite “Smitty’s” outward appearance, he had the heart of a competitor -and the desire to show everyone he was a good football player. He -worked hard and proved his point. In his senior year he was selected -the outstanding player in the 1951 Sugar Bowl game when we defeated the -University of Oklahoma. After graduation he played for several years with -the New York Giants as a fine defensive end. I shall always have the -greatest respect for him. - -Other coaches probably have had similar experiences where a boy with -questionable ability has made good. If a boy has a great desire to play -football, regardless of his ability, and you work with him, he is likely -to make tremendous progress toward fulfilling his objective. - - -GOOD ORGANIZATION—A BIG FACTOR IN BUILDING WINNERS - -Without good organization our thoughts or plans of any kind would be -absolutely useless. Good organization is a must if a team is to operate -at maximum efficiency. There are many plans of organization that are -good, and I am not saying mine is the best, but I believe my plan is -sound and this is what really counts. - -It always has been my practice to observe people who are successful in -a particular field, and try to determine what makes their operation -successful. There is little originality remaining in the field of -coaching. Consequently we have gotten many of our ideas from other -people. As Frank Howard of Clemson College put it, “If we get something -from one team, it’s called stealing; but if we get ideas from several -different teams, it’s called research.” - - -_Use the Ant Plan_ - -I borrowed my plan of organization from some ants in Africa. I realize -this sounds ridiculous and far fetched; nevertheless, it’s the truth. It -is interesting how it all came about. - -While I was in the Navy in Africa, one hot, humid afternoon I was sitting -under a tree feeling sorry for myself. I started to watch some ants -building an ant hill. At first I was amused, but as I watched I became -very interested. What at first appeared to be confusion was actually a -carefully organized plan as the ants all worked toward their objective of -building a home. The longer I watched the more obvious it became that all -of the ants were working, many in small groups here and there. There was -no inactivity, no wasted motion. There was unity and there was a plan. It -appeared the ants had planned their work and they worked their plan. - -With the ant plan in mind, we try to organize our practice sessions so -that we have everyone working and no one standing around idle. We work -in small groups and this eliminates inactivity. As a result we feel that -we can get more work done in a shorter period of time. Consequently we -believe the less time a player spends on the practice field, the higher -will be his morale. - -I did not have to watch the ants to learn the value of teamwork and -cooperation, although this was evident in their activity. The main lesson -I learned from them was the value of small group work in order to keep -everyone busy. - -There are many other factors that must be taken into consideration when -organizing the program, and I shall discuss the subject more fully in -Chapters 3 and 10. Planning and organization are the backbone of a -successful team. Planning a practice so that you get maximum results from -the players and the assistant coaches requires a great deal of time. The -importance of this cannot be emphasized too greatly. - - -CONCLUSION - -Winning theories vary from coach to coach, but our philosophy toward -building a winner consists of the following factors: (1) a hard working -staff that is dedicated to football; (2) players with a genuine desire -to excel, to “out-mean” the opponent, and be in top physical condition; -(3) a strong organization and a sound plan; (4) mental toughness in -both staff and players; and (5) the full confidence of the school -administration. In addition, you must teach sound football. Your boys and -your staff must have confidence in your type of football. I shall discuss -our methods fully in later chapters. - - - - -CHAPTER 3 - -Making the Most of the Coaching Staff - - -I am a firm believer in the old saying, “A head coach is no stronger -than his assistant coaches.” In order for any head coach to have a good -program he must surround himself with a staff of good assistant coaches. -This does not mean that every coach must have six or eight assistants. In -some cases the head coach may not have more than two or three assistants. -The principles are the same, however, regardless of the number of -assistant coaches. I have been fortunate in having an excellent group of -assistants every place I have coached, and I want to give credit to them -for any measure of coaching success I may have had in the past. - - -ASSISTANT COACH: TYPE OF MAN - -There are many characteristics I am seeking in an assistant coach. I -shall not attempt to list them in the order of importance because I think -they all belong at the _top_ of the list. Briefly, the desirable traits -and characteristics I am seeking in an assistant are as follows: - - 1. He should be dedicated to the game of football. - - 2. He should be willing to work hard and to make personal - sacrifices. - - 3. He should be an honest person. - - 4. He should have a sound knowledge of football. - - 5. He should have a great deal of initiative. - - 6. He should be a sound thinker. - - 7. He should be tough mentally. - - -_A Dedicated Person, Hard Worker, Loyal_ - -The first trait, “Be dedicated to the game of football,” is a _must_ for -_all_ coaches, assistants as well as head coaches. Don’t ever try to fool -yourself or anyone else. If you are not truly dedicated to your work, and -you dread spending many hours every day working and planning on building -a good football team, then you are in the wrong business. I’ll guarantee -there is no easy way to develop a winning team. If it were an easy task, -all of us would be undefeated and “Coach of the Year.” Unfortunately -one team generally wins and the other loses, and if it is the latter it -doesn’t make a coach’s job any easier. If you will look at the consistent -winners, you will find behind them a group of coaches who are dedicated -100% to their work. - -Regardless of whether it’s the college or high school level of -competition, there are coaches and teams that win year after year. The -real reason for this success, other than good material, is the coaches of -these particular teams are dedicated to the extent that they “want” to -do what is necessary to win. There is a big difference between “wanting -to” and “willing to” do something to be a winner. Frankly, I don’t like -the word “willing” in connection with an assistant coach. First, if the -coaches are _not_ willing, they should _not_ be coaching. Coaching is not -an 8 A.M. to 5 P.M. job. The assistant who is “willing” to work a little -extra is not the one I want on my staff. The assistant who “wants” to do -what is necessary in order to get the team ready to play, regardless of -the time element involved, is the man whom I want to assist me. - -A head coach cannot expect his assistants to be dedicated to their work, -unless he leads by example. The head coach must work harder, longer, and -be more dedicated to his work than any of his assistants, if he expects -to have a good, hard-working staff and winners. - -Another qualification I consider a must for all assistant coaches is -their 100% loyalty to the head coach’s plan. It is very important for a -coach and his staff to know they have mutual trust and loyalty to each -other. These characteristics are obvious, and an assistant coach who does -not possess them commits professional suicide. - - -_Initiative and Ambition_ - -An assistant coach should have a great deal of initiative and ambition. -I prefer to have my assistants study the game all ways and always. They -should constantly try to improve themselves. There is no corner on the -brain market and a person advances in his field through hard work and his -own initiative. - -It is a must that all coaches be good “mixers.” They must be able to get -along with each other, the head coach, the players, and the people in the -community. On the college level a coach must know how to recruit, and -most of the time the successful recruiter is a good mixer. He must sell -your product—the school, the team, the coaching staff, etc.—to athletes -and their parents, and his job will be easier if he has this type of -personality. - - -_Honesty and Integrity_ - -It is an absolute must that all coaches be honest with themselves, the -people for whom they work, and the others with whom they come in contact. -If I cannot trust a person, I do not want him around. Along this same -line, we like our coaches to be active in their church work. We emphasize -to our players the value of attending church, and we like our coaches to -set a good example for everyone. - - -_A Sound Thinker With a Good Understanding of the Game_ - -In order for a coach to be competent, he must be a sound thinker and -possess a good knowledge of the game of football. I have mentioned this -previously. I expect my assistants to study, plan, discuss and try to -come up with ideas that might aid us in winning a football game. We are -going to toss around all ideas in our staff meetings before we adopt any -of them, but your brand of football can become stale and unprogressive if -the coaches do not study the game. - - -DIVISION OF COACHING DUTIES - -Morale on a squad is very important. The morale of a coaching staff is -very important, too. I feel the latter group will influence the former -group, consequently I am vitally concerned about my assistants having -good morale. With this thought in mind, I try to delegate duties and -responsibilities so the assistants enjoy their work. Each man is really a -specialist, or he can do some phase a little better than another coach. -Therefore it’s just common sense to permit him to work at the specialty -in which he is going to excel. He will not only have more enthusiasm -for his work, but his enthusiasm will be reflected in the players’ -work. There is no substitute for enthusiasm. Under such conditions the -players learn more quickly and the coaches are able to do a better job of -coaching. - - -_Assistant Coaches Direct Group Work_ - -I do not think it advisable for a head coach to do group work with one -of his assistants. If an assistant is directing a group and the head -man comes over to help out, he takes the lead away from the assistant. -As a result the assistant coach is likely to lose his initiative—the -very trait you want him to develop. Secondly, the players are likely -to give the head coach all of their attention, and this isn’t fair to -the assistant working with the same group of boys. Thirdly, I do not -think it is desirable to suggest changes, make corrections or reprimand -an assistant on the field. I feel the proper time to get the matter -straightened out is after practice, and not while the players are around. -I always try to avoid situations which are not conducive to good team and -staff morale because you’ve got to have good morale in order to build a -winner. - - -_The Coaching Specialist_ - -I think it is important for my assistants to specialize in either -offensive or defensive football. I feel they can do a better job of -coaching if they devote most of their time and effort toward one aspect -or the other. We still want them to be cognizant of the opposite phase, -however, as the defensive coaches must understand offensive football, -and vice versa for the offensive coaches. In fact, from time to time I -will put an offensive coach with the defense so he can learn more about -this particular phase of the game. I believe it would be advisable for a -high school coach, with possibly only a staff of two, to follow the same -plan—one offensive coach and the other on defense. - -Immediately after practice every day during the season I meet with my -staff. I have little patience with the assistant who wants to hurry away -from practice immediately. I want my staff members to meet in the staff -room so we can discuss all phases of the day’s practice schedule while -it is still fresh in our minds. Evaluation of personnel goes on all the -time. Therefore, I want my assistants to list on the blackboard the work -schedule for the next day for their particular group of boys. In addition -I want their suggestions and comments as to the type of teamwork needed. -Now I am in a better position to do a more intelligent job of setting up -the practice schedule for the next day since I have been made aware of -our individual and team needs, strengths and weaknesses. We have found -this procedure very helpful, and I encourage my assistants to express -themselves. I shall explain our procedures more fully in Chapter 10. - - -_Delegating Responsibility_ - -The head coach must delegate responsibility to his assistants in order -to have a more effective plan of operation. The head coach must let each -assistant know what he expects from him. An explanation of duties and -responsibilities in the beginning is likely to eliminate misunderstanding -later on. Secondly, a person with some responsibility is likely to do -a better job than the individual who doesn’t have any. I have found it -gives the assistant more confidence in himself and more pride in his work -if he has been given a certain amount of responsibility. - -As I mentioned previously in Chapter 2, in order to get the most from -your staff, they must be completely sold on your plan for building a -winner. Of course, the head coach must believe in his own plan 100%, -along with the assistants, and he cannot make any compromises if he -expects to be successful. - - -_A Good Coach Is a Good Teacher_ - -We stress the point frequently that coaching is teaching of the highest -degree, and a good coach is a good teacher. It is not what you and your -assistants know about football that is going to win the games, but rather -what you are able to teach your players. In order to give our coaches an -opportunity to improve their coaching techniques, we have them get up -at staff meetings and explain and demonstrate various points. The other -coaches will pretend they do not understand the coach who has the floor, -and he must explain and answer the questions to our satisfaction. We have -found this method gives the coaches a lot of confidence and they do a -better job of coaching on the field. - - -CONCLUSION - -In order for the head coach to get the maximum from his assistants, he -must set a good example. Since others will follow a leader who actually -leads, rather than one who merely tells what to do, I believe a head -coach must work longer, harder, and stay a jump ahead of his assistants -and the other coaches in the profession. He must be dedicated to the game -of football, well organized, sound in his thinking, and have the ability -to delegate authority and responsibility to his assistants if he expects -to build a successful program. - - - - -CHAPTER 4 - -Defense: Our Kind of Football - - -We believe _defense_ is one of the most important phases of football. -As a matter of fact, we work on defense more than we do on offense. We -feel if we do not permit the opposition to score, we will not lose the -football game. While in reality most teams actually score on us, we still -try to sell our players on the idea that if the opposition does not score -we will not lose. - -If you expect to have a good defensive team, you must sell your players -on the importance of defensive football. Our players are enthusiastic -about defensive football. I believe we do a good job of teaching -defensive football because the staff and players are sold on what we are -trying to do. Defense is our kind of football. - - -DEFENSIVE OBJECTIVES - -The primary objective of defensive football is to keep the opposition -from scoring. We want our players to feel their ultimate objective is to -keep the opposition from crossing our goal line. - -A more functional facet of the primary object is to keep the opposition -from scoring the “easy” touchdown, which is the cheap one, the long pass -or the long run for six points. While a singular long run or a long -completed pass may not actually defeat us, it is very likely if either -play breaks for the “easy” touchdown we _will_ be defeated. - -Secondly, our kicking game must be sound, which I shall discuss fully -in Chapter 6. We must be able to kick the ball safely out of dangerous -territory. Providing we do this, and eliminate the “easy” touchdown, we -believe our opposition’s own offense will stop itself 65% of the time -through a broken signal, a penalty, or some other offensive mistake. -Therefore, if my boys are aggressive while on defense, we’ll probably -keep our opposition from scoring about 25% of the time they have the -ball. The remaining 10% will be a dog fight. Therefore, we must instill -in our defensive men a fierce competitive pride that each player is -personally responsible for keeping the opposition from scoring. - - -_The Offensive-Minded Defense_ - -Our next objective is to sell the players on the idea our defensive unit -can and will score for us. There are more ways to score while on defense -than on offense; consequently, the odds favor the defense. If statistics -are kept on the defensive team’s performance, and the defensive team is -given credit for all scores made by running back a punt, recovering a -fumble or any other defensive maneuver where they either score or get -the ball for their offense inside of the opposition’s 25-yard line, -which results in a score, the players can be sold on the idea of the -offensive-minded defense. - -Previously I mentioned the importance of good morale in building a -winner. In order to sell a boy on defense you must create good morale. -Therefore, we sell our boys on the idea that playing defense is the -toughest assignment in football. We try to see that our defensive players -get most of the recognition and favorable publicity. If our defense makes -a goal line stand, and we win the game, we try to give most of the credit -to our defensive players. - - -_Sell Them On Defensive Football_ - -We want to make our defensive players believe that when the opposing -team has the ball inside our 3-yard line they aren’t going to score—they -can’t score—they must not score! If a team believes this, it’s almost -impossible for the offense to score. In 1950 our defensive unit prevented -opposing teams from scoring on 19 occasions from the 3-yard line. The -morale of the defensive players was outstanding. They thought it was -impossible for another team to score on them even though they had only -three yards to defend. I recall in our game with Oklahoma University in -the Sugar Bowl, the Sooners got down to our 3-yard line. We were caught -with three or four of our best players on the bench, and I was trying -to get them back into the game quickly. As Jim McKenzie, who had been -replaced, came off the field, he said, “Don’t worry, Coach, they will -never score on us.” And they did not score! When I see such evidence -as this, I know our players believe what we tell them, and “we are in -business!” - -I do not believe you can teach defensive football successfully unless -you are able to present a clear picture to your players of what you are -trying to accomplish. Our objective is to limit the offense to as small -an area as possible. By limiting their attack, we can hem them in and -catch them. We attempt to build a fence around the ball, and around the -offensive operation. I want my players to have a good picture of exactly -how we are going to build this fence, and what we hope to accomplish, -both of which will be explained later. - - -_Defense Is a Personal Challenge_ - -Defense is a phase of football I have always considered very interesting -because every play is a personal challenge. When a team is on defense, -the players are challenging the offensive players in relating to an area -of ground or field. Every man on defense should believe, “I am not going -to let the offense score.” If you expect to be a winner, either as a -player or a coach, you must believe in this philosophy 100%. Your play -must be sound, and you must believe in it. - -Offensive football is assignment football, while defense is reaction -football. One mistake on defense can cost a team a football game. -Consequently there cannot be errors on defense. By being sound, and in -order to eliminate errors, I mean you must always have the strength of -your defense against the strength of the offense. The defensive players -must be positioned in such a way that the team as a whole can handle any -situation that might arise. - - -DEFENSIVE AXIOMS - -There are numerous defensive alignments, just as there are different -points-of-view or theories toward how defense should be played. -Regardless of the differences and a coach’s particular plan, the -following “musts” are considered basic axioms if a defense is to be sound: - - 1. The defense _must not_ allow the opponent to complete a long - pass for an “easy” touchdown. - - 2. The defense _must not_ allow the opponent to make a long run - for an “easy” touchdown. - - 3. The defense _must not_ allow the opposition to score by - running from within your 5-yard line. - - 4. The defense _must not_ allow the opposition to return a - kick-off for a touchdown. - - 5. The defense _must not_ allow the opposition to average more - than 20 yards per kick-off return. - - 6. The defense _must_ intercept two passes out of every 13 - passes attempted. - - 7. The defense _must_ average 20 yards per return on each - interception. - - 8. The defense _must_ return three interceptions for touchdowns - per season. - - 9. The defense _must_ force the opposition to fumble the ball - on an average of three and one-half times per game. - - 10. The defense _must_ recover an average of two and one-half - fumbles per game. - -These 10 basic axioms are extremely important, and must be applied if a -team is to be sound defensively. - - -_Defense—A Team Proposition_ - -A good sound defense is one that has every player on defense carrying -out his assignment. Then it is impossible for the offense to score. Note -that I said _every_ player, which makes defense a team proposition and -eliminates the individual defensive play. By this I mean every defense is -coordinated and a player just doesn’t do what he wants to do. I do not -mean suppressing an individual’s initiative or desire to excel while on -defense, as long as the entire defense is a coordinated unit. We try to -instill in every boy that he is personally responsible to see that our -opposition does not score. When individual players and a team accept this -responsibility, I feel we are making progress and beginning to build a -winner. - - -_Gang Tackling—A Defensive Must_ - -During all phases of our defensive work we elaborate frequently on the -importance of gang tackling. We like to see six or seven of our boys in -on every tackle. Such tactics are not only demoralizing to ball carriers -and wear them down physically, but represent sound football. It is -difficult for the ball carrier to break loose and score when half a dozen -men are fighting to get a piece of him. - -We want the first tackler to get a good shot at the ball carrier, making -certain he does not miss him. We want the other defenders to “tackle the -ball,” and make the ball carrier fumble it so we can get possession of -the football. We are trying to get possession of the football any way we -can. Frankly we want the first man to the ball carrier merely to hold him -up, and not let him get away, so we can unload on him. You can punish a -ball carrier when one man has him “dangling,” and the others gang tackle -him hard. I am not implying we want our boys to pile on and play dirty -football merely to get a ball carrier out of the game. First, we do not -teach this type of football as it is a violation of the rules and spirit -of the game. Second, piling on brings a 15-yard penalty. We cannot win -when we get penalized in clutch situations. - - -OUR DEFENSIVE NUMBERING SYSTEM AND TERMINOLOGY - -After coaching for a number of years, and always trying to find something -that would make football easier to understand for the average player, I -came upon a system of defensive numbering that has proven very valuable -to me since then. In the past I have used many different defenses. I -always employed the technique of giving each defense a name. Most of the -time the name had little in common with the defense, and this confused, -rather than helped, the players. After discussing the possibility of the -numbering system with my own and other college and high school coaches, -while at Texas A & M in 1956 I finally come across a feasible plan -for numbering defensive alignments. I must give credit to O. A. “Bum” -Phillips, a Texas high school coach, for helping work out the solution as -he experimented with the numbering system with his high school football -team. - -In the numbering of our defense now, we give each offensive man a number, -as well as the gaps between the offensive linemen. Figure 1 is an example -of our defensive numbering system. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 1] - -Accompanying each number is a particular “technique,” which will be -explained shortly. If a defensive player lines up in a 2 position, -he will play what we call a “2 technique”; a 3 position plays a “3 -technique,” etc. Therefore, from end to end of the offensive line we can -line-up our defensive men and each position has a particular technique. - -Who calls the defense? How is it called and what does it mean? Who -is included in the call? Each linebacker calls the defense for his -particular side of the line. He controls his guard, tackle and himself, -but he does not control the end on his side of the line. The latter is -controlled by the defensive signal caller in the secondary who gives a -call for the 4- or 5-spoke defensive alignment. - -Each linebacker calls two numbers. The first number tells his guard where -to line up and his accompanying defensive technique. The second number -gives the same information to the defensive tackle. - -As an example, if the linebacker calls, “26,” the guard will play a 2 -technique and the tackle a 6 technique. If the caller said, “59,” the -guard would play a 5 technique and the tackle a 9 technique. When the -linebacker tells the guard and tackle which techniques to play through -his oral call, then he lines up in a position to cover the remaining -gaps. As an example, Figure 2 illustrates a 26 call, and the linebacker -must take a position between his guard and tackle so he can fill the -gap(s) not covered by the other front defenders. You can see by this -example the linebacker is in a position to help out over the offensive -tackle position, and also on a wide play to his side of the line. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 2] - -Figure 3 illustrates the position of the defensive right guard, tackle -and linebacker when the call is 59. The linebacker is now in a position -to help out on a play that is in the middle of the line. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 3] - -One point I failed to mention, if we are playing a 4-spoke defense, which -will be explained and illustrated shortly, we assign one defender to -play “head on” the offensive center, and he does not figure in any of the -calls. He lines up the same every time, as is illustrated in Figure 4. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 4] - -When we play a 5-spoke defense, which will also be explained shortly, -the two linebackers assign one player to the area inside the offensive -guards. As an example, if we are playing a 5-spoke defense and the call -on the right side is 59, the call on the left side must be a one as the -first digit, such as, _1_7, _1_6, _1_5. Figure 5 illustrates a 59 call on -the right, and a 17 call on the left, with one man playing a 1 technique -in order to keep from having a large gap between the two guards. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 5] - -You can quickly observe that by having our players learn only a few -numbers and their accompanying techniques, we can line up in numerous -defensive alignments merely by calling two numbers. Figures 6 and 7 are -examples of 59 and 39 defensive calls, which are 4-spoke defenses with a -man in a 0 technique, and are commonly referred to as the Oklahoma and -Eagle defenses, respectively. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 6] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 7] - -Figure 8 illustrates a 25 call, with a 0 technique, and is a 9-man front -defensive alignment. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 8] - -Figures 9-11 are 5-spoke defenses representing 26, 37, and 13 calls, -which are commonly referred to as a wide tackle 6, a split 6, and a gap 8 -alignment, respectively. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 9] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 10] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 11] - -These defenses, Figures 6-11, have the same call to each side. Each side -is actually independent of the other as far as the calls are concerned. -To eliminate any confusion, merely designate which side (left) is to -call first, and the other linebacker (right) can adjust on his call -accordingly so there is not a large gap in the middle of the defensive -line. The linebackers must be especially aware of this if we are -employing a 5-spoke defensive alignment. - -The signal caller should never call a defense involving two successive -numbers, such as 2-3, 7-6, as this will leave too much territory for him -to try to cover (see Figure 1). The caller is always responsible for -having a man in, or capable of covering, every gap. - -It is very simple for the defensive signal caller to change the guard and -tackle assignments even after he has given them a position to line up -in and its accompanying technique. The caller merely adds a zero (0) or -a one (1) to the end of the number he has called. As an example, if he -gives the call 37 and he wants the players in the 3 technique to charge -one-half a man toward the inside, he will say, “30.” If he wants this -defender to charge one-half a man to the outside, he would say, “31.” -This second call is given to only one player at a time, but he can -change both of their techniques by saying, “31—71,” or “30—70,” etc. - - -_Advantages of a Defensive Numbering System_ - -Our present method is the simplest one I know of for getting players into -various defenses quickly with a minimum amount of talking. We feel it -eliminates much confusion. We have found the players take a great deal of -pride in learning only a few techniques, which they are able to execute -well. We know it makes our job easier as coaches, and we can do a better -job of coaching the boys. As a coaching point, when a coach talks to a -tackle, as an example, he talks in terms of a particular technique (6, -7, etc.), and the player understands him immediately. When the coaches -are discussing plays, or in a staff meeting, we identify the particular -technique immediately, and everyone understands each other. We have also -found the method useful when making out the practice schedule as I merely -specify, “Tackle coach work on 6 technique,” etc. - -Employing a defensive numbering system requires the defensive signal -callers to be alert. They do not merely call several numbers. They must -be aware of the tactical situation at all times, and call a sound defense -according to a tactical and strategical planning. As an illustration, a -good short yardage call would be 13, and sound passing situation calls -would be 36, 37, 39, 59 (see Figures 1, 3, 6, 7, 10, 11). I spend at -least several minutes every day with my defensive signal callers. It -is the linebackers’ responsibility to see that we line up in a sound -alignment every time. - - -PLAYING OUR DEFENSIVE TECHNIQUES - -As illustrated in Figure 1, and mentioned earlier, our techniques and -defensive positions are numbered from 0-9 on both sides of the defensive -line, numbering from inside-out (with certain exceptions noted, Figure -1). I now wish to explain in detail each particular technique, although -there is only a slight difference between several of them. As an example, -when playing the 2 technique, a defender lines up head on the offensive -guard, and when playing a 4 technique he is head up on the offensive -tackle. Consequently these techniques are similar. - - -_The 0 Technique_ - -As illustrated in Figure 12, the defender lines up head on the offensive -center. Depending upon the situation, the distance he lines up off the -football will vary. On a short yardage situation, he will line up close -to the center’s head. On a long yardage situation, normally he will be -about one yard off the ball. He will use either a three- or a four-point -stance, with one foot staggered. His technique is to play the center’s -head with a quick hand shiver on the snap of the ball. When he makes -contact with the center, he brings his back foot up so his feet are even -with each other. If the quarterback goes straight back to pass, the 0 -technique man is responsible for the draw play, and then he rushes the -passer. If it is a run instead of a pass play, he will keep the center -away from his blocking surface, not permitting himself to be tied up in -the middle of the line, and he will pursue the ball taking his proper -angle depending on the type of running play. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 12] - - -_The 1 Technique_ - -The main job of the player(s) employing the 1 technique is to control the -offensive splits, forcing the guards to keep their splits to a minimum, -as illustrated in Figure 13. He is also responsible for keeping the -center off of the defensive linebacker. If both guards are playing in -this technique, as illustrated in Figure 13, only one will “slam” the -center, and the other will take a long step toward his guard, playing him -from inside-out. He must always be aware of the trap coming from the -inside, however. If the play is a back-up pass, he is responsible for the -draw first, and rushing the passer second. If it is a running play, he -will slam the center or guard and then pursue the football. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 13] - - -_The 2 Technique_ - -The 2 technique is similar to the 0 technique, and is illustrated in -Figure 14. One difference is the guard is head on the offensive guard, -instead of on the offensive center. The distance he lines up off the -ball in a staggered stance will be determined by the tactical situation. -On the snap of the ball he plays the guard with a hand shiver, and -immediately locates the football. If it is a back-up pass and there is no -man in a 0 or 1 technique, he will look for the draw play first, and then -rush the passer. If it is a running play, he will look first toward the -inside for a trap, and then pursue the football. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 14] - - -_The 3 Technique_ - -The 3 technique is similar to the 1 technique, and is illustrated in -Figure 15. The 3 man is responsible for keeping the offensive tackle’s -split cut down, and on occasion to keep the offensive guard or tackle -from blocking the defensive linebacker. He, too, lines up with the feet -slightly staggered, and about one foot off the ball. Depending upon the -defense, when the ball is snapped, he will play either the guard or -tackle with a quick flipper or shiver, preferably with the hands. He is -to watch for the trap at all times. If the play is a straight drop back -pass, he will rush the passer from the inside. If it is a running play, -he will pursue the football. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 15] - - -_The 4 Technique_ - -The 4 technique man lines up head on the offensive tackle and about one -to one and one-half feet off the ball, and is illustrated in Figure 16. -He will have his feet slightly staggered, and on the snap of the ball he -is to play the offensive tackle with a quick hand or forearm flipper. -If it is a running play toward him, he must whip the offensive tackle, -be ready to stop the hand-off, and help out on the off-tackle play. If -it is a straight back pass, he will rush the passer from the inside. If -the play goes away or to the far-side, he will control the offensive -tackle and pursue the football. On his angle of pursuit he should never -go around the offensive tackle, but pursue the football going through the -tackle’s head. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 16] - - -_The 5 Technique_ - -The 5 technique man lines up on the outside eye of the offensive tackle, -as illustrated in Figure 17, with the feet staggered (outside foot back -in most cases). On the snap of the ball he employs a forearm flip charge -into the tackle. As he makes contact, his back foot is brought up even -with his front foot. He has 75% off-tackle responsibility, and he should -never be blocked in by only one man. If it is a straight back pass, he -should rush the passer from inside-out. If the play comes toward him, -he should whip the tackle and make the play. He must be certain to keep -the offensive blocker in front of him at all times as the 5 man will -be eliminated from the play very easily if he tries to go around his -blocker. If the play goes away from him, he must pursue the football. He -is instructed not to cross the offensive line of scrimmage when employing -a 5 technique. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 17] - - -_The 6 Technique_ - -The 6 technique player lines up head on the offensive end, as illustrated -in Figure 18. If the end splits too far, the 6 man is to “shoot the gap.” -He is primarily responsible for keeping the offensive end from releasing -quickly on passes, and he must keep the end from blocking the linebacker. -He is responsible for the off-tackle play. Consequently he must not be -blocked in or out. The game situation will determine how far he lines -up off the ball, but it will usually vary from one to three yards. If -the play is a straight back pass, he is responsible for rushing the -passer from the outside-in. If the passer runs out of the pocket, the 6 -man must not permit him to get to the outside. He must either tackle -the passer or force him to throw the football. If the play comes toward -the 6 man, he whips the end with a flip or shiver charge, and helps out -both inside and outside. He never crosses the line of scrimmage unless -it is a back-up pass. If it is an option play toward him, he must make -the quarterback pitch the ball or he must tackle the quarterback. If the -flow goes away from him, he trails the play. He should be as deep as the -deepest man in the offensive backfield so he can contain the reverse play -back to his side, not permitting the ball carrier to get outside of him. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 18] - - -_The 7 Technique_ - -The 7 technique player lines up splitting the inside foot of the -offensive end, as illustrated in Figure 19. He is responsible for forcing -the end to reduce his offensive split. We want him to line up with his -outside foot staggered, and he must never be blocked out by the offensive -end. He has 75% inside responsibility and 25% outside responsibility. -When the ball is snapped, he uses a hand or forearm flipper charge on -the offensive end and brings his back foot up even with his front foot. -His main responsibility is to whip the offensive end, and to close the -off-tackle play. If the play is a straight drop back pass, he is the -outside rusher and he must not permit the quarterback to get outside of -him. If the play goes away from him, he is to trail the ball carrier. -He plays just like the trail or chase man on the 6 technique. He should -be as deep as the deepest offensive backfield man so he can contain any -reverse play coming back to his side of the line. He should not let such -a play get outside of his position. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 19] - - -_The 8 Technique_ - -When we speak of a man playing an 8 technique, as illustrated in Figure -20, we are speaking of a “true end,” or a defensive end who lines up -outside of the offensive end. The 8 man will be from one and one-half -to three yards outside of the offensive end’s normal position, with -his inside foot forward, and his shoulders parallel with the line of -scrimmage. If it is a straight back pass, the defensive end, without -taking his eyes off the passer, will turn to his outside, and using -a cross-over step will sprint to his outside trying to get width and -depth to play the ball to his side. His depth should be 8-10 yards deep, -similar to a linebacker’s position covering the flat. He stops running -when the quarterback stops to set up. When the ball is thrown, he sprints -for the ball. - -If the play comes toward the 8 man, we want him to cross the line of -scrimmage about two yards, getting set with his inside foot forward, -shoulders parallel with the line of scrimmage, and playing the outside -blocker. He is the outside contain man, and he must not permit the ball -to get outside of him. He never makes the quarterback pitch on option -plays. If it is a running pass toward him, he is the outside contain -and rush man. If the flow goes away from him, he must make sure it is -not a reverse play back to his side before he takes his proper angle of -pursuit, which is through the area where the defensive safety man lined -up originally. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 20] - - -_The 9 Technique_ - -Figure 21 illustrates where the defensive men line up when playing a 9 -technique, splitting the outside foot of the offensive end. He should -line up 14 inches off the line of scrimmage, with most of the weight on -his outside foot which is back. When the ball is snapped, the 9 technique -man will take a short step with his inside foot toward the offensive end, -and at the same time he will deliver a hand or forearm shiver to the head -of the offensive end. If the offensive end blocks in and the play comes -toward him, the 9 man immediately looks for the near halfback or the -trapper expecting to be blocked by either offensive man. - -If a running play comes toward him and the quarterback is going to -option the football, he must make the quarterback pitch the ball. If the -quarterback is faking the ball to the fullback, the 9 man must “search” -the fullback for the ball first. The 9 technique man never crosses the -line of scrimmage. If the offensive play is a straight back pass, the 9 -man delivers a blow to the end, and drops back two or three yards looking -for the screen or short pass. He is in a position to come up and make -the tackle if the quarterback gets outside of your outside rusher and -the quarterback decides to run with the football. If the flow goes away, -he is the trail man and has the same responsibilities as the 6 and 7 -technique men, which I explained previously. The most important coaching -point is that the man playing the 9 technique must deliver a good blow to -the offensive end on every play. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 21] - - -OUR DEFENSIVE STANCE - -We are not too particular about the stance our defensive players employ, -but on the other hand we are not so indifferent that we ignore how they -line up defensively. We want them to be comfortable, but at the same -time the linemen must be in a position so they can uncoil, make good -contact, and be in a good position so they can move quickly. We never -permit a man to take a stance in which he gets too extended and loses -most of his hitting power. There are a few basic techniques we insist our -defensive players use. These techniques vary to some extent from position -to position. The defensive stance for linemen, linebackers, and the -secondary is as follows: - -_Guards_—The defensive stance our guards take is very similar to the -stance we use offensively. We like them to be in a four-point stance with -their feet even and spread about three inches wider than their shoulders. -The weight must be slightly forward, and their tail slightly higher than -their shoulders. Their back is straight, and their shoulders are square. -Their hands are slightly outside of their feet, elbows relaxed, with -thumbs turned in and forward of the shoulders slightly. - -_Tackles_—The defensive stance our tackles take is very similar to the -stance we use offensively. We want our tackles to use a four-point -stance, having their inside foot staggered back slightly. Their feet -should be a little wider than their shoulders. The weight must be forward -slightly, and the tail should be slightly higher than the head. Just -like the guards’ stance, we want their back straight and their shoulders -square. Their neck must be relaxed, but their eyes must be focused on the -man opposite or on the ball. The hands are slightly outside of the feet, -elbows relaxed, and the thumbs turned in and forward of the shoulders -slightly. - -_Ends_—The defensive ends line up with their inside foot forward and -perpendicular to the line of scrimmage. We want our ends standing up in -a good football position. The knees are slightly bent, as is their body -bent forward slightly at the waist. They must have their eyes on the -quarterback, but still be able to see the offensive halfback and end -closest to them on their side. When the action starts toward an end, -we want him to come across the line and make contact with the outside -blocker. The shoulders should remain parallel with the line of scrimmage -upon contact with an offensive back. - -_Linebackers_—We want our linebackers to be standing with their feet -even and parallel with each other. They should be in a good football -position—tail down, back straight, slight bend at the waist, weight on -the balls of the feet, knees bent, and coiled to the extent that when a -guard or tackle fires out on the linebacker the defensive man can whip -him. Our linebacker takes a step forward with the inside foot toward the -blocker who is firing out at him. We want him to drop his tail and hit on -the rise when making contact. He then brings his back foot up even with -his forward foot so that he will be in a position to move laterally. - -_Halfbacks_—Our defensive halfbacks line up in their regular position -which is three yards outside of the offensive end in a 3-deep defense, -and on the inside shoulder of the offensive end in a 4-spoke defense. We -want our halfbacks to have their outside foot back with the inside foot -pointing perpendicular to the line of scrimmage. The outside foot is -about 14″ behind the front foot, and pointing out at a 45 degree angle. -The halfback’s knees should be flexed slightly, and he must be in a good -football position. His arms should be in a cocked position. He must face -the quarterback. His first step is backward and outward. - -_Corner man_—The corner man lines up in his regular position about four -yards wide and two and one-half yards deep, with his feet parallel and -even about 18″ apart pointing directly toward the offensive quarterback. -He should be in a good football position, weight on the balls of the -feet, arms cocked, etc. He should _not_ rest his hands on his knees. From -a good football position he can rotate quickly and properly, or he can -come forward and meet the play if it comes toward him. - -_Safety_—The safety man lines up a little deeper than the other backs. He -should face slightly the wide side of the field or the strong side of the -offensive backfield. He has his outside foot back, and he is permitted -to stand a little straighter than the other deep backs. He, too, is in -a good football position watching the quarterback. His first step is -backward and outward, and he must be able to cover a pass from sideline -to sideline. - - -OUR SURPRISE DEFENSE - -We never send our boys into a football game without trying to prepare -them for every conceivable situation that might arise during the -contest. We must try to anticipate every situation, and counteract with a -sound defense. A situation might be very unusual, and we cannot actually -defense it properly until the coach in the press box tells us exactly -what the opposition is doing. Then we can work out the proper defense on -the sideline and send it in. In the meantime the boys must have something -they can counteract with immediately or the opposition is likely to -score with its surprise offense. Consequently our signal caller will -yell, “_Surprise Defense_,” when he sees an unusual offensive formation, -and the boys will react accordingly. Our rules for covering a spread or -unusual offensive alignment are as follows: - - 1. If one man flanks, our halfback will cover him. - - 2. If two men go out, our halfback and end will move out and - cover them. - - 3. If three men go out, our halfback, tackle and end move out - and cover them. - - 4. If four offensive men go out, we put out the halfback, end - and tackle, and our linebacker goes out half-way. The alignment - for the linebacker would be a yard deeper and a yard wider than - he usually lines up. - - 5. If five men go out on the offensive team, we put out our - halfback, end, tackle, linebacker half-way, and the defensive - guard. If they put more than five men out, we do not change our - alignment. - - 6. If there is any doubt about how to meet strength with - strength, we start with the outside man and put a defender on - every other offensive man. - - 7. The safety man will always play in the middle of the field - or in the middle of the eligible receivers. - - 8. A defensive end must never be flanked by one offensive man - unless he can beat the flanker through the gap and into the - offensive backfield. - - 9. A tackle should never be flanked by two offensive men unless - he can beat the nearest opponent. - - 10. The initial charge of the players who are left on defense - is to the outside, unless there is a concentration of offensive - backs. Should the latter be the case, then the defensive charge - will be normal. - - 11. The greater the offensive team splits its line, the farther - off the line of scrimmage the defenders must play. - -Figures 22-23 illustrate two examples of spread formations, and the -application of our _surprise defense_ coverage rules. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 22] - -The first offensive man who flanks to our right (Figure 22), will be -covered by our defensive right halfback. The second to our right will -be covered by our right end. The first man flanked to our left will be -covered by our offensive left halfback; the second man out, by our left -end; the third flanker, by our left tackle; the fourth flanker will be -covered by our left linebacker, who will move out half-way. The fifth -man flanked to our left will be covered by our left guard. The remaining -players will meet strength with strength. Our right guard will play on -the outside shoulder of the offensive right guard, and the defensive -right tackle will play on the outside shoulder of the offensive left -guard, as illustrated in Figure 22. - -We instruct our defensive players to force the offensive players to come -to them. We do not want our men off the line of scrimmage to penetrate, -leaving gaps in the defense. We want our men to be in a good football -position so they can pursue the ball quickly. - -Figure 23 illustrates another example of the application of our -_surprised defense_ rules in covering a spread offense. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 23] - - -OUR VICTORY DEFENSE - -I think it is very important for a team to be able to go into a “_Victory -Defense_” when the occasion warrants its use; for example, when you -have a slim lead with little time remaining before the termination of -the first half or the game. We will go into a 5-man line if we have the -game won and our opponents are not close to our goal line. Under such -circumstances we can afford to permit the opposition to get a first down -or two, but we cannot afford to let them complete the long pass or the -long run for a touchdown. We believe our victory defense is sound, and -we are playing sound defensive football when we employ it. Figure 24 -illustrates the victory defense we used eight times in one year, and we -intercepted our opposition’s intended forward pass on seven of the eight -occasions. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 24] - -The individual and team duties and responsibilities when we employ our -_Victory Defense_ are as follows: - -_Middle Lineman_—Sole responsibility is to look for the screen pass -and/or for the draw play. - -_Ends and Tackles_—Line up on the outside shoulder of the offensive ends -and tackles. If the offensive end(s) splits, we will adjust on them with -our three deep backs. We want our defensive ends to shove the offensive -ends to the inside, holding them up if possible, and then look to the -inside for a trap block or for a screen pass. Should neither of these -occur, the ends are to contain the passer, not permitting the ball to -get outside either of their respective positions. They should play loose -and proceed with caution, rather than rushing hard into the offensive -backfield. - -The defensive tackles should play back off the line of scrimmage with -their feet even and parallel. Each tackle must keep his man in front of -him, not permitting the offensive tackles to block them in or out. When a -pass develops, the tackles must rush the passer, making certain to stay -in front of the football. - -_Linebackers_—Line up about six yards deep and at a spot opposite where -the defensive end ordinarily would line up. By lining up wide, we hope -to funnel the offense toward the middle of our formation. By this I mean -we want them to direct their attack toward the inside and we don’t want -them to turn the corner, to get outside or to kill the clock by running -out-of-bounds. - -_Halfbacks and Safety_—We want our halfbacks to be at least 12 yards deep -and well outside the offensive formation. We want our safety man at least -12 yards deep and in the middle of our defensive alignment. The three -backs will play their regular defense. - -_Best Defensive Player_—The next step in setting up our _Victory Defense_ -is to station our very best defensive football player 10 yards behind the -middle safety man. His sole responsibility is to keep the offensive team -from scoring. He must always stay between the ball and the goal line. We -do not want him to come forward and break up a pass. Nor do we want him -coming up to make the tackle. We want him to fight off blockers and make -certain the ball carrier does not score should our defense break down and -the opposition move downfield toward the goal line with a long run or a -completed pass. When the ball is thrown, we want every man on the team -to go for the ball _except_ our deepest man, our best defensive football -player. He remains 10 yards behind the ball at all times in case there is -a tip and the opponent might catch it and score. His sole responsibility -is to keep the opposition from scoring when we are using our _Victory -Defense_. - - -OUR GOAL LINE DEFENSE - -Our goal line defense is very simple, and I am certain many other coaches -use the same goal line defense, as illustrated in Figure 25. Perhaps -there are a number of goal line defenses that are better than ours, but -we have faith and believe in our goal line defense, and I believe this -is 50% of the battle. When we go into our goal line defense, we want our -boys to be so sold on what they are doing that they are not going to -let the opposition score. Each man is going to take it upon himself to -see that they do not score over his particular defensive area. Playing -goal line defense is a terrific challenge. There is not much territory -remaining, and the big questions are, “Who is going to come out on top?” -and “Who will end up with the ball when the dust settles?” If we give our -team a sound plan and teach it to them well, and they believe in it and -in us, we will do all right. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 25] - -Figure 25 illustrates our goal line defense, and the individual and team -duties and responsibilities are as follows: - -_Ends_—The defensive ends line up in a four-point stance as close to the -line of scrimmage as they can get, just shading the outside eye of the -offensive ends. On the snap of the ball the defensive ends will charge -low and hard through the tail of their offensive ends, trying to get -approximately one yard deep into the offensive backfield. If the flow -comes toward his side and the quarterback has the football, the defensive -end tries to force the quarterback to pitch back to the off-halfback. - -_Tackles_—The defensive tackles line up on the outside eye of the -offensive tackles, and they aim for a spot one yard deep in the offensive -backfield behind the inside foot of the offensive tackles. Each tackle -is responsible for the hand-off play to his side, making the tackle or -forcing the dive play to the inside so our middle linebacker can make the -tackle. - -_Guards_—The defensive guards get their spacing by lining up on each -other, but theoretically they will line up on the inside eye of the -offensive guards. They are responsible for sealing-off the middle of -the line, and for keeping the offensive center from blocking the middle -linebacker. They aim for a spot about one yard behind the offensive -center’s position. They must get to this spot using a low, hard submarine -charge. - -As illustrated in Figure 26, if our six linemen carry out their defensive -assignments using a low, hard charge and get to their predetermined -spots, we will form a wall. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 26] - -_Middle Linebacker or Defensive Center_ (see Figure 25)—He is responsible -for making any play that occurs between the offensive tackles. He should -make the tackle on a hand-off, on a play up the middle, and help on the -off-tackle play. On a back-up pass, he will drop off covering a short -zone. If the play starts wide, the middle linebacker will pursue the -football. He should be one of the best defensive football players. Figure -27 illustrates the defensive position and responsibilities of the middle -linebacker on our goal line defense. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 27] - -_Inside Linebackers or Fullback and Right Halfback_ (see Figure 25)—They -are responsible for the off-tackle play and the quick containing of the -quarterback on the option play (Figure 28a). If the flow goes away, they -check for the counter play before they pursue the football. On a running -pass toward one side or the other, as illustrated in Figure 28b, one -linebacker will cover the flat and the other his hook spot. On a back-up -pass they will cover the short one-quarter zones or areas. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 28a] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 28b] - -_Outside Linebackers or the Left Halfback and the Quarterback_ (see -Figure 25)—They are responsible for the wide play. They must not permit -the play to get outside of them on their particular side of the defensive -alignment. When the offensive play starts, both outside linebackers will -“read” the offensive end closest to them, and the flow of the offensive -backs. It is important they diagnose a running pass correctly, because -the offensive end to the on-side must be covered correctly if his route -is deep. (The outside linebacker must cover the deep man whether it’s an -end or a back.) If the play is away, the backs will revolve toward it. - -The two inside and two outside linebackers (Figure 25) play 4-spoke pass -coverage on all passes, which will be explained in greater detail in -Chapter 5, “Pass Defense.” Our automatic “Thunder,” which is very good -versus this particular situation, will also be explained later. - - -A SPLIT-T DEFENSE - -There are a number of good defenses versus a T team with a straight-up -T backfield. I will go over several of the defenses we have used more -frequently than others. Figure 29 illustrates our 59 call or the Oklahoma -5-4 defense versus the T formation. The individual and team duties and -responsibilities are as follows: - -[Illustration: FIGURE 29] - -_Ends_—The defensive ends play a 9 technique, and on this particular -defense both ends’ assignments and techniques will be identical. They -will not penetrate beyond the line of scrimmage unless the flow is away. -When the flow goes away, the off-side defensive end becomes the trail man. - -_Tackles_—The defensive tackles play a 5 technique, which I discussed in -detail earlier in the chapter. They will never cross the line except on -a straight drop back pass, and then both tackles will rush the passer. -Otherwise the tackles whip their respective opponents (tackles) and -pursue the football. - -_Middle Guard_—The middle guard plays a 0 technique, always alert for the -screen pass or the draw play. On the snap of the ball, the middle guard -should whip the offensive center and then go to the ball. - -_Linebackers_—The inside linebackers will line up on the outside eye -of their respective offensive guards, and “read” through them into the -offensive backfield. If the offensive guards or tackles fire out, the -linebackers whip them and go to the football. If the flow goes away, -the off-side linebacker will check the counter play, and then pursue -the football. On a drop back pass each linebacker will cover his short -one-quarter pass zone or area. - -The defensive secondary will play its regular 4-spoke defense, and -revolve on the plays after the offense shows what they are going to do -(or from a predetermined call, which will be explained shortly). The -4-spoke secondary will be discussed and illustrated in Chapter 5, “Pass -Defense.” - -Figure 30 illustrates our 27 call or a wide tackle 6 defensive alignment -versus the T formation. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 30] - -We use a 6-2 alignment frequently because we can stunt easily or we can -play it straight versus a long yardage situation, and we can jump from -it into another defensive alignment without too much difficulty. The -linebackers control their particular units, as I explained earlier. The -individual and team duties and responsibilities are as follows: - -_Guards_—The guards will play a tough 2 technique, then pursue the -football. On a drop back pass they are responsible for the screen pass in -the middle, the draw play, and rushing the passer. - -_Tackles_—The tackles will play a tough 7 technique. They are responsible -for the off-tackle play to their respective side. If the play goes away, -the tackle is the trail man. On back-up passes, the tackles rush the -passer from the outside. - -_Ends_—The defensive ends play an 8 technique, and they are the contain -men if the flow comes their way. If the ball goes away, the off-end -drops back and pursues through the area where the safety lined up -originally. On back-up passes they will cover the short one-quarter pass -areas or zones. - -_Linebackers_—The linebackers line up on the inside eye of the offensive -tackles, and play their regular positions. If the play comes toward -them, the linebacker whips the blocker with a flipper and plays the ball -carrier. When flow is away, he checks the counter play and then pursues -the football. On pass plays they will cover their short one-quarter pass -zones. - -_Secondary_—The defensive secondary will play their regular 3-deep -coverage, which will be explained in the next chapter. On wide-running -plays the halfback must come up to the outside and turn the play back -inside. The safety man comes up to the inside, playing inside-out, and -the off- or far halfback revolves and becomes the last safety man. - -Figures 31-34 illustrate several of our defensive stunts from a 6-2 -alignment which we have employed with success in the past. - -In Figure 31 the linemen pinch, sealing-off the inside, and the -linebackers cover outside. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 31] - -In Figure 32 the guards loop to the outside over the offensive tackles, -and the linebackers fill inside the offensive guard splits. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 32] - -Figure 33 illustrates a simple X-pattern between the defensive ends and -tackles. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 33] - -Figure 34 illustrates the tackles pinching, and the linebackers replacing -them at the line of scrimmage over the offensive ends. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 34] - - -OUR DEFENSE VERSUS AN UNBALANCED LINE - -We do not adjust a great deal to an unbalanced line, and our adjustments -are relatively simple. We merely move our defensive line over one whole -man, and then revolve the secondary toward the weak side, as illustrated -in Figure 35. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 35] - -When we do this, we carry out our same assignments, which I have -explained already. The only difference is that our middle guard lines -up on the offensive strong side guard, instead of on the center. If we -are playing a 3-deep defense, we would adjust with our linemen. Then -we consider the strong guard as the middle of the offensive line (the -center), and we play our regular defense. - - -ADJUSTMENTS VERSUS BACKS AND ENDS FLANKED - -When we have a defense called and the opposition comes out and lines up -with a back or an end out, we can play it one of two ways. If it is a -floater out or an end split, we will adjust slightly with our secondary, -and we will drop the defensive end off the line a little. The remainder -of the defensive linemen will play the defense that has been called. If a -flanker is put out to one side or the other, we will revolve our 4-spoke -secondary toward him and leave the linemen in their regular positions, -or we will shift our line toward the flanker one whole man. These -adjustments will be explained and illustrated more fully in Chapter 5, -“Pass Defense.” - -In making our game plans, which will be discussed in Chapter 10, -“Planning For a Game,” we will always have a definite call that our -signal caller will use in the situations discussed above relating to our -adjustments versus backs and/or ends flanked out. As an example, we may -tell our signal caller to shift our defense _away_ from ends out and -floaters, but shift _toward_ flankers and an unbalanced line. These calls -will depend upon the information we secure from scouting our opponents. - - -OUR DEFENSES VERSUS THE SINGLE WING OFFENSE - -Defensing the single wing offense has always created problems for us -because we feel we must meet strength with strength, and then we get -hurt to the weak side. Figures 36-37 illustrate two defenses which we -believe are sound, and we have used them successfully against the single -wing offense. Of course, personnel makes the defense as we all know, and -a linebacker like Jack Pardee whom I had at Texas A & M made all of our -defenses sound. - -Figure 36 is a defense which I feel is especially good versus the single -wing offense. The duties of the defenders are as follows: - -[Illustration: FIGURE 36] - -_Strong Side End_—The end lines up one to three yards outside of the -wingback, “reading” him and the offensive end. If the flow comes toward -him, the strong side end comes across hard about three yards into the -offensive backfield, and he turns everything in, as he is the contain -man. When he makes contact with the outside blocker, the defensive end’s -shoulders must be parallel to the line of scrimmage. If the flow goes -away from him, he drops back and pursues the ball carrier. On a straight -drop back pass, he will cover the short one-quarter area. - -_Strong Side Tackle_—He lines up on the outside eye of the offensive end, -and on the snap of the ball he charges through the head of his man. He is -to penetrate the offense about one yard. If the flow goes away, he trails -the play. On a straight drop back pass he rushes from the outside. - -_Strong Side Guard_—He lines up on the outside eye of the offensive guard -and on the snap of the ball he tries to penetrate through the head of -the guard, trying to seal-off the middle. If the flow goes away, he will -pursue the ball. On a straight drop back pass he rushes from the inside. - -_Weak Side Guard_—He has the same alignment and assignment as his strong -side guard, only he is on the other side of the defensive line. - -_Weak Side Linebacker_—He plays in front of the offensive weak side -end and keeps him from getting out quickly on a pass play. If the flow -comes toward him, the weak side linebacker whips the end and then “plays -football.” If the flow is away, he will pursue the ball. On a straight -drop back pass he will cover the short flat one-quarter pass zone or area. - -_Weak Side End_—He lines up about two yards outside of the offensive weak -side end. If the flow comes toward him, he will come across the line -playing his 8 technique, which I have explained before. He cannot permit -the play to get outside of his position. When he makes contact with the -blocker, his shoulders must be parallel with the line of scrimmage. He -will trail the play if the flow goes away from him. He rushes the passer -on a drop back pass action. - -_Middle Linebacker_—He lines up in front of the center. He varies his -position as at times he will be close, and other times off the offensive -center’s position. He keys the blocking back, who is the offensive -quarterback, and the middle linebacker goes to the football. He drops -back and covers the short one-quarter area on drop back passes. - -_Strong Side Linebacker_—He lines up approximately behind the strong side -tackle, and he reads the wingback, end and quarterback. When the flow -comes toward him, he comes up and plays it tough. When the flow goes away -from him he pursues the football. He covers a short one-quarter area -versus the straight drop back pass. - -_3-Deep Secondary_—They play their regular 3-deep coverage, which will be -discussed in detail in the next chapter. - -Figure 37 illustrates another of our 6-2 defensive alignments versus the -single wing offense. The individual assignments are the same as those -just described, except that the guards play slowly. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 37] - -We employ a number of defensive stunts when we play against a single -wing team. We have been quite successful in the past with the stunts -illustrated in Figures 38-41. There are other stunts which may be used, -of course, but we have found the four stunts illustrated (Figures 38-41) -satisfactory and adequate. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 38] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 39] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 40] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 41] - - -CONCLUSION - -There are many defenses that are good versus various offensive -formations. The important point is to have a defense you and your players -believe in, and which is sound in all respects. Each player must take -pride in himself and his defensive ability. He must personally feel he -is not going to permit the opposition to score. He must accept it as a -personal challenge to himself. He must eliminate the long run and/or -the long pass for the “easy” touchdown, pursue relentlessly and tackle -viciously in order to be sound both individually and as a team while on -defense. - -Other phases of defensive football, such as defending against the on-side -kick and the field goal attempt, will be discussed in detail in Chapter -6, “Our Kicking Game.” The drills which we use for our defensive ends, -interior linemen, linebackers, the secondary, and for the team will be -illustrated in Chapter 11. Pass defense will be discussed in its entirety -in Chapter 5. - - - - -CHAPTER 5 - -Pass Defense: Objectives and Tactics - - -An intercepted pass will probably get the defensive team out of a tight -spot quicker than any other play in football. An intercepted pass also -can change the complexion of a game very quickly. We recognize the fact -that a team which is difficult to pass against is a difficult team to -defeat. Therefore, in order to be “tough” defensively pass defense is one -phase of football which we _must_ work on every day. If we can either -eliminate a team’s passing game or hold this phase of their offense to a -minimum gain, we will definitely have the edge over our opposition. - -Basically, good pass defense is merely being in the proper position and -going for the football when it is in the air. Our most important coaching -point is, “When the football is in the air, _it belongs to us and we must -get it_!” Pass defense requires more individual desire by the players -than any other phase of the game of football. If a boy has tremendous -desire and the ability to play defensive football, you place him in a -spot where it is possible for him to intercept the pass if it comes near -his area, and you will have a winner. - - -PASS DEFENSE OBJECTIVES - -Pass defense is so vital that one simple defensive mistake can cost your -team a football game. In order to have a good football team, the play in -the defensive secondary must be sound. - -The primary objective of pass defense is to keep the opponent from -scoring, and secondly, to get the football. We stress these points all -the time. On every play we want each player trying to get possession of -the football for our team. - -Pass defense consists of the following phases: - - 1. Rushing the passer. - - 2. Holding up the receivers. - - 3. Covering the areas or zones. - -We have found it difficult to do a good job of _all_ three of these -phases at the same time. - - -_Rushing the Passer_ - -Rushing the passer is a good element of surprise, especially with an 8- -or 9-man line. Overloading one side of the line is a sound tactic, too, -because you have more men rushing than the offense has blocking, and the -quarterback must get rid of the ball quickly. If the quarterback has -sufficient time to spot his receivers, then throw to one of them when he -breaks to get open, it is difficult for the defense to cover the pass -properly. - -The men rushing the passer must have their hands up high, forcing the -passer to release the ball higher than he does normally. Such tactics -keep the passer from throwing the fast, straight, bullet-like pass, which -is the hardest for the defenders to break up. Secondly, the rushers with -their hands high cause the pass to remain in the air longer because of -its upward trajectory as it is released. Consequently this gives the -defensive secondary time to release from their areas and sprint to the -spot where the ball is descending. - -The man who has the outside rush, and whose responsibility it is to -contain, must get his hands high. He should _not_ leap off the ground in -an effort to tackle the passer, as he must be in a position to contain -him in the event the passer tries to get out of the pocket and/or runs -with the football. - -When we are rushing the passer, we want our _players_ to know they _must -not_ permit the passer to throw the football. In a definite passing -situation when we decide to overload a zone and rush more men than the -opposition has blockers, we acknowledge the fact we are sacrificing -coverage in our secondary. Therefore, we must put on a strong rush, and -we cannot permit the ball to be thrown. - -Figure 42 illustrates an overload on the right side of the offensive -line. Analyzing the illustration and assuming it is a passing situation -when we overload, if the opposition does throw a drop back pass, we are -in good shape because we have more rushers than they have blockers. If -the opposition runs to their right, which would be our left, again we -are sound defensively because they are running into our strength. In -other words, we are 66⅔% correct before the play even starts. If the -opposition goes to their left (our right), we are not strong, but by our -right side hitting and sliding to the outside, as illustrated in Figure -42, we will not be hurt. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 42] - -There are many ways of rushing a passer, but we do not expect to do a -really good job of rushing unless we out-number the blockers. Then, when -we have a pass rush called, our boys know they cannot permit the passer -to throw the ball, as I cited previously. - - -_Holding Up Receivers_ - -We work on detaining the receivers at the line of scrimmage, but we -probably do not devote enough time to this phase of pass defense. The -purpose of this defensive tactic is to give your linebackers time to get -to their defensive areas before the receivers get to them. It also gives -your defensive halfbacks time to get their width and depth and get set -up in their respective pass coverage zones. We hold up receivers several -different ways as illustrated in Figures 43-45. - -Figure 43 illustrates the tackle playing head up on the offensive end in -order to detain him. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 43] - -Figure 44 illustrates the defensive end and linebacker pinching-off the -offensive end, making it difficult for him to release for a pass. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 44] - -Figure 45 illustrates a third method of holding up an eligible receiver, -merely by placing the linebacker in front of the offensive end so he can -“whack” him as he releases from the line of scrimmage. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 45] - - -_Covering the Areas_ - -We cover the areas on pass defense and not the eligible receivers. We -want our players to be in the middle of their areas in a good football -position, and as soon as the ball leaves the passer’s hand, we want our -boys to forget about everything else _except intercepting the pass_. -We want our defenders to play _through_ the receiver _for_ the ball. -They should never go around the receiver, unless it is a short pass. -They should go for the ball at the highest point they can reach, and -never catch the ball low if they could have intercepted the pass at a -greater height. Our logic is that if a defender is waiting for the ball -to come down so he can handle it at his chest or waist, the intended -receiver has time to come in front of our defender and catch the pass -for a completion. Whereas if our defender will go back when the ball is -thrown, plant, and come toward the opponent’s goal line intercepting the -ball with arms and fingers extended upward, the intended receiver can’t -possibly take the ball away from him. This, of course, would depend upon -the type of pass that was thrown. - - -OUR FIVE-SPOKE PASS DEFENSE - -The 5-spoke or 3-deep, as it is commonly referred to at times, is a very -sound defense in the secondary. Let me explain exactly what I mean by a -5-spoke defense. We compare the perimeter of our defensive secondary to -one-half of a wheel, which may have 5 spokes or 4 spokes. The principles -are basically the same, as you will see shortly. I shall discuss the -5-spoke defense first, however. - -Figure 46 illustrates our 5-spoke defense. At the end of each of the -imaginary spokes is a defender. The distance between the defenders -depends on their individual ability. The spokes can be lengthened or -shortened, but they should not be brought closer together or there will -be a vulnerable area in the defensive secondary, as will be illustrated -shortly. When the spokes of the wheel are lengthened, the players -automatically become farther apart, depending upon the distance of the -defenders from the football. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 46] - -As illustrated in Figure 46, there are defensive men stationed at the -ends of the spokes at points 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. The defensive end located -at 1 is able to cover the area from point F to A; the halfback at point -2 can cover the area from A to B; the safety at point 3 can cover the -area from B to C; the halfback at point 4 covers C to D; and the end at -point 5 can cover the area from D to E. If the length of the spokes is -decreased, the area to be covered will not be as great. Conversely, the -longer the spokes, the greater the area to be covered by the defensive -secondary. If we stretch a wire from F to A to B to C to D to E, the area -enclosed will represent the space in which we should be able to contain -our opponents, as illustrated in Figure 46. - -We want our players to assume that the half-wheel will revolve clockwise -and counter-clockwise, but the defenders must always remain at their -points at the end of the spokes keeping the same relative distance -from each other in order for the defense to be sound. If the offensive -team runs to their left, the wheel should revolve to our right, -counter-clockwise, as illustrated in Figure 47. It would be just the -opposite if the play were run to our left—revolve clockwise. If it were a -running play up-the-middle, the spokes of the wheel would be shortened as -the defensive men would converge on the ball carrier, keeping their same -proportionate relationship to each other. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 47] - -Figure 48 illustrates a vulnerable area in the defensive secondary as the -result of the safety man being out of position versus a back up pass. His -course should be straight back, covering the deep middle zone, so that he -is approximately equidistant from his halfbacks. Should the error occur, -as illustrated in Figure 48, our pass defense will not be sound. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 48] - -The length of the spokes will be determined by the distance of -the defenders from the passer. As an example, if the passer goes -back to throw off of a drop back action, the spokes would stretch -proportionately. The defenders would have time to cover more distance if -the passer is attempting to throw deep because the ball must remain in -the air longer in order to reach its receiver. Conversely, if the passer -attempts to throw a quick pass from only a yard or so off the line of -scrimmage, the receivers will not have time to get deep, consequently -the length of the spokes will not be lengthened but will be shortened -proportionately as the defenders converge on the ball as it is thrown. - -Figure 49 illustrates the initial depth and width of the ends and the -3-deep secondary in the 5-spoke defensive alignment when the ball is in -the middle of the field between the hash marks. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 49] - -Figure 50 illustrates the width and depth of the ends and the 3-deep -secondary in the 5-spoke alignment when the opposition has the football -on the defensive right hash mark and the wide side of the field is to our -left. It would be just the opposite if we were on the defensive left -hash mark and the wide side of the field was to our right. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 50] - - -_Keys for the 5-Spoke Defenders_ - -Our 5-spoke defenders key as follows: - -_Ends_—Our defensive ends look through the tail of the offensive ends and -read the whole backfield, especially the back nearest to the defensive -end. - -_Halfbacks_—They look through the offensive end to their side and read -the whole backfield. It is very important that the halfbacks know at -all times where the football is; consequently, they should watch the -quarterback closely. - -_Safety_—The safety looks through the center, reading the quarterback and -the whole offensive backfield. He, too, must know where the football is -at all times. - -_Linebackers_—They line up on the tackle or guard, depending upon the -particular front alignment we are employing at the time, and read the man -in front of them. They should watch the entire backfield, too. - -Figure 51 illustrates the positions and keys of the linebackers and the -5-spoke defenders. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 51] - - -_Dividing the Areas_ - -We divide the areas in our defensive secondary into four short -one-quarters and three deep one-thirds. The short one-quarters are -covered by the ends and linebackers, and the halfbacks and safety cover -the three deep thirds, as illustrated in Figure 52. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 52] - -Our short one-quarter areas extend back 16 yards from the line of -scrimmage because we are trying to force the passer to throw the football -higher to his receivers behind our front line. We think that our -linebackers can get back approximately 12-14 yards, but we always tell -them we want them to cover 16 yards so they will hustle and work hard to -get depth on their pass coverage. If we said only 12 yards, they might -only get back to a depth of 10-12 yards, which would not be sufficiently -deep to cover their zones. - -If our inside linebackers drop back 16 yards and our corner linebackers -drop to 8 yards, if all four of these defenders are in a football -position and ready to move, they should be able to touch any ball that -is thrown in this area. There may be a ball thrown in front of our -linebackers, but a completed pass in this area normally will not defeat -us. We believe if the passer goes back seven or eight yards, and our -rushers can make him release the ball at a higher angle over their -extended arms and fingers, it will be difficult for the passer to throw -in front of the linebackers. Consequently if they hustle and get to the -depth I have indicated, they should be in a good position to intercept -any ball thrown into their zone. We instruct our men in the short -“fourths” to tip the ball when possible, providing they cannot intercept -it, as one of our deep backs is likely to intercept a deflected pass. -Incidentally, at times we will not have a defender in every “fourth,” or -only two of the “fourths” will be covered. At other times we’ll have an -extra man in one of the “fourths.” - -After our linebackers get back to their positions, we want them to assume -a relaxed position with the feet almost together, knees slightly bent, -and ready to move in the direction indicated by their keys. We adopted -this stance after making a study of Jackie Robinson’s relaxed and always -ready-to-move position on the baseball field. We do not want our players -to waste time and motion running in a circle getting to the football. - -We can play only three men back in the deep zones. Therefore, we divide -our deep zones into “thirds.” A pass should never be completed in one of -the deep zones if the line rushes hard forcing the passer to release the -ball higher than usual, if the 3-deep men cover their zones properly, and -if they see the ball leave the passer’s hand and hustle to intercept it. -Of course, teams do complete passes on us in these areas, but we do not -believe it should ever happen. Each of the 3-deep men is a “guardian” of -his particular area of the field, left, middle and right one-third. - -The “thirds” will vary in size. As an example, if the football is over -on the offensive team’s left (our right) hash mark, the defensive right -halfback’s third would be smaller than the left halfback’s one-third, -as illustrated in Figure 53. The right halfback’s one-third is smaller -because of field position, and secondly because the ball has a relatively -shorter distance to travel if thrown in this area of the field. -Conversely, if the ball were thrown in the left halfback’s area, the ball -would be in the air longer on a deep pass and both defender and receiver -would have farther to go to get to the ball. Therefore, the defensive -left halfback’s “third” would be larger and farther removed from the ball -on the opposite hash mark. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 53] - - -OUR PASS COVERAGE - -We normally want a man in every area on our pass coverage, unless we -decide for one reason or another not to cover one of the “fourths,” as I -indicated previously we sometimes do. The defender _must_ intercept or -knock down any and all passes thrown in his area. The defenders do not -play man-to-man in their areas, but each man covers a zone. If he will -play in the middle of his zone or area, when the ball is thrown he can go -to it. If a defender plays a man instead of his zone, the decoy can take -him out of his area permitting another receiver to catch the ball. Then -our defense is not sound. Therefore, we stress zone coverage, and playing -the ball—not the man. - - -_Coverage of Straight Drop Back Pass_ - -We consider a pass that is thrown from between the offensive tackle -positions as a straight drop back pass, as is illustrated in Figure 54. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 54] - -Figure 55 illustrates our coverage of the zones versus a straight drop -back pass. The defenders’ duties and responsibilities are as follows: - -[Illustration: FIGURE 55] - -_Defensive Right End_—Turns to his outside, sprints back and out to a -depth of 10 yards. He then sets up and faces the passer. He covers a -short one-quarter zone. When the ball is thrown, he sprints for it. - -_Defensive Right Linebacker_—Using a cross-over step, he turns to the -outside and sprints back trying to get a depth of 12-14 yards. He must -set up when the passer sets up. He keeps his distance with his other -linebacker to the inside. When the ball is thrown, he sprints for it. - -_Defensive Right Halfback_—His first step is backward and outward, and -he continues to go back covering his deep one-third zone. He should not -get closer than eight yards to the sideline. When the ball is thrown, he -sprints for it. - -_Defensive Safety_—He should favor the wide side of the field when he -retreats to cover his middle one-third zone. If no one is coming into his -area, he should favor the side with two receivers out. When the ball is -thrown, he sprints for it. - -_Defensive Left Halfback_—His first step is backward and outward, and he -continues to go back covering his deep one-third zone. He should never -get closer than eight yards to the sideline. When the ball is thrown, he -sprints for it. - -_Defensive Left Linebacker_—He turns to his outside and sprints back, -using a cross-over step, and tries to get a depth of 12-14 yards. -However, he must set up when the passer stops and sets up. He keeps his -distance with the linebacker to the inside. When the football is thrown, -he sprints for it. - -_Defensive Left End_—He turns to his outside and sprints backward and -outward to a depth of 10 yards, and faces the passer. He covers a short -one-quarter zone. When the football is thrown, he sprints for it. - - -_Coverage of an Action Pass_ - -Figure 56 illustrates our coverage versus an action pass. The defenders’ -duties and responsibilities are as follows: - -[Illustration: FIGURE 56] - -_Defensive Right End_—He crosses the line of scrimmage and contains the -passer very quickly. He must make the passer throw the football quickly. -We do not want the passer to be able to hit the deep receiver. - -_Defensive Right Linebacker_—He plays the run first. After he sees the -offensive end releasing, and when he knows that a pass is developing, he -sprints out and covers the flat. - -_Defensive Right Halfback_—His first step is back and out. He starts off -slowly at first, then covers faster and faster. He will cover the deep -one-third of the field on his side. He must be as wide as the widest -receiver, unless the receiver is within eight yards of the sideline. Then -he will play an inside-out position on the receiver. - -_Defensive Safety_—His first step would be back and out, favoring the -wide side of the field. His area of responsibility is the deep one-third -of the field. He must always be as deep as the deepest receiver. When the -ball is thrown, he will sprint for it. - -_Defensive Left Halfback_—His first step will be back and out when he -sees the flow is going away from him. He should turn to the inside and -get depth as he covers his area of responsibility, which is the deep -one-third of his side of the field. - -_Defensive Left Linebacker_—When he sees the flow going away from him, -he will play the counter first, then start to pursue the football. When -he sees a pass developing, he sprints back to his spot and covers the -short one-quarter zone. - - -_Pass Defense Versus Broken Backfield (Straight Drop Back Pass)_ - -Figure 57 illustrates our pass coverage of a straight drop back pass -when the offense has a broken backfield. The defenders’ duties and -responsibilities are as follows: - -[Illustration: FIGURE 57] - -_Defensive Right End_—He should line up slightly wider, and he goes back -to his spot about 10 yards deep. He will get a little greater width when -a man is flanking him. - -_Defensive Right Linebacker_—He should play a little looser, but still -cover his spot about 12-14 yards deep. - -_Defensive Right Halfback_—He should line up slightly wider, about one -and one-half yards outside of the flank man. He will still cover his -regular one-third deep zone. - -_Defensive Safety_—He should line up in a position where he will be in -the middle of the eligible receivers. He will face out, and he will cover -the deep middle one-third of the field. - -_Defensive Left Halfback_—His alignment does not change and he has the -same deep one-third area. - -_Defensive Left Linebacker_—His alignment does not change and he has the -same short one-quarter area, which is about 12-14 yards deep. - -_Defensive Left End_—His alignment and assignment does not change. He -will have the same width and depth, and cover the short one-quarter area. - - -_Pass Defense Versus Action Pass With Broken Backfield_ - -Figure 58 illustrates our pass coverage of an action pass (to our -left) from a broken backfield. The defensive players’ duties and -responsibilities are as follows: - -[Illustration: FIGURE 58] - -_Defensive Left End_—He plays a little wider than usual, and he has one -of two options depending upon which defense has been called. He either -rushes and contains the passer quickly or he will drop off and cover the -short flat area. When the latter occurs, the tackle has the outside rush -and contain responsibility then in place of the defensive end. - -_Defensive Left Linebacker_—He plays his regular position. He plays -the run first, but when he sees a pass develop, he covers his short -one-quarter area. If the defensive end is going to contain the passer, -the linebacker will check for the run first and then cover the short flat. - -_Defensive Left Halfback_—He lines up on the outside shoulder of the -widest man and on the snap of the ball he steps back and out. He plays -his regular position, and his area of responsibility is the deep -one-third to his side of the field. - -_Defensive Safety_—He lines up in the area where he will be splitting -the eligible receivers. His area of responsibility is the deep middle -one-third. - -_Defensive Right Halfback_—His first step is toward his outside. As soon -as he sees the flow going away from him, however, he turns and gets depth -still covering the deep one-third area to his side. - -_Defensive Right Linebacker_—He will play the counter when he sees the -flow going away from him. When he sees a pass develop, he will cover his -short one-quarter area. - -_Defensive Right End_—The back who is flanked out does not alter the -defensive right end’s responsibility. He will start pursuing the ball -until he recognizes a pass, then he will cover his short one-quarter area. - - -_Pass Defense Versus End Out_ - -We cover the split end, illustrated in Figure 59, exactly the same way -that we would cover a back out. If the play is an action pass away from -the end out, we would cover it as we cover a regular action pass. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 59] - - -_Pass Defense Versus a Flanked Back and a Split End to Opposite Sides_ - -Figure 60 illustrates our defensive alignment versus a flanked back and a -split end out to opposite sides. Our coverage depends on whether it is an -action or a straight back pass we are defending against. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 60] - -_Versus the straight drop back pass_, we cover this like our regular drop -back coverage. Our ends drop off and cover their short one-quarter areas, -and the linebackers cover their short one-quarter areas. The defensive -halfbacks line up outside of the widest man to their side unless he is -closer than six yards to the sideline. They cover their deep one-third -area, always staying as deep as the deepest receiver. The defensive -safety man would line up in a position splitting the eligible receivers. -He faces the wide side of the field, and as the receivers come downfield -he would cover the deep middle one-third of the field. - -_Versus the action pass_, the ends play their regular defense versus -a man out toward them. If the flow comes toward the end, he comes up -containing the passer quickly forcing him to throw the football. The -end away from the action will start his angle of pursuit through the -area where the defensive safety man lined up originally. When he sees a -pass develop, he tries to get back to the off-side one-third area. The -defensive halfback on the side of the action covers his deep one-third -area, unless he receives an oral signal from his safety man. The halfback -away from the side of the action takes his steps back and out, and then -sprints to a position where he can cover the off-two-thirds of the field. -He must get his width and depth first. The defensive safety will start -in the direction of the action, and then try to get in a position so -that he can cover the deep one-third of the field. When he gets in this -position, the defensive safety man gives an oral signal which releases -the defensive halfback to go up and cover the short one-quarter area. -If the safety cannot get in this proper position, he does not give the -signal and we have two men covering the deep one-third area. - - -PASS DEFENSE BY POSITIONS - -_Defensive End_ (Flow toward a defensive end)—After lining up in his -proper stance and position, when he sees the action coming toward him -he crosses the line of scrimmage approximately two yards deep in the -offensive backfield. His inside foot should be forward, and his shoulders -parallel to the line of scrimmage, as he plays off the outside blocker. -He must contain the passer quickly. He cannot permit the passer to get -outside of his position. On certain defenses he will drop off and cover -the short flat, especially when a back is flanked to his side of the -field. - -_Defensive Ends_ (Versus drop back pass)—After lining up in his proper -stance and position, when he recognizes a drop back pass, he turns to -his outside and sprints, using a cross-over step, to a spot 10 yards -deep. He never takes his eyes off the passer. When the passer gets set to -throw the ball, the defensive end must stop and set up, even if he has -only gotten five yards deep. He must get into a good football position -quickly, which is tail down, head up, back straight, weight on the balls -of the feet, knees slightly bent and feet even. When the passer steps -in one direction as if to throw or fake the pass, we want the end to -start in that direction, even if he “takes the fake.” Should the latter -occur and the passer not throw the football, then the end must bring -himself under control quickly and sprint for the football when the passer -releases it, regardless of where it is thrown. - -_Defensive End_ (Flow away from a defensive end)—After taking his proper -stance and position and he recognizes the play going away from him, he -commences his angle of pursuit through the area where the defensive -safety man lined up originally. When he sees a pass develop, he stops -and still facing the passer and wide side, he tries to get back into a -position to help out in the deep off-one-third. He gets as deep as he can -and puts his hands high. Consequently the passer must throw the ball high -and get it over him. Since the ball is thrown higher, it stays in the air -longer and gives our defensive halfback who is covering that third of the -field time to react and sprint for the football. When the ball is thrown, -the end must sprint for it. - -_Defensive Linebackers_ (Versus straight drop back pass)—If, after lining -up in their proper position and stance, they recognize the play as a -straight drop back pass, the linebackers will turn to their outside and -by using a cross-over step they will sprint back trying to get to a depth -of 12-14 yards. They should never take their eyes off the passer. As soon -as he gets set to throw, the linebackers should set up in a good football -position regardless of their depth at the time. The linebackers must take -the first passing fake of the quarterback or they will never be able to -knock down the short passes. When the ball is thrown, they both must -sprint to it. - -_Defensive Linebacker_ (Flow pass toward a linebacker)—After the -linebacker has lined up in his proper stance and position and recognizes -the flow is coming toward him, he must expect a running play first. The -hole he must check will depend upon the defense that has been called. -After he has checked for a run but sees a pass developing, he must -turn to his outside and sprint for his short one-quarter area using a -cross-over step, or he will sprint to the flat on his side and cover -this area. He, too, must get set when he sees the passer get set, and he -takes the first fake. If the ball is not thrown, he regains his balance, -position, etc., and sprints for the ball when it is thrown. - -_Defensive Linebacker_ (Flow away from the linebacker)—From his proper -stance and position when he observes the flow going away from him, he -steps in and checks the counter play and then starts his pursuit for the -football. When he recognizes a pass developing, he will plant and try -to get back to his short one-quarter area by using a cross-over step. -He will continue to go back to his one-quarter area still facing the -direction of the flow. He is trying to get to a depth of 12-14 yards. -However, he must come under control and maintain a good position when the -quarterback gets set to pass. He then plays his regular pass defense. He -must try to maintain his proper distance between his other linebacker -as a short one-quarter area will be vulnerable if they move too close -together. When the ball is thrown, he sprints for it. - -_Defensive Halfbacks_ (Versus straight drop back pass)—After the -defensive halfbacks have lined up in their proper stance and position -and the ball is put into play, their first step is back and out. Each -halfback starts toward his deep one-third zone as he sees the straight -drop back pass develop. Although they commence slowly, the longer the -passer holds the ball, the faster and deeper they cover their one-third -areas. The deep men do _not_ take the passing fake, such as the ends and -linebackers must do. When the ball is put into the air in his area, the -halfback must sprint to intercept the pass. It is very important that the -halfbacks take the shortest and straightest line to the football once it -leaves the passer’s finger tips. - -The defensive halfback will never get closer than eight yards to the -sideline when he is covering a deep one-third of the field. As he gets -close to the sideline and the passer is still holding the football, the -defensive halfback will bend away for the sideline but still remain in a -position to see it. - -If the ball is thrown deep over his head, the halfback is permitted to -turn his back (whirl around) on the passer and go after the football. -We feel he can cover more ground and get to the ball faster using the -whirl around method than if he plants, pivots, keeps his eye on the ball, -and then goes after it. This is the only time we will permit a 3-deep -defender to take his eyes off the football. - -_Defensive Halfback_ (Flow pass toward a defensive halfback)—After the -halfback has lined up in his regular position and he recognizes an action -pass or a running pass coming toward him, he starts back and out. His -area of responsibility is the deep one-third to his side of the field. -He must always be as deep as anyone in his area, and he must be in a -position so that he can cover his whole zone. If the football comes into -his zone, he is responsible for it. He must play the ball at the highest -possible point he can reach it safely. He must not get closer than eight -yards to the sideline because this cuts down his ability to cover the -entire one-third, his responsibility. When the ball is thrown, he must -sprint for it. - -_Defensive Halfback_ (Flow pass away from the halfback)—After lining up -in his proper position and stance and recognizing the flow is starting -away from him on the snap of the football, his first step is back and -out. He must get his width in case of a roll-out pass. On his third -step he will plant, pivot to his inside, and get depth covering his -one-third to his side of the field. Regardless of flow or action his pass -responsibility is the deep one-third of the field that he lines up in. - -_Defensive Safety_ (Versus straight drop back pass)—After the safety -has lined up in his proper position and stance and he sees the ball has -been put into play, his first step is back and out, favoring the wide -side of the field. He starts running slowly, but the deeper he goes, the -faster he runs. He cannot permit a receiver to get behind him. He must -be as deep as the deepest receiver anywhere on the football field. His -responsibility is the deep middle one-third, and if the ball is thrown -in his area, he must play the ball and _not_ the receiver. We instruct -the safety man to be deep enough so that he must come forward to play -the football in the air instead of running backward to play it. If the -ball is thrown in one of the deep one-third areas to his right or left, -he does _not_ sprint for the ball. Instead he sprints for a spot between -the place where the ball will come down and the opposition’s goal line. -In case the opponent catches the ball, he will be in a position to tackle -the receiver. If the ball is tipped into the air, the safety man should -be in a position to catch the ball. He must remember that he is the -safety and it is his duty to stop the opposition from scoring if they get -past the other 10 defensive men. - -_Defensive Safety_ (Flow pass in any direction)—After the safety has -lined up in his proper position and stance and sees the flow pass -develop, his first step is back and out toward the flow. His area of -responsibility is the deep middle one-third of the field, but he goes -back facing or favoring the flow. He must get as deep as the deepest -receiver and be in a position to cover the middle one-third, as well as -be in a position to help out on deep passes from sideline to sideline. -He must remember he is the safety, and he _must_ prevent the touchdown -regardless of where the ball is thrown. - -_All Defenders When the Ball Is Thrown_—When the ball is thrown to any -deep one-third area, the procedure is the same. Let’s assume the play -is a straight drop back pass and it is thrown into our defensive right -halfback’s one-third zone area, as illustrated in Figure 61. If he is in -the proper position, he will give an oral signal while the ball is still -in the air. His signal tells the other defenders he is going to touch the -football, and they should get set in the event it is tipped into the air. -The safety will get between the halfback and the opposition’s goal line. -He should assume a good football position and be alert for the tipped -football from his halfback. The defensive ends, linebackers and the other -defensive halfback will be sprinting for the football. When they hear the -right halfback’s oral signal, they will stop about five yards away from -him, get into a good football position, and watch for the tip. If our -defender intercepts the football, his teammates will turn around quickly -and block aggressively for him. The technique as I have described it is -illustrated in Figure 61. - - -ADVANTAGES OF THE 5-SPOKE PASS DEFENSE - -The advantages of the 5-spoke pass defense are as follows: - - 1. When playing a team that quick kicks frequently, we have - a man in position to field the kick without weakening our - defense. - - [Illustration: FIGURE 61] - - 2. The 3-deep men only have one position to learn on defense. - The defensive right halfback is always the defensive right - halfback, etc. - - 3. When the offense flanks backs and splits ends, it is easy - to adjust our defensive backs. Instead of revolving, they - simply loosen up or line up wider and still play their regular - positions. - - 4. There is always a defender in each of the deep one-third - areas without revolving into the areas. - - 5. It is easier to cover the running pass because there is no - point of indecision. - - 6. On a straight drop back pass, there is a defender in every - deep one-third area and one in every short one-quarter area. - - 7. We can get fast containment versus the action pass because - ends line up in a wide position initially. - - 8. It is easy to teach because we delegate a definite area of - responsibility on every occasion. - - 9. It is a very good defense against the long pass because of - the deep centerfielder or safety man. - - 10. Keying is cut to a minimum because there is no revolving - necessary in order to get a man in the deep safety position. - - -THE 4-SPOKE PASS DEFENSE - -The 4-spoke or 2-deep defense is also a very good pass defense. I believe -it requires a little better athlete to play some of the positions in a -4-spoke as compared to the 5-spoke defense. I would probably be using -the 4-spoke defense if it were not for the fact that a number of teams -we play quick kick frequently. This was a major factor in my changing -from the 4-spoke defense which we used successfully at Texas A & M to the -5-spoke defense which we now use at the University of Alabama. - - -_Advantages of the 4-Spoke Defense_ - -The advantages of the 4-spoke defense are as follows: - - 1. When playing a 9-man front, the extra man is always where - you need him. - - 2. You can stunt a great deal in your secondary and give the - passer problems. - - 3. It is a good defense against a Split-T offense. - - 4. Tremendous pursuit can be obtained from this formation - because the linemen all play an outside technique. - - 5. You can predetermine your rotation; consequently, you remove - any indecision. - - 6. You use the same coverage with your goal line defense, - merely tightening up the defense and the secondary. - - 7. You put quick pressure on the passer by using your 9-man - front advantageously. - - 8. The defensive keys are definite. - -The principle of the 5-spoke pass defense and the 4-spoke pass defense -is basically the same with the exception you have only four spokes or -four men in the outer perimeter of your secondary. The spokes run from -an imaginary center with a defender placed on the end of each spoke, as -illustrated in Figure 62. - -These spokes can all be lengthened or shortened, as was explained -previously for the 5-spoke defense. They must move as a unit or team, -however, or there will be vulnerable areas in the secondary. We run an -imaginary line from defender to defender, considering the lines as a -rubber band, as illustrated in Figure 63. The rubber band can stretch, -but it should not break. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 62] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 63] - -In Figure 63 the spokes have lengthened, the rubber band has stretched, -and the defense is still sound. The defenders, although they are farther -apart, have all kept their proper spacing with each other. Although they -are farther apart, the time that is required for the ball to travel the -extra distance will permit the defenders to cover the space between them. - -In Figure 64 the defensive right halfback has taken the wrong route, -causing a large gap in the secondary and we are extremely vulnerable -should a pass be thrown into the area where the rubber band has broken. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 64] - - -_The 4-Spoke Alignment_ - -Figure 65 illustrates the depth and width of the secondary defenders in -the 4-spoke defensive alignment when the ball is in the middle of the -field between the hash marks. The defensive corner man will line up about -four yards wide and about two and one-half yards deep. They key or read -the offensive halfback closest to them, and the nearest end. The reaction -of the corner man will be determined by his keys (offensive end and near -halfback). He will “read” the following situations: - - 1. If the end blocks in and the backs come toward the corner - man, he should come up and contain the play quickly. - - 2. If the end comes out and does not block and the backs start - toward the corner man, he should turn to his outside, sprint - back eight yards and get set to cover his short one-quarter - area. - - 3. If the end comes out and does not block and the back starts - away from the defensive corner man, he should sprint back and - get in a position to cover the deep one-third zone. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 65] - -The deep backs or twin safeties line up on the inside shoulder of the -offensive ends about seven and one-half yards deep. They should keep a -relative position to each other. The safeties should look through the -offensive tackles to the halfbacks. The flow of the offensive backs will -determine largely the direction the defensive safeties should go, who -must react on the snap of the ball. The twin safeties should react to the -following situations: - - 1. On a straight drop back pass, the safety starts deep to his - outside until he gets an oral signal from his corner man. This - signal sends him to the middle one-third area. - - 2. If the football or the action of the offensive backs goes - away from the safety, he should go to the middle one-third zone. - - 3. If the flow comes toward him, he covers the deep one-third - area to his side of the field. - - -_4-Spoke Pass Coverage Versus Straight Drop Back Pass_ - -Versus the straight drop back pass, as illustrated in Figure 66, the -linebackers, corner men and twin safeties will react as follows: - -[Illustration: FIGURE 66] - -_Defensive Left Corner Man_—On the snap of the ball the defensive corner -man is in a position to observe both the end and the halfback nearest -to him. If the end releases and the halfback is coming toward him, the -corner man must turn to his outside and sprint to a position eight -yards deep. He sets up in a good football position and covers his short -one-quarter area. He never takes his eyes off the passer, and should the -ball be thrown into his area he intercepts the pass. - -_Defensive Left Halfback_ (Safety)—After he lines up in his proper -position, the defensive halfback upon recognizing a straight drop back -pass developing, immediately looks to see which side has two eligible -receivers. He then starts to his outside and goes deep, unless he -receives an oral signal from his corner man releasing him from his deep -one-third area. As shown in Figure 66, the defensive left halfback covers -the deep one-third area to his side of the field. - -_Defensive Right Halfback_ (Safety)—After lining up in his proper -position and stance, the defensive right halfback, upon recognizing the -drop back pass, covers the deep one-third zone. Should he receive an -oral signal from his corner man, he is released from covering the deep -one-third to his side and he now covers the deep middle one-third. He -should receive the signal on his third or fourth step, if the corner man -gives it. The safety then plants his foot and turns to the inside, always -facing the passer, while he sprints to the middle one-third if he is -released from his other responsibility by his corner man. - -_Defensive Right Corner Man_—On the snap of the ball, when the defensive -corner man observes the drop back pass developing, and the end and -halfback release to his side, he starts to his outside in order to cover -his short one-quarter area. If the near halfback stays in and blocks, and -only the end releases, the corner man gives an oral signal to his safety, -the defensive right halfback, who covers the middle one-third, and the -corner man covers the deep one-third area on his side. - -_Defensive Linebackers_—The defensive linebackers play exactly like the -linebackers on a 5-spoke defense, which I explained previously. The only -difference is the area which they line up in (see Figure 55 and Figure -66). On the 4-spoke pass defense the linebackers play the straight drop -back pass and the action pass exactly as they do on a 5-spoke defense, -which I explained previously. - - -_4-Spoke Pass Defense Versus the Action Pass_ - -Versus the action pass, as illustrated in Figure 67, the 4-spoke -defenders react as follows: - -[Illustration: FIGURE 67] - -_Defensive Right Corner Man_—He lines up in his regular position and -observes the type of play developing. When he sees the offensive end to -his side releasing downfield and the action is coming toward his side, -he is alert for a pass. He then turns to his outside and sprints to his -short one-quarter area, which is about eight yards deep. He should be in -a good football position so that he can cover his zone properly. He must -try to stay wider than the widest man in his area, unless he is closer -than six yards to the sideline. - -_Defensive Right Halfback_—After lining up in his proper position, when -the action starts toward his side, he sprints to his outside getting -depth and tries to get into a position so that he can cover the deep -one-third area, as illustrated in Figure 67. He should be as deep as -the deepest man in his area, and when the ball is thrown, he plays the -football and not the receiver. - -_Defensive Left Halfback_—When he sees the flow going away from him, upon -receiving an oral signal he will turn to his inside and start for an -angle of pursuit through where the safety man would have lined up if it -were a 3-deep defense. On his third or fourth step he should see a pass -developing, and then he must start for the deep middle one-third of the -football field. - -_Defensive Left Corner Man_—On the snap of the football as the defensive -left corner man sees the flow of the backs going away from him, he -immediately knows only one man can come to his side as a receiver. -Therefore, he must sprint back to cover the deep one-third area, usually -covered by his defensive left halfback in a normal situation. He gives -an oral signal to his halfback, which releases him from his normal -responsibility. - -_Defensive Linebackers_—The defensive linebackers play the action pass on -the 4-spoke defense exactly as they do on the 5-spoke defense, which was -explained previously. - - -_4-Spoke Pass Defense Versus the Roll-Out Pass_ - -Figure 68 illustrates the 4-spoke pass defense versus the roll-out pass. -The box-wing defenders must react as follows: - -[Illustration: FIGURE 68] - -_Defensive Right Corner Man_—When the defensive right corner man observes -the near offensive end release and the flow starts toward him, he sprints -back to his area eight yards deep. When he sees the quarterback roll away -from him, as illustrated in Figure 68, he turns to his inside and gets -into a position so he can cover the deep one-third of the field to his -side. He must react quickly as his responsibility changes from a short -one-quarter to a deep one-third pass coverage when the play starts toward -him and then the quarterback rolls away from his position. - -_Defensive Right Halfback_—On the snap of the ball if the defensive right -halfback sees an action pass coming in his direction, he starts back -and out to a position where he can cover the deep one-third area to his -side of the field. On about his eighth or ninth step, he should be able -to recognize a change in the offense’s direction and the flow is going -away from him. He immediately turns to his inside and still watching the -passer he sprints to the deep middle one-third of the field. He, too, -must react very quickly and sprint in order to cover the deep middle -area. The time it takes him to react and change his direction will be an -important factor in determining whether or not he breaks up the pass. - -_Defensive Left Halfback_—When the defensive left halfback sees the flow -going away from him, he should receive an oral signal from his corner -man releasing him from his deep off-one-third responsibility. After he -hears his signal, he will sprint to a position where he can cover the -middle one-third area. As he is running to his area, he observes that -the quarterback is now rolling out to his side. Therefore, the halfback -must plant, pivot and try to get into a position to cover the deep -one-third area on his side of the field. If he sees he can cover this -area satisfactorily, he will give an oral signal to his corner man which -tells the latter to go up and cover the short one-quarter area. If he -sees that he cannot get into a good football position to cover his area, -the defensive halfback will _not_ give a signal. Then we will have two -men covering the deep one-third area, and the short one-quarter area will -not be covered in such a situation. - -_Defensive Left Corner Man_—By reading the offensive backs, the defensive -corner man observes the flow going away from him. He immediately turns -to his inside and yells an oral signal to his defensive halfback, which -tells the latter the corner man will cover the deep off-one-third area. -As he is sprinting toward his area, he observes the quarterback reversing -his action, and the play is now coming toward him. He turns to his -outside and stays in a position to cover the deep left one-third (Figure -68) until he hears an oral signal from his halfback releasing him from -his deep responsibility. If he does not hear a signal, he will continue -to go back and cover the deep one-third zone. If he hears a signal, he -is released from his deep responsibility, which is now assumed by the -halfback, and the corner man covers his short one-quarter area. If the -offense is going to complete the pass, we want them to catch it in the -short area rather than in the deep zone. Therefore, the deep one-third -coverage has preference over the short one-quarter zone. At times we -might end up with two defenders in the same deep zone, but we would -rather do this than leave the deep zone uncovered. If this were the case, -then our defense would not be sound. Once again our first objective of -defensive football is to eliminate the “easy” or “cheap” touchdown pass. - - -_4-Spoke Coverage Versus a Flanker Set_ - -Figure 69 illustrates a 4-spoke coverage versus a straight drop back -pass from a flanker set. As you can observe, the entire perimeter of the -defensive secondary is revolved to the left. If the offense were strong -to their left, our secondary would revolve to our right versus a flanker -set left. - -In Figure 69 the _left corner man_ goes up on the line of scrimmage, and -from his new position he carries out the same assignment he would if -he lined up in his normal position of two and one-half yards deep and -four yards wide. In his new position he can contain a running play very -quickly. If a straight drop back pass developed, he would turn to his -outside and still cover his short one-quarter area. - -The _defensive left halfback_ carries out the same assignment by -covering the deep one-third of the field to his side, but he lines up -outside of the flanker instead of on the inside shoulder of the offensive -end. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 69] - -The _defensive right halfback_ moves over and plays the safety position. -When the straight drop back pass develops, he covers the deep middle -one-third of the field. As he goes back to cover his area, he faces -toward the strong side of the offense. - -The _defensive right corner man_ revolves from his regular corner -position back to a defensive halfback. He lines up about three yards -outside of his offensive end, and when the pass develops, he covers the -deep one-third of the field that he has lined up in. - -The _linebackers_ play their regular technique, sprinting to their usual -spots to play their regular pass defense. - - -_Action Pass With a Flanker_ - -Figure 70 illustrates 4-spoke coverage versus the action pass from a -flanker set. - -The defensive secondary again revolves to the strong side of the -offense, as illustrated in Figure 70. If we do not have a stunt on in -our secondary, which I shall cover later in this chapter, our secondary -would play it exactly as we do the straight back pass, explained above. -The _left corner man_ reads his keys and goes back to cover his spot. He -must be ready to come up if the passer chooses to run with the football. -The _left halfback_ covers the deep one-third to his side. The _right -halfback_, who has revolved to the middle, plays and covers the deep -middle one-third. The _right corner man_, who has also revolved back to -the defensive halfback position, covers the deep one-third to his side of -the field. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 70] - - -_4-Spoke Coverage Versus a Floater_ - -Figure 71 illustrates 4-spoke coverage versus the straight back pass from -a floater set. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 71] - -When the offense lines up in a floater set, illustrated in Figure 71, our -secondary does not revolve but merely loosens up a little. The defensive -_corner man_ to the side that the back is flanked (our right) lines -up a little wider and a little deeper. On the snap of the ball, if a -back-up pass develops, he drops off to eight yards depth, and covers his -one-quarter zone. The _defensive right halfback_ lines up wider and he -still covers the deep one-third area to his side. The _defensive left -halfback_ lines up in approximately his regular position because he must -be able to cover the deep one-third zone to his side of the field. On -this particular play as he sees a back-up pass develop, and only one -receiver is out to his left, he anticipates receiving a quick release -signal from his corner man. Should this occur, he now covers the deep -middle one-third of the field. Otherwise he covers his deep side zone, as -indicated above. The _left corner man_ lines up in his regular position -and sprints into a position to cover the deep one-third area on his side -of the field when he sees his nearest offensive back blocking and only -one receiver is coming out to his side. He gives the defensive halfback a -quick release signal on about his second or third step. - - -_Action Pass With a Floater_ - -[Illustration: FIGURE 72] - -Figure 72 illustrates 4-spoke coverage versus the action pass from a -floater set. The entire secondary plays the action pass exactly the same -as a drop back pass if the action is toward the back who is flanked. It -would be played in a slightly different manner if the action is away -from the back who is flanked, as illustrated in Figure 72. In such a -situation the _left corner man_ would sprint to a position eight yards -deep and set up immediately to cover the short one-quarter zone. The -_left halfback_ sprints to a position back and out so he can cover the -deep one-third of the field to his side. The _right halfback_ plants, -turns to his inside, and sprints to a position to cover the deep middle -one-third of the field. The _right corner man_ turns to his inside, -sprints back and out, and gets in a position to cover the deep one-third -of the field when the action starts away from him. - - -PREDETERMINED ROTATION - -When identifying our different defenses, we decided to number all of our -4-spoke defenses in the 40 series as far as the secondary was concerned. -I mentioned in a previous chapter that we have a defensive signal caller -for the secondary, as well as for the defensive line. We decided that -4-spoke and 40 had something in common (the 4’s), and would be easy for -our players to remember. Consequently a 4-spoke defense is in the 40 -series. - -In addition, we gave our right and left corner men numbers. Our objective -was to eliminate indecision as the second digit, when called, gave the -corner man a definite responsibility, as will be illustrated shortly. -Therefore, it was possible for the secondary to do a good job of rotation -merely by watching the flow of the offensive backs. - -As an example, let’s assume our defensive signal caller says, “40,” which -is our regular 4-spoke defense. Therefore, our secondary will revolve -according to the flow of the offensive backs, and the corner men will -read the end and halfback nearest to them in order to ascertain whether -they go up or drop back. - -However, we will do more than play a straight 40 defense. By numbering -our corner men, we can predetermine the rotation. Our right corner man is -given the even numbers 4 and 8, and the left corner man the odd numbers 5 -and 9. Therefore, we can call 44, 45, 48 and 49 defenses from the 4-spoke -alignment. Now 44 and 48 mean two different things, as does 45 and 49. -However, 44 and 45 are the same, only to opposite sides of the line, and -the same holds true for 48 and 49. - - -_Defensive Calls 44-45 for Secondary Rotation_ - -When our defensive signal caller calls, “44,” our secondary will -have a predetermined rotation to our right, _unless_ the flow of the -offensive backs is to our left. Then we will play regular and disregard -the predetermined call. Let’s assume 44 was called and the flow of the -offensive backs was to our right. We have already predetermined our -rotation. Regardless of whether it is a pass or a run, our defensive -right corner man must come across the line of scrimmage and contain -the passer quickly, as illustrated in Figure 73. Our defensive right -inside linebacker knows the corner will contain quickly, so he is now -responsible for the short one-quarter area the corner man usually covers -on a flow pass toward him (Figure 73). If the corner man was hesitant -before, he need not be under these conditions as he knows he will contain -without fail on a 44 predetermined call when the flow is toward him. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 73] - -If the flow was away from him on a 44 call, as illustrated in Figure 75, -the predetermined call is “off,” and he revolves back and covers his -regular position. Both situations would be reversed if the call was “45.” - -Defensive call 44 is also good versus a straight back pass, as -illustrated in Figure 74. The same is true of defense 45. The only thing -that erases the predetermined call is when the flow is away from the -second digit called, i.e., away from 4 or 5. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 74] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 75] - - -_Defensive Calls 48-49 for Secondary Rotation_ - -We use the call 48 and 49 when we want a sure rotation, say, to the wide -side of the field. When our right corner man hears “8” and the left -corner man hears “9,” he knows he must go across the line of scrimmage -regardless of the flow of the play. If the flow of the play is away from -him, as illustrated in Figure 76, he will trail the play. If the play -is a straight back pass, as illustrated in Figure 77, he will rush the -passer hard. Figure 78 illustrates the flow of the play coming toward -the right corner man. His job is to contain the play then. The remaining -three backs know they are going to go to a 3-deep secondary regardlessly. - -We ordinarily will use such a stunt only toward the wide (right) side of -the field (Figure 76-78). The element of surprise is very good, and it -eliminates indecision on the part of the secondary. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 76] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 77] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 78] - - -_Defensive Calls 38-39 for Secondary Rotation_ - -Another predetermined rotation is 38 and 39, and is similar to 48 and 49, -respectively, as one corner man rushes regardless of the situation. We -use 38 or 39 when we do not wish to call 48 or 49. If the offense sets -a flanker to one side, and we want our secondary to revolve toward the -flanker and the corner man who is now up on the line of scrimmage to -rush regardlessly, we would call 38 or 39. The first digit, “3,” tells -our secondary to revolve to a 3-deep toward the flanker. The second -digit, “8” or “9,” indicates the right or left corner man, respectively, -is going to fire into the offensive backfield. Figures 79-80 illustrate -call, “38,” versus a running play and a straight drop back pass, -respectively. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 79] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 80] - - -STUNTING IN THE DEFENSIVE SECONDARY - -A team must be sound in its defensive secondary in order to be a good -football team. All of us use certain basic principles, but we must be -careful we do not “type” ourselves as this could be very costly if the -opponents pick up our maneuvers while scouting our team. - -One of the basic principles we try to teach our quarterback when we -are discussing different phases of the passing game is where _not_ to -throw the football. While we might not complete the pass, as long as -the opposition does not intercept it, we are not in too bad a position. -Everyone knows the effect an interception can have on both the offensive -and defensive teams. - -In order to do an intelligent job of telling our quarterbacks where -_not_ to throw the ball, we must know the maneuvers of the opponent’s -defensive secondary on action passes and on drop back passes. However, we -always give our opponents credit for being as smart or smarter than we -are. They, too, teach their quarterbacks where _not_ to throw the ball. -Consequently we try to make their job even more difficult by using some -stunts in our secondary. - -After we started to experiment, we found these stunts were actually -serving a two-fold purpose. Not only was it confusing the opponents but -it was also helping us to eliminate some problems of indecision that -our corner men were having on certain occasions. By giving each man a -specific assignment and by letting his assignment be determined by the -flow of the offensive back and not by keying different positions, this -greatly reduced our mistakes. - -When we are using a particular stunt in our secondary, we never want -to weaken our coverage at any point. To the contrary, we think we are -strengthening it when we stunt. We have used four stunts successfully -from time to time. We call our stunts “Thunder,” “Robber,” “Gangster,” -and “Lightning.” After carefully analyzing these stunts, we came to the -conclusion we were usually having two or three men exchange assignments, -having defenders come from different angles, but still covering all the -regular areas. - - -“_Thunder_” - -“Thunder” is the name we have given to a stunt that will be between our -defensive right halfback and right corner man, which will constitute one -team, and our defensive left halfback and left corner man which will -constitute a second team. Each team will be completely independent of -the other team. What the stunt really amounts to is that the halfback -and corner man will exchange assignments completely unless the flow goes -away from them. For example, let’s say the offense runs an action pass -to their right side. With an action pass of this type, our left corner -man would ordinarily drop back eight yards deep and cover the short flat -area. With “Thunder” called, however, he will turn to his outside and -sprint back and cover the deep one-third of the field to his side. The -left defensive halfback, who ordinarily would cover the deep area on this -particular type pass, will come forward and outside and cover the short -area the corner man would ordinarily cover. Not only have we given the -quarterback an entirely new picture to look at, but we have strengthened -our coverage by having our halfback come forward through the hook zone, -going to the flat area. “Thunder” is illustrated in Figure 81. - -I mentioned earlier that one of the advantages of these stunts was that -it takes away any point of indecision for our corner men. When we are -using our regular coverage and the flow goes away from our corner man, he -will sprint to his outside and cover the deep one-third area, but when -the flow comes toward him he has to key the offensive end and determine -if he is blocking, slamming, going down field to block or to catch a -pass. The action our corner man takes will largely depend upon the action -the offensive end takes. When we have “Thunder” called, the corner man -knows on the snap of the ball, regardless of what kind of play the -offense will run, he will sprint back and cover the deep area to his side -of the field. (Figure 81.) - -The signal caller in our secondary can call “Thunder” for our right side -only, left side only or both sides at the same time. If he calls it for -both sides at the same time, then the direction in which the offense -operates will determine which side of our defensive secondary will play -“Thunder.” - -[Illustration: FIGURE 81] - - -“_Robber_” - -“Robber” is another of our stunts that serves a two-fold purpose of -eliminating indecision and is an element of surprise. - -Our “Robber” will be someone playing defensive right or left halfback, -depending upon our game plans. However, we will _never_ have “Robber” -called on _both_ sides at the same time. - -For example, let’s say our defensive left halfback will be our “Robber,” -as illustrated in Figure 82. On the snap of ball, regardless of the -flow, our left corner man will sprint back and cover the deep third -of the field to his side, our defensive right halfback will cover the -deep middle of the field, and our right corner man will cover the deep -one-third to his side of the field. On the snap of the ball, our “Robber” -can go anywhere he thinks the opponents will run. This is a very good -element of surprise because we will get an additional defender at the -point of attack and he can be very reckless due to the fact that he does -not have any designated responsibility. We expect our “Robber” to try to -second-guess the opponent’s quarterback. When a pass play develops, he -is in a very good position to break up the short passes. - -We do not use this as a steady diet, but we gain considerably by having -the “Robber” pursue the ball recklessly. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 82] - - -“_Gangster_” - -“Gangster” is a stunt we particularly like with a 4-5 defense or any -9-man front defense where our linebackers will line up a little wider -than ordinarily. - -This stunt will be performed by three men—a corner man, linebacker, -and halfback. For example, we will use our defensive left side, as -illustrated in Figure 83. On the snap of the ball, regardless of the -flow, our left corner man will sprint back and cover the deep third area -to his side of the field (the halfback ordinarily covers this area). The -left linebacker will cover the short flat to his side of the field (the -corner man ordinarily covers this area). The left halfback will come -forward and cover the hook spot (the linebacker ordinarily covers this -area). The remaining backs will cover their regular area. - -The main advantage of this stunt is that by having our halfback come -forward we are in a good position to stop all short passes in the hook -zone. He is going forward and covering the same area our linebacker -usually covers. Our linebacker has to key, sprint back, and set up, -before he can get ready to go forward. You can see that we have -definitely strengthened our coverage at this point and it is equally -sound in the other area. We will only call “Gangster” to one side at a -time. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 83] - - -“_Lightning_” - -“Lightning” is a stunt between our linebacker and corner man only, and -is illustrated in Figure 84. We first started using this stunt for the -sole reason of eliminating any point of indecision for our corner man. It -is a very simple stunt. As an example, if the flow goes toward the side -on which we have called “Lightning,” the corner man will come across the -line of scrimmage very fast and contain the ball carrier. He does not -have any pass responsibility at all if the action comes toward him. The -linebacker to his side will cover the short flat area if a running pass -develops. Our corner man is coached to contain the passer so fast that a -receiver does not have time to get very wide and our linebacker does not -have any trouble covering the short flat area. The remaining backs will -cover their regular areas. The call, “Lightning,” will be _off_ if the -flow goes away from the side we have called it on, or if a straight drop -back pass develops. - -We can call “Lightning” on both sides at the same time. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 84] - -We do not use a stunt on every play, but with our regular coverage and -using a stunt occasionally we can give the opposition’s quarterback a -number of problems. He is looking at a number of different “pictures” -when we employ these defensive tactics. Secondly, we feel it helps us -because any indecision our corner men might have is eliminated when we -stunt. - - -CONCLUSION - -The basic principles of pass defense are: when the ball is in the air, -your secondary men must sprint for the football, play through the -receiver for the ball and not around him, and play the football at -the highest point possible. If your defenders will apply these basic -principles along with an aggressive attitude that the ball belongs to the -defenders when it is in the air, you will have a good defensive secondary. - -In a later chapter I shall explain and illustrate our drills for the -defensive secondary. - - - - -CHAPTER 6 - -Our Kicking Game Techniques - - -The over-all kicking game is probably the most important phase of -football. In considering the work to be done on the practice field, I -probably place more emphasis upon the kicking game than any other coach. -I feel I cannot have a sound football team unless we have an extremely -sound kicking game. We thought the kicking game was important during the -period when we played two-platoon football, but now it is more important -than ever before under the present rules governing the game of football. - - -THE PUNTING GAME - -I am certain our players are “sold” on the kicking game, and take -pride in it. If a player takes pride in something, he will do it well. -Incidentally, we work on our kicking game every Tuesday during the -regular season. Previously we waited until Thursday to work on our -kicking game, but we found our boys were tired the day of the football -game, probably as a result of so much running on Thursday. We use the -kicking together with our kick-return game in our pre-season practice as -a conditioner. We feel we can get sufficient running from our kicking -game to get our players in good physical condition. At the same time we -are developing this important phase of the game. - - -_The Punter_ - -Instead of merely talking to our players about their individual kicking -game assignments, we go on the field and rehearse everything over and -over again. This is also true of any unusual situations that might -confront the punter at various times during the game. We also time our -punters. I believe it is possible to over-coach the kickers, however, and -this is not desirable. I know from past experience. When we tried too -thoroughly to coach our kickers, we found we were probably doing more -harm than good. At least, we were not getting the desired results in -comparison to the amount of time we were devoting to their instruction. -As an illustration, I had Bob Gain at Kentucky, an All-American tackle, -who as a freshman was a terrific kick-off man. By taking only three -steps he could boot the ball out of the end zone when he kicked-off. -Unfortunately we over-coached him and by the time he was a senior he -would run 10 yards on his approach, and could only kick the ball 35 yards -on the kick-off. - -Another illustration relates to Clayton Webb, a very fine punter whom -I had at the University of Kentucky. As a freshman he could “hang” the -ball in the air for a relatively long period of time when he punted. Yet -during his senior year I felt we had coached him down to a 29.4-yard -average on his punts. Consequently we now do very little coaching of the -kickers. - -We like to have our punters use the step-and-a-half method, taking the -first (half) step with the kicking foot, then a full step with the -non-kicking foot. We ask our punters to hold the ball 18 inches in -front of the hip over their kicking foot. We watch our kickers closely, -time them, and try not to over-coach them if they are kicking well in -practice. However, we do have a meeting with our kickers to review every -situation that might confront them in a game. We want our punters to -know what to do under such conditions, always taking into consideration -the tactical situation. Merely talking about these problems is not -sufficient training for the punters. They must be placed in various -confronting situations and must have the opportunity to react to them on -the practice field if they are to perform with proficiency in a game. An -example will illustrate my point. - -One of my former assistants at the University of Kentucky played under an -extremely intelligent football coach, a Phi Beta Kappa honors graduate. -The coach had gone over many situations on the blackboard, but had never -taken time to actually rehearse them under game-like conditions. This was -a typical situation: Assuming that a team had the lead in the game, if -on the third down that team was forced to kick from behind its own goal -line, should the punter receive a poor snap from his center and be unable -to kick, he should pick up the football and either run with it or throw -an incomplete forward pass. The team was playing Michigan State, and the -score was 7-6 in the fourth quarter. The other team was backed up to its -own 2-yard line. The punter said that as he lined up to punt he knew -exactly what to do if he received a bad pass from his center. The pass -was poor, the punter picked up the ball and threw it up into the stands. -Unfortunately the play was not an incomplete forward pass, but was ruled -a safety as the ball went out of the end zone _behind_ the goal line, and -Michigan State won, 8-7. I am not criticizing the punter nor his coach -as both are extremely capable men, but merely citing what can occur if -a kicker is merely _told what_ to do but is not given actual experience -under game-like conditions practicing it. - -Our procedure is to put the ball on our 2-yard line, inform our kicker of -what could occur, then give him the “works.” We load up and rush hard, -give him a bad pass, etc., and our punter must react properly to the -situation, always being cognizant of the tactical situation. - -Since I have been coaching, one of the few punts we have had blocked was -at Texas A & M when we were playing Rice Institute. The situation was as -follows: third down, senior punter, poor pass from center. Instead of -attempting to run with the ball, since we still had fourth down in which -to kick, my punter tried to kick then. The result was a blocked punt. In -fairness to the boy, I must assume the responsibility for the blocked -punt. We had not done a good job of coaching the punter since he did not -react to the situation properly. Nevertheless, the mistake was costly. - - -_The Center_ - -The most important person in our kicking game is our center. We believe -if he can snap the ball back to our punter at a distance of 13 yards with -a perfect pass in six-tenths of a second, we won’t get our kicks blocked. -I believe about 98% of all blocked kicks have resulted from imperfect -passes from the center to the kicker. Incidentally, as a coaching point, -if the center makes a poor pass, your kicker should inform him of this. - -In timing the center’s pass, we have had very few centers who could snap -the ball in less than six-tenths of a second. I recall, however, there -was a center at the University of Georgia who could get the ball back to -the kicker in four-tenths of a second. This is the exception rather than -the rule, however. - -We time our centers in their work every day. As a point of interest, -the coaches are not with the centers when we are timing them. We put a -defensive man over our centers as we want our centers to pass the ball -and then block a man, rather than keep their heads down, watching the -ball going back to the punter. - - -_Timing the Punter_ - -We want our punters to get the ball away within one and three-tenths -seconds from the time the ball hits their hands on the pass from center, -until their foot makes contact with the ball. Gene Henderson, one of -my kickers at Texas A & M, could get the ball away in one second. Babe -Parella at Kentucky could also get the ball away in a second when -punting. Here once again these are more exceptions than the rule. - -I stated previously we wanted our kickers to use the step-and-one-half -method of punting. We are not too concerned if he doesn’t follow this -method, _providing_ he kicks well. Nor are we too concerned about his -method of holding and dropping the ball and other individual techniques, -_providing_ he kicks well and gets the ball away in one and three-tenths -seconds or less. If our kicker is a 3-step kicker, who kicks well and can -get the ball off in the prescribed time limit, we merely move him back -an extra yard. Frankly, we don’t believe we’ll ever get a kick blocked if -the center gets the ball back in six-tenths of a second or less, and the -kicker’s time does not exceed one and three-tenths seconds (total time of -one and nine-tenths seconds), _providing_ the defensive men are bumped -and not permitted to have a straight run directly at the kicker. - -When talking about the punting game, one must realize the importance of -the length of time the ball is in the air _over_ the field of play. We -want our kicker to be able to kick the ball in such a manner that it will -remain up in the air and _over_ the playing field for a period of four -seconds or more. Consequently a kick of four seconds’ duration in flight -will be about a 40-yard punt. We are not interested in an 80-yard punt, -as we cannot adequately cover such a long kick. The following example -will illustrate my point. - -I had a player at one time who could literally kick the football a -country mile. Yet his kicking was very erratic. I recall he kicked the -football 78 yards _out-of-bounds_ in a game against Tennessee, and later -in the fourth quarter he kicked the ball 80 yards _over_ the end zone -line. In another football game, he kicked the ball 70 yards, _out-kicking -his coverage_, and the opposition returned it for the game-winning -touchdown against us. My point is that he was too good a kicker for us. -The _average net gain_ is the most important thing in punting, not the -total distance the punter kicks the ball. A punt 40 yards from the line -of scrimmage with no return is a 40-yard kick. A 60-yard punt returned 50 -yards is a net punt of 10 yards. We are interested only in the _net gain_ -of the play. - -If the kicked ball can remain in the air for four seconds and if it takes -one and nine-tenths seconds to get the punt away, there is a total period -of time of five and nine-tenths seconds expended. If our linemen block -for one second on the line before releasing to cover the punt, they will -have approximately four and nine-tenths seconds to cover the ball. A -fast lineman can get downfield a good distance in four and nine-tenths -seconds, though I don’t know of anyone who can cover 60 or 70 yards in -this period of time. As you can see, this sort of thing allows a team -time to get the ball, set up a wall, get a couple key blocks and run -one back for a long gain or a touchdown merely because the punter has -out-kicked his coverage. Therefore, we are not interested in how far -the punter kicks the ball, but we are vitally interested in how far the -opposition returns our punts. I shall discuss this particular phase of -the kicking game in greater detail shortly. - - -_Practicing the Punting Game_ - -During the regular scheduled practices, we work on our defensive kicking -game at least one period two days a week, and sometimes three days a -week. These periods never have a time limit, and they are our last drill. -Our reasoning is two-fold. First, the boys are tired and in order to get -proper execution and coverage we insist they give that “little extra,” -which I feel is so important in order to build a winner. Secondly, the -boys know there is no time limit and we are going to work on this phase -of our football program until we do it to my satisfaction. Therefore, -they strive extra hard to get perfect execution and coverage so we can -end practice. We feel if the boys can learn to execute the kicking game -perfectly while they are tired, they will do it perfectly during the -actual game. - - -OUR SPREAD PUNT FORMATION - -Before discussing the techniques of our spread punt, I would like to tell -you how we adopted it. I related previously that Tennessee defeated my -1946 Kentucky team with a punt return. In 1947 a number of teams hurt us -badly by returning our punts. In 1948 the University of Mississippi ran -back punts for 258 yards and two touchdowns. - -Our Mississippi game bothered me a great deal. At the time we were -using only the tight punt formation. I was searching for another type -of formation which would give us better coverage. I had never used the -spread punt, but we had played against Tulane and Vanderbilt, both -of whom had employed spread punt. Woody Woodard, while at Southern -Methodist University, had an exceptionally fine punting game, and I -was considering changing to his system. However, while coming back -from Chicago one weekend with “Scrappy” Moore of the University of -Chattanooga, he sold me on trying the spread punt. He gave me his spread -punt blocking rules. I adopted them, and since 1949 we have used the -spread punt formation. The results have been very favorable as far as -we are concerned. As an illustration, we made a study of our punting -game and we found that during the season we went for eight games without -having our punts returned one inch. For the entire season our punts -were returned only one and four-tenths yards. During our 1950 season, -the average yards returned per game from our punts was four-tenths of -a yard, and we recovered five mishandled punts. The following season -our opponents returned our punts for an average of one and four-tenths -yards per punt, and we recovered three mishandled punts. Since we tie -our kicking game in with our defensive game very closely, you can see -that spread punt coverage has been much more satisfactory for us than -the tight punt formation and coverage which we employed prior to 1949. I -shall discuss our spread punt coverage shortly. - - -_Spread Punt Line Splits_ - -The main advantage of using spread punt formation is that the defensive -team has a difficult time holding up your coverage. A team can cover its -punt much wider. If a team can spread its men across the field as they -are covering a kick, it is very hard for the receiving team to return the -ball for a sizeable gain. - -The splits in our offensive line are determined largely by the size of -the men. We want our guards to be split about one and one-half yards from -the center. These splits also will be determined by the physical size of -our backfield men whom we place in the gaps to each side of the center, -two yards deep. If the back is a small man, then the guard will cut down -his split to approximately one yard. Conversely, if the back is a large -person, the guard can widen his split to approximately one and one-half -yards. Our tackles will split from their guards one and one-half to two -yards. Each tackle must be able to block the second man outside of his -guard. Our ends can split out as far as they wish, providing they can -block back all the way to the tackle if a situation arises warranting it. -The ends usually split out about two yards, as illustrated in Figure 85. - -Our up-backs line up in the seams between the guard and center, about -two yards deep, as was explained previously. The personal protector will -line up five yards deep, and will be on the right side for a right-footed -kicker, and on the left side for a left-footed kicker. His depth will be -13 yards. The type of spread punt we employ is illustrated in Figure 85. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 85] - - -_Spread Punt Blocking Rules_ - -We do not believe a defensive lineman will ever get a straight run at the -spot where the kicker’s foot meets the football if our players occupy -their proper positions, unless the defensive man comes from the outside -of our protection. For this reason, we feel it is not necessary for our -players to block for more than a second before going down under the punt. -Our players are instructed to count, “One thousand and three,” then -release downfield covering the kick. - -The rules which our players use in protecting our punter apply to the -blocking of any man who is within one yard of the line of scrimmage. We -do not feel an opposing player can block a kick if he is more than one -yard off the line of scrimmage, even though we do not block him. Our -spread punt blocking rules are as follows: - -_Center_—The center should make a perfect pass to the kicker, snap up his -head quickly, and cover the kick immediately. We do not want him to block -anyone. - -_Guards_—Our guards will block the first man to their outside, and they -must keep their inside foot stationary. If a guard steps laterally with -his inside foot as he blocks, he will leave a hole through which a -defensive man can sprint and block the kick. After he has blocked the -first man to his outside for a period of one second, which I explained -above, he covers the kick downfield. - -_Tackles_—If there are two men lined up between the tackle and his -adjacent guard, he will block to his inside. If there are not two men -between his position and his adjacent guard, he will block the first man -to his outside. After he has blocked for one second, he will cover the -kick. - -_Ends_—Each end will block the first man to his outside, _unless_ there -are two defensive men between him and his adjacent tackle. If there are -two men between his guard and tackle, he will block the first man to his -inside. - -_Up-Backs_—The up-backs block anyone coming over their territory between -the guard and center. If no one comes through their territory, they delay -slightly and cover the kick. - -_Personal Protector_—He looks up and down the line for the most dangerous -man to the kicker, and then blocks him as he rushes. - -These spread punt blocking rules apply to any defense and provide the -most protection at the spot where the ball will be kicked. The basic -principle for the linemen in carrying out their assignments is never to -move the inside foot. If the lineman makes contact with the defensive man -and throws him off-balance, then he can cover the kick immediately. The -up-backs take a good stance with a wide base and uncoil at anyone coming -through the inside gaps. The personal protector can use any type of block -he wishes, but we prefer the butt block or the cross-body block when -protecting the kicker. - - -_Spread Punt Coverage_ - -We want the first man down under the punt to dive at the safety man’s -Adam’s apple, really “unloading” on him if possible. He may leave his -feet if necessary in order to accomplish his objective. For illustrative -purposes, Figure 86, let’s assume that our center is the first man -down under the punt. We want him to try to beat the football down the -field, and tackle the safety man high when he touches it, or force the -safety man to fair catch the football. We want our guards to go down and -assume positions indicated in Figure 86. Our left end and right tackle -will go down and set up five yards outside of the safety man, and five -yards away from him. We set our right end out about 10 yards, and he -is our “sprinter.” His assignment is to sprint straight for the safety -man, and force the safety to fumble the ball, if possible. His line of -direction has a second purpose, too. Since he is in an excellent position -to catch the football should the punter fake the punt and pass, the -defense must adjust to him and cannot merely permit him to run a diagonal -course downfield every time we have a punting situation. If the defense -continuously ignores him and doesn’t adjust to him when he covers punts, -sooner or later we are going to hit him with the pass for a sizeable gain. - -It is not possible for a coach to get the type of coverage on kicks, as -illustrated in Figure 86, unless he stresses the fact to his players that -it is extremely important for them to spread out in order to maintain -proper positions in “spreading the net” for the receiver. They must -sprint at top speed in covering kicks. We do not want our left end and -right tackle to make any tackles in our punt coverage, as they merely -turn the runner into the other men. We want our six men to go down and -get set in a football position three yards from the football and then -guard the safety man. In assuming a good football position, we mean a -position in which the player’s eyes are on the safety man, his tail -is down, back straight, and his feet apart. If we have six men down on -the safety man, guarding him, he will have no place to run. We want -to drive the safety man back and forth, searching for a place to turn -upfield, and then we’ll move in on him. We refer to this as our _One-Six -Formation_. We want our up-backs to go downfield and take the positions -of linebackers behind our six-man coverage, as illustrated in Figure 86. -They must be in a position to defend against the return up the middle. We -want our personal protector and punter to take halfback positions to the -outside behind the one-six-two coverage formation (Figure 86). - -[Illustration: FIGURE 86] - -We spend a great deal of time giving our players practice in executing -their assignments on blocking and covering from spread punt formation. -I can assure you that merely talking about their assignments and -responsibilities will not obtain the desired results. I think we do a -good job of covering punts simply because we work on this important phase -of the kicking game so much. - -As I mentioned previously, we do our kicking work last, not setting -a definite time limit on it. When our players are covering punts, we -blow a whistle and everyone stops. We want to find the players in their -proper positions when covering the kick. If they are not covering to our -satisfaction, we merely do it over and over again until we get the type -of coverage we want. The boys actually put the pressure on each other to -get perfect coverage, consequently we generally spend about 10 minutes -instead of 20 minutes covering punts. - - -OUR TIGHT PUNT FORMATION - -The only time we kick from a tight punt formation is when we are backed -up inside of our own 3-yard line and it is impossible for us to kick -from a spread formation since our kicker cannot get the sufficient depth -of 13 yards which we think is necessary. Therefore, we always tell our -quarterback we should _never_ kick the ball from behind our own 3-yard -line. His objective is to get us out to at least the 3-yard line so we -can employ spread punt. Assuming we can’t get out to the 3-yard line, -then we will have to use tight punt formation. When we are definitely -going to kick the ball out-of-bounds as we do on occasion, we kick from -tight formation. - -Because I feel we cannot cover the kick very well from tight punt -formation, the quarterback will always designate in the huddle the -direction the punter is going to kick the ball—“Punt from tight punt; -kick to our right.” This tells our linemen in which direction they should -sprint after they have blocked their men. It also affects the blocking -assignments of our ends. Figure 87 illustrates our tight punt formation -and coverage on a kick to our right. Our blocking rules are as follows: - -_Interior Linemen_—Our interior linemen will line up in a tight formation -with very little splits. They all have one blocking rule—inside gap N/T -over, which means they will block a man if he is in their inside gap; if -there is no one playing that position, they will block the man playing -over them. They must all block for one and one-half counts, when using -the tight punt, then release and cover the kick quickly. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 87] - -_Ends_—The ends will be split out about two yards, and they have definite -assignments. If the quarterback indicates in the huddle the kick will -be to the right, then the right end does not have a blocking assignment -but he must cover the kick immediately. He must get good width and make -certain the ball carrier does not get outside of him. The end playing the -position on the opposite side will block the defensive end. If the kick -is to the left side, the ends merely exchange assignments. - -_Up-Backs_—They will line up about two yards deep and in positions behind -their respective offensive tackles. Their assignment is to keep their -inside foot in place and block the first man who shows outside of our -offensive tackle. They must make the defensive man come to them. They are -going to protect their area. - -_Personal Protector_—He lines up about one and one-half yards behind the -right up-back, and his assignment is to block the second man outside of -our offensive tackle or the first man outside of our up-back. When he -makes contact with the defensive man, he forces him to his outside. He, -too, must keep his inside foot in place. If we are going to kick the ball -to our left after the ball has been snapped, he will cross over and block -the first man who shows outside of our left up-back. He covers wide to -the side he blocks on. - -_Kicker_—The kicker is back nine yards, and after he kicks he immediately -covers to the side opposite he kicked the ball. - -The tight punt coverage is practically the same as we use on our spread -punt, but the linemen are so close together it is difficult for them to -cover wide. Our center cannot leave quite as quickly as on spread punt -and we hold our blocks a little longer. Otherwise everything is the same -on the two punt formations. - - -OUR QUICK KICK FORMATION - -The quick kick is a tremendous offensive weapon which we now employ -frequently, depending upon our particular opponent. We think the quick -kick has helped us win a few football games in the past, and I suspect -it will continue to aid us in the future if we execute it properly. -Consequently we will continue to spend time practicing and coaching the -quick kick. Since we quick kick frequently, this makes our short passing -game more effective as our opponents must play their safety man deeper -than usual. - -We try not to tip-off when we intend to quick kick. We try to make the -formation look exactly like our regular running formation. One slight -difference is that we line up our backs slightly deeper than usual -and slightly to their right, as illustrated in Figure 88, if the left -halfback is quick kicking. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 88] - - -_Quick Kick Rules and Coverage_ - -Our quick kick rules and coverage are very simple, and are as follows: - -_Ends, Guards and Tackles_—They block the man on their inside gap, and if -no man is there, they block the man over them. They are trying to form -a completely new line of scrimmage on their first charge about one yard -straight ahead. It is very important these six men penetrate the defense -on their initial charge, in order to give the kicker adequate room to -kick the football. - -_Center_—The center’s first responsibility is to make a good snap to the -person who is going to kick the football. Then he blocks the man in the -off-gap—no one there, blocks man over him. As an example, if we have a -right-footed kicker, the center will block to his left, as illustrated in -Figure 88. If the kicker is left-footed, the center would block to his -right. - -_Quarterback_—The quarterback acts as if he is going to receive a -hand-back pass from his center. However, he takes a wider leg spread than -usual in order to permit the center to pass the ball directly through the -quarterback’s legs to his left halfback (Figure 88). His blocking rule is -to block the on-gap, i.e., the right gap for a right-footed kicker, as -illustrated in Figure 88, and the left gap for a left-footed kicker. - -_Right Halfback_—He has no blocking assignment as he covers the quick -kick immediately. - -_Fullback_—He will move over to his right slightly, and his assignment -is to block the first man who shows outside of our offensive right end. -He will step up to meet him, giving the kicker adequate room to kick the -ball. - -_Left Halfback or Kicker_—He lines up a little deeper than usual and -moves over about a foot to his right. When the kicker catches the -football, he will rock his weight back to his right foot, leaving his -left foot in place, and pivoting his body to the right. He then takes -a step with his left foot in about a 45 degree angle to the sideline, -and at the same time he will drop the ball (pointing straight down the -field) and kick the ball trying to make contact with it over the arch -of his right foot. After he hits the football, he legswings toward the -goal line. This action will make the ball go end-over-end and cause it to -continue rolling toward the goal line upon hitting the ground. - -The quick kick must come as a complete surprise to the defense or it will -not be effective. If the defense knows you are going to quick kick, it -will be more effective to employ spread punt and kick the football. You -would get better protection and coverage from spread formation, though -the element of surprise is not present. - - -OUR PUNT RETURN - -We have never done what I would consider an outstanding job of returning -our opposition’s punts. One reason for this is that it is awfully easy -to overlook this particular phase of the kicking game. I am planning to -devote more time on punt returns from now on. - -We feel about punt returns about the same as we do pass defense—you must -either rush or return, and it is difficult to accomplish both at the same -time. Therefore, we try to do one or the other, depending upon the game -situation. - -We use a punt return to our left and one to our right, and a return up -the middle to keep the kicking team honest. All of these returns have -proven satisfactory from time to time. - - -_Punt Return Left_ - -When we are going to return the punt left or right, we line up in a -strong side defense. Consequently there is no indication of whether we -are returning the punt right or left, or rushing the punter trying to -block the punt. - -Figure 89 illustrates our punt return left. Our return rules are as -follows: - -_Left End_—He comes across the line of scrimmage about five yards deep -into the offensive backfield, and makes certain the kicker does not get -outside of him in the event the latter tries to run with the ball. After -he sees the kicker punt the football, he turns and swings in behind his -right guard in forming the wall. He will be the fourth man in line and -he must keep his proper distance from his guard. The length of the kick -will determine how far downfield he will go before he sets up. He blocks -anyone who is in his area trying to break through the wall. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 89] - -We have an imaginary post three yards outside of our defensive left end, -and we want all of our players to swing wide and go around this spot -before going back downfield. If all of the players do this, our entire -line will be running in approximately the same path and our wall will be -set up correctly. - -_Left Tackle_—As soon as he crosses the line of scrimmage, he will turn -to his left, go around the imaginary post, and head quickly downfield -becoming the first man in the wall. His block will be a key one, -springing loose the safety man. His depth depends on the distance the -punter kicks the ball. - -_Middle Guard_—He follows the same course as the left tackle. He will -be the second man in the wall, and he must maintain the proper distance -between the first man and himself. When he gets into position, he will -block anyone who is in his area trying to break through the wall. - -_Right Guard_—Same course as the left tackle, only he follows the middle -guard around the imaginary post and back downfield becoming the third man -in the wall. He should keep his proper distance from our middle guard. - -_Right Tackle_—He will rush the punter from the outside, making certain -the punter actually kicks the ball. Then turning to his left, he will -swing wide, as illustrated in Figure 89, becoming the fifth man in the -wall. He must keep his proper distance from our defensive left end who -will be the fourth man, as I explained previously. - -_Right End_—He will rush the kicker from the outside making certain he -actually kicks the ball. He will then turn to his left, and start around -the imaginary post. He will be the sixth man in the wall, and he should -maintain a proper distance between his right tackle and himself. - -_Right Linebacker_—The right linebacker will come back to his outside and -block the most dangerous pursuer threatening the safety man. He usually -blocks the offensive left end as he covers the punt downfield. - -_Left Linebacker_—He will come back fast to his outside, and his -responsibility is to block out the offensive right end. The others are -blocking toward the wide side of the field. He is the only man blocking -toward the sideline. - -_Halfbacks_—They will handle the short kick to their side of the field. -Otherwise they are personal protectors for the safety man if he fields -the kick. They block the most dangerous pursuer who is in a position to -tackle our receiver. - -_Safety_—It is very important that the ball is handled in the air and not -permitted to strike the ground and bounce around. Assuming the safety -man catches the football, he should start straight up the field in order -to give his wall time to form and to draw the pursuers into the middle -toward him. Then he swings in behind his wall on the sideline. - - -_Our Middle Punt Return_ - -Our return up the middle is very similar to our man-to-man kick-off -return (Figure 94), in that we assign one man to block one man at the -line of scrimmage. Each defensive man is supposed to stay with his -offensive man, as illustrated in Figure 90. We use the same defensive -alignment as when we are going to return the ball to our right or left -(Figure 90). - -[Illustration: FIGURE 90] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 91] - -If we want to be in a balanced defensive alignment, and we know they have -a slow offensive lineman, we will line up in a straight 6-2 defense. -Figure 91 illustrates our alignment and hold-up return if we know the -offensive center is slow. We merely let him go, and our interior linemen -and linebackers hold-up the offensive ends, tackles and guards. Our ends -rush the kicker from the outside, making certain he kicks the football. -The interior linemen and linebackers use the same techniques our -offensive backs use when they are protecting the passer. When they feel -they are losing their men, then they will go into a cross body block. Our -halfbacks will be the personal protection for the safety man. The safety -will field the ball in the air and start upfield. If he sees a hole, he -will break for it on our middle return. - - -OUR KICK-OFF AND ITS COVERAGE - -The kick-off is a very important phase of the defensive kicking game -because of the number of times it is used in a game. As you know, the -kick-off comes at the start of the game, at the beginning of the second -half, and after a team has scored. It is a terrific advantage to get a -deep kick-off with good coverage, and tackle the ball carrier inside -of his 20-yard line. It is important to eliminate the long run on the -kick-off return for several reasons. First, a long run has a demoralizing -effect on the kicking team, and gives the receiving team both a -psychological and a strategical advantage. With respect to the latter -point, if the receiving team gets beyond its 30-yard line, it can open up -with its entire offensive attack immediately. Conversely, if the kicking -team keeps the receiving team deep in its own territory, the receiving -team is forced to run a limited offense, punt the ball or gamble in order -to get out of its own territory. - - -_Two Types of Kick-Offs_ - -We employ two different kinds of kick-offs, depending upon the particular -opponent we are playing. As an illustration, if we know the opposition -has two dangerous runners playing deep, we will kick the ball in such a -manner that it strikes the ground and bounces around making it difficult -for either man to control. This tactic also gives us time to cover the -kick properly. On the other hand, if our scouting report reveals the -safeties are only fair runners, then we will kick the ball high in the -air and end-over-end. Of course, if we had a place kicker who could boot -the ball out of the end zone every time, our kick-off strategy would be -simple and our problem would be solved. Kickers with such ability are -difficult to locate. - -I suppose our coverage on the kick-off is like that of most other -football teams. We want our men back five yards from the ball in a -3-point stance, all facing toward the football. Our quarterback stands -one yard to the side of the ball and a yard off the ball on the 39-yard -line with his arms raised ready to give the starting signal to the men -watching him. When the kicker approaching the football gets to a point -where the men covering the kick-off cannot get off-side, the quarterback -will drop his arms as a signal for the men to start forward together. We -want everyone but the safeties to cover the kick quickly. Each man is to -protect his own area, and then go to the cut-off point. We instruct our -ends to be certain no one gets outside of them. - -We have two safeties not including the quarterback. If the ball is kicked -down the middle, the quarterback is the safety. If the ball is kicked to -our right, our quarterback and left halfback will be safeties. If the -ball is kicked to our left, the quarterback and our right halfback will -be safeties, as illustrated in Figure 92. When our safeties drop out, our -other men will converge slightly to close the gaps. The safety men cover -slowly, and should always be in a position to tackle the ball carrier -before he can score. - -Figure 92 illustrates the fullback kicking the ball. If a player other -than the fullback is the kick-off man, he and the fullback would merely -exchange places in the line up. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 92] - -It is very important that our men going down to cover the kick-off keep -their proper distance from the men on each side of them. If we have two -men covering the kick close together, a good block by the receiving team -could eliminate both of them, and then our coverage would not be sound. - - -OUR KICK-OFF RETURN - -I explained previously the advantages of returning the kick-off. I like -to get this psychological and strategical “jump” on our opposition when -we receive the kick-off; consequently, we attach much importance and -significance to returning the kick-off. We work hard on our returns. We -want a good return so that if we must surrender the ball by punting to -the opposition, we’ll give it to them back in their 3-down zone. By this -I mean they must make a first down in their first three plays or they -will be forced to kick the ball back to us on the fourth down. If we get -a poor return and cannot move the ball and must punt it from deep in -our own territory, we might give the ball to them immediately in their -4-down zone. Now we have increased their chances of scoring by 25% merely -because we did not get a good kick-off return. - - -_Our Kick-Off Return Right_ - -Figure 93 illustrates our kick-off return to our right with the men on -the receiving team blocking their “numbers” downfield, as indicated. -Each man on the kicking team is numbered from one through seven from the -outside-in, except the last four men on the opposite side of the kicking -line, i.e., the men on our extreme left in Figure 93. If we know from -scouting reports who the safety man will be, we do not give him a number. -If we don’t know who the safety man is, we instruct our players—if your -man turns out to be a safety, regardless of where you line up, then you -will block the first man to your inside. The deep back who does not -receive the ball will head upfield and block the most dangerous man -threatening the ball carrier. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 93] - - -_Our Middle Kick-Off Return_ - -We think our middle kick-off return is very simple and actually takes -very little work to perfect it. What we are trying to accomplish is to -wall off the opposition in a solid line. This gives our ball carrier time -to pick up speed and we let him break where the hole opens up. - -In our alignment, illustrated in Figure 94, our front line is about 12 -yards in front of our back line. When the ball is kicked, our front line -will drop back six yards and get into a good football position, keeping -their eyes on the men they are going to block. When we are using this -type of return, we commence counting from the outside-in on both ends of -the line. The end men are not blocked because we know they are taught -to stay outside. If our scouting report shows they converge and other -men cover the outside, then we will change our assignments to handle the -situation. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 94] - -We want our blockers to use the same block that our backs use when -protecting the passer. We want them to remain on their feet until they -feel they are losing their man. Then they go into a crotch block. The -deep back who does not field the ball will get in front of the ball -carrier and lead interference. The back who receives the kick-off will -start straight up the field attempting to gain as much yardage as -possible. When he sees daylight in the line in front of it, he breaks for -the opening at his discretion. - -If the kicking team places the football on the hash mark to kick-off and -we are employing a middle return, we will count the end man closest to -the football and block him, and disregard the two farthest men from the -ball on the opposite end of the line. - - -OUR ON-SIDE (SHORT) KICK - -The on-side kick, i.e., legal short kick, is one of the best weapons -a team can have when you must gain possession of the ball after a -touchdown. We work on the on-side kick, practicing it every week. If an -on-side kick helps us to win one football game, then it is well worth -all the time we have spent on it. - -Previously I mentioned our 1955 game with Rice where we were behind -12-0, with three minutes remaining to play in the game. We scored on -a running play, kicked the extra point, and with the score 12-7 we -still needed a touchdown to win the football game. Having rehearsed the -on-side kick during the week, as we lined up for the kick-off, we knew -our strategy would be a short kick. We recovered the ball successfully -on the on-side kick, then scored with a long pass, and converted the -point-after-touchdown, making the score 14-12. Rice attempted to get -back into the game by passing as time was running out. We intercepted a -pass, scored again, and won the game 20-12. You can see why we are firm -believers in the on-side kick. - -Figure 95 illustrates our on-side kick to the left. We line up in our -regular kick-off alignment. When the kicker approaches the ball, instead -of driving through with the toe of his kicking shoe, he kicks the -football with his instep. He merely tries to get a piece of the ball, -sort of punching it left or right so we can go down and cover it quickly. -The end, tackle and center (Figure 95) do not try to recover the ball, -but try to wedge in front of it and wall off the area so the men on the -receiving team cannot get possession of the football. Our halfback comes -down fast and his assignment is to recover the football (behind the -wall). When we kick the ball to the left, as illustrated in Figure 95, -the quarterback will swing in behind the halfback in the event he misses -recovering the ball and the opposition is trying to advance the kick-off. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 95] - -We also try an on-side kick down the middle with the tackles and guards -(see Figure 95) forming a wall in front of the kicker, who tries to -recover the football. - -When we try an on-side kick to our right, the principles are the same -with our end, guard and tackle forming the wall while the right halfback -tries to recover the ball. - - -DEFENDING AGAINST AN ON-SIDE KICK - -We also work on defending against the on-side (short) kick because we -know the opposition will attempt to use it against us. The last year -I was at Kentucky, we were playing Cincinnati and I knew they would -attempt an on-side kick. I sent 11 players into the game with the sole -responsibility of recovering the kick and not permitting Cincinnati to -get the football. I wish I could report that we were successful, but -Cincinnati recovered its on-side kick. However, our boys at least knew -we had worked on defending against the on-side kick and we were not -surprised when the opposition used it. - -When we are expecting an on-side kick, we want to get our best ball -handlers up close to the restraining line so they can field the ball. -Figure 96 illustrates our receiving alignment defending against the -on-side kick. Our halfbacks and quarterback are at the 45-yard line, with -the fullback deep and the ends in their usual alignment. We put our five -interior linemen close to the restraining line for two reasons. First, we -do _not_ want them to handle the football. Second, we want them to block -or wall off for the man who is going to field the ball. Our quarterback -is our surest ball handler so we place him in the middle, hoping he -will be the one to field the ball. Note the halfbacks are inside of the -end men on the restraining line in front of them. If the ball is kicked -to our left, our front men sprint quickly to a point in front of the -football where they can block the men on the kicking team before they -can recover the football. The halfback on the left side is instructed -_not_ to try to advance the football, but merely to fall on it and get -possession of the football. The quarterback and right halfback swing in -behind the left halfback in the event he mishandles the football. If the -kick were to our right, the right halfback would handle the ball with -the other two backs backing up the right halfback. If the ball is kicked -down the middle, we want the quarterback to fall on the ball, with the -two halfbacks swinging in behind him in the event he mishandles the ball. -Our five front men would block in front of the ball for their quarterback. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 96] - - -OUR EXTRA POINT AND FIELD GOAL PROTECTION - -Our extra point and field goal protection are the same with the exception -that on the latter we must cover the kick. Our point-after-touchdown and -field goal attempt blocking rules are as follows: - -_Center_—Our center’s main responsibility is to make a perfect snap to -the holder, and then he braces himself and holds his ground. We actually -try to get our center to grab the ground with his hands so that he cannot -be knocked backwards. Should the latter occur, the center would leave a -hole in the line. The center must hold his ground, and he should keep -both feet stationary. - -_Guards, Tackles, Ends_—The other six linemen have exactly the same -blocking rules. The guards and tackles do not take splits, so the line -from tackle to tackle will be tight. The ends will split approximately -six inches. None of these men can move their outside foot. It must remain -stationary. They will line up looking in at the football. On the snap of -the ball, the guard will step with his inside foot toward the center. -He will put his head in front of the center’s leg, with his neck firm -against it. The guard must keep his outside leg stationary as the tackle -will put his head and neck firmly against the guard’s leg. The end will -use the same technique putting his neck against the tackle’s outside leg. -We are trying to build a solid wall so the opposition cannot penetrate it -and get to our kicker. We are trying to force the opponents to rush from -the outside, rather than permitting them to rush inside. - -_Up-Backs_—The up-backs line up about a yard deep and a yard inside our -offensive ends. They are in a position where they can reach out and touch -the tail of our end on their respective sides. The up-back’s assignment -is to keep his inside foot in place and force the rushers to go wide. He -cannot move his inside foot, and he must not be knocked down. On a field -goal attempt he has wide responsibility to his side of the field. He will -leave as soon as he hears the thud of the ball. - -_Holder_—The holder lines up about six yards and one foot deep and his -responsibility is to place the ball on the tee in a good position, -permitting our kicker to get his foot into the ball. - -Figure 97 illustrates our place kicking formation. The whole operation -for the extra point or field goal attempt should take only one and -three-tenths seconds. If it takes longer than this, it is likely the kick -will be blocked. - -We have our extra point and field goal kickers out 20 minutes early -every day practicing their specialties. We have a set of goal posts -approximately one-half as wide as the regulation width that our kickers -practice kicking through. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 97] - - -DEFENDING AGAINST A FIELD GOAL ATTEMPT - -When we are trying to rush a field goal attempt, we never rush from both -sides at the same time, and we always play our 3-deep pass coverage. The -only exception is that our safety will line up a little deeper so he can -handle the ball if the situation warrants it. We are always as conscious -of the fake field goal attempt and pass as we are of the actual place -kick. - -We only rush from one side at a time, and it will probably be our -right side if the kicker is right-footed. We overload to that side, as -illustrated in Figure 98, trying to get one of our fastest ends in there -to block the attempted place kick. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 98] - - -CONCLUSION - -I think the kicking game is very important as it is tied in closely with -our defensive football. You must be sound in all phases of the kicking -game, as neglecting any one phase can cost you a football game. In order -to have a winner, our kicking game must be sound. - - - - -CHAPTER 7 - -Our Offensive Running Game - - -The number one objective of offensive football is to score. If we cannot -score, then the only alternative is to kick. We never want to surrender -the ball to our opposition outside of the 4-down zone other than by -kicking it to them. We cannot possibly win the tough football games if we -lose the football by fumbles, interceptions, blocked kicks, or anything -else other than by kicking the ball to our opponents. - - -BASIC PRINCIPLES AND REQUIREMENTS OF OFFENSIVE FOOTBALL - -Offense is based on two primary principles, running with and/or passing -the football. They go hand in hand and complement each other in all -respects. A team must pass sufficiently in order to keep the opposition -from putting all of its strength on or relatively close to the line of -scrimmage. A team also must be able to advance the football with its -ground game so the opposition does not have to defend against only one -phase of the game, the passing attack. - -The main requirements for playing offensive football are: (1) explosive -speed, and (2) a real desire to carry out the specific assignment, -whether it be to block, run or fake. Offense is a game of skill and -perfection, and many hours must be spent working on it. - - -_A Sound Offense_ - -A sound offense is one in which each play is designed to gain ground, -and if executed perfectly there is a good possibility for a long gain -and/or scoring a touchdown. If the offense is going to operate at maximum -efficiency, the bad play must be eliminated completely. The _bad_ play is -one that does not gain yardage. If the offense is based on the 4-yard per -play or short thrust offense, such as Oklahoma has used so successfully -in the past under Bud Wilkinson, it is clear to see how a bad play can -stymie the offensive attack. - -The sound attack also utilizes the best personnel available, such as the -best ball carriers carrying the ball, the best blockers for blocking, and -so on. If you will analyze your offensive attack, you are likely to learn -this does not always occur. The best blocker might be carrying the ball -more often than your best ball carrier, who in turn might not be a strong -blocker. - -We had a fine team at Texas A & M in 1956, but when I look back over the -season I now realize I did not utilize my backs to maximum efficiency. -Our quarterback, Roddie Osborne, was a very fine football player, and -like the great ones he enjoyed running with the football. Roddie did -a terrific job of running with the ball, but we had other outstanding -backs, such as All-American John Crow, All-American Jack Pardee, and -Lloyd Taylor, a great competitor. When the season was over and we -tabulated our final statistics, we found Roddie had carried the ball -nearly as many times as the combined carries of Crow, Pardee, and Taylor. - -In order to maintain maximum results with the offense, it must be -presented to the squad so they all have a complete understanding of what -you are trying to accomplish and how it is going to be done. Unless the -players have a thorough picture and understand the reasoning behind your -offensive attack, maximum efficiency is impossible. - -I firmly believe that the simpler the offense, the better. The fewer -things a boy has to do and remember, the better he will execute the -fundamentals you have taught him. If executed well, the player will have -more confidence in what he is doing and his own ability. Consequently -the greater the chance the offensive attack has of being successful. - - -OUR OFFENSIVE TERMINOLOGY - -To be sure that we are all talking the same “language” and can understand -each other readily, we have adopted the following offensive terminology: - - _Flow_—Direction in which most of the backs start. - - _On-Side_—Lineman on side of point of attack. - - _Off-Side_—Lineman on side away from point of attack. - - _Near Back_—Halfback on side of flow. - - _Far Back_—Halfback away from side of flow. - - _On-Back_—Of the two remaining backs in the backfield, the back - toward call. - - _Off-Back_—Of the two remaining backs in the backfield, the - back away from call. - - _Point of Attack_—Spot where ball crosses the line of scrimmage. - - _Over_—Defensive man over any part of the offensive man. - - _Cut Off_—Shoot the head and shoulder past the defensive man, - destroying his correct pursuit angle to the football. - - _Set_—Fake pass protection block. - - _Slam_—Entertain defensive man with shoulder and forearm. - - _N/T_—No one there. - - _Position Lateral_—Getting self in position to receive lateral - from the man with the football. - - _Covered_—Designates offensive man with a defensive man over - him on L.O.S. - - _L.B._—Linebacker. - - _M.L.B._—Middle linebacker. - - _L.O.S._—Line of scrimmage. - - _Man on L.O.S._—Defensive man down in 3- or 4-point stance on - the line of scrimmage. - - “_6_”—Right end. - - “_7_”—Left end. - - _Club_—A vicious running head and shoulder block attacking the - defensive man’s upper extremities from the blind side. This - block is used in the area approaching the point of attack. - - _Color_—First man approached with different color jersey. - - _Motion_—Back leaving before snap of the ball. - - _Ice_—Receiver going to outside or inside and becoming a - possible receiver after making his block or when no one shows. - Yell “Ice” when open. - - _Trail Junction Blocker_—Ball carrier straddling the outside - leg of junction blocker. Stay close to him. - - _Pursuer_—Defensive man pursuing the ball carrier. - - _Gap_—Space between two offensive men. - - _Flare_—Call to tell a back to run a flare route. - - _Drive Man_—Man who does the driving on a two-on-one block. - - _Post Man_—Man who stops the progress of the defensive man on a - two-on-one block. - - _Odd Defense_—Offensive guards not covered. - - _Even Defense_—Offensive guards are covered. - - _Box Defense_—Only two deep men in the secondary. - - _3-Deep Defense_—Three deep men in the defensive secondary. - - _9-Man Front_—Box defense. - - _8-Man Front_—Three deep defense. - - _Position Ball_—Bring ball immediately into belly, elbows in, - ball in fingers. - - _Drive Block_—A vicious head and shoulders block and turn - opponent. - - _Climb Block_—A brutal drive block. - - _Chop Block_—Open field block on men in the secondary by - throwing your body (extended) at his throat. - - _Crack Back_—A vicious low reverse body block. - - _Groin Block_—A low drive block with upward action aimed at - defensive man’s groin. - - _Fill_—Protect the area to your inside. - - _Shoot Out_—Springing from your original stance, hitting on - your hands and feet running (used to get downfield). - - _Against the Grain_—Direction in the secondary opposite the - flow. - - _On Linebacker_—Denotes (on-side L.B. N/T M.L.B.). - - _Position_—Getting to a spot between the man you are to block - and the ball carrier. - - _Roll Back_—Position and block defensive man from blind side. - - _Eagle_—Call to tackle and guard to switch assignments. - - _Head On_—Man nose on nose. - -We want all of our players and coaches to understand and use our -offensive terminology. One or two words either explains the descriptive -action we want or identifies some segment of the offense or the -opposition’s defense. The terms are simple, meaningful and descriptive. - - -OUR OFFENSIVE STANCE - -The offensive stance is very important. It is difficult enough trying to -attain maximum results when they are lined up in their proper stance, -but it puts your players at a distinct disadvantage and handicaps them -greatly if you permit them to assume a stance that is improper and -incorrect. Therefore, we put first things first, and try to coach our -players always to take the proper stance. - - -_Offensive Stance for Linemen_ - -The stance for the linemen, with the exception of the center, is -basically the same, with allowances being made for various physical -characteristics, which vary from individual to individual. The inside -foot is forward, the feet staggered in an arch to toe relationship. The -tackles and ends exaggerate the stagger from heel to toe since they are -further removed from the center and quarterback. - -The feet should not be spread wider than the individual’s shoulders, -with the weight of the body concentrated on the balls of the feet. The -heels should be slightly in, with the cleats on the heel of the forward -foot almost touching the ground. The ankles should be bent slightly. The -knees should be bent slightly more than 90 degrees, and turned slightly -in. The tail is even or a little higher than the shoulders, and splitting -the forward and rear heels. The back is straight, shoulders square, neck -relaxed, and eyes open keeping the defensive linebacker in line of sight. -The hands are placed down slightly outside of the feet, elbows relaxed, -and thumbs in and slightly forward of the shoulders. - - -_Offensive Stance for Center_ - -The center lines up in a left-handed stance with the feet even and -slightly wider than the shoulders. The weight is on the balls of the -feet, heels turned slightly in, with the cleats on the heels of the shoes -almost touching the ground. The knees are slightly in and bent a little -more than 90 degrees. The tail is slightly higher than the shoulders and -about two inches in front of the heels. The center places his left hand -inside his legs down from between his eye and ear almost directly under -the forehead, with the fingers spread and the thumb turned slightly in. -The shoulders are square, the back is straight, the neck is relaxed, -and the eyes looking upward. His right hand grasps the football like -a passer. He should reach out as far as possible without changing his -stance. The center is coached to place the ball on his tail as quickly -as possible with a natural turn of the arm. He should drive out over the -ball with his head coming up and tail down, keeping his shoulders square -as he makes his hand-back to the quarterback. - - -_Quarterback’s Stance_ - -The quarterback is coached to get into a football position with the feet -slightly wider than the shoulders, weight on the balls of the feet, heels -and knees turned slightly in, knees bent slightly, and a natural bend at -the waist in order to be in a good position to receive the ball from the -center as he snaps the ball on the hand-back. The elbows must be bent and -in close to the body. - -The quarterback’s right hand goes up in the center’s crotch. He turns it -slightly to the right. At this spot he applies pressure with the hand -to his center’s tail. The left hand must be in a comfortable position, -making slight contact with the right hand, and it is used to trap the -ball and to assist the right hand in taking the football from the center. - - -_Halfback’s Stance_ - -The feet of the halfback should not be wider than the shoulders, and -staggered in a heel to toe relationship with each other. The weight -should be on the balls of the feet, but will vary slightly depending -upon the direction the halfback must move in carrying out his particular -assignment. With the snap of the ball he should throw himself in the -direction he is going, and he should not use a cross-over step. - -His knees should be bent a little beyond 90 degrees, with the knees -and heels turned slightly in, and the tail a little higher than the -shoulders. The halfback’s shoulders should be square, with his head and -eyes in a position to see the defensive linebacker on the opposite side -from him. The inside hand should be down, slightly forward and inside of -the knee with the thumb turned a little to the inside. The body weight -should be forward slightly. - - -_Fullback’s Stance_ - -The fullback lines up with the feet even and a little wider than his -shoulders. The cleats on the heels of his shoes should touch the ground. -The heels and knees are turned slightly in with the weight on the balls -of the feet. The head and eyes are in a relaxed position, but where -they can see the second man standing outside of the offensive end. The -hands are directly in front of each foot with the thumbs turned in. The -shoulders are square, the back is straight, the tail is directly above -the heels, with the weight slightly forward, but not to such an extent he -cannot start quickly in a lateral direction to either side. - - -OFFENSIVE LINE SPLITS - -The use of intelligent line splits by the offensive guards, tackles and -ends must be mastered in order to realize the full potential of our -basic offensive attack. Without proper line splits, it is impossible for -the offense to function at 100% efficiency. Therefore, we must present -line split theory and coach our linemen in such a way they will have a -clear understanding of why and when we want to move in, out or remain -stationary. Mastering the intelligent use of line splits is one of the -most important single duties of the offensive linemen. (The other is a -quick offensive charge together on the starting count.) - - -_The Pre-Shift Position_ - -When the linemen leave the huddle and come up to the line of scrimmage in -a pre-shift position (hands on knees in a semi-upright stance), the basic -split rule for the guards is to split one full man. The tackles and ends -will split slightly more than one full man. As the linemen go down into -their offensive stance, each man (except the center) will move in, out or -remain stationary, depending upon the particular defensive alignment and -the individual’s split rules. - - -_Our Basic Split Rules_ - -Our offensive basic split rules are as follows: - - -EVEN DEFENSE: - -1. Guards—full man; don’t move. - -2. Tackles—man over you, split one-half man. If no one is there, use a -common sense split which would be to cut the split down on a wide play -and take a maximum split on an inside play. - -3. Ends—Line up a little over a full man split, and use the common -sense split rule which would depend upon the play. Never move more than -one-half man either way. - - -ODD DEFENSE: - -1. Guards—Take a full man split, but never so wide that if a man should -jump into the gap between the guard and center, you could not cut him -off. After taking the proper split, then apply the common sense split -rule. - -2. Tackles—If there is no inside linebacker: - - (a) Wide play called—split in one-half man. - - (b) Inside play called—fake split and don’t move. Inside - linebacker: Split out one-half man. - -3. Ends—Take good wide splits and apply common sense rule, never split -more than one-half man either way. - -In order to split intelligently it is important to determine first of all -if the defensive man will move with you when you move (Figure 99a), or -whether he is keeping his spacing on his own defensive man (Figure 99b). -You are attempting to determine as quickly as possible if your defensive -man is taking a variable or a static position. Figures 99a-b illustrate -variable and static spacing, respectively, by the defensive linemen. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 99a] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 99b] - -Do not ever emphasize that you are splitting to get good blocking angles, -but you split in order to isolate a defender. If the defender splits when -the offensive man splits, you can isolate him. If his split is static, a -good blocking angle will be the result. Your linemen should _never_ split -merely to get the angle, however. It will also help the linemen if they -have a clear picture of where the ball crosses the line of scrimmage (the -critical point of attack), and from where the ball is being thrown on a -pass play. Then, too, there is no set rule that will cover all defensive -situations and the offensive men must be able to apply the common sense -split rule along with the basic split rule. - -Figure 100 illustrates the pre-shift position of the right side of the -offensive line and the application of the guard’s, tackle’s, and end’s -split rules. From the pre-shift stance and position, the offensive men -are allowed to split one-half man either way, according to the defense. -The inside always must be protected. A defensive man must not be allowed -to penetrate or shoot the inside gap as he is likely to stop the -offensive play for a loss. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 100] - -If the defensive man will move with the offensive man, then the offense -should be able to isolate one man and the point of attack should be -directed toward him. Figures 101a-b illustrate the center’s man and -the offensive right tackle’s man being isolated respectively, and the -critical point of attack being directed at the isolated defenders. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 101a] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 101b] - -It is very important for the offensive lineman to know his main objective -in proper line splitting is either (1) to spread the defense out, or -(2) to isolate a man. The main objective is _never_ to split in order -to get a good blocking angle. This latter misconception can destroy any -advantage we gain by splitting the line. - - -OUR SNAP COUNT - -In order for a team to operate at maximum efficiency offensively all of -the players must get off with the ball at the same time. They must uncoil -as a unit and strike the opposition as quickly as possible. The only -advantage the offense has over the defense is the former knows where the -play is going and when the ball will be snapped. In order to maintain -this advantage the offense must strike quickly as a unit. Should the -defense penetrate the offense or the offense not get off on the ball -together, the offense loses its advantage over the defense. - -The offense’s advantage hinges on its ability to get off on the ball -together. Whether or not the offense can do this well will depend upon -their first initial movement, which in turn depends upon the snap count. - -At one time or another I believe we have used just about every imaginable -snap count. We have found that our line gets off better as a unit, -without leaning, and hits quicker when we employ a sound snap count. The -quarterback can say what he likes if we are going on the first sound. -While in the huddle, the quarterback will give the play and then cue the -action with the first sound, second sound or the third sound. We use the -same word for our sound snap count, but the emphasis is placed on the -first, second or third sound. For example, if the quarterback calls, -“24 on the second sound,” the team lines up in its offensive position, -and the quarterback says, “Go!” Since this is the first sound, the ball -is _not_ centered. Then the quarterback commands, “Go!” for the second -sound, the ball is centered and the team moves as a unit. The quarterback -can wait between his first and second commands since our snap count is -non-rhythmic. Such a measure not only keeps the defense off guard, but it -also keeps the offense constantly alert. - - -_Automatics_ - -It is not my purpose to discuss the automatic versus the non-automatic -systems of signal calling. In the former the quarterback can use the -automatic system or change the play at the line of scrimmage. In the -latter he runs the play that was called in the huddle and does not change -it at the line of scrimmage. There are advantages and disadvantages to -both systems. A strong argument that is advanced for the non-automatic -system is that it gives the linemen time to analyze their block and -mentally pick out the person they are supposed to block as they approach -the line of scrimmage. The people who favor the non-automatic system -maintain they have fewer broken signals, and fewer bad plays than the -teams using the automatic play change. - -While I am not stressing the merits of one system over the other, -frankly, I would never send my players into a football game without -several plays which could be automaticked at the line of scrimmage. It is -just common sense to realize certain plays are not good against certain -defenses, and it is useless in most instances to run a play directly -toward the strength of a defense when you need to gain yardage in order -to sustain your offensive drive. Therefore, we always have a trap play, -an end sweep, and a look pass as our automatics. Since they are few in -number, our automatics are easy to learn and they allow the quarterback -to change his play at the line of scrimmage if he wishes to do so. - -Our automatic system is very simple, and there is very little confusion -when we change our plays. As an example, while we are in the huddle, -the quarterback will call play, “18,” and the players will break from -the huddle and go to the line of scrimmage. After the quarterback gets -the players down into their offensive positions and he sees he wants -to change the play on automatic, he will repeat the original play, -“18.” This will alert the players, and they know the next number they -hear will be the new play that will be run instead of play 18. After -the quarterback has repeated the original play, and has called another -number, “24,” as an example, everyone on the offensive team knows the -new play will be 24, and the snap count always remains the same. - - -_Faking the Automatic_ - -If the quarterback wishes to fake an automatic so the opponents cannot -catch on to what he is doing, this can be done very simply. As an -example, let’s say the quarterback called the play, “30,” in the huddle. -At the line of scrimmage he decided to fake or dummy the automatic. At -the line he will say any number other than the one he called in the -huddle. This notifies the boys it is a fake automatic and they will not -pay any attention to the next number he calls as they are going to run -the play which the quarterback called originally in the huddle. - -By using this two number system we can always play the automatic or fake -it, and it is impossible for the opponents to catch on because they do -not know the play the quarterback called in the huddle originally. It -is impossible to use the automatic if the quarterback has elected to -run the play on the _first_ sound. The majority of the time when we are -going on the first sound we will be hitting fast and straight away, and -an automatic will not be necessary. If the quarterback thinks there is -any chance he might want to change the play for any particular reason, he -would _not_ run the play on the first sound. - - -THE OFFENSIVE HUDDLE - -The entire offensive operation starts with the huddle; therefore, it is -very important to insist that proper huddle techniques are carried out -properly. It is not too important the way the men are spaced or lined -up in forming the huddle, as long as everyone can see, hear, and get to -their proper offensive positions with as little confusion as possible. It -is a must, however, for the quarterback to use the proper techniques in -calling his plays and in controlling the huddle. - - -_The Quarterback Controls the Team_ - -A quarterback should never allow any talking in the huddle, unless he -asks a question and wants specific information. Therefore, he should -stand out of the huddle until it is completely formed. This will give -any player an opportunity to come and give specific information to the -quarterback without talking in the huddle. - -The quarterback should not just call a signal, but on certain occasions -he should make a few extra comments while in the huddle. He should be -forceful, and above all he must be confident. The team will run the play -the way the quarterback calls it. Occasionally he should single out the -man called on to make the key block and inform him the team is depending -upon him. After the quarterback has called the play, and someone wants to -check the signal, the quarterback should not merely repeat the signal but -the entire play over again. - -The quarterback must know the tactical situation at all times. If a -substitute comes into the game, the quarterback should always ask if -there are any instructions from the coach. The quarterback must always -be conscious of the 25 seconds between plays, and he should use it to -his advantage, whether to speed up or slow down the game. Training the -quarterback will be discussed in greater detail in Chapter 9. - - -THE QUARTERBACK’S TECHNIQUES - -I spoke previously of the quarterback’s stance. It is very important for -him to take the same stance every time. The center must know where to -place the ball every time. Centers and quarterbacks should work with each -other frequently giving them as much practice as possible. Each center or -quarterback has particular traits, and by the centers and quarterbacks -working with each other they get to know one another better, thus -eliminating bad exchanges between them. - -The quarterback should have his head up and always look straight ahead, -while observing the defense at all times. He should be as comfortable and -as relaxed as possible, and he should never look down when receiving the -ball from his center. - - -_Taking the Snap-Back_ - -On the snap of the ball, the quarterback should dip his hips so his -hands will follow the tail of the center as he charges. This technique -will also help the quarterback push off. The quarterback will take the -ball with his right hand, using the left as a trapper, as was explained -previously. He should make certain he has the ball, and he should not -fight it, before withdrawing his hands from the center’s crotch. As soon -as the quarterback has possession of the ball, he should bring it into -his “third hand,” his stomach. Such a procedure will help prevent a -fumble. He then wants to push off and execute his techniques as quickly -as possible. - -The quarterback must always be cognizant of the fact he cannot score -without the ball; consequently, he wants to make certain he has -possession of it before pulling out of there. If he gets in a big hurry, -he is likely to drop the ball to the ground. I have seen this occur many -times. - - -_After Receiving the Snap_ - -After receiving the snap, the quarterback will operate in one direction -or the other by using a pivot or a cross-over step. The theory and -techniques are basically the same. - -First, the quarterback must know the defensive alignment as this will -determine how far he should pivot, or if he needs to take a position -step. After he has recognized the defense and he has taken the first -short jab step or pivot step, he should have the ball in close to his -body until he is ready to hand-off. - -The head is the first part of the body around if using the pivot step, -and also the first to move in the direction the quarterback is taking -if the cross-over step is used. After the head is pointed in the right -direction, the steps can be adjusted to avoid running into the ball -carrier. The quarterback should not wave his arms or his body up and down -as he should maintain the same level throughout the entire operation. The -quarterback should never flash (show) the football; he always operates -under control. - - -_Making the Exchange_ - -It is important for the quarterback to know each man with whom he must -make an exchange, including his speed, strong and weak points. He should -look at the target, the far hip, of the man to whom he is going to hand -the football, and he should be very quick with the exchange. He should -try to make the hand-off with the same motion he would use if he were -dealing cards quickly. - - -_Quarterback Faking_ - -The faking of the quarterback is very important. He should always -remember to carry out his fakes realistically. Incidentally we sometimes -give the ball to the man who is supposed to be doing the faking. We have -found it helps our faking as the man is not certain whether or not the -quarterback is going to give the ball to him. - -When attempting a fake, it is very important for the quarterback to -look at the man he is faking to, and not merely swing his arms in a -half-hearted fake. He should go through the same motions he uses when he -actually gives the ball to the faker. His fakes must be realistic for the -offense to be effective. The quarterback should remember he never stops -moving while on offense, except when faking to set up a drop back pass. - - -BALL CARRYING TECHNIQUES - -Every team wins or loses a great percentage of its games due to the -manner in which the backs and ends carry the football. All players, not -only the backs, should be drilled in the proper mechanics and techniques -of carrying a football properly as it is possible on occasions an -interior lineman will have an opportunity to run with the ball. - -The outstanding characteristics or strength of each ball carrier is -likely to be different as one might possess outstanding speed, another -is a nifty, shifty runner, and the third is solid on his feet, possesses -power, and is capable of running over the opposition. Every ball carrier -must utilize his natural talents, and should practice diligently to -become as versatile as possible. Regardless of the individual style of a -runner, the most important point is for him to hold on to the football -and not fumble it. - -Good habits, careful handling, and the execution of proper techniques -will prevent fumbles on ball exchanges. When a player has the ball in -his possession and fumbles it, he has committed the unpardonable sin in -my estimation. The ball carrier should remember to have one point of the -football in the palm of his hand with the fingers around the end of the -ball, and gripping it tightly. The other end should be in the crook of -his arm, which should force the football up close to his body. - -If the football is carried properly, and the ball carrier is determined -to hang on to it, the football should never be lost due to a fumble. The -ball is the most valuable object on the football field. Consequently if -the ball carrier fails to hang on to the ball, he is letting down his -entire team. Once a player has control of the ball and fumbles it, this -is no accident. It is either carelessness or lack of courage. I can’t -build a winner with this type of player. In a close game a fumbled ball -can be the deciding factor in winning or losing. - -A ball carrier should remember his primary objective is to gain ground; -if possible, to score. Therefore, he should move directly toward the -opposition’s goal line as quickly as possible, unless there is a definite -reason for doing otherwise. There are always exceptions to the rules, and -a ball carrier may not be running toward the opposition’s goal because he -might be trying to make better use of a blocker, dodge an opponent, get -to the opening, time the play properly, or he might have some other valid -reason. There will be times when top speed and the correct direction will -not be sufficient to get the job done. - - -_Open Field Running Techniques_ - -When a ball carrier is in the open field, he should always keep the -tackler guessing. He should not tip-off whether he is going to try to -outrun him, run through him, or dodge him, until he is close enough to -the tackler to give him the fake and then get by him. The ball carrier -should never concede he is down, and he should always keep fighting to -gain ground until the whistle stops the play. - -The ball carrier should always realize and know exactly where he is -on the field, and just what he must do in order for the play to be -successful. In a majority of cases, a ball carrier should be concerned -only with running for a touchdown. - - -_The Importance of Proper Mental Attitude_ - -The basic difference between ordinary and great athletes is mental -attitude. As far as football players are concerned, the ordinary ball -carrier will try to make a touchdown, but he will be satisfied with a -five or six yard gain. The champion athlete, the All-American back, -is dissatisfied when he fails to score. He is always going for the -opposition’s goal line. The ball carrier actually does not succeed in -his objective unless he runs for a touchdown on every play (except for -occasional tactical situations), and he should never be made to feel he -has accomplished his objective unless he scores. - -A ball carrier must be made to realize when he does a poor job of -carrying the ball, the effort of the other 10 men has been wasted. The -ball carrier must always be aware of the yardage necessary for a first -down and for a touchdown. When the ball carrier has possession of the -football, he must realize he has the control of the game in his hands. - - -OUR BLOCKING TECHNIQUES - -Blocking techniques are basically the same for all linemen. The blocks -the backs are called upon to execute are basically the same, too. -Therefore, we will not discuss the techniques of each position, but -merely discuss techniques and procedures as a whole. - - -_The Drive Block_ - -The drive block or the one-on-one block was developed primarily for a -fast hitting attack, and is one that we use on many occasions. All blocks -consist of the following steps: (1) the approach, (2) the contact, and -(3) the follow through. - - -APPROACH: - -1. Approach with short, controlled step. First step should be with the -outside foot, and it should not go beyond the forward foot. The knees -should be bent at this time. - -2. Split the opponent’s course with the first step, and aim the nose -guard at the middle of the opponent’s target. - -3. Keep the eyes on the target at all times. - -4. Uncoil off the forward foot. Do not duck the head during the uncoil. - - -CONTACT: - -1. Strike a jarring blow with the forehead. - -2. Bring the head up as contact is made. (The body will follow the head; -this will help arch the back.) - -3. The drive should be forward, then upward. The object is to knock the -opponent off-balance, thus depriving him of his traction; this will make -him easy to move out of the play. - -4. Bring the feet up fast with short, choppy, digging steps, but still -keeping the knees bent. - - -FOLLOW THROUGH: - -1. Stay on feet with the knees still bent and keep driving. - -2. Keep the feet well spread and under the body. - -3. Charge through the opponent. - -4. Keep the body between the opponent and the path of the ball carrier. - -The most important single step in the drive block is keeping the feet -driving the instant contact is made. - - -_The Reverse Shoulder Block_ - -This block is used primarily when the blocker already has position on a -hard charging lineman. - - -APPROACH: - -1. Aim the far shoulder for the opponent’s far hip. This will help allow -for the opponent’s charge. - -2. Shoot the head and shoulders in front of the defensive man. - -3. This movement must be sharp and on a straight line. - -4. Take a short positive step with the inside foot. - - -CONTACT: - -1. Uncoil off the near foot. - -2. Strike a good blow on the opponent’s hip, squeezing with the neck and -head in the stomach. - -3. Bring inside foot up to help cut off penetration. - - -FOLLOW THROUGH: - -1. Bring the legs up fast and keep them driving. - -2. The charge of the defensive man will put the blocker in a perfect -blocking position. - -3. Keep the body weight into opponent. - -4. If and when the opponent attempts to spin out, go into a crab position -around the outside thigh to prevent pursuit. - - -_Blocking Linebackers_ - -The percentage of time the offense can block the linebackers will -determine to a great extent how successful the offense will be. If the -linebackers are blocked, the defense will usually break down. - - -APPROACH: - -1. Get off on snap of the ball. - -2. Whenever possible release to the inside to block an inside linebacker; -to the outside when blocking an outside linebacker. - -3. Stay low, don’t run in a circle, but take the shortest route to the -linebacker. - -4. Get to the point of attack in position to block before the linebacker -can get there to defend it. - -5. Keep your body between the linebacker and the ball carrier. - - -CONTACT: - -1. Split the linebacker right down the middle with initial block. - -2. Thrust the body forward and upward, hit the linebacker on the rise and -elevate the shoulders on contact. - -3. Strike the blow with a low fundamental position, hit with forehead and -forearm. - -4. Make contact off top of the feet. Keep the feet underneath the -blocker, thus making it impossible for the blocker to follow-through -properly if he lunges or leaves his feet before or while making contact. - - -FOLLOW THROUGH: - -1. As soon as contact is made with the linebacker, continue the leg -drive. The initial blow should knock him off balance and the leg drive -should keep him this way. - -2. Keep the weight into the linebacker. - -3. Gain position follow through. The blocker should continue to strive -for position to eliminate any possibility of the linebacker being in on -the tackle downfield. - - -_Downfield Blocking_ - -The approach of the downfield block will vary with the play called and -position of the defensive secondary men. The approach we will discuss -will be centered around attacking the defensive halfback. - -The downfield block is a definite characteristic of all good football -teams, and it is virtually impossible to have many long runs without good -downfield blocking. - - -APPROACH: - -1. Release rapidly on the line of scrimmage. - -2. Sprint shallowly just beyond the line of scrimmage. - -3. When approaching the designated person to block, aim for a spot in -front of his original position; this eliminates running behind the -halfback when he comes up to make the tackle. - -4. The blocker must have a clear concept of the point of attack and the -prescribed path of the ball carrier. - -5. The blocker should make the defensive man commit himself before he -starts to make contact. - - -CONTACT: - -1. Once the defensive man has committed himself in a specific direction, -the blocker then starts his contact. - -2. The blocker will get as close as possible to the defensive man (about -two yards) and spring off his inside foot, thus swinging his outside -elbow and arm toward the head of the opponent. This will cause a lifting -motion and make it possible for the blocker to extend the entire length -of his body in a horizontal position. - -3. The blocker must aim his body at the opponent’s throat, trying to make -contact with his hip. - -4. The defensive man will not allow him to hit him in the throat, but by -aiming there he may hit him around the knees. - - -FOLLOW THROUGH: - -1. The follow through will consist of keeping the body extended as long -as possible and jumping up and trying to make another block. - - -_The Post-Lead Block_ - -The post-lead block, or two-on-one block, is used to insure the blocking -of the most dangerous defensive man, and at the same time give the ball -carrier the feeling of confidence that he can concentrate his efforts -on whipping the one defensive man to the inside or outside of the man -being double-teamed. With this in mind, the blockers are more conscious -of turning the defensive man away from the play rather than drive him -straight down the field. By using this same method, it makes it possible -to cut off the pursuit. - - -APPROACH: - - -(Post Man) - -1. Drive straight at the defensive man with a short controlled step. -First step is with the outside foot. - -2. Aim the nose guard at the middle of the target. - -3. Keep the eyes on the target at all times. - -4. Uncoil off the forward foot. - - -(Drive Man) - -1. Take a position step with the inside foot and then a good step with -the outside foot to get squared away. - -2. From this new position aim the nose guard at the middle of the -opponent and use as an apex. From this position the middle of the -opponent would be below the armpit and just above the waist. - -3. Keep eyes on target all the way. - - -CONTACT: - - -(Post Man) - -1. Strike a good blow with the forehead. - -2. Drive straight through the opponent to stop his charge. - -3. Hit on the rise and keep the pressure applied, keeping the knees bent -at all times. - - -(Drive Man) - -1. Strike a jarring blow with the forehead below the armpit of the -opponent. - -2. After good contact, slide head past body and continue applied pressure -with the inside shoulder. - -3. Keep the tail down, head up, and feet under the body. - - -FOLLOW THROUGH: - - -(Post Man) - -1. After good contact and feet are well up under the body, turn the tail -toward the drive man. - -2. Keep pressure applied, feet moving in short, choppy steps, and drive -man down the line. - - -(Drive Man) - -1. Keep pressure with shoulder and neck, and do not let man spin out to -outside. - -2. Keep the tail to inside and do not allow defensive man to split. - -3. Keep feet moving in short, choppy steps and move man down the line. - -4. Force defensive man into pursuit to help eliminate it. - - -_The Trap Block_ - - -APPROACH: - -1. It is important to take the same stance as if going straight ahead, -but just before the ball is snapped, the weight is shifted to the outside -foot. - -2. Take a quick, short, 6-inch step with inside foot and point toe -directly toward spot to be trapped. - -3. Never raise the body up. Stay down and in a semicoiled position. - -4. Drive off the forward foot, still taking short steps. - -5. Anticipate the person to be trapped, to be filling the inside or -floating in the hole. - - -CONTACT: (see below) - - -FOLLOW THROUGH: - -The contact and follow through are exactly the same as on our drive -block, which I explained previously. - - -_The Pass Protection_ (_Drop back pass_) - -This technique is used by the guards and tackles when protecting the -passer on a straight dropback pass. It is good to go from a pre-shift -position when using this type of block. - - -APPROACH: - -1. Take a short step backwards with the inside foot, then a longer step -backwards with the other foot. - -2. While doing this, turn the tail slightly to the inside and remember -the inside gap must be protected. - -3. After the second step backwards, the blocker should be in a good -football position (tail down, head up, knees bent, back straight, and the -body in a cocked position ready to strike a blow). - - -CONTACT: - -1. Look at the man to be blocked, make him come to the blocker. When -close enough, spring and butt him with the forehead, trying to make -contact with him at the numbers. - -2. After contact is made and the charge of the offensive man has been -stopped, the blocker will take a step back, regain his football position -and make contact again. - -3. At all times the blocker will be forcing the defensive man to the -outside. - - -FOLLOW THROUGH: - -1. When the blocker sees that he can no longer strike a blow with his -head, due to the position of the defensive man, he will fake a blow with -his head, then slide it and his body in front of the defensive man. - -2. He will lock him with his leg and at the same time apply pressure with -his body. - -3. At all times the blocker will be in a crab position and working his -feet around to force the defensive man to the outside, thus keeping him -away from the passer. - - -_The Crack Back Block_ - -This block is used primarily by the ends when they are blocking an inside -linebacker. It can also be used by anyone who might be blocking directly -in front of the ball carrier. - - -APPROACH: - -1. Release from line of scrimmage as quickly as possible and run straight -at linebacker. - -2. Aim slightly above the knees of the linebacker. - -3. Get within a yard and a half before going into block. - - -CONTACT: - -1. Throw outside arm with a quick, jerky motion in front of linebacker. -This quick motion will cause the head and shoulder to get in front of -defensive man. - -2. Release off of inside foot to start block. - -3. Make good solid contact with the outside hip just above the defensive -man’s knees. - - -FOLLOW THROUGH: - -1. After contact is made, go into a four-point position with the arms -extended, and tail high into the air. - -2. Work the feet around and force the defensive man to go in front of -blocker’s head. - -3. Do not let defensive man get out behind the blocker’s feet because -this will allow him to pursue the ball from a proper angle. - -4. Keep tail up and feet working. - - -_The Junction Block_ - -This block is used primarily by the fullback when he is blocking a true -end or a corner man on a wide play. - - -APPROACH: - -1. Aim for a spot about a yard in front and outside of man to be blocked. - -2. Run low and hard at spot. - - -CONTACT: - -1. Extend the head and shoulders in front of and past the defensive man. -(The blocker’s head is pointing downfield.) - -2. The blocker will use his inside leg and hip to catch the outside leg -and hip of the defensive man. - -3. The blocker will then have his head and shoulders past the defensive -man and his inside leg firmly against the outside leg of the defensive -man, with his hands down and his tail up. - - -FOLLOW THROUGH: - -1. Force defensive man to go inside by keeping feet moving and driving -downfield. - -2. Do not extend body and fall flat on the ground. - -3. Do not let man spin to blocker’s outside. - -4. Keep pressure on defensive man as long as possible. - - -_The Roll Block_ - -This block is used when a small back, in particular, is trying to block a -true end or corner man on the ground. - - -APPROACH: - -1. Aim for a spot about a yard in front and outside of the man to be -blocked. - -2. Run low and hard at spot. - - -CONTACT: - -1. With the head pointed at the outside hip of the defensive man, the -blocker will get about a yard and a half from him. As the blocker -springs, he will drop his inside shoulder and turn his head down and to -the outside. - -2. The blocker will hit the outside leg of the defensive man with the -part of his shoulder pad that covers the scapula of his inside shoulder. - - -FOLLOW THROUGH: - -1. After contact has been made with the back of shoulder, the blocker -will roll to his inside and give a corkscrew effect. - -2. Stay as high as possible (around the knees) and make two or three -complete rolls in the corkscrew fashion, trying to knock the legs out -from under the defensive man. - -3. At all times the blocker must keep his head pointing downfield or no -less than a 60 degree angle. - - -NUMBERING THE DEFENSIVE ALIGNMENTS - -[Illustration: FIGURE 102a] - -In making our blocking rules or assignments for all of the players -versus all different defensive alignments, there are several factors to -take into consideration. The rules must be simple, and secondly, they -must be brief. We have used several different kinds of rules, such as, -“Inside gap, over, linebacker,” and others. This was a good method, but -it amounted to quite a bit of memory work for the players because the -majority of the blocks were all different and the players were required -to learn a number of different sequences. Trying to adhere to the theory, -“the simpler, the better,” we started numbering the defensive men as -illustrated in Figure 102a versus the 5-4 defensive alignment; 102b -versus the wide tackle 6; 102c versus the gap 8 defense; and Figure 102d -versus the Eagle defense. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 102b] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 102c] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 102d] - -We start counting with the man over the center and number him zero, and -from there go both left and right numbering every man within two yards -of the line of scrimmage, as illustrated in Figures 102a-b-c-d. We also -number the men in the secondary. We do this by merely continuing with our -numbering beyond the end lineman in the direction the ball is going to -go, as illustrated in Figure 103a versus the Oklahoma 5-4 defense, and -Figure 103b versus the wide tackle 6-2 defensive alignment. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 103a] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 103b] - - -_Application of Our Blocking Rules_ - -By numbering the defensive men it is simple when making out the blocking -rules to assign each man a number, and the offensive man merely learns -which numbered man he will block. There will be certain plays in which a -particular position must have one or two options. As an example, a rule -might read, “#3 unless outside, then, #2.” - -The following are examples of blocking rules by numbers: - -_Regular Block_—straight ahead - - On-E #3 - On-T #2 - On-G #1 - C #0, off-side - Off-G #1 - Off-T #5 - Off-E #6 - -_Trap Block_— - - On-E #3 - On-T L.B. - On-G Slam man #1 or #2, N/T #0 - C Off-side - Off-G Trap - Off-T 1st outside guard - Off-E #6 - -_Counter Block_— - - On-E #6 - On-T #2 - On-G #1 - C #1, N/T #0, N/T off-side - Off-G #1 - Off-T #2 - Off-E #3 - -By using this particular method it is also very easy to incorporate the -backs into the blocking scheme. When using the back to the side the ball -is going, in order to have a backfield man block a particular defensive -player, we merely add two zeroes to the number which has been assigned -to the defender, and the back gets this man. As an illustration, if we -want our halfback to block the #3 defensive man, the halfback’s block -is 300; and the #4 man, the block would be called 400. Several complete -illustrations would be as follows: - -_300 Block_— - - Off-E #6 - Off-T #5 - Off-G #1 - C #0, N/T off-side - On-G #1 - On-T #2 - On-E slam #3, then #5 - H.B. #3 - -_400 Block_— - - Off-E #6 - Off-T #5 - Off-G #1 - C #0, N/T off-side - On-G #1 - On-T #2 - On-E #3 - H.B. #4 - -_Under Block_— - - Off-E #6 - Off-T #5 - Off-G #1 - C #0, N/T off-side - On-G #1 - On-T #2 - On-E #3 - H.B. #4 - -_Over Block_— - - Off-E #6 - Off-T #5 - Off-G #1 - C #0, N/T off-side - On-G 1st man on line of scrimmage - On-T 2nd man on line of scrimmage - On-E 3rd man on line of scrimmage - H.B. 1st inside linebacker - - -ATTACKING THE DEFENSIVE ALIGNMENT - -Probably like many other football teams, we have too much offense. -However, in order to do an intelligent job of planning our attack versus -the numerous defensive alignments, one must have sufficient offense since -not all plays are good against all defenses. - -Regardless of one’s offense, the first approach is to establish a good -sound middle attack that is based on the trap, fullback hand-off, and -a pass off of the same action. Unless a team can force the defense to -respect the inside power and force the defensive linebackers and guards -to stay “at home,” it is almost an impossibility to perfect the outside -attack. After we establish the inside attack, then we want to run far -enough inside the defensive end to cut down his quick containment. The -next step then is to perfect the wide attack and the corner passes, in -order to have a well-rounded offense. Bootleg passes, reverses, and -an occasional trick play are also needed in order to keep the defense -“honest,” and to make the above-mentioned plays more effective. - - -GOING WIDE - -It is an offensive _must_ for a team to be able to go wide and to get the -long gainer. Occasionally all of us get a good gainer from the inside -attack, but most long gainers are from passes or some form of wide attack. - -Previously we operated on the assumption if we could gain four yards on -each play we would score with a sustained drive. Statistics will prove a -team will generally stop itself by some error, or the defense will stop -the offense, before the attack can make four consecutive first downs or -gain 50 yards, a majority of the time. Consequently a team must perfect -its wide game. - -There are several ways of going wide, but regardless of the manner -attempted, the defensive end or corner man must be eliminated either by -blocking him, optioning him, or throwing the football over his area. - - -_The Run-Pass Option_ - -When trying to get wide against a corner man, the run or pass option is -one of the best methods to employ. Figure 104 illustrates the on-guard -blocking #1, on-tackle #2, and the fullback blocking the #3 man. The -near halfback and the on-end will run their pass routes. The #4 man is -not blocked, and the passer is going to option from him. As soon as the -passer has possession of the ball, he watches the #4 man. If he comes up -to tackle the passer, the latter throws to the open receiver. If the #4 -man drops back to play pass defense, the passer is instructed to turn -upfield and run with the football. If our passer feels he can gain at -least four yards on the play, we want him to run with it most of the -time. The play is much better against a team that uses a 9-man front than -against an 8-man front alignment. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 104] - - -_The Quarterback Option_ - -There are several kinds of option plays, but the one designed to get wide -is the two-way option, in which the quarterback either keeps or pitches -to the far halfback, depending upon the reaction of the defensive man -from whom he is optioning. - -The blocking rules on the quarterback option play are very simple, as -illustrated in Figure 105. The offensive guard and tackle to the on-side -block their numbers, respectively. The on-end will block to his inside, -N/T (No One There) halfback, and the fullback will block the #4 man with -a junction block. The quarterback must watch his man all the time in -order for the play to turn the corner successfully. He _must_ option the -#3 man and _not_ permit the latter to option the quarterback. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 105] - - -_The Three-Way Option_ - -[Illustration: FIGURE 106] - -The other option play, illustrated in Figure 106, is the three-way option -with the quarterback playing the #4 defender. This option is in the same -series with the outside belly play. The quarterback has the option of (1) -giving the ball to the fullback, who will hit off-tackle, (2) keeping -the ball himself, after faking the fullback off-tackle, or (3) faking -the off-tackle play and optioning off of the #4 man by pitching back to -the far back running wide, after the defender plays the quarterback. The -on-guard blocks #1, on-tackle #2, on-end #5. The fullback is responsible -for making #3 tackle him, and the quarterback must watch #4 man. - - -_Changing Offensive Blocking Assignments at the Line_ - -Since there are numerous defensive alignments and we cannot always -anticipate where our opponents will line up, and due to the inherent -limitations of the number rule blocking system, we use a _change-off_ for -our blockers. As an example, Figure 107 illustrates a defensive alignment -where the offensive tackle could not block his man (#2) on a play going -wide. Therefore, the offensive tackle merely calls, “Tiger,” or any other -code name, and this alerts the end that he and the tackle are exchanging -blocking assignments (Figure 107). - -[Illustration: FIGURE 107] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 108] - -Figure 108 illustrates an exchange of blocking assignments between the -tackle and guard, as the code, “Eagle,” has been called by the tackle. -Ordinarily the guard’s block is #1 and the tackle’s block is #2, but -as Figure 108 illustrates, it would be difficult for the guard to -sustain his block on a play going wide. Therefore, “Eagle,” or any other -appropriate code word, changes the blocking assignments between the -guard and tackle. On certain occasions the center and guard can exchange -assignments, too, by using a code call. - - -CONCLUSION - -My objective has been to present each phase of our offensive running -game, which can be utilized against the various defensive alignments. Our -offensive passing game will be discussed in Chapter 8. My philosophy is -to keep the offense simple, be sound in our coaching, and never settle -for anything less than perfection in its execution! - - - - -CHAPTER 8 - -Our Offensive Passing Game Techniques - - -The passing game is one of the two main weapons of offensive football. -In order for your passing game to be successful, you must sell this -phase of football to your players, and then have good protection, good -receivers, and a good passer. These essentials of a good passing game -go hand-in-hand, and no combination of any two is any value without the -third. - - -THE PASSER - -It is beyond the wildest expectation of any optimist to hope for a good -passing game without a good passer. Therefore, select an individual who -has the natural ability to throw. There are certain things one can and -cannot teach a passer. - -It was my good fortune to have Vito “Babe” Parilli at Kentucky, one of -the finest natural passers in modern-day football. Since his motion was -natural, we coached him very little, other than on the basic mechanics -of grip, holding the ball, etc. I feel it is possible to over-coach the -passers, just like the kickers. - - -_The Grip_ - -Assuming a boy has natural throwing ability, the first coaching point to -teach is the grip. It is generally preferred for the passer to grip the -ball with the point of his little finger touching almost in the center -of the lace. We feel if the points of any of his other fingers touch the -lace, he will be gripping the ball in the center (the roundest part of -the football), consequently limiting his ability to get a good grip of -it. A passer definitely cannot throw the ball properly if he grips it -with the point of the forefinger, middle or third finger touching the -lace. The grip is very important. The passer should not grip the ball -as tightly in inclement weather as he ordinarily does under more ideal -playing conditions. - -When employing the T formation, the quarterback is required to fake -with the football, and then set up to pass. Therefore, he must always -bring the football back into his stomach after every fake. When the -quarterback’s forearms are touching his hips in a relaxed position, he is -able to keep the football closer to his body and it is easier to hide. -During the faking of the ball, the quarterback should shift his entire -weight toward the back, rather than toward the extension of the arms and -the extended football. This, too, is very helpful to aid in hiding the -football after the faking is completed. - -The quarterback should be ready to throw the football the instant he -gets back and sets up. The ball should be held with both hands until -the passer is ready to release it or fake a release. This procedure -will insure the passer of being in a relaxed position, which is vitally -important. After the passer has set up to throw the ball, it should be in -a cocked position by the passer’s ear. This position enables the passer -to save time as he prepares to release the football. - - -_The Release and Delivery_ - -Releasing and delivering the football are next. If the passer has learned -the grip and how to hold the football as explained elsewhere, then the -release and delivery will come more easily. The passer must release the -ball with a snap of the wrist. Very few passers have a good, natural -wrist snap. Consequently there are few good natural passers. The wrist -snap can be developed by drills, and we use several different types. - -In delivering the football, which is actually part of the release, the -passer, except in rare instances, should step _toward_ the intended -receiver as he throws the football. Not only will the passer be more -accurate, but he will be going in the correct direction to cover his -pass in case of an interception, when he steps and throws in the same -direction. If he steps in one direction and attempts to throw in another -or attempts to throw across his body, the passer is throwing from an -awkward position and throwing against his own weight. - - -_The Footwork_ - -Perfecting the passer’s footwork is very important. He must know the spot -from which he is going to throw the ball prior to his actual passing. -It is especially important for the protecting line and backs to know -the spot from which the passer is going to throw. They cannot do an -intelligent job of protecting him unless they know and unless he makes -certain he actually throws from that spot. When throwing from the pocket, -the passer must retreat straight back, set up as quickly as possible, and -stay inside the pocket formed by his linemen and remaining backs. - -The running or optional pass is one of the best passes in modern-day -football. It should be perfected by those teams who base their attack -partially on wide plays. There are no definite rules or steps for the -passer on the running pass, because all athletes are a little different. -What might be right and proper for one passer on his fifth and sixth -steps would be wrong and improper for another passer due to individual -differences. Nevertheless, the passer should have the ball up and in -a position ready to throw it by the time he reaches a spot directly -behind the area where his offensive end lined up originally. He should -start upfield as quickly as possible. This not only makes the play more -effective, but it also puts him in a position to run if the defensive man -drops back to cover the pass (see Figure 104). - - -_Individual Passing Principles and Techniques_ - -Passing is one phase of football in particular that needs constant -practice and close attention. It is also one phase which is overlooked -and underworked by teams that do not have natural passers. The following -individual principles and coaching points should prove helpful in -teaching a boy with natural throwing ability how to be a better passer: - - 1. Push off with the left foot (right-handed passer). - - 2. Hide the ball on the way back to set up. - - 3. Set up quickly. - - 4. Get at least seven yards deep on most drop back passes. - - 5. Be under control when you set up, and be sure to be in a - good position to throw the football. - - 6. Look straight downfield. - - 7. Stay in your pocket while throwing. - - 8. Keep the arm cocked, and the ball high at all times. - - 9. Step in the direction of your pass. - - 10. Throw the ball out-of-bounds or hold it if no receiver is - open. - - 11. Know the pass routes. - - 12. Know the receivers. - - 13. Know the weak and the strong defenders. - - 14. Know when to drive the ball or pull the string on it. - - 15. Don’t throw interceptions. - - -PASS ROUTES - -A good passing game is based on the following primary objectives: - - 1. To flood an area, that is, to have more receivers in a - particular area than there are defenders. - - 2. To get a one-on-one situation, and let the offensive man - outmaneuver the defensive man by using various cuts or patterns. - - -_Flooding An Area_ - -Flooding an area is perhaps the easiest and surest way of having a -receiver open or in a position to catch the ball. The basic thinking in -this particular type of passing game is to assign two or three receivers -to a particular area, as illustrated in Figures 109-111, making it -impossible for one or even two defenders to cover the receivers if they -stay spread out and run their routes properly. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 109] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 110] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 111] - - -_Offensive Pass Cuts_ - -There are numerous offensive sets a team can employ in order to force the -opposition to cover using a man-on-man coverage. When using different -sets and formations, I think it is more advisable to teach all of the -eligible receivers pass cuts, rather than having them classified under -pass patterns which would affect the whole team. As an example, the -quarterback could call a formation that would set the left halfback -right and split the left end out. He could then call a pass pattern to -his right which would be a pattern to flood a particular zone, and at -the same time call a particular cut for the left end who will try to -outmaneuver the defensive right halfback—who might be forced to cover -him alone. Figures 112-115 illustrate several individual pass cuts, such -as, sideline, deep, out, drive, circle, stop, Z-in and Z-out. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 112] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 113] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 114] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 115] - - -PASS RECEIVING - -A football team can have a great passer and good cuts and patterns, but -unless the receivers do their jobs correctly the passing game is of -little value. The pass receiving phase is broken down into the following -six basic maneuvers: (1) the release, (2) the approach, (3) faking, (4) -running, (5) catching the ball, and (6) running with the ball. - - -_Release_: - -To be a good and consistent receiver, the first prerequisite is clearing -the line of scrimmage. A good receiver should never be held up at the -line of scrimmage. He must work on this important phase of the passing -game in order to perfect it. Every time an end releases downfield on -running plays, he should experiment on techniques which will aid him -later on pass plays. No two defenders are the same. What is successful -against one might not be successful against another defender. - - -_Approach_ (Man-for-man coverage): - - -Straight Line Approach: - -1. Run at three-fourths speed. - -2. Run at a specific point of the defender’s body. - -3. Force the defender back, attempting to get him to turn in the opposite -direction of your final break. - -4. Make a good fake and step in the opposite direction of your final -break. - - -_Weave Approach_: - -1. Run at three-fourths speed. - -2. Run an irregular course. - -3. Through the change of direction force the defender to change his feet. - -4. The number of weaves will be determined by the cuts called and the -depth in which the ball is to be caught. - -5. Give the impression that each weave is to be the final cut. - - -_Faking_ (types): - -1. Head fake—accompanied by a short jab step in the opposite direction of -the final break. - -2. Roll step—fake one way and roll off back foot directly toward the -defender. - -3. Change of direction. - -4. Hook. - -5. Hook and go. - - -_Run_ (immediately after faking to receive the ball): - -1. Run under control and relaxed. - -2. By running three-fourths speed, the receiver is able to adjust to -poorly thrown balls. - -3. Keep the arm action parallel to the leg action, until ready to catch -the ball. - -4. While running, turn only the neck and head. If the body is turned at -the waist, the receiver will be slowed down considerably. - - -_Catching the Ball_: - -1. Relax completely as the ball comes toward the receiver. Relax -particularly the fingers. - -2. Follow the ball with the eyes all the way into the hands. - -3. Catch the ball in and with the hands. - -4. Never attempt to trap the ball next to the body. - -5. Eliminate all thought from the mind except catching the football. All -great receivers concentrate to such a degree they are actually unaware of -the presence of the defenders. - -6. A ball thrown directly at chest level or higher should be caught with -the thumbs in. If the ball is thrown below the chest level, the thumbs -should be turned out. - -7. Always try to get the body in front of the ball on short passes. - -8. A ball thrown on the outside and away from the receiver should be -caught with the thumbs out. - -9. When attempting to catch a long pass, never allow the inside arm to be -in a position to blind you from seeing the football. - -10. Catch the ball and tuck it away before running with it. - -11. Every pass thrown to a receiver belongs to him, and he should exert -every effort to catch it. - -12. If the receiver cannot possibly catch the football, he should not -permit the opponent to catch it. This is a cardinal rule. - - -_Running_ (after catching the ball): - -1. As soon as the ball is caught, take it firmly in the hand, tuck it -under the arm, and most important, do not fumble. - -2. Drop the inside shoulder expecting immediate contact. - -3. Turn upfield to score. - - -CONCLUSION - -Offense is based on two primary principles, running with and/or passing -the football. The passing and running games supplement and complement -each other. Neither phase is of particular value, however, unless the -quarterback knows when, where, why and how to use each phase, along with -the kicking game. Training the quarterback will be discussed in Chapter -9. - - - - -CHAPTER 9 - -Training the Quarterback - - -All outstanding football teams have two distinct characteristics in -common—a great fighting spirit and a great quarterback. A smart, capable -quarterback is the greatest single asset a football team can possess. -Success in a football game is determined mainly by the selection of -plays. Poor selection of plays will destroy team morale and nullify the -finest of teamwork. - -Quarterback generalship is simply the application of good common sense. -It consists of two parts—knowing what to do and making the team do it. -If a team has confidence in its quarterback, it is likely the plays -selected will be successful. If a team does not have confidence in its -quarterback, it is likely the plays will not be successful. The “right” -quarterback inspires confidence. One manner in which the quarterback -builds confidence is through the selection of proper plays. I do not mean -to imply the “right” quarterback can grab-bag any play and make it work. -If he is wrong frequently as the result of his grab-bag selection of -plays, his teammates will lose confidence in him. - - -THREE TYPES OF QUARTERBACKS - -There are basically three types of quarterbacks. There is the quarterback -who makes positive mistakes, due to his total disregard for the basic -principles of generalship. He does not know his offense, and has -little understanding and knowledge why his plays are not effective. -He is unaware of what the defense is doing. Generally he calls plays -quickly—any play to get the team out of the huddle. He destroys team -morale and spirit. His team generally loses badly. He is not coachable. I -cannot build a winner with this type of quarterback, and I consider him -highly undesirable. - -The quarterback who works to avoid mistakes is a second type of -individual. He does what he is told and taught, but from a tactical and -mechanical standpoint only. Generally he lacks initiative. He tends to be -conservative in his quarterbacking. His errors and mistakes are not the -glaring, positive type, as in the first case cited. Although he is not -brilliant in his quarterbacking, he is dependable. - -The third type of quarterback is the one every coach is seeking. He -directs his team to maximum results. He is a student of the game. He is -logical in his thinking, and bold in his action when necessary to win the -football game. He is confident, which in turn gives his team confidence -in him and the offense. He is a winner through preparation, and he will -give you winners through his action and leadership. Unfortunately there -are few such quarterbacks of this particular type. Consequently you must -take what you have and develop what you’ve got. Regardless, however, a -good quarterback must be a natural leader, be smart, have initiative and -resourcefulness, be unselfish, have a good voice, and good mechanical -ability. If your quarterback either lacks the ability to select the -proper plays, or does not have the natural ability to inspire your team -to do its best on every play, it is not likely you will have a winner. - -From time to time I have been blessed with smart quarterbacks—and we -have had winners then. I attribute much of this success to my backfield -coaches who have spent considerable time with the quarterbacks teaching -them the what, when, why and how of offensive football, and a knowledge -of defensive football so they can do an intelligent job of field -generalship. As I indicated previously, without proper play selection it -is almost impossible to win the tough football games. - - -FIELD POSITION - -Of the many factors that go into selecting a play, probably the most -important single factor is field position. To aid our quarterback in his -play selection, we divide the field into different areas and zones, as -illustrated in Figure 116. Each zone is given a name, and there are some -very important “musts” concerning each area. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 116] - -We divide the field into the following areas and zones, with the most -important coaching points listed as follows: - - -_The “Must” Zone_ (Goal Line to 3-Yard Line) - -In this zone we _must_ move the ball out at least to the 3-yard line so -it will be possible to kick from spread formation. Our kicker stands -back 13 yards deep when we kick from our spread kick formation. - - -_The Three-Down Zone_ (3-Yard Line to 25-Yard Line) - -1. Normally we will kick on third down with five yards or more to go. - -2. We _must_ make a first down with three plays. - -3. We do not like to punt while in this zone. If we can hold the football -until we get past the 25-yard line, we can put the opposition in their -three-down zone with a 40-yard kick. - -4. Run trap plays. - -5. Anticipate a goal line defense occasionally. - - -_The First Down Zone_ (20-Yard Line to 40-Yard Line) - -We must make a first down so we can continue to control the ball when we -reach the Free Wheeling Zone. - - -_The Free Wheeling Zone_ (40-Yard Line to 40-Yard Line) - -1. Easiest part of the field to score from. - -2. Go into our game planned offense. - -3. It is a guessing game until you make a good gain, then you should -be a play ahead of the defense. Once you gain this advantage, keep the -pressure on the defense. - - -_The Scoring Zone_ (40-Yard Line to 20-Yard Line) - -1. Try to score with a trick play or a scoring play which you have set up. - -2. You may use a play the scouting report indicates should work. - -3. Figure on four downs to make the 10 yards. - - -_The Gut Zone_ (20-Yard Line to 4-Yard Line) - -1. Must “out gut” them. - -2. Do not lose ground. - -3. Try to get five yards or more on first down. - -4. Pass on first down or waste down. - -5. Must maintain control of the football. - - -_The Self-Scoring Zone_ (4-Yard Line to Goal Line) - -1. Minimum handling of the football. - -2. Score yourself if you have a play per yard. - -3. Do not pull linemen. - -4. Give the football to the best ball carrier. - -5. Must score. - - -_Our Three MUSTS_: - -Our quarterback must continuously remind our team of three very important -principles affecting our offense, which are as follows: - -1. We _must not_ get a penalty. - -2. We _must not_ break an offensive signal. - -3. We _must_ get our men (blocks). - -After your quarterback is thoroughly familiar with the zones and their -relationship to each other, then you can do an intelligent job of -instructing and teaching him which plays should be run in the various -zones. Consequently he will have a better understanding of field position. - - -RECOGNIZING AND ATTACKING DEFENSES - -When working with our quarterbacks “picking” a defense, we never tell -them to attack the opposition’s weakness but merely to run away from -their strength. The only time your quarterback really needs to know how -to recognize a defense and its strengths and weaknesses is when he is -changing plays at the line of scrimmage. Otherwise your quarterback will -call specific plays in certain zones or areas according to your scouting -report and game plans. - -There are two basic defensive alignments, which are _even_ and _odd_. If -there are defensive men playing over our guards, we call this an _even_ -defense. If there are no defensive men playing over our offensive guards, -we call this an _odd_ defense. - -With respect to the secondary, there are two alignments. They are -_3-deep_ and _box_. If there is a safety man, it is a _3-deep_ secondary -and an 8-man defensive front. If there is no safety man, it is a _box_ -defense and there are nine men in close proximity to the line of -scrimmage, or a 9-man front. - - -_Recognizing and Attacking an 8-Man Front_ - -After the quarterback has determined whether the defense is odd or even, -and the secondary is 3-deep or box, he should then look and determine -the number of men who are playing outside of his offensive end. By -doing this he can determine if the strength of the defense is inside -or outside. If there are two or more men outside of his offensive end, -as illustrated in Figure 117, the strength of the defense is wide. -Consequently the quarterback should run inside plays, away from the -strength of the defense. As illustrated in Figure 117, by looking through -the inside and outside lanes it is easy to see these defenses are -fundamentally the same. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 117] - -You can definitely run against an 8-man front, as illustrated in Figure -117, because by splitting properly the defense has only two men outside -of the offensive ends. Consequently you can run wide. Or the defense must -have four men or less inside your end, in which event you can run inside -with your basic offensive attack. - -The defensive team playing a gap 8 defense, as illustrated in Figure -118, is trying to get penetration by shooting the gaps. The quarterback -must recognize what the opposition is attempting to do, and he must -eliminate the bad play. Consequently he should work slightly off the line -of scrimmage in order to avoid being tackled before he can hand-off. The -strength of the defense is inside. Consequently the quarterback must run -the corners. The game situation and field position will determine which -play the quarterback will call. The quarterback should never throw a -counter pass or a back up pass versus the gap 8 defense because all the -defenders cannot be blocked. He stands a better chance of scoring if he -selects a corner pass. The block or action pass is very good because it -helps to eliminate the bad play. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 118] - - -_Recognizing and Attacking a 9-Man Front_ - -If it is not a 3-deep secondary, then it is a 9-man front. All 9-man -fronts are basically the same, as I have illustrated in Figure 119. - -The quarterback wants to run at the man who is isolated in the defense, -and in most cases it is the defensive man over the offensive center’s -area. The attack can go wide, too, but the offensive team must do an -intelligent job of splitting in order to draw the defense in tight. If -the offensive guards take wide splits and the defensive men move out -with them, the defensive man over the center will be isolated and the -quarterback can direct his attack toward the middle. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 119] - -The corner passes versus a 9-man front, with the quarterback exercising -his option of running or passing, are excellent because of the pressure -exerted on the corner man. If he drops off to cover an area for the pass, -the quarterback must run with the football. If he rushes to contain the -passer, the short flat is open for a pass. - -It is very important to teach your quarterbacks the different defenses, -and the strength of each defensive alignment. As I mentioned previously, -we teach the quarterbacks to run away from the strength of the various -alignments. The quarterback must also be aware of the fact that he does -not have to whip the entire defense, but only the weak area in the -defense. If a defensive man is isolated or if there is not a defensive -man on the line in a particular area, we consider this the weak part of a -defensive alignment. - - -_Playing the Game on a Blackboard_ - -We have a number of meetings with our quarterbacks going over strategy -and game situations and drilling them in the principles of quarterbacking -and field generalship. It is difficult to expect a quarterback to make -the correct decision at a critical time in a game unless he has been -drilled to react to such a situation. With this in mind, for years I have -used the procedure of having our quarterback coach and the quarterbacks -play a game of football on the blackboard. - -In order to explain our procedure more clearly, let’s assume it is early -September and we are preparing for our opening game with the University -of Georgia. We have been drilling our quarterbacks daily on the defenses -we expect Georgia to use in various parts of the field. We have been -drilling them on how to attack these particular defenses with our -offense. With this basic information, we are now ready to work with the -quarterbacks at the blackboard playing our football game. - -A coach goes to the blackboard and draws a diagram of a football field, -along with the defenses we expect Georgia to use on the hash mark, in the -middle of the field, on the goal line, and in a short yardage situation. -On the board the coach will also list the backfield personnel, so the -quarterback will have an opportunity to use his men properly. To digress -for a second: the quarterback uses the wrong judgment if he calls for -sweeps with a slow backfield, does not employ the best blocker to block, -etc. The quarterback must know his offensive personnel thoroughly. - -The coach then explains to the quarterbacks, who are observing what he -is writing on the blackboard, the condition of the field, wind, and the -other tactical factors. It is now time to play the game with a particular -quarterback. - -The coach will select a quarterback and say, for example, “Georgia -kicked-off to us and we returned the ball to the 25-yard line on the -right hash mark.” The coach will plot the position on the diagram. The -quarterback will then take into consideration the defensive alignment we -expect Georgia to employ in this particular section of the field, and the -quarterback must call a play accordingly. If he makes what the coach -considers a good call, the coach will say, “You made four yards on the -play. It is now second and six.” If the quarterback makes a bad call, the -coach will say, “You lost three yards on the play,” and he will explain -why the call was a poor one. If the quarterback takes too long in calling -his play, he receives a five yard penalty. When the quarterback makes a -very good call, the coach gives him a long gain or a touchdown. - -By using this game, a quarterback can learn to call plays by anticipating -defenses in areas all over the football field. He also learns to use his -personnel properly. We have found this game at the blackboard has helped -our quarterbacks tremendously. - -While one quarterback is playing the game, the other quarterbacks are -listening. If the boy at the board fails to make a first down, he must -punt, and the coach appoints another quarterback to take over. After each -play the coach will plot the position of the ball on the diagram, and -the players learn to know which defenses to expect. We have found, with -other things being equal, the quarterback who has the mental ability to -sustain the ball for a long drive and a touchdown will usually be your -best quarterback. - -We also spend quite a bit of time going over situations. The coach will -cite a specific situation, and then say, “What would you do in this -situation?” The situations are usually the clutch ones, and should the -quarterback select the wrong answer in the game it is likely to lose the -contest. Even though you drill the quarterbacks there is no fool-proof -method of making certain they will always make the right decision. The -following example will illustrate my point. - -Early in September during our 1959 season, our backfield coach, Phil -Cutchin, was going over situations with our quarterbacks and said, “We -are playing the University of Houston (our second game). We are ahead by -six points. There are five minutes remaining to play. We are on our own -18-yard line. It is a first-and-10 situation, and Houston is playing a -5-4 defense. What would you do?” One quarterback said quickly, “Coach, I -would throw a corner pass into the sideline.” Phil answered, “Yes, and -they would intercept the pass, return it for a touchdown, kick the extra -point, and we would lose the game, 7-6.” The quarterback saw his mistake -and said he was glad we had gone over this particular situation. - -Three weeks later the same quarterback was faced with almost the -identical situation, except that we were ahead by three points. The other -factors were the same as previously cited. What did the quarterback do? -He threw the corner pass into the sideline, and Houston intercepted it. -Fortunately Houston did not score! The point I am trying to make is your -quarterbacks will still make mistakes even after you have worked with -them. - - -THE QUARTERBACK’S GUIDE - -In order for a quarterback to be outstanding, he must be cognizant of -certain pertinent information relating to his offense, the opposition’s -defense, tactical and strategical information, and the principles of -quarterbacking and field generalship. - - -_Offensive, Defensive and Tactical Information_ - -The following information is of value and significance to the quarterback: - - -_Information a Quarterback Must Know About His Own Offense_: - -1. Know your teammates thoroughly, including your best ball carrier, your -best blocker, best pass receiver, best faker, etc. - -2. Know all of your plays and everyone’s blocking assignments. - -3. Know where every receiver is on every pass pattern. - -4. Know your best play and pass against every defense. - -5. Know and understand how each play fits into a series. - -6. Know and remember the plays that are working—keep running them. - -7. Know the reasons for the proper line splits. - -8. Know the plays the players have the most confidence in. - -9. Know the best plays for special situations—draw, screen, etc. - -10. Know how to stop the clock. - - -_Information a Quarterback Must Know About the Defense_: - -1. What defense are they playing? - -2. Who is making the tackles? - -3. Are they stunting their defenses? - -4. What type of pass coverage do they use? - -5. Do the linebackers run through? - -6. Are the ends crashing? - -7. Who is tackling the passer? - -8. Who is the best defensive man? - -9. Which man can we isolate? - -10. How quickly does the secondary revolve? - - -_Information a Quarterback Must Know About the Game_: - -1. Time left to play is a big factor. - -2. Time outs left. - -3. Weather and field condition. - -4. Know which down it is at all times. - -5. Field position. - -6. What yard line the ball is on. - -7. Which zone the ball is in. - - -_Game Strategy_ - -The following game strategy information is of value and significance to -the quarterback: - - -_General Information_: - -1. Always know score, time to play, yards to go and down. - -2. Know your field zones, and avoid giving the ball to the opposition in -the 4-down zone. - -3. You are playing for a victory, but remember a tie is better than a -defeat. - -4. Know your own personnel and each man’s capabilities. - -5. Know all there is to know about your opponents by studying scouting -reports and movies. - -6. Know your offense, including the blocking assignments. - -7. Be able to recognize any defensive alignment. - -8. Understand the importance of field position. - -9. Know when not to pass. - -10. Know when to kick. - -11. Use the wind intelligently. - -12. Know when not to try for a score. - - -_When To Kick_: - -1. When in doubt. - -2. Normally for every touchdown lead you have, you should kick a down -earlier. - -3. Kick early with a strong wind or against a weak offense. From 40 to -40-yard line, kick straight away and high. Inside 40-yard line kick out -of bounds. - -4. When score is even, or you are ahead, always make safe kick to 3-down -zone. - -5. Kick early on a wet field; let the opponents handle the ball. - - -_When Not To Pass_: - -1. When the opponent expects a pass. - -2. When you have two downs to make six yards or less. - -3. In your own territory, just before half-time. - -4. When backed up and you are ahead. - - -_Type Of Pass To Throw_: - -1. On long yardage, throw short passes or to third man out. Draws, -screens. - -2. On first down, play passes. - -3. On waste downs, play passes, long passes, and screens. - -4. When time is short, throw near sideline. - -5. When in doubt, throw optional passes. - - -_On Wet Field_: - -1. Play conservatively and kick early. - -2. No difficult ball handling. - -3. Avoid bad places on field, also wide plays and cut backs. - -4. Do not be afraid to pass. - -5. Doubt the wisdom of a quick kick. - - -_When Not To Try For Score_: - -1. Just before half time, behind your own 40-yard line. - -2. When you are running clock out. - -3. When you are preparing to give a safety. - -4. When you have one down to make first down—go for first down. - - -_When To Try To Score In One Play_: - -1. When you have mental edge on opponent following a block kick, a -recovered fumble, or an intercepted pass in the opponent’s territory. - -2. Just before half-time in the opponent’s territory. - -3. On waste down in opponent’s territory. - -_When To Run Your Best Ball Carrier Behind Best Blockers_: - -1. When you must have a first down. - -2. In four down zone going in for a score. - -3. Clutch down in danger zone, coming out. - -4. Save your best ball carrier in the free wheeling zone. - -5. Do not use him first play after a long run. - - -_What To Do On Clutch Down_: - -1. Fake and give. - -2. Some kind of an optional play. - -3. Best ball carrier behind best blocker. - -4. Waste man effectively. - -5. When trying to save time, tell ball carrier to go out of bounds. - - -_Scoring Area_: - -1. Waste man effectively. - -2. Best ball carrier behind strongest blockers. - -3. First down inside three—run ball yourself. No ball handling. - -4. Make sure that on fourth down you will have the ball in the middle of -the field where you can try any type of a scoring play. - - -_What To Run on Waste Down_: - -1. Safe, long gainers. - -2. Fake-give, or optionals are normally effective. - - -_When To Speed Up Offense_: - -1. When you are behind. - -2. Inside the opponent’s 15-yard line. - -3. When you have the wind to your back. - - -_When To Slow Down Your Offense_: - -1. When you are trying to kill time. - -2. Just before the half in your own territory and you are ahead. - -3. Fourth quarter, if more than one touchdown ahead. - -4. When the wind is against you. - - -_Free Wheeling Zone_: - -1. Try for long gainer. - -2. Use sideline intelligently. - -3. Use wind intelligently. - -4. Use best ball carrier as decoy. - -5. Utilize various formations. - -6. Try long gainer on first down and second down and go for first down on -third down. - -7. Call trick plays that have been set up earlier. - -8. Try to keep ball in middle of field. - - -_Quarterbacks Must Remember_: - -1. Poor field position calls for conservative plays. - -2. When you are ahead and the game is drawing to a close, play slowly, -conservatively, and very deliberately. - -3. When you are behind and the game is drawing to a close, play faster, -be more reckless, and get the ball out of bounds to stop the clock. - -4. When you are in scoring territory, you _must_ score. Any yardage -gained without scoring is of slight value only. - -5. Any yardage you make deep in your own territory which does not serve -to get the team into the free wheeling zone is of slight value. - -6. If you are ahead by 11 points and there is not more than five minutes -remaining to play and there is a strong wind against you, it is smart to -take a safety instead of trying to punt out from inside your 10-yard line. - -7. Time works with you when you are ahead; against you when your team is -behind in score. - -8. Figure what the defense would normally expect in any given situation, -and then do the opposite. - -9. If a play fails, you must know why. - - -_Tips for Quarterbacks_: - -1. You must have genuine confidence in yourself and your ability. - -2. You must have the confidence and respect of your team. - -3. You must have personality and leadership; then exercise it. - -4. You must know the ability of your own personnel. - -5. Play the percentages for ultimate team victory. Consequently you must -study scouting reports and have a clear picture of the game plan. You -must be able to recognize defenses immediately, and be able to direct -your attack away from the strength of the defense. You should think with -the defensive signal caller by putting yourself in his place. Remember it -is a guessing game until you make a gain. After a gain you should be one -play ahead of the defense. - -6. Eliminate bad plays as they will defeat us. Any play that does not -gain is a bad play. Only a fumble or a penalty can stop our offense if -you eliminate the bad plays. - -7. Run more offensive plays by getting out of the huddle quickly. - -8. After a penalty or a time out, have your play called and the team -ready to play at the line of scrimmage. Do not follow this procedure when -trying to run out the clock. - -9. Try to score in one play after a break in an effort to demoralize -the defense. Should you follow this procedure several times and not be -successful, discontinue it; otherwise, you will demoralize your own team. - -10. _Never_ try to score just before the half from deep in your own -territory. Run out the clock and get a fresh start the second half. - -11. When you are behind, _never_ try to score in one play. Play the game -as if it were a tie contest; otherwise, you can be out of the game before -you realize it. - -12. Normally we like to pass on first down and on a waste down. On short -yardage, throw play passes. On long yardage, throw in front of the deep -men. - -13. First down is your important call. If you make five yards or more, -you have the advantage. If you fail to make four yards, the defense has -the advantage. - -14. On clutch downs and short yardage, run fake gives because the defense -must go to the first fake under such circumstances. - -15. Remind your line to tighten up on the goal line, and do not call -plays that require linemen to pull as the defense may break through and -throw us for a loss. - -16. Do not pull a play out of the hat. If you are in doubt, run an option -run-pass. - -17. We will rehearse weekly every situation possible, such as saving -time, killing time, giving up a safety, side line offense, etc., so that -you will automatically make the right decisions in the game. - - -CONCLUSION - -It is virtually impossible for a quarterback to know and do everything -correctly. However, a coach must work with his quarterback, and the -individual must spend many additional hours studying and preparing -himself so he will be able to handle any situation that arises. It is an -absolute must for your quarterback to be well prepared if you expect to -have a successful football team. If you are rebuilding a football team, -it is very important for you to pick your quarterback first, find out -what he can do well, and then build your offense around him. - - - - -CHAPTER 10 - -Planning for a Game - - -Planning for any phase of football is important, but planning for a -particular game is vitally important. I tell my players our staff will -study, prepare and plan one hour for every minute the players are on the -practice field. Then we actually spend this much time in our practice and -game preparation. The typical fan has little conception of the amount of -time we spend planning for a single football game. - - -OUT-OF-SEASON PLANNING - -Our planning commences in early summer when I assign each assistant coach -to a particular game opponent for the coming season. If we do not have as -many coaches as we have football games, several assistants will have to -double up and prepare for two opponents. - -Each coach will secure as many movies as possible on his particular -opponent and break-down the films. He also familiarizes himself with the -returning personnel, and studies each player’s characteristics, strengths -and weaknesses. The coach will observe the returning quarterback’s -movements in particular, looking for tip-offs. Does he look at his -receiver all the way downfield? Does he have a favorite pass route? Does -he have a favorite receiver? Does he favor action or drop back passes? -Does he like to operate to his left or right? Such information, along -with additional scouting information, helps us get a “book” on the -quarterback. - -It is important to know the opposition’s strongest and weakest positions -on offense and defense. The coach looks at the films, and attempts to -get as much reliable and valid information as possible from them. Then -when the coach (scout) sees his opposition in the fall he will do a -better job of scouting them because he is familiar with the offense, -defense, and the returning personnel. - - -IN-SEASON PLANNING - -During the season we like to see an opponent play at least three times. -We feel we can do a better job of planning after we have a fairly clear -understanding of what our opponents are likely to do. We want to have a -fairly definite idea of what our opposition will do offensively in the -following situations: - - 1. First down and 10 yards to go. - - 2. Second down and long yardage. - - 3. Second down and short yardage. - - 4. Third down and long yardage. - - 5. Third down and short yardage. - - 6. Fourth down and short yardage. - - 7. Unusual and special situations. - -Conversely, we want to find out what our opposition will do defensively -versus the above situations. - -In order to give you a run-down of our procedures, let’s consider a -typical week preceding Saturday’s game. - - -_Sunday’s Schedule_ - -The coaching staff will meet together early Sunday morning and go over -the film of Saturday’s game. While the assistant coaches are studying and -grading the film, I will meet with the assistant coach who scouted the -team we will be playing this coming Saturday. In addition to receiving a -thorough scouting report from him, I want his recommendations offensively -and defensively of what we should do against the opponent. The scout will -then complete his report as he will present it to the squad members on -Monday night. - -In the meantime the other assistant coaches have completed their grading -of the film, and then we discuss personnel. As the result of game -performance, we commence to make plans as to the personnel we will be -using in the upcoming game. - - -_Monday’s Schedule_ - -On Monday morning the scout will give his report to our entire staff. He -then answers questions relating to the opponent we will be playing on -Saturday. After we have fully discussed the opposition from every aspect, -our defensive coaches will have a separate meeting and make plans to set -up the defenses which they would like to use. The offensive coaches have -a similar meeting, and map out their strategy versus all of the various -defenses the opposition has used in various situations. We recognize the -fact that some plays are good only against certain defenses and not all -plays are successful against all defenses. Therefore, we try to limit our -offense to the best possible plays against our opposition’s anticipated -defenses. Of course, we must have a valid, reliable, comprehensive -scouting report in order to make our plans. We also understand and -recognize the fact that some teams will change practically their entire -offensive system from game to game. However, this gives such teams only -one week to perfect a new “favorite” series, and this is almost an -impossible feat. - -All of our coaches will meet together again around 10:30 A.M., with the -defensive coaches making their recommendations for Saturday’s opponent. -The strategy is discussed at length before a decision is reached. Let me -digress for just a second to say that once we have made our decisions, -we will stick with them tenaciously for fear of confusing our players by -changing defenses later in the week. - -The procedure is repeated again, this time with the offensive coaches. -All coaches, regardless of position or whether they specialize in offense -or defense, will enter the discussion. We have found following such a -procedure helps us do a better job of coaching, and some of our best -suggestions relating to offense have come from our defensive coaches, and -vice versa, defensive suggestions have come from the offensive coaches. -We are always open to suggestions! - -After we have made our plans, we can then make out our work schedule -for Monday afternoon. Although I usually make out the remainder of -the schedule for the week each night after practice, you can see the -necessity of waiting until Monday in order to make out the day’s work -schedule. - -After lunch we will have a short squad meeting. First, we go over last -Saturday’s game discussing both the good and bad points. Then we will -inform the squad of our plans for this coming Saturday’s game, and change -assignments, make adjustments, etc., at this time. - -The boys who do not have late afternoon classes meet at 3:30 P.M., and -we go over last week’s game movie. Each coach will sit with the players -whom he has graded and discuss their performance in the film. If time -permits, we like to have the ends and backs meet in one group and the -interior linemen in another group for separate viewings of the film. We -feel such a practice is highly desirable and eliminates the confusion -that generally occurs when all of the players view the game film at the -same time. - -On Monday and Friday our regular practice commences at 5:30 P.M., -since our boys take their laboratory classes on these two days. It is -impossible to set up a practice schedule if key personnel are absent due -to late labs every day of the week. - -The boys who played in Saturday’s game will be out in sweat clothes for -approximately 45-50 minutes. They will stretch and loosen up, before we -spend most of the time learning and rehearsing the defenses they will -be using for this coming Saturday’s opponent. Our procedure is to have -the “red shirts” come out of the huddle and line up in the different -offensive formations we expect to face, and our defense will adjust -accordingly. For the last 15 minutes of the session a scrub team will run -the opposition’s favorite plays about half speed so the regulars will -have an opportunity to familiarize themselves with the offense. Then the -boys in sweat clothes take several short sprints and we send them to the -showers. - -The boys who did not play in last Saturday’s game have a good workout -emphasizing and practicing fundamentals. At times we terminate Monday’s -practice session with a short scrimmage against the freshman squad. - -After a late dinner on Monday night, we have another squad meeting where -the scout will give a complete oral report to the players on our upcoming -opponent. He will discuss personnel, favorite plays, passes, defenses, -kicking game, and any additional pertinent information relating to the -opposition. He then hands out a comprehensive typed scout report to the -squad members. Frankly, I do not believe a boy can do an intelligent job -of playing without studying his scouting report. - - -_Tuesday’s Schedule_ - -We will have a staff meeting early on Tuesday morning in order to set -up the practice schedule for the afternoon. A typical Tuesday practice -session will last approximately one hour and 35 minutes, plus the last -period which does not have a specific time limit for the reasons I -explained previously. - -Our schedule is generally set up so that the first five minutes the -linemen will be firing out and hitting the big sled or seven dummies, and -the backs will be having a fumble drill or working on stance and starts. -Our exercises and agility drills precede this drill for the linemen and -backs. - -The second period will usually be 20 minutes in duration, which will vary -from week to week according to our needs. A typical period will have our -first team secondary working on pass defense against a scrub team who -will be throwing the opponent’s passes. At the same time, in another -area we will have our first and second team guards and tackles working -on defensive techniques. Our backs will be divided into two groups. One -group will work on our polish drill, and the other on the secondary -drill. Our third and fourth lines will be working as teams on blocking. - -At the termination of the previously mentioned 20 minute period, we -exchange the backs and linemen, and the coaches repeat the drills again -with their new groups. - -Our next period will be working on individual techniques by positions -for approximately 15 minutes’ duration. During this time our coaches -generally work on weaknesses or correct errors which they observed -in last Saturday’s game film. Or they will work by positions on -recommendations which were made at Monday’s coaches’ meeting. - -Our team drills and “team learning” are next on Tuesday’s practice -schedule. The first and third teams will work on our offense for -Saturday’s game. The first team will run about three plays to one -compared to the third team. During this time the second team will work on -defense against the scrub team, which will be running the opposition’s -plays and passes. At the termination of 20-25 minutes the first and -second teams will change around, with the first team working on defense, -and the second and third teams working on offense. This period continues -for 20-25 minutes. - -The first and second teams will work on the kicking game next. As I -stated previously, we use our kicking game as a conditioner and at the -same time doing something functional with respect to perfecting our -protection and coverage. When they do it properly, normally this phase -of the practice schedule lasts 10-12 minutes. If not executed to our -satisfaction, the period is longer in duration. While the first two units -are working on their kicking game, the third team will usually be working -on their defensive play. After completing their 20 minutes’ defensive -drill, they must have their kicking game practice. - -After we have set up Tuesday afternoon’s schedule we will amend offensive -and defensive plans if necessary. We generally spend the remainder of -Tuesday morning evaluating player personnel. - -After lunch we will have a short squad meeting for about 15-20 minutes if -we have amended our offensive or defensive plans or if we are going to -make any changes of any nature involving the offense or defense. - -Some time after lunch and before our specialists take the field at -3:10, with our regular scheduled practice commencing at 3:30 P.M., our -defensive coach will meet with our defensive signal callers and our -offensive coach will meet with our quarterbacks, and go over defensive -and offensive plans and strategy, respectively. - -After practice we will have a brief staff meeting again and we will -review our entire practice schedule. At this time I want my assistant -coaches to make recommendations for the next day as I want to work on the -schedule at night for the following day. I discussed our procedures in -Chapter 3. - - -_Wednesday’s Schedule_ - -The procedure is the same as previously—staff meeting and set up the -afternoon’s practice schedule, which will be about one hour and 30 -minutes, excluding the last drill which is not timed. - -After setting up the exercises and the agility drills, we will have -our linemen firing out, the same as on Tuesday, and the backs will be -polishing plays. - -The next 25 minute period will be first team on defense against the scrub -team, and they will practice defense over the field. The scrub team will -run the opposition’s plays and tendencies, and the defense is full speed -with the exception of tackling the ball carrier. During this time, on -another field our second and third teams will be running our offense -versus the opposition’s defenses. - -During the next period the first and second teams will exchange and -repeat the same drills listed above. - -The next period will usually be 20 minutes’ duration with the third team -working on defense over the field, and the first and second teams working -on special situations such as quick kicks, passes, etc. - -The next period will be devoted to our kicking game. We also usually have -a few goal line drives on Wednesday. - -Our Wednesday’s practice schedule will vary more than the other days -because we spend about 20 minutes on group drills and about six minutes -full speed on goal line defense, and phases of this nature. - -After Wednesday’s schedule is completed and out of the way, the staff -will usually go to the projection room and view films of this week’s -opponent. - -After lunch we will again have a short meeting and inform the squad of -any changes we have made or plan on making. We will also discuss the -previous day’s practice. - -The defensive signal callers and the quarterbacks will meet separately -with their respective coaches for about 20 minutes, which is our usual -procedure daily during the football season. - -After Wednesday evening’s dinner we have a squad meeting and go over the -film of the opponent we will be playing on Saturday. - - -_Thursday’s Schedule_ - -Thursday morning we will again have an early staff meeting and we set up -the afternoon practice schedule first. - -After five minutes of firing out for the linemen as units, and the backs -working on stance and starts or a quick fumble drill, we will have three -25 minute periods where we will stress learning and perfection more than -body contact. - -We will have three different groups working at the same time. The first -unit will be working on offense versus the opposition’s defenses, over -the field. The second unit will be working on their defenses versus the -opposition’s offense, being run by the scrubs over the field. The purpose -of this is to check our defensive signal caller to see that he is calling -the correct defense in various sections of the field. In a third area we -will have the third team working on all phases of the kicking game, such -as quick kicks, spread punt, punt returns, on-side kick, etc. - -At the termination of the 25 minute period, the teams will change. The -first unit will go to the defensive drill; the second unit to the kicking -drill; and the third unit will go to offense. - -When the second 25 minute period has terminated, we will change for the -third period. Following such a procedure gives each unit 25 minutes of -offense, of defense, and on the kicking game. Then we send the players -to the showers because we do not want them to leave their game on the -practice field and be tired on Saturday. - -After Thursday’s schedule is set, the staff will spend the remainder -of the morning discussing the progress which has been made to date in -preparation for our forthcoming opponent. We also discuss personnel at -this time. - -After lunch we will have a very short meeting, merely taking time to -discuss or review our defensive game plans. Our defensive signal callers -and quarterbacks will meet as usual, as I mentioned previously. Our -regular practice session will commence at 3:30 P.M. - -The coaches meet after practice, as is our usual procedure. We do not -meet with the squad on Thursday evening after dinner, however. - - -_Friday’s Schedule_ - -Since Friday’s practice schedule will not be longer than 30 minutes’ -duration, we do not have to spend much time in setting it up. We will -work as a group and have a short, snappy workout in sweat clothes, going -over all of the situations that are likely to occur during the game. -After we rehearse kick-offs, returns, on-side kicks, and a couple of goal -line drives, we send the boys in. As I stated previously, due to Friday -afternoon labs, our practice session will commence at 5:30 P.M. - -A typical Friday evening dinner menu, if we are playing on Saturday -afternoon, would be as follows: - - Tomato soup - Fruit cocktail cup - 14 ounce choice sirloin strip, medium well done - One-half baked potato mashed, topped with American cheese - Green beans - Assorted bread (but no hard French bread) - One pint of milk or iced tea - Vanilla ice cream, one dip. - -After dinner we will go to a movie as a group or we go some place where -we will all be together. At 10 P.M. the team will return from the movie -to the dormitory or hotel where they are staying. Lights will go out and -players will be in bed by 10:20 P.M. the night before a game. - - -_Saturday’s Schedule_ - -On Saturday morning the football managers will telephone the players in -their rooms at 8:30 A.M. The boys who want coffee or juice will be served -at 9 A.M. The pre-game meal will be served at 10 A.M., and will consist -of the following: - - 11-12 ounce choice sirloin strip, well done - Green peas - Dry toast, two slices (no butter) - Honey - Hot tea (no cream). - -We will have a squad meeting at 10:30 A.M., and leave for the stadium at -12:10 P.M., preparing to meet our opposition at 2 P.M. During the squad -meeting we will go over all tricky situations that might arise during the -game. After the meeting the defensive and offensive coaches will meet -with the signal callers and quarterbacks respectively, and review our -final game plans. - -After we arrive at the stadium, we send our passers out to warm up -about 31 minutes before game time, and the backs and ends will come out -about 26 minutes before game time. Our linemen start warming up about -30 minutes before the game. As 2 P.M. approaches, we always feel we -are ready and we have done the very best we can to get ready for our -particular opponent. - -I failed to mention a procedure we follow which we think is highly -desirable. During the week of the game, the assistant coach who scouted -Saturday’s opponent lives in the football dormitory with the players. -From 7:30-10:00 P.M. nightly, when we do not have squad meetings, he will -show films of the opposition in the dormitory. He will answer questions -and give the players any information they are seeking on our opposition. -We find our players do a better job when they understand _why_ we ask -them to do something. On the field many times we do not have the time -to explain _why_. The assistant in the dormitory does have the time to -explain _why_ and as a result the players do a more intelligent and -better job of playing. - - -GRADING THE GAME FILM - -Grading the game film is a very definite part of our planning. If we do -not know who is doing what during a game, we can’t do an intelligent job -of planning and coaching. I am sold on our grading system, and we feel -that through the study of films we can determine who to play, and also -who _not_ to play, in critical situations. Knowing this information in -advance has won a number of football games for us. - -Our procedure for grading films is for one coach to take one position -and grade every player in that position offensively and defensively. It -is possible for a player to get one of three possible scores, plus (+), -minus (-), or ungradable (U), on each play. Our criteria is as follows: - -_Plus_ (+)—If the boy carries out his assignment and gets his job done -properly, his coach will give him a plus. His technique of execution -might not be the way he was taught, but we are concerned with the fact -either he did or did not do his job. - -_Minus_ (-)—If the player failed to carry out his assignment and/or his -man “whipped” him, then he is graded minus (for the particular play). - -_Ungradable_ (_U_)—If a player is not shown in the picture or he does not -have the opportunity to help out on the play, he is ungradable and would -receive (U). An example would be the defensive right end when the play -goes away from him and in all probability he will not have an opportunity -to take part in the play. - -After getting a grade for each play, like symbols are added together, -and the total number of offensive (or defensive) plays participated in -to determine percentages. Divide the sum total of plus and minus signs -into the total number of plus signs in order to arrive at the percentage -of plays that got the job done. We have found that a player must grade -at least 61% on offense and on defense in order to be a winning football -player. - -We grade the offense and defense separately. If a player consistently -makes a good grade on defense and a poor grade on offense, we know either -we have to play him only on defense or we must give him more offensive -work. - -We have several other expressions, which we have borrowed from baseball -terminology, that we use in our grading system. They are as follows: - -_RBI_—Stands for runs batted in, and means something extra good, such as -intercepting a pass, causing or recovering a fumble, blocking a punt, -throwing a key block—a real clutch play. These are what we call the “big -plays” and they are the ones that win the tough games for you. If your -team does not make many big plays, you will not win many tough games. -We place a great deal of emphasis on the big play. Frankly, we would -rather have a boy make three or four RBI’s, even though his grade is only -50-55%, rather than have a boy get 65-68% and never make any big plays. - -_Errors_—If a player busts an assignment, gets a penalty, misses a tackle -in open field, permits a receiver to get behind him, fumbles the ball, or -commits some act of a similar negative nature, we consider this bad and -he is given an error. A player who consistently makes two or three errors -per game simply cannot play for us. His play will cost you more ball -games than you will ever win with him. Consequently, we watch the errors -column very closely when we are grading film. - - -CONCLUSION - -Coaching football is a race against time. Time lost on the practice field -can never be regained. We attempt to utilize every minute possible in -preparing for our opponents and our practice sessions. - - - - -CHAPTER 11 - -Our Drills - - -There are many good football drills. Since we place a great deal of -emphasis on defensive football, it is only natural our drills for the -most part emphasize individual and team defensive techniques. - - -DRILLS FOR THE SECONDARY - -The following drills are used to teach individual and team techniques for -the defensive secondary: - - -_Defensive Cuts Drill_ (6-8 men): - -With a defensive man standing in a good football position, the coach will -move the ball back and forth, and the player will plant, pivot to the -inside and sprint in the direction the coach is pointing the football. He -will then throw the football and the defensive man will sprint to catch -it. The Defensive Cuts Drill is illustrated in Figure 120. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 120] - - -_Intercept Drill_ (8-10 men): - -Eight or 10 secondary men will line up behind each other. One player at -a time will run toward the coach who will throw the football directly at -the player, or to either side of him. The defensive man should intercept -the pass, as illustrated in Figure 121. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 121] - - -_Tip Drill_ (8-10 men): - -Following the same line up and procedure described previously for the -Intercept Drill, instead of the player catching the football he tips it -back to another player who is training him, who intercepts the pass. The -Tip Drill is illustrated in Figure 122. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 122] - - -_Running the Line Drill_ (6-8 men): - -A defensive man will line up straddling a line about 35 yards long, -facing the coach. On a command from the coach, the player will start -backwards using a cross-over step but keeping his eyes and head on the -coach. He will try to change direction as many times as possible, always -using a cross-over step, keeping his eye on the coach (passer), as he -zigzags properly from one side to the other down the 35-yard line. -(Running the Line Drill is not illustrated by diagram.) - - -_Covering Third-and-Fourths Drill_ (2 complete defensive secondaries): - -The entire secondary can be set up in a 4-spoke or 5-spoke defense, -as illustrated in Figure 123. A coach, simulating a passer, will stand -facing the unit. He will simulate either an action pass or a drop back -pass, and the men must react properly to the simulated backfield action. -When the ball is thrown, all defenders must sprint for it. The ball is -placed on either hash mark and in the middle of the field and a full -offensive backfield may or may not be used to establish flow for the -defensive secondary’s proper reaction. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 123] - - -_Dog Fight Drill_ (For defensive halfbacks and corner men) (6-8 men): - -Place a defensive halfback or corner man in his regular position. A pass -receiver runs a direct route in front of the defensive man’s regular -position. A coach or passer throws the ball, and we want the defender to -play full speed through the receiver for the football, as illustrated -in Figure 124. It is merely one-on-one and gives both the receiver and -defender practice fighting for the ball. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 124] - - -_Dog Fight Drill for Safety Man_ (8 men): - -We put a safety man in the middle of the field and receivers on each hash -mark. On a signal from the coach, the receivers start down the field and -the passer drops back with the football. The safety man must stay in the -middle of the field as he gets depth in order to be in a position to -cover both receivers. When the ball is thrown, the safety man sprints -full speed for the interception, as illustrated in Figure 125. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 125] - - -_Outside Drill_ (15-25 men): - -We set up a skeleton offensive unit of ends, center and a complete -backfield versus the defensive ends and secondary, as illustrated in -Figure 126. The offense works full speed running its outside plays and -passes, and the defense is drilled in stopping the wide attack. - - -_Big Tip Drill_ (2 complete secondaries): - -The entire defensive perimeter is used in our Big Tip Drill, illustrated -in Figure 127. A coach will establish flow by running to his left or -right simulating backfield action, and the defense must react and rotate -accordingly. The coach will then pass the ball, simulating an action -pass, and the defender nearest to intercept the ball will yell an oral -signal indicating he is going to tip it. The other defenders get in a -good football position, and look for the tip. As the first man tips the -ball, the defender nearest to it will intercept it and return the pass. -The others will head downfield as blockers. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 126] - -[Illustration: FIGURE 127] - - -_Tackling Drill in the Secondary_ (8-10 men): - -Figure 128 illustrates a drill which we use on the sideline, teaching -our backs to utilize the sideline properly as the “twelfth man.” The -dots represent shirts which are placed six yards from the sideline. The -defensive tackler (T) gets in a good football position, which I have -described previously, and makes the ball carrier come to him. The ball -carrier may take any course or use any individual tactic he wishes to -evade the tackler, as long as he stays inside of the six-yard area. We do -not want the tackler to meet the ball carrier head on, but we want him -to approach his man from an angle, keeping leverage on the ball carrier -in order to force him out of bounds. The tackler should keep his head in -front of the ball carrier, and should try to butt the football with his -helmet. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 128] - - -DRILLS FOR THE DEFENSIVE ENDS - -The following drills are used to teach individual and team techniques for -the defensive ends: - - -_Peel-Off Drill_ (10-12 men): - -Figure 129 illustrates a good drill to teach reaction and to protect his -area, which we use for our defensive ends. The end assumes his normal -defensive position. The first backfield blocker attempts to block the -end, then the second, and finally the third blocker. As soon as the first -man leaves, the second starts, and then the third blocker leaves, giving -the defensive end experience in playing one blocker at a time but in -rapid succession. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 129] - - -_“Reading” Drills_ (8-12 men): - -Figure 130 illustrates a “Reading” Drill which we use for our defensive -ends. The end has to play properly the block of the offensive end, -pulling guard, on-side halfback and/or the fullback. These are the -situations he will face in a game. This drill teaches quick reaction and -play recognition for the defensive ends. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 130] - - -_All Secondary Drills_: - -Since we consider our ends as part of our defensive secondary, as I -explained previously, they will take part in all of the drills explained -and illustrated in Figures 120-128, if feasible. - - -DRILLS FOR THE DEFENSIVE INTERIOR LINEMEN - -The following drills are used to teach individual and team techniques to -the interior linemen: - - -_Butt Ball Drill_ (8-10 men): - -An offensive man is given a football and told to run a straight line -laterally back and forth, carrying the ball on the side he is moving -toward. The defensive man must be in a good football position moving back -and forth with the offensive man, butting the football with his forehead. -He bounces back and forth and keeps butting the football trying to knock -it out of the ball carrier’s arm. The tackler’s head should be up and his -back straight. (The Butt Ball Drill is not illustrated by diagram.) - - -_4-on-1 Drill_ (6-8 men): - -Figure 131 illustrates four offensive blockers playing one defensive -man. The coach stands behind the defensive player, and indicates by hand -signal the starting count and the blocking assignments of the offensive -men. The defensive man must react to the various blocks—double team, -wedge, trap, etc., and fights pressure. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 131] - - -_A & M Wave Drill_ (9-12 men): - -On a signal, the offensive men will uncoil on the defensive men, -illustrated in Figure 132. The defenders must control the blockers with -their hands and forearms, locate the ball and pursue in the direction the -coach points or runs with the football. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 132] - - -_3-on-3 Drill_ (16-24 men): - -The offense runs a hand-off to the right or left halfback, or to the -fullback. The coach, standing behind the defensive team, indicates which -back will carry the football. The defensive man varies his techniques -from head on, inside, outside or linebacker. If the play is in one -defensive man’s area, he must whip his blocker and make the play. The -other two defenders take proper pursuit angles on the ball carrier. The -drill is full speed both ways, and we do not want the men stopping until -they hear a whistle. Figure 133 illustrates our alignment for the 3-on-3 -drill. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 133] - - -_Middle Drill_ (14-25 men): - -The middle drill is similar to the previous drill, only the interior -linemen are used offensively and defensively, as illustrated in Figure -134. The defensive alignments are changed around and the offense runs all -situations. At times we use the down marker and chains simulating down -and distance when doing this drill. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 134] - - -_7-Man Spin-Out Drill_ (8-12 men): - -Figure 135 illustrates a player moving from a good defensive position -hitting the sled, spinning out, and hitting every other pad on the -machine. If moving to the right, we want the players to hit the sled with -the right shoulder, keep a tight arc, spin out correctly, and deliver a -good blow to the alternate pad. We drill the players right and left as we -want to give them practice spinning out both ways. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 135] - - -_Circle Drill_ (5-7 men): - -One player gets in the middle of a circle about five yards in diameter -in a good football position. On a signal from the coach the middle man -starts moving his feet, body crouched, pivoting slowly. The coach will -call out a boy’s name who is on the outside of the circle, who will rush -in facing the defender and deliver a shoulder blow. The defender should -step with the foot closest to the rusher and deliver a forearm shiver -or shoulder blow to the man. He should play only two or three men, and -then get out of the circle, permitting another of the men to move to the -middle. Figure 136 illustrates our circle drill. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 136] - - -_Leverage Drill_ (8-12 men): - -Figure 137 illustrates our Leverage Drill and we have two groups going -at the same time in opposite directions. Four blockers are lined up one -behind the other, with the defensive man lined up on the outside shoulder -of the blocker facing him. On a command by the coach, the defender must -play the first blocker with a shiver and the other blockers one at a time -with the forearms, shoulders and hands as he retreats and reacts, not -permitting himself to be hooked from the outside and blocked in. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 137] - - -_Explode Drill_ (9 men): - -The offensive men will line up with their inside knee on the ground, -and the defensive man in the gap between the two offensive men, as -illustrated in Figure 138. The defensive player will explode and uncoil -on his count with his tail down, head up, and feet moving after bringing -them up under him after his initial contact. The coach will give him a -hand signal, and the defensive man must spin out properly, ending up in -a good football position. It is important for the defensive man to get -under the offensive men on his initial charge. We also let the blockers -go full speed and teach the defensive man to react from a two-on-one -block. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 138] - - -_Defensive Reaction Drill_ (14-18 men): - -With the interior linemen from tackle to tackle, we place defensive men -head on the center and tackles, as illustrated in Figure 139. A coach -will stand behind the defensive men, facing the offensive men, and -give hand signals indicating starting count and blocking patterns. The -defensive men must react and pursue the football properly. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 139] - - -_Alabama Wave Drill_ (8-12 men): - -Four men line up facing a coach, in a good football position, feet -moving as illustrated in Figure 140. The coach points to his right and -the players using a cross-over step must react in that direction. He -then points in another direction and the players stop, plant and start -in this direction as quickly as possible. The drill is not only a good -conditioner, but teaches quickness, too. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 140] - - -_Rushing the Passer Drill_ (12-16 men): - -Using the two-man Crowther sled, two defenders explode into the machine -with a good hard blow on the snap of the football, spin out laterally, -and rush the passer playing through two blockers (X), as indicated in -Figure 141. The defensive men must hit with the inside shoulder before -spinning out to play through the blockers at the side and rear of the -sled. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 141] - - -_Gauntlet Drill_ (10-12 men): - -We are primarily concerned with the tacklers in this drill. Two rows of -jerseys five yards apart is the area the ball carrier (X) is permitted -to run with the football. The tacklers (T) are five yards apart one -behind the other. The ball carrier tries to get by the tackler, and the -coach is checking on the latter’s football position—bend at the knees, -back straight, hit on the rise, and follow-through. If the coach stands -behind the ball carrier, he will be in the best position to observe the -tacklers, making certain they do not close their eyes on contact, etc. -Figure 142 illustrates our Gauntlet Drill. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 142] - - -_Defensive Bucker_ (4-6 men): - -The individual Bucker Drill, not illustrated by diagram, is used when we -work in small groups. It teaches the correct form for delivering a blow -with the hands, shoulders or forearms. A coach or manager moves the ball -to simulate the start of a play, and the defensive man reacts and moves -quickly on the sight of the ball. - - -DRILLS FOR THE LINEBACKERS - -The following drills are used to teach individual and team techniques to -our linebackers: - - -_All Secondary Drills_: - -Since our linebackers are a part of our defensive secondary, every drill -relating to pass defense mentioned and illustrated previously, are also -used for our linebackers. - - -_Eye-Opener Drill_ (8-12 men): - -Figure 143 illustrates four large dummies, a line of ball carriers (O) -and a line of tacklers (X). The ball carrier either fakes at one hole and -goes through the next one, or goes through the first hole trying to beat -the tackler. The linebacker tries to keep leverage on the ball carrier, -trying to meet him in the hole. The tackler must be careful he does not -over-run the ball carrier. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 143] - - -_Eye-Closer Drill_ (12-15 men): - -Figure 144 illustrates our Eye-Closer Drill with the offense running -its middle attack and the linebackers in particular reacting to every -situation they are likely to encounter in a game. - -[Illustration: FIGURE 144] - -The linebackers also take part in the following drills which I have -discussed and illustrated previously: - - 1. Defensive Bucker Drill. - - 2. Gauntlet Drill. - - 3. Middle Drill. - - 4. Pursuit Drill. - - 5. Wave Drill. - - 6. Peel-Off Drill. - - -DEFENSIVE DRILLS FOR THE TEAM - -When we have defensive drills for our entire team, it is usually -three-quarters full speed, or as we commonly refer to it, full speed -except for tackling. - -We also have drills in which our linemen run half-speed and the defensive -secondary, full speed. At times one side of the line will be full speed -and the other half-speed. The offense is operating full speed and does -not know which side of the defensive line is full speed and which side is -half-speed. - -Our game condition scrimmages are about the only time our entire -defensive unit will play full speed, with the exception of full speed -goal line defensive scrimmages occasionally. We learn and rehearse our -defenses as a team, but seldom scrimmage full speed as a team. - - -CONCLUSION - -We think our drills are functional in nature, and this is why we use -them. I cannot see the value of employing drills which are not functional -and which do not adhere to the individual and team techniques we will use -in a game. We want to drill and rehearse the players in practice the way -we want them to perform in a game. - - - - -CHAPTER 12 - -Those Who Stay Will Be Champions - - -Quitting comes easy for many people. Many do not want to pay the price -to be a winner. It requires little effort to be a loser—and anyone who -tries can be most successful. The “solid citizens” who finish my “course” -will be better men as a result of having stuck it out. The boy who sets -his mind to do what is required of him in order to be a winner is not -only the type of boy we are looking for, but he will get the most from -the program. Those who stay will be champions and will become winners not -only on the football field but in life itself. - -Walter D. Wintle’s poem about a person’s state of mind has a great deal -of meaning to it. We have the poem posted in various places throughout -our building so our boys can read it from time to time. The poem is as -follows: - - -_It’s All in a State of Mind_ - - If you think you are beaten, you are; - If you think you dare not, you won’t; - If you like to win, but don’t think you can, - It’s almost a cinch you won’t. - - If you think you’ll lose, you’re lost; - For out in the world you’ll find - Success begins with a fellow’s will; - It’s all in a state of mind. - - For many a game is lost - Ere even a play is run, - And many a coward fails - Ere even his work is begun. - - Think big and your deeds will grow, - Think small and you’ll fall behind; - Think that you _can_ and you _will_; - It’s all in a state of mind. - - If you think you are out-classed, you are; - You’ve got to think high to rise; - You’ve got to be sure of yourself before - You can ever win a prize. - - Life’s battles don’t always go - To the stronger or faster man, - But sooner or later, the man who wins - Is the fellow who thinks he can. - -We must inspire our boys to the degree they think and know they are -capable of doing what it takes to win. Teaching the boys how to -accomplish this is extremely gratifying and one of the rewards of -coaching. - -From time to time I have been asked, “Coach, what has been your greatest -thrill as a football coach?” Trying to single out the “greatest thrill,” -or even one of my greatest thrills as a coach, is very difficult for me -to do. The game of football has been thoroughly rewarding to me. - -I recall one thrill in particular, the day our 1956 team at Texas A & M -defeated the University of Texas, 34-21, in Austin. You like to win ’em -all, but the real thrill is the story behind this particular game. - -It actually started in the spring of 1954 when I first went to Texas A -& M. The Aggies had not won the Southwest Conference Championship in 15 -years. We hoped to remedy this situation in time, so we commenced our -building program that spring. - -In the fall we took our players to Junction, a small place in South -Texas, for pre-season training. The work was hard and the weather was -hot, and many boys dropped by the wayside. Many did not want to pay the -price to be a winner. - -That fall I imagine those who had not remained for early season practice -felt they had made a wise decision since we won only one football game. -Those who stayed, although beaten in every game except one, seemed more -determined than ever to prove their point. They fought their hearts out -in every game and although beaten they won the admiration and respect of -everyone for their courage. While it was disappointing to lose, I felt -deep down in my heart if those boys stayed, they would be champions by -the time they were seniors. - -The following year we had a good team, but we lost the final game of the -season to the University of Texas, and with it we lost the Conference -Championship. So close, yet so far was the elusive championship and a -victory over Texas. - -From the beginning of the 1956 season the determination of the senior -group was evident. Consequently we went into the final game of the season -with Texas in Austin, undefeated. There was more to it than just a mere -football game. The Aggies had not beaten the University of Texas in -Austin for a period of 33 years. In fact they had never beaten Texas in -Memorial Stadium, the site of the 1956 battle. - -The afternoon of November 29, 1956 could mean a great deal to this group -of boys who started setting their sights at Junction in 1954. The public -was aware of the fact these boys could win the Southwest Conference -Championship, have an undefeated season, and break the “jinx” at Memorial -Stadium. They probably were not aware the stakes were higher. These -boys had a chance to prove to themselves that they were men; they could -and would do what it takes, no matter how tough it may be, to become -champions. - -The greatest thrill was not in the final score, 34-21. The thrill was -watching those boys work, grow, develop and rise from a season in 1954 -where they won only one game to an undefeated season in 1956. These boys -paid the price to become champions. They were champs then, and they will -always be champions, because they know, understand, and are willing to -do what they must do to be successful. The boys who started at Junction -as sophomores are as follows: Don Watson, Lloyd Hale, Jack Pardee, Gene -Stallings, Bob Keith, Dennis Goehring, Dee Powell and Bobby Lockett. As -for the boys who dropped out because the going was too tough, who can -remember their names? - - ... For out in the world you’ll find - Success begins with a fellow’s will; - It’s all in a state of mind.... - - - - -Index - - - A & M wave drill, 222-223 - - Action pass: - coverage of, 75-77 - from broken backfield, 78-79 - from flanker set, 4-spoke coverage versus, 96-97 - from floater set, 4-spoke coverage versus, 98-99 - 4-spoke pass defense against, 92-93 - - Africa, 16 - - Against the grain, 143 - - Aggies, 232, 233 - - Agility drills, 209 - - Alabama wave drill, 226-227 - - Ant plan, 16-17 - - Assistant coach, 203, 204, 212 - group work, 21 - responsibility, 22 - specialist, 21-22 - type of man, 18-20 - - Automatics, 151-152 - faking, 152 - - - Backs: - flanked out, defense adjustments versus, 56-57 - in victory defense, 47 - - Bad play, 141 - - Ball carrying techniques, 155-157 - mental attitude and, 157 - open field running, 156-157 - - Baltimore Colts, 3 - - Baseball terminology, 214 - - Berry, Ray, 3 - - Best defensive player, in victory defense, 47-48 - - “Big plays,” 214 - - Big tip drill, 218-219 - - Blocked kicks, 114, 115 - - Blocking techniques, 157-166 - blocking linebackers, 159-160 - crack back block, 164-165 - downfield, 160-161 - drive block, 157-158 - junction block, 165 - pass protection, 163-164 - post-lead block, 161-162 - reverse shoulder block, 158-159 - roll block, 165-166 - trap block, 162-163 - - Box defense, 143, 190 - - Bucker drill, 228 - - Butt ball drill, 222 - - Butt block, 120 - - - Center, 114 - extra point and field goal blocking rules, 137 - in goal line defense, 49-50 - offensive stance for, 145 - in quick kick formation, 125 - spread punt blocking rules, 119 - - Champions, 231-234 - - Chop block, 143 - - Church, 20 - - Circle drill, 224-225 - - Clemson College, 16 - - Climb block, 143 - - Club, 142-143 - - Coach: - assistant (_see_ Assistant coach) - backfield, 187, 195-196 - dedication, 10 - defensive, 21-22, 208, 212 - head (_see_ Head coach) - high school, 22 - long term contract, 9-10 - mental toughness, 10 - necessity of a plan, 11 - offensive, 21-22, 205, 208, 212 - qualifications, 10 - quarterback, 194 - staff, 11 - and winning team, 9-11 - - Coaching: - division of duties, 21-23 - over-coaching kickers, 112 - rewards of, 232 - teaching and, 23 - (_see also_ Planning for a game) - - Color, 143 - - Conerly, Charlie, 2 - - Corner man: - defensive stance, 43 - left, defensive: - 4-spoke pass defense versus action pass, 93 - from flanker set, 96-97 - from floater set, 99 - 4-spoke pass coverage versus straight drop back pass, 91 - from flanker set, 95 - from floater set, 98 - 4-spoke pass defense versus roll-out pass, 95 - right, defensive: - 4-spoke pass defense versus action pass, 92 - from flanker set, 97 - from floater set, 99 - 4-spoke pass coverage versus straight drop back pass, 91 - from flanker set, 96 - from floater set, 97-98 - 4-spoke pass defense versus roll-out pass, 94 - - Cotton Bowl, 3 - - Courage, example of, 4-7 - - Covered, 142 - - Covering third-and-fourths drill, 216-217 - - Crack back, 143 - - Crack back block, 164-165 - - Cross-body block, 120 - - Crow, John, 141 - - Cutchin, Phil, 195 - - Cut off, 142 - - - Dedication: - coach, 10 - players, 12 - - Defenders, pass defense by, 85 - - Defense, 24-61 - axioms, 27 - errors, 26 - gang tackling, 28 - goal line, 48-51 - importance of belief in, 61 - limiting offense, 26 - numbering system, 28-34 - advantages of, 34 - objectives, 24-27 - offensive-minded, 25 - pass (_see_ Pass defense) - personal challenge, 26-27 - philosophy of, 26 - reaction football, 26 - scoring, 25, 26 - signal callers, 33, 34 - 6-2 alignment, 53-56 - split-T, 51-55 - stance, 41-43 - surprise, 44-46 - team proposition, 27-28 - techniques, playing of, 34-41 - versus backs and ends flanked, 56-57 - versus single wing offense, 57-61 - versus unbalanced line, 56 - victory, 46-48 - - Defensive alignment: - attacking, 171 - even, 190 - numbering, 166-171 - odd, 190 - - Defensive bucker drill, 228, 230 - - Defensive coach, 21-22, 208, 212 - - Defensive cuts drill, 215 - - Defensive ends, drills for, 220-221 - - Defensive football (_see_ Defense) - - Defensive interior linemen, drills for, 222-228 - - Defensive reaction drill, 226 - - Defensive secondary: - drills for, 215-220 - stunting in, 105-110 - - Desire to excel, 13 - - Dietzel, Paul, 2 - - Dog fight, 25 - - Dog fight drill, 217 - for safety man, 218 - - Downfield blocking, 160-161 - - Drills, 215-230 - for defensive ends, 220-221 - for defensive interior linemen, 222-228 - defensive, for team, 230 - functional, 230 - for linebackers, 228-230 - for secondary, 215-220 - (_see also under_ Name of Drill) - - Drive block, 143, 157-158 - - Drive man, 143 - - - Eagle, 144 - - “Easy” touchdown, 24, 25, 27, 61 - - 8-man front, 143 - recognizing and attacking, 190-192 - - 8 technique, 40 - - Ends: - blocking rules: - extra point and field goal, 137-138 - spread punt, 119 - tight punt formation, 123 - defense versus single wing offense, 58 - defensive stance, 42 - in 5-spoke defense, 70 - flanked out, defense adjustments versus, 56-57 - goal line defense, 49 - left, in punt return, 127-128 - left, defensive: - coverage of action pass from broken backfield, 78 - coverage of straight drop back pass, 75 - from broken backfield, 78 - pass defense by, 81-82 - in quick kick formation, 125 - right, in punt return, 128 - right, defensive: - coverage of action pass, 76 - from broken backfield, 79 - coverage of straight drop back pass, 75 - from broken backfield, 77 - 6-2 alignment, 53-54 - in split-T defense, 52 - in victory defense, 47 - - Errors, 24, 26 - - Even defense, 143 - - Explode drills, 225-226 - - Extra-point, blocking rules, 137-138 - - Eye-closer drill, 229 - - Eye-opener drill, 229 - - - Far back, 142 - - Field goal: - blocking rules, 137-138 - defending against attempt, 139 - - Field position, 187-190 - - Fighting spirit, 186 - - Fill, 143 - - Films, of game, 203, 204, 206, 212 - grading, 213-214 - - First down zone, 189 - - 5-spoke defense, 31, 32, 33, 66-73 - (_see also_ 5-spoke pass defense) - - 5-spoke pass defense: - advantages of, 85-86 - dividing the areas, 71-73 - principle of, 87 - - 5 technique, 38 - - Flanker set: - 4-spoke coverage versus straight drop back pass from, 95-96 - 4-spoke coverage versus action pass from, 96-97 - - Flare, 143 - - Flooding an area, 179-181 - - Flow, 142 - - Football: - American way of life, 3-4 - intrinsic values of, 4-7 - winning, theory of, 8-17 - - Four Horsemen, 1 - - 4-on-1 drill, 222 - - 4-spoke defense, 30-31 - (_see also_ 4-spoke pass defense) - - 4-spoke pass defense: - advantages of, 87-89 - alignment, 89-90 - in 40 series, 99 - principle of, 87 - versus action pass, 92-93 - from flanker set, 96-97 - from floater set, 98-99 - versus flanker set, 95-97 - versus floater set, 97-99 - versus roll-out pass, 93-95 - versus straight drop back pass, 90-92 - from floater set, 97-98 - - 4 technique, 35, 37 - - Free wheeling zone, 189 - - Fullback: - in goal line defense, 50-51 - offensive stance for, 146 - in quick kick formation, 125 - - Fumbling, 27, 28 - - - Gain, Bob, 112 - - “Gangster,” 108-109 - - Gang tackling, 28 - - Gap, 143 - - Gap 8 alignment, 32 - - Gauntlet drill, 227-228, 230 - - Gilmer, Harry, 2 - - Gipp, George, 3 - - Goal line defense, 48-51 - challenge of, 48 - - Goehring, Dennis, 233 - - Going wide, 171-174 - change-off for blockers, 174 - quarterback option, 172-173 - run-pass option, 172 - three-way option, 173-174 - - Grange, Red, 1 - - Groin block, 143 - - Guards: - blocking rules: - for extra point and field goal, 137-138 - for spread punt, 119 - defense versus single wing offense, 58 - defensive stance, 42 - goal line defense, 49 - middle: - in punt return, 127 - in split-T defense, 52 - in quick kick formation, 125 - right, in punt return, 128 - 6-2 alignment, 53 - versus single wing offense, 59 - - Gut zone, 189 - - - Hale, Lloyd, 233 - - Halfbacks: - defensive, pass defense by, 83-84 - defensive stance, 43 - in 5-spoke defense, 70 - left: - 4-spoke coverage versus action pass from floater set, 99 - in goal line defense, 51 - in quick kick formation, 125-126 - left, defensive: - coverage of action pass, 76 - from broken backfield, 79 - coverage of straight drop back pass, 75 - from broken backfield, 77 - 4-spoke pass defense versus action pass, 93 - from flanker set, 97 - 4-spoke pass defense versus roll-out pass, 94 - 4-spoke pass coverage versus straight drop back pass, 91 - from flanker set, 95-96 - from floater set, 98 - offensive stance for, 146 - in punt return, 128 - right: - 4-spoke coverage versus action pass from floater set, 99 - in goal line defense, 50-51 - in quick kick formation, 125 - right, defensive: - coverage of action pass, 76 - from broken backfield, 79 - coverage of straight drop back pass, 75 - from broken backfield, 77 - 4-spoke pass defense versus action pass, 91-92 - from flanker set, 97 - 4-spoke pass defense versus roll-out pass, 94 - 4-spoke pass coverage versus straight drop back pass, 91 - from floater set, 96, 98 - 6-2 alignment, 54 - in victory defense, 47 - - Head coach, 18, 23 - delegation of responsibility, 22, 23 - example, 19 - group work, 21 - (_see also_ Coach) - - Head on, 144 - - Henderson, Gene, 114 - - High school coach, plan for, 22 - - Holder, in extra point and field goal attempt, 138 - - Howard, Frank, 16 - - Huddle, offensive, 152-153 - - - Ice, 143 - - Inspiration, 232 - - Intercept drill, 215-216 - - Intercepting passes, 27, 62, 66, 105 - - “It’s All in a State of Mind,” 231-232 - - - Junction block, 165 - - - Keith, Bob, 233 - - Kicker: - blocking rules for tight punt formation, 124 - over-coaching, 112 - in quick kick formation, 125-126 - - Kicking, in defensive football, 24-25 - - Kicking game techniques, 111-139 - extra point blocking rules, 137-138 - field goal attempt: - blocking rules, 137 - defense against, 139 - kick-off, and its coverage, 130-137 - kick-off return, 132-134 - on side (short) kick, 134-136 - defending against, 136-137 - place kicking formation, 138 - punting, 111-116 - punt return, 126-130 - quick kick formation, 124-126 - spread punt formation, 116-122, 126 - tight punt formation, 122-124 - - Kick-off, 27, 130-137 - coverage, 130 - types, 130-132 - - Kick-off return, 27, 132-134 - middle, 133 - right, 132 - - - L.B., 142 - - LeBaron, Eddie, 2 - - Left end (_see under_ Ends) - - Left halfback (_see under_ Halfbacks) - - Left tackle (_see under_ Tackles) - - Leverage drill, 225 - - Lewis, Tommy, 3 - - “Lightning,” 109-110 - - Linebackers: - blocking by offense, 159-160 - defensive: - 4-spoke defense versus action pass, 93 - 4-spoke pass coverage versus straight drop back pass, 91-92 - pass defense by, 182-183 - defensive stance, 42-43 - drills for, 228-230 - in 5-spoke defense, 70 - 4-spoke coverage versus straight drop back pass from flanker set, 96 - inside, in goal line defense, 50-51 - left, in punt return, 128 - left, defensive: - coverage of action pass, 76-77 - from broken backfield, 78-79 - coverage of straight drop back pass, 75 - from broken backfield, 78 - middle: - in goal line defense, 49-50 - defense versus single wing offense, 58 - outside, in goal line defense, 51 - right, in punt return, 128 - right, defensive: - coverage of action pass, 76 - from broken backfield, 79 - coverage of straight drop back pass, 75 - from broken backfield, 77 - 6-2 alignment, 54 - in split-T defense, 52 - strong side, defense versus single wing offense, 59 - in victory defense, 47 - weak side, defense versus single wing offense, 58 - - Linemen: - blocking techniques, 157 - defensive interior, drills for, 222-228 - interior, blocking rules for tight punt formation, 122 - middle, in victory defense, 47 - offensive stance for, 144-145 - spread punt blocking principle for, 119 - warm up time, 212 - - Line splits, 146-150 - basic rules, 147-150 - pre-shift position, 147 - - Lipscomb, Gene “Big Daddy,” 2 - - Lockett, Bobby, 234 - - Long term contract, value of, 9-10 - - L.O.S., 142 - - - McKenzie, Jim, 26 - - Man on L.O.S., 142 - - Meals, pre-game, 211, 212 - - Michigan State University, 113 - - Middle drill, 223-224, 230 - - M.L.B., 142 - - Moore, “Scrappy,” 117 - - Morale: - coaching squad, 21 - for defense, 25, 26 - squad, 21 - team, 186 - - Motion, 143 - - “Must” zone, 188-189 - - - Nagurski, Bronco, 2 - - Near back, 142 - - New York Giants, 2, 15 - - 9-man front, 143 - recognizing and attacking, 192-194 - - 9 technique, 41 - - Notre Dame University, 3 - - N/T, 142 - - Numbering system for defense, 28-34 - advantages of, 34 - - - O’Brien, Davy, 2 - - Odd defense, 143 - - Off-back, 142 - - Offense: - advantages over defense, 150 - assignment football, 26 - main requirements of, 140 - mistakes, 25 - objective, 140 - primary principles of, 140 - sound, 141-142 - - Offensive coach, 21-22, 205, 208, 212 - - Offensive football (_see_ Offense) - - Offensive-minded defense, 25 - - Offensive passing game techniques, 176-185 - passer, 176-179 - pass receiving, 183-185 - pass routes, 179-182 - - Offensive running game, 140-175 - attacking defensive alignment, 171 - ball carrying techniques, 155-157 - basic principles of, 140 - blocking techniques, 157-166 - going wide, 171-174 - huddle, 152-153 - line splits, 146-150 - numbering defensive alignments, 166-171 - quarterback’s techniques, 153-155 - requirements of, 140 - snap count, 150-152 - stance, 144-146 - terminology, 142-144 - - Off-side, 142 - - On-back, 142 - - One-six formation, 121 - - 1 technique, 35-36 - - On linebacker, 143 - - On-side, 142 - - On-side (short) kick, 134-136 - defending against, 136-137 - - Organization, in building winning team, 15-17 - - Osborne, Roddie, 141 - - O technique, 35 - - “Out-mean,” 13, 17 - - Outside drill, 218 - - Over, 142 - - Owens, Jim, 2 - - - Pardee, Jack, 6, 57, 141, 233 - - Parella, Babe, 114 - - Parilli, Vito “Babe,” 176 - - Pass coverage, 73-81 - of action pass, 75-77 - from broken backfield, 78-79 - of end out, 79 - of flanked back and split end out to opposite sides, 80-81 - of straight drop back pass, 74-75 - from broken backfield, 77-78 - zone coverage, 74 - - Pass cuts, 181-182 - - Pass defense, 62-110 - coaching point, 62 - 5-spoke, or 3-deep, 66-73 - advantages of, 85-86 - 4-spoke pass defense, 87-89 (_see also_ 4-spoke pass defense) - individual effort in, 62 - objectives, 62-66 - pass coverage, 73-81 (_see also_ Pass coverage) - phases: - covering areas, 63, 66 - holding up the receivers, 63, 64-65 - rushing the passer, 63-64 - by positions, 81-85 - predetermined rotation, 99-104 - principles of, 110 - stunting in the defensive secondary, 105-110 - versus action pass with broken backfield, 78-79 - versus broken backfield, 77-78 - - Passer, 176-179 - footwork, 178 - grip, 176-177 - passing principles and techniques, 178-179 - release and delivery, 177-178 - rushing of, 63-64 - warm up time, 212 - - Passes (_see under_ Name) - - Passing, principles and techniques, 178-179 - (_see also_ Passer) - - Passing game: - essentials of, 176 - primary objectives, 179 - (_see also_ Offensive passing game techniques) - - Pass protection, 163-164 - - Pass receiving, 183-185 - - Pass routes, 179-182 - flooding an area, 179-181 - offensive pass cuts, 181-182 - - Pass rush, 64 - - Peel-off drill, 220-221, 230 - - Penalties, piling on, 28 - - Personal protector: - spread punt blocking rules, 119, 120 - tight punt formation blocking rules, 123-124 - - Phillips, O. A. “Bum,” 29 - - Piling on, penalty for, 28 - - Place kick, blocking, 139 - - Place kicking formation, 138 - - Planning, 16 - - Planning for a game, 203-214 - grading game film, 213-214 - in-season planning, 204-212 - out-of-season planning, 203-204 - week preceding game, 204-212 - - Players: - dedication, 12 - desire to excel, 13 - leaders, 14 - physical condition, 13 - “solid citizens,” 10, 14, 231 - traits necessary, 12 - type, 11 - - Point of attack, 142 - - Position, 144 - - Position ball, 143 - - Position lateral, 142 - - Post-lead block, 161-162 - - Post man, 143 - - Powell, Dee, 234 - - Practice, 206, 207-209, 210, 211 - time essential, 214 - - Punt (_see under_ Kicking game techniques) - - Punter, 112-114 - timing of, 114-116 - - Punting, 111-116 - - Punt return, 126-130 - left, 126-128 - middle, 128-130 - - Pursuer, 143 - - Pursuit drill, 230 - - - Quarterback: - characteristics of, 187 - faking, 155 - field position, 187-190 - in goal line defense, 51 - greatest asset, 186 - guide for, 196-202 - in huddle, 152-153 - making the exchange, 154-155 - offensive stance for, 145-146 - option, 172-173 - passing, 105 - playing game on blackboard, 194-196 - in quick kick formation, 125 - after receiving snap, 154 - recognizing and attacking defenses, 190-196 - stance, 153 - taking snap-back, 153-154 - team confidence in, 186 - techniques, 153-155 - tips for, 201-202 - training of, 186-202 - types of, 186-187 - - Quick kick formation, 124-126 - surprise element, 126 - - - RBI, 214 - - “Reading” drill, 221 - - Receivers, holding up, 64-65 - - Reverse shoulder block, 158-159 - - Rice Institute, 3, 5, 6, 113, 135 - - Right end (_see under_ Ends) - - Right guard (_see under_ Guards) - - Right halfback (_see under_ Halfbacks) - - Right tackle (_see under_ Tackles) - - “Robber,” 107-108 - - Robinson, Jackie, 72 - - Rockne, Knute, 1 - - Roll back, 144 - - Roll block, 165-166 - - Roll-out pass, 4-spoke pass defense against, 93-95 - - Rose Bowl, 1 - - Rotation, predetermined, 99-104 - - Running game (_see_ Offensive running game) - - Running the line drill, 216 - - Run-pass option, 172 - - Rushing the passer drill, 227 - - - Safety man: - defensive: - coverage of action pass, 76 - from broken backfield, 79 - coverage of straight drop back pass, 75 - from broken backfield, 77 - pass defense by, 84-85 - defensive stance, 43 - in 5-spoke defense, 70 - in punt return, 128 - 6-2 alignment, 54 - in victory defense, 47 - - Scoring, on defense, 25 - - Scoring zone, 189 - - Scout, 204, 207 - (_see also_ Coaching) - - Scout report, 207 - - Scrimmages, 230 - - Secondary: - alignments, 190 - defensive, drills for, 215-220 - 6-2 alignment, 54 - in split-T defense, 52-53, 54 - 3-deep, defense versus single wing offense, 59 - - Secondary rotation, defensive calls for, 100-104 - - Self-scoring zone, 189-190 - - Set, 142 - - “7,” 142 - - Seven Blocks of Granite, 1 - - 7-man spin-out drill, 224 - - 7 technique, 39 - - Shoot out, 143 - - Signal callers, 34, 35 - in adjustments versus backs and ends flanked, 57 - - Signal calling, automatic versus non-automatic, 151-152 - - Single wing offense, defense versus, 57-61 - - “6,” 142 - - 6 technique, 38-39 - - 6-2 alignment, 53-56 - versus single wing offense, 59, _Fig. 37_ - - Slam, 142 - - Snap count, 150-152 - - Sooners, 2, 26 - - Southern Methodist University, 116 - - Southwest Conference Championship, 232, 233 - - Split, 6, 32 - - Split-T defense, 51-55 - - Spread punt formation, 116-122, 126 - advantages, 117 - blocking rules, 118-120 - coverage, 120-122 - line splits, 117-118 - - Staff meetings, 22, 23 - (_see also_ Planning for a game) - - Stagg, Amos Alonzo, 2 - - Stallings, Gene, 6, 233 - - Stance: - defensive, 41-43 - (_see also under_ Offensive running game) - - Straight drop back pass: - coverage of, 74-75 - from broken backfield, 77-78 - from flanker set, 4-spoke coverage versus, 95-96 - from floater set, 4-spoke coverage versus, 97-98 - 4-spoke pass coverage versus, 90-92 - - Strategy, planning of, 205 - - Sugar Bowl, 15, 26 - - “Surprise defense,” 44-46 - - - Tackles: - defense versus single wing offense, 58 - defensive stance, 42 - extra point and field goal blocking rules, 137-138 - goal line defense, 49 - left, in punt return, 127 - right, in punt return, 128 - 6-2 alignment, 53 - in split-T defense, 52 - spread punt blocking rules, 119 - in victory defense, 47 - - Tackling drill in the secondary, 219-220 - - Tackling, gang, 28 - - Taylor, Lloyd, 6, 141 - - Teaching, coaching and, 23 - - Team: - drills, 208 - defensive, 230 - “learning,” 208 - unity, 14 - - Teamwork, defense and, 27-28 - - Texas A & M, 29, 57, 87, 113, 114, 141, 232 - 1955 football team, 5-6 - - 3-deep defense, 143 - - Three down zone, 189 - - 3-on-3 drill, 223 - - 3 technique, 36-37 - - Three-way option, 173-174 - - “Thunder,” 51, 106-107 - - Tight punt formation, 122-124 - blocking rules for, 122-124 - kicking from, 122 - - Time schedules, pre-game, 211-212 - - Timing: - centers, 114 - for extra point, 138 - for field goal attempt, 138 - punters, 114-116 - - Tip drill, 216 - - Touchdowns: - “easy,” 24, 25, 27, 61 - interceptions and, 27 - - Trail junction blocker, 143 - - Trap block, 162-163 - - Tulane University, 116 - - “Twelfth man,” 219 - - 2-deep defense (_see_ 4-spoke pass defense) - - Two-on-one block (_see_ Post-lead block) - - Two-platoon football, 111 - - 2 technique, 34, 36 - - - Unbalanced line, defense versus, 56 - - Unity, feeling of, 14 - - University of Alabama, 87 - - University of Chattanooga, 117 - - University of Cincinnati, 136 - - University of Georgia, 114, 194 - - University of Houston, 195, 196 - - University of Kentucky, 14, 112, 113, 114, 116, 136, 176 - - University of Mississippi, 116 - - University of Oklahoma, 15, 26, 141 - - University of Tennessee, 115, 116 - - University of Texas, 232, 233 - - Up-backs: - extra point and field goal blocking rules, 137-138 - spread punt blocking rules, 119-120 - tight punt formation blocking rules, 123 - - U. S. Navy, 16 - - - Vanderbilt University, 116 - - “Victory defense,” 46-48 - - - Watson, Don, 6, 233 - - Wave drill, 230 - - Webb, Clayton, 112 - - Wide tackle, 32 - - Wilkinson, Bud, 2, 141 - - Winning: - intrinsic value of, 4 - theory of, 8-17 - - Wintle, Walter D., 231 - - Woodard, Woody, 116 - - Wright, Jimmy, 6 - - - Zone coverage, 74 - - Zones, 187-190 - - -*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BUILDING A CHAMPIONSHIP -FOOTBALL TEAM *** - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the -United States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where - you are located before using this eBook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that: - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without -widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/68466-0.zip b/old/68466-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9899f7a..0000000 --- a/old/68466-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h.zip b/old/68466-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 783cf7a..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/68466-h.htm b/old/68466-h/68466-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 9ad1ffd..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/68466-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,11179 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> - <head> - <meta charset="UTF-8" /> - <title> - The Project Gutenberg eBook of Building a championship football team, by Paul W. “Bear” Bryant. - </title> - - <link rel="icon" href="images/cover.jpg" type="image/x-cover" /> - - <style> /* <![CDATA[ */ - -a { - text-decoration: none; -} - -body { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - -h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 { - text-align: center; - clear: both; -} - -h2.nobreak { - page-break-before: avoid; -} - -hr.chap { - margin-top: 2em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - clear: both; - width: 65%; - margin-left: 17.5%; - margin-right: 17.5%; -} - -img.w100 { - width: 100%; -} - -div.chapter { - page-break-before: always; -} - -ul { - list-style-type: none; -} - -li.indx { - margin-top: .5em; - padding-left: 2em; - text-indent: -2em; -} - -li.ifrst { - margin-top: 2em; - padding-left: 2em; - text-indent: -2em; -} - -li.isub1 { - padding-left: 4em; - text-indent: -2em; -} - -li.isub2 { - padding-left: 6em; - text-indent: -2em; -} - -li.isub3 { - padding-left: 8em; - text-indent: -2em; -} - -p { - margin-top: 0.5em; - text-align: justify; - margin-bottom: 0.5em; - text-indent: 1em; -} - -table { - margin: 1em auto 1em auto; - max-width: 40em; - border-collapse: collapse; -} - -td { - padding: 0.25em; - vertical-align: top; -} - -.tdr { - text-align: right; -} - -.tdpg { - vertical-align: bottom; - text-align: right; -} - -.blockquote { - margin: 1.5em 10%; -} - -.caption { - text-align: center; - margin-bottom: 1em; - font-size: 90%; - text-indent: 0em; -} - -.center { - text-align: center; - text-indent: 0em; -} - -.figcenter { - margin: auto; - text-align: center; -} - -.footnotes { - margin-top: 1em; - border: dashed 1px; -} - -.footnote { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; - font-size: 0.9em; -} - -.footnote .label { - position: absolute; - right: 84%; - text-align: right; -} - -.fnanchor { - vertical-align: super; - font-size: .8em; - text-decoration: none; -} - -.larger { - font-size: 150%; -} - -.pagenum { - position: absolute; - right: 4%; - font-size: smaller; - text-align: right; - font-style: normal; -} - -.poetry-container { - text-align: center; - margin: 1em; -} - -.poetry { - display: inline-block; - text-align: left; -} - -.poetry .stanza { - margin: 1em 0em 1em 0em; -} - -.poetry .verse { - padding-left: 3em; -} - -.poetry .indent0 { - text-indent: -3em; -} - -.right { - text-align: right; -} - -.smaller { - font-size: 80%; -} - -.smcap { - font-variant: small-caps; - font-style: normal; -} - -.allsmcap { - font-variant: small-caps; - font-style: normal; - text-transform: lowercase; -} - -.titlepage { - text-align: center; - margin-top: 3em; - text-indent: 0em; -} - -.x-ebookmaker img { - max-width: 100%; - width: auto; - height: auto; -} - -.x-ebookmaker .poetry { - display: block; - margin-left: 1.5em; -} - -.x-ebookmaker .blockquote { - margin: 1.5em 5%; -} - -/* Illustration classes */ -.illowp100 {width: 100%;} -.illowp33 {width: 33%;} -.x-ebookmaker .illowp33 {width: 100%;} -.illowp50 {width: 50%;} -.x-ebookmaker .illowp50 {width: 100%;} -.illowp60 {width: 60%;} -.x-ebookmaker .illowp60 {width: 100%;} -.illowp62 {width: 62%;} -.x-ebookmaker .illowp62 {width: 100%;} -.illowp64 {width: 64%;} -.x-ebookmaker .illowp64 {width: 100%;} -.illowp75 {width: 75%;} -.x-ebookmaker .illowp75 {width: 100%;} -.illowp83 {width: 83%;} -.x-ebookmaker .illowp83 {width: 100%;} -.illowp85 {width: 85%;} -.x-ebookmaker .illowp85 {width: 100%;} -.illowp88 {width: 88%;} -.x-ebookmaker .illowp88 {width: 100%;} -.illowp92 {width: 92%;} -.x-ebookmaker .illowp92 {width: 100%;} -.illowp93 {width: 93%;} -.x-ebookmaker .illowp93 {width: 100%;} - - /* ]]> */ </style> - </head> -<body> -<p style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Building a championship football team, by Paul W. Bryant</p> -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online -at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you -are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the -country where you are located before using this eBook. -</div> - -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: Building a championship football team</p> -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: Paul W. Bryant</p> -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Contributor: Lloyd Gregory</p> -<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: July 6, 2022 [eBook #68466]</p> -<p style='display:block; text-indent:0; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</p> - <p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em; text-align:left'>Produced by: Tim Lindell and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This book was produced from images made available by the HathiTrust Digital Library.)</p> -<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BUILDING A CHAMPIONSHIP FOOTBALL TEAM ***</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_i"></a>[i]</span></p> - -<p class="titlepage larger"><i>Building a</i><br /> -CHAMPIONSHIP<br /> -<i>Football Team</i></p> - -<p class="titlepage">PAUL W. “BEAR” BRYANT</p> - -<p class="center"><i>Athletic Director and<br /> -Head Football Coach,<br /> -University of Alabama</i></p> - -<p class="titlepage">Englewood Cliffs, N.J.<br /> -PRENTICE-HALL, INC.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_ii"></a>[ii]</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_iii"></a>[iii]</span></p> - -<p class="titlepage smaller">© 1960, BY<br /> -PRENTICE-HALL, INC.<br /> -Englewood Cliffs, N.J.</p> - -<p class="center smaller">ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THIS BOOK<br /> -MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FORM, BY MIMEOGRAPH<br /> -OR ANY OTHER MEANS, WITHOUT PERMISSION<br /> -IN WRITING FROM THE PUBLISHER.</p> - -<p class="center smaller"><span class="smcap">Library of Congress<br /> -Catalogue Card Number</span>: 60-53173</p> - -<p class="center smaller">Eighth Printing February, 1968</p> - -<p class="titlepage smaller">PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA</p> - -<p class="center smaller">08605—BC</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_iv"></a>[iv]</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_v"></a>[v]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="Dedication">Dedication</h2> - -</div> - -<p>To a few close associates who were genuinely dedicated to the -game of football. These men were not only great assets to the game; -they also exemplified the true American way of life. Had it not been -for men like these, many of us would have fallen by the wayside. -To them, I am forever grateful.</p> - -<table> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Robert A. Cowan<br /> - Fordyce, Arkansas</span></td> - <td><span class="smcap">Herman Hickman<br /> - Yale University</span>—<i>Sports Illustrated</i></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Frank W. Thomas<br /> - University of Alabama</span></td> - <td><span class="smcap">Jim Tatum<br /> - University of North Carolina</span></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">W. A. Alexander<br /> - Georgia Tech</span></td> - <td><span class="smcap">G. A. Huguelett<br /> - University of Kentucky</span></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">H. R. “Red” Sanders<br /> - U. C. L. A.</span></td> - <td><span class="smcap">Herman L. Heep<br /> - Texas A & M</span></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td><span class="smcap">Charles Caldwell<br /> - Princeton University</span></td> - <td><span class="smcap">Rex Enright<br /> - University of South Carolina</span></td> - </tr> -</table> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_vi"></a>[vi]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">Acknowledgment</h2> - -</div> - -<p>This book would not have been possible had -it not been for the untiring efforts of Eugene -Stallings, co-captain Texas A & M 1956, All -Conference SWC End, and assistant football -coach, University of Alabama. “Bebes” Stallings -exemplifies the true meaning of football, -both as a player and as a coach.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_vii"></a>[vii]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">A Real Competitor</h2> - -</div> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> - <div class="stanza"> - <div class="verse indent0">“Fight on, my men,” Sir Andrew says,</div> - <div class="verse indent0">“A little I’me hurt, but yett not slaine;</div> - <div class="verse indent0">“I’le but lye downe and bleede awhile,</div> - <div class="verse indent0">“And then I’le rise and fight againe.”</div> - </div> - <div class="stanza"> - <div class="verse right">“Sir Andrew Barton,” Part 2, St. 16<br /> - (PERCY’S RELIQUES, Series II, Book II)</div> - </div> -</div> -</div> - -<p>If Sir Andrew were coaching football today, he would be accused -of teaching “hard-nosed football,” for his battlecry “I’ll -rise and fight again” is that of Paul “Bear” Bryant, author of -this book and self-acknowledged teacher of hard-nosed or all-out -football.</p> - -<p>Paul Bryant is one of the ablest, most colorful, most controversial -mentors. Fans either love Bear Bryant or despise him—which -makes him excellent box office.</p> - -<p>Competitive fires flame high in Coach Bryant. Legend has it -he once played an entire game with a broken leg, believable -when one considers the all-out effort he demands of himself and -his players. Deep down, he is a sentimentalist who leaves a -heavy imprint on his players. John David Crow, All-American -back and Heisman Trophy winner under Bryant at Texas A & M, -and now a National Football League star, says, “Coach Paul -Bryant is the greatest coach in America. He made a man out -of me.”</p> - -<p>Paul Bryant is a builder. When he came to Texas A & M in -1954, Aggie fortunes were at a low ebb. In four years, Bryant’s -Aggies won 25, lost 14, tied 2, and nine of those losses were -in his first year.</p> - -<p>As a sports writer and television commentator, this observer -has watched Southwest Conference football since 1915, the first<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_viii"></a>[viii]</span> -year a grid champion was crowned. The conference’s best job -of coaching was Bryant’s, beginning in 1954. His outstanding -player walked out of the Junction, Texas training camp, and -Bryant would <i>not</i> let him return. In their first game, the Aggies -lost to Texas Tech 9 to 41. The Aggies dropped all six conference -games, but only Baylor was able to achieve a two-touchdown -margin. In 1956, Bryant built an unbeaten team, with -“my Junction boys” the nucleus.</p> - -<p>There was something almost mystical about Bryant’s story -of why he was leaving Texas A & M for his alma mater, the -University of Alabama: “As a small boy, I sometimes would -play until after dark, and then, from afar off, I’d hear my beloved -mother calling, ‘Paul, come home.’ I’d run as fast as my -legs would carry me.”</p> - -<p>Some cynics sneer at Paul Bryant’s explanation. But the many -sportsmen who hold for him lasting respect and affection know -this warm-hearted man is telling the truth.</p> - -<p class="right"><span class="smcap">Lloyd Gregory</span><br /> -<span class="smcap">Houston, Texas</span></p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_ix"></a>[ix]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak">Table of Contents</h2> - -</div> - -<table> - <tr> - <td class="tdr smaller"><i>Chapter</i></td> - <td></td> - <td class="tdpg smaller"><i>Page</i></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">1.</td> - <td><span class="smcap">Why Football?</span></td> - <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_1">1</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">2.</td> - <td><span class="smcap">The Theory of Winning Football</span></td> - <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_2">8</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">3.</td> - <td><span class="smcap">Making the Most of the Coaching Staff</span></td> - <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_3">18</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">4.</td> - <td><span class="smcap">Defense—Our Kind of Football</span></td> - <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_4">24</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">5.</td> - <td><span class="smcap">Pass Defense—Objectives and Tactics</span></td> - <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_5">62</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">6.</td> - <td><span class="smcap">Our Kicking Game Techniques</span></td> - <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_6">111</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">7.</td> - <td><span class="smcap">Our Offensive Running Game</span></td> - <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_7">140</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">8.</td> - <td><span class="smcap">Our Offensive Passing Game Techniques</span></td> - <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_8">176</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">9.</td> - <td><span class="smcap">Training the Quarterback</span></td> - <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_9">186</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">10.</td> - <td><span class="smcap">Planning for a Game</span></td> - <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_10">203</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">11.</td> - <td><span class="smcap">Our Drills</span></td> - <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_11">215</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">12.</td> - <td><span class="smcap">Those Who Stay Will Be Champions</span></td> - <td class="tdpg"><a href="#CHAPTER_12">231</a></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr"></td> - <td><span class="smcap">Index</span></td> - <td class="tdpg"><a href="#Index">235</a></td> - </tr> -</table> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_1"></a>[1]</span></p> - -<h1>Building a<br /> -CHAMPIONSHIP<br /> -Football Team</h1> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_1">CHAPTER 1<br /> -<span class="smaller">Why Football?</span></h2> - -</div> - -<p>Have you ever wondered about football? Why it’s only a -game which is as fundamental as a ball and a helmet. But the -sport is a game of great importance. If you take all of the ingredients -that go into making up the game of football and put -them into a jar, shake well and pour out, you’ve got a well-proportioned -phase of the American way of life.</p> - -<h3>FOOTBALL IS MORE THAN A GAME</h3> - -<p>Football is the All-American and the scrub. It’s the Rose -Bowl with 102,000 cheering fans, and it’s the ragged kids in -a vacant lot using a dime-store ball. It’s a field in Colorado -ankle-deep in snow, and one in Florida sun-baked and shimmering.</p> - -<p>Leaping cheerleaders, a brassy band, and the Dixie Darlings -are a part of the wonderful game of football. It’s a rich guy -being chauffeured to the stadium gate, and a frightened boy -shinnying the fence and darting for the end zone seats. It’s a -crowd which has gone crazy as it rips down the goal posts. And -it’s a nation stunned and wet-eyed at the news of Knute Rockne’s -death.</p> - -<p>Football is drama, music, dignity, sorrow. It’s exhilaration -and shock. It is also humor and, at times, comedy. It’s a referee -sternly running the game. It’s an inebriated character staggering -onto the field and trying to get into the action.</p> - -<p>Football is the memory of Red Grange, the Four Horsemen, -and the Seven Blocks of Granite. It’s a team’s traditional battle -cry, such as, “War Eagle,” in the middle of the summer. It’s<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_2"></a>[2]</span> -a crisp fall day, traffic jams, portable radios and hip flasks. It’s -train trips, plane flights and victory celebrations. It’s the losers -moaning, “You were lucky, just wait’ll next year!”</p> - -<p>Names are football, such as Bronco, Dixie, Night Train, The -Horse, Hopalong, Bad News, The Toe, and Mr. Outside.</p> - -<h3>FOOTBALL IS THE GREAT AMERICAN NOVEL</h3> - -<p>For four quarters, football is the Great American Novel, with -chapters from Frank Merriwell, the Bible, Horatio Alger, the -life of Lincoln and Jack the Giant-Killer.</p> - -<p>Newspaper photos, arguments, Mr. Touchdown USA, yellowed -clippings, the Hall of Fame, The Star-Spangled Banner—they’re -all football.</p> - -<p>It’s a game of young men with big shoulders and hard muscles. -It’s also a game of old pros, such as, 38-year-old Charlie Conerly -quarterbacking the New York Giants to a football championship.</p> - -<p>Football is popcorn, cokes, banners and cigaret smoke. It’s -people standing for the kick-off, lap blankets, pacing coaches, -penalties and melodious alma maters.</p> - -<p>Football is a game of surprises. The big guy everybody picks -in pre-season as All-American fizzles out. But a kid nobody ever -heard of scores the winning touchdown and a star is born. It’s -Tennessee going 17 games without being scored on. It’s also -tiny Chattanooga upsetting mighty Tennessee, making a coach’s -dream come true.</p> - -<p>It’s the pro halfback who is a movie star. And the water boy -who got into a game at Yale. It’s Bronco Nagurski butting down -a sandbag abutment, and dwarfish Davey O’Brien disappearing -from sight behind an array of 250 pound linemen. It’s Harry -Gilmer jumping high to pass, and Coach Jim Owens proving -that nice guys finish first.</p> - -<p>Football is Bud Wilkinson, whose Sooners are 40 points -ahead, walking up and down the sideline like a caged lion. It’s -35-year-old Paul Dietzel and 90-year-old Amos Alonzo Stagg. -It’s 6′8″ Gene “Big Daddy” Lipscomb and 5′6″ Eddie LeBaron.</p> - -<p>Women who don’t know a quick kick from a winged-T cheer -every move on the field, waving pennants, purses and even mink<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_3"></a>[3]</span> -stoles. That’s football. So is the pressbox with its battery of -clattering typewriters. And the oldtimer who claims they played -a better game in his day is a part of football, too.</p> - -<p>It’s Ray Berry, who wears contact lenses, making unbelievable -catches for the Baltimore Colts. And after the game, when he -dons his thick glasses, he looks the part of a studious school -teacher—which he is after football season terminates.</p> - -<p>It’s a scramble for tickets, playing parlays, wide-eyed youngsters -getting autographs, a fist fight in the stands, second guessing, -banquets, icy rains, color guards, fumbles, goal line stands, -homecoming queens, and the typical mutt running onto the field -attracting everyone’s attention.</p> - -<p>Football is Tommy Lewis jumping off the bench in the Cotton -Bowl game and tackling a touchdown-bound Rice runner -simply because, “I’ve got too much Alabama in me, I guess.” -It’s the quivering voice of a dying George Gipp telling his Notre -Dame teammates, “Win one for the Gipper.”</p> - -<p>It’s New Year’s, Christmas and the Fourth of July rolled into -one. It’s VJ Day, the Declaration of Independence, Haley’s -comet and Bunker Hill. It’s tears and laughter, pathos and -exuberance.</p> - -<p>Football is a game that separates the men from the boys, but -also it’s a game that makes kids of us all.</p> - -<p>Most of all it’s a capsule of this great country itself.<a id="FNanchor_1" href="#Footnote_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a></p> - -<div class="footnotes"> -<div class="footnote"> -<p><a id="Footnote_1" href="#FNanchor_1" class="label">[1]</a> The author extends sincerest thanks to Clettus Atkinson, Assistant -Sports Editor, Birmingham Post-Herald, for contributing his fine depiction -to the meaning of football.</p> -</div> -</div> - -<h3>FOOTBALL IS THE AMERICAN WAY OF LIFE</h3> - -<p>Football, in its rightful place, can be one of the most wholesome, -exciting and valuable activities in which our youth can -possibly participate. It is the only sport I know of that teaches -boys to have complete control of themselves, to gain self-respect, -give forth a tremendous effort, and at the same time learn to -observe the rules of the game, regard the rights of others and -stay within bounds dictated by decency and sportsmanship.</p> - -<p>Football in reality is very much the American way of life. -As in life, the players are faced with challenges and they have -an opportunity to match skills, strength, poise and determination -against each other. The participants learn to cooperate, associate,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_4"></a>[4]</span> -depend upon, and work with other people. They have -a great opportunity to learn that if they are willing to work, strive -harder when tired, look people in the eye, and rise to the occasion -when opportunity presents itself, they can leave the game -with strong self-assurance, which is so vitally important in all -phases of life. At the same time they are developing these priceless -characteristics, they get to play and enjoy fellowship with -the finest grade and quality of present day American youth.</p> - -<h4><i>The Game’s Intrinsic Values</i></h4> - -<p>Not only is football a great and worthwhile sport because it -teaches fair play and discipline, but it also teaches the number -one way of American life—to win. We are living in an era where -all our sympathy and interest goes to the person who is the -winner. In order to stay abreast with the best, we must also win. -The most advantageous and serviceable lesson that we can -derive from football is the intrinsic value of winning. It is not -the mere winning of the game, but it is teaching the boys to win -the hectic battle over themselves that is important. Sure, winning -the game is important, and I would be the last to say that -it wasn’t, but helping the boy to develop his poise and confidence, -pride in himself and his undertakings, teaching him to give that -little extra effort are the real objectives of teaching winning -football.</p> - -<p>If I had my choice of either winning the game or winning the -faith of a boy, I would choose the latter. There is no greater -reward for a coach than to see his players achieve their goals -in life and to know he had some small part in the success of the -boys’ endeavors.</p> - -<p>Boys who participate in football, whether in high school or -college, are in their formative years. It is every coach’s responsibility -to see that each boy receives the necessary guidance and -attention he so rightly deserves. I would be deeply hurt and -embarrassed if I learned a boy wasn’t just a little better person -after having played under my guidance. If we, as coaches, lose -the true sense of the value of football and get to a point where -we cannot contribute to a boy progressing spiritually, mentally,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_5"></a>[5]</span> -and physically, we will be doing this wonderful game of football -a great injustice by remaining in coaching.</p> - -<p>The coaching profession is honorable and dignified and we -football coaches are in a position to contribute to the mental -development and desirable attitudes which will remain with the -boys throughout their lives. We have the opportunities to teach -intangible lessons to our players that will be priceless to them -in future years. We are in a position to teach these boys intrinsic -values that cannot be learned at home, church, school or any -place outside of the athletic field. Briefly, these intangible attributes -are as follows: (1) Discipline, sacrifice, work, fight, -and teamwork; (2) to learn how to take your “licks,” and yet -fight back; (3) to be so tired you think you are going to die, but -instead of quitting you somehow learn to fight a little harder; -(4) when your team is behind, you learn to “suck up your guts” -and do whatever it takes to catch up and win the game; and -(5) you learn to believe in yourself because you know how to -rise to the occasion, and you know you will do it! The last trait -is the most important one.</p> - -<h4><i>The Greatest Display of Courage</i></h4> - -<p>One personal reference will illustrate the intangible attributes -that football teaches. We have all seen or heard someone tell -about the greatest display of courage a team has ever shown. -When a team you coach has had such an experience, it makes -you exceedingly happy and proud of your position and the team. -While I have never been ashamed of any of my football clubs, -I will always have a soft spot in my heart for one of my teams -in particular. I think my 1955 Texas A & M team displayed the -greatest courage, rose to the occasion better, and did more of -what I call “sucking up their guts and doing what was required -of them” in a particular game than any other team with which -I’ve ever been associated.</p> - -<p>We were playing Rice Institute in Houston on a hot, humid -afternoon. Our play was very sluggish and before we fully realized -it, the game was almost over, and we were behind 12-0. -We were leading the Conference race up to this point, but it<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_6"></a>[6]</span> -was beginning to look as if we were going to be humiliated -before 68,000 people. Having become disgusted with my starting -unit’s ineffective play, I withdrew the regulars from the game -early in the fourth quarter. With approximately four minutes -left to play, I decided to send the regulars back in. I told them -they still had time to win the game if it meant enough to them -to do so.</p> - -<p>The first unit went on to the field and immediately called -time out. I later found out they vowed to each other they were -going to do whatever it took to win the game. We eventually -got possession of the football on our own 42-yard line, and the -clock showed 2:56 remaining to play. Again the boys called -time out, giving each man a few seconds to make up his mind -just exactly what he was going to do. On the first play from -scrimmage, Lloyd Taylor, a little halfback from Roswell, New -Mexico ran 58 yards around left end for a touchdown. He kicked -the extra point and the score was 12-7, with 2:08 remaining in -the game. We tried an on-side (short) kick, and Gene Stallings -recovered the ball on Rice’s 49-yard line. Our quarterback, -Jimmy Wright, then threw a 49-yard pass to Lloyd Taylor who -made a beautiful catch as he crossed the goal line. Taylor scored -his fourteenth point as he kicked his second point-after-touchdown -placement. With the score 14-12, we lined up and kicked -the ball deep to Rice. Forcing Rice to gamble since they were -behind, they attempted a deep pass which our great fullback, -Jack Pardee, intercepted and returned 40 yards to the 3-yard -line. On the next play Don Watson carried the ball across for -a touchdown, making the final score 20-12 in our favor.</p> - -<p>After the game in our dressing room when everyone was congratulating -each other, and everything was in a state of confusion, -Lloyd Taylor suggested we thank the Master for giving us the -courage to make the great comeback. From that game on we -have always said a prayer of gratitude after the game, win, lose, -or draw.</p> - -<p>The particular incident cited was the greatest display I have -ever seen of boys reaching back and getting that little extra, -showing their true colors, and rising to the occasion and putting -into practice the thing that we preach and believe in.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_7"></a>[7]</span></p> - -<p>What do we get out of coaching? There is nothing in the world -I would swap for the associations with those boys, and the other -fine men I have coached, and the self satisfaction of knowing -I’ve helped many boys to find themselves. In my estimation, -football is truly a way of life.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_8"></a>[8]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_2">CHAPTER 2<br /> -<span class="smaller">The Theory of Winning Football</span></h2> - -</div> - -<p>Every football team has a slogan, and each coach has his own -theory as to what makes a winning team. We are no exception. -Our slogan is, “Winning is not everything, but it sure beats anything -that comes in second.” Our theory on how to develop a -winning team is very simple—WORK! If the coaches and players -will work hard, then winning will be the result.</p> - -<p>We want to win. We play to win. We are going to encourage, -insist and demand that our players give a 100% effort in trying -to win. Otherwise we would be doing them a great injustice. -It is very important for the boys to have a complete understanding -of what they must do in order to win.</p> - -<p>When a boy has completed his eligibility or has played four -years under our guidance, I like to believe he will graduate -knowing how to suck up his guts and rise to the occasion, and -do whatever is required of him to get his job done. If our boys -are willing to work hard, and we give them the proper leadership -and guidance, then they will graduate winners and our athletic -program will be a success.</p> - -<h3>HOW TO START BUILDING A WINNER</h3> - -<p>Building a winning football team is something that cannot be -accomplished overnight, or even in a year or two, if the program -is starting from scratch. I believe, irrespective of the time element -involved, a football program has little chance of succeeding unless -the following “musts” are adhered to:</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_9"></a>[9]</span></p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>1. The coach <i>must</i> have a definite plan in which he believes, -and there <i>must</i> be no compromise on his part.</p> - -<p>2. The football coach <i>must</i> have the complete cooperation -and support of the administrators and the administration, who -<i>must</i> believe in the head coach, his staff, and his plan.</p> - -<p>3. The coach <i>must</i> have a long term contract.</p> - -<p>4. The coach <i>must</i> not only be dedicated to football, but he -<i>must</i> be tough mentally.</p> - -<p>5. The head coach <i>must</i> have the sole responsibility and -authority of selecting his staff of dedicated men, who <i>must</i> believe -in the head coach and his plan.</p> -</div> - -<h4><i>The Administration Must Believe in Your Plan</i></h4> - -<p>It is vitally important that a coach build a solid foundation -for his program. In order to do this he must have complete -cooperation from every member of the school’s administration. -In many cases the school officials will not have a complete and -thorough understanding of your athletic program. It is important -that you explain to them just what you are trying to accomplish, -how long it will take, and why you are doing it in your particular -manner. The administrators and the administration must understand -the value the program has for each boy who participates, -and the ways the program can benefit the entire school system. -Therefore, before a coach accepts a particular position he should -give considerable thought to the administration’s philosophy, attitude -or point-of-view toward the football program. If the -school president or principal is skeptical, consider the position -seriously before accepting it. Building a championship team is -difficult enough with full cooperation from everyone, but it is -an impossible coaching situation without the administration’s -full support and confidence.</p> - -<h4><i>The Coach Must Have a Long Term Contract</i></h4> - -<p>If a college coach is going to build a team, it is an absolute -must that he have a long term contract. There is little use in believing -or thinking any other way. It is very possible, and highly -probable, it will take at least four or five years to shape a ball<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_10"></a>[10]</span> -club into winning form. Without the security of a long term -contract, a coach can be forced to concentrate on winning a -certain number of games each year, and it is possible this can -completely disrupt or disorganize a rebuilding program. I am -not saying that a coach should not try to win every game, because -he obviously should strive to win ’em all. I merely want to -point out the fact that without the security of a job for a period -of years, he might be forced to revert to certain practices which -he knows are not sound principles on which to build a winning -program. As an illustration, he might have to revert to such a -practice as playing individuals of questionable character because -of their immediate ability, rather than weeding them out and -concentrating on the solid citizens. The latter group will stay -with you and will eventually be winners, if you are given job -security and adequate time to work with them.</p> - -<h4><i>The Coach Must Be Dedicated and Tough Mentally</i></h4> - -<p>Unless a person is dedicated to his chosen trade or profession, -regardless of his field of endeavor, he is never going to be highly -successful. Building a winning football team is no exception. The -head coach, as well as his assistants, must be dedicated to football. -All of them must be tough mentally, too.</p> - -<p>Many times a coach’s job is unpopular and unrewarding. -From time to time a coach must make decisions that are unpleasant. -He cannot compromise, however, if he expects to build -a winner. He must be tough mentally in order to survive.</p> - -<p>In addition, a coach must be tough mentally in another sense. -He must be able to spend numerous hours studying football all -ways and always. A coach who hopes to be successful must drive -himself and be so dedicated to his job that he puts it ahead of -everything else in his life, with the exception of his religion and -his family. One can have a tremendous knowledge of the game, -but he cannot possibly make the grade unless he can stand up -to the long hours and the trying times. It is not an absolute -necessity for a coach to be exceptionally smart or a brilliant -strategist, but he must be a hard worker, mentally tough, and -dedicated to the game of football. One can only be honest with -himself in determining whether or not he has these qualifications.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_11"></a>[11]</span></p> - -<h4><i>You Must Have a Definite Plan</i></h4> - -<p>As head football coach, you must give leadership and direction -to your program if you expect it to be successful. Therefore, -you must have a definite plan in which you and your assistants -believe. In order to build winners you cannot deviate from your -plan, and there cannot be any compromises.</p> - -<p>Many factors go into the plan, such as organizing the program -and the type of boys whom you have on your squad, both -of which will have a great deal to do with your ultimate success -or failure. These and other phases of the plan will be discussed -in detail shortly, and in later chapters in this book.</p> - -<h4><i>You Must Have a Good Staff</i></h4> - -<p>In order to build winners, the head coach must surround -himself with a dedicated staff of hard working coaches. While -I have touched on this point briefly already, this particular <i>must</i> -will be discussed in greater detail in <a href="#CHAPTER_3">Chapter 3</a>, “Making the -Most of Your Coaching Staff.”</p> - -<h3>THE TYPE OF BOY = SUCCESS OR FAILURE</h3> - -<p>The team with the best athletes will usually win the tough -ball games, other things being equal. It is a well recognized -fact that a coach is no better than his material. Therefore we must -have the best material available in order to be a winner. I tell -my coaches if they can recruit the best athletes to our school, -then I can coach them. If they recruit mediocre athletes, then -the assistants will have to coach them.</p> - -<p>There are a number of qualifications that we look for in our -athletes, and some of these are <i>musts</i> if the boys are to become -champions. Football is nothing more than movement and contact. -If a player has excellent movement but won’t make contact, -he will never be a winner. Conversely, if a boy is mean, loves -body contact, and likes to hit people, but is so slow he never -gets to the ball carrier, then he will never make a winner either. -There are ways to improve an individual’s quickness, but if a -boy refuses to make contact, there is nothing that I know of to -correct it.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_12"></a>[12]</span></p> - -<p>The type of boy you select to play on your football team has -a great deal to do with your ultimate success or failure. In order -for our program to be successful, we try to select the boy with -the following traits:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>1. He must be dedicated to the game of football.</p> - -<p>2. He must have the desire to excel and to win.</p> - -<p>3. He must be tough mentally and physically.</p> - -<p>4. He must be willing to make personal sacrifices.</p> - -<p>5. He must put team glory first in place of personal glorification.</p> - -<p>6. He must be a leader of men both on and off the field.</p> - -<p>7. He should be a good student.</p> -</div> - -<h4><i>The Players Must Be Dedicated</i></h4> - -<p>A player must be dedicated to the game to the extent he is -willing to work, sacrifice, cooperate and do what he possibly -can to aid the team in victory. It is our duty as coaches to explain -and show our boys the advantages of being winners, and -to impress upon them the absolute necessity of it so they will -put forth the much needed effort to accomplish the objective. -It is important for the players to understand that football is -not an easy game; nor is achieving fame an easy task. However, -anything worth doing, is worth doing right. Therefore let’s do -it right and be winners.</p> - -<p>We refer to “the little extras” a boy must give in order to be -a winner. These little extras really make the difference between -good and great, whether it be on an individual or a team basis. -When a boy puts into practice what you have been preaching -about giving that extra effort when he is dog tired, going harder, -rising to the occasion and doing what is necessary to win, then -you are making progress and he is on the way to becoming a -winner both individually and for his team.</p> - -<p>There is nothing else I would rather see than when our boys -are in their goal line defense, and they have supreme confidence -they will keep the opposition from scoring. Every boy is taking -it upon himself personally to do what is necessary to stop the -ball carrier from scoring. When a coach has a team thinking<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_13"></a>[13]</span> -like this, he will have a winner, and the boys will be winners -when they get out of school.</p> - -<h4><i>Our Boys Must Have the Desire to Excel</i></h4> - -<p>We talk about the importance of particular aspects of coaching, -such as full cooperation, long contracts, and other phases -connected with coaching, but in the final analysis the success or -failure of your program depends on the performance of the boys -on the playing field. The game is generally won by the boys -with the greatest desire. The difference in winning and losing -is a very slight margin in a tough ball game. The same applies -to two players of equal ability, except that one is great and the -other is average. What is this slight margin? It’s the second and -third effort, both individually and as a team. The boy who intercepts -a pass or blocks a punt, or who gets his block then -goes and knocks down another opponent is the individual who -wants to excel. He will make the “big play” when it counts the -most. He and others will give us “the winning edge.” These are -the deciding factors in a tough ball game.</p> - -<h4><i>You Must Beat Your Opponent Physically</i></h4> - -<p>The teams that win consistently are the ones in the best physical -condition. As a result they can play better football than -their opposition in the fourth quarter. We also believe and teach -our boys they must be more aggressive and “out-mean” our -opponents if they expect to win consistently.</p> - -<p>We may not be as smart and as tricky as our opposition, so -we have to out-work ’em. If our boys are in top physical condition, -if we “out-mean” and physically whip our opponents by -hard blocking and tackling, and we are consistent in doing it, -we’ll win a lot of football games. Football is a contact sport, -and we must make the initial contact. In order to be a winner -a boy must whip his man individually, and the team must beat -the opponent physically.</p> - -<h4><i>Genuine All-Out Desire for Team Victory</i></h4> - -<p>Unity is the sound basis for any successful organization, and<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_14"></a>[14]</span> -a football team is no exception. Without team unity you cannot -have winners. We believe and coach team victory. Our goal is -to win every game we play. We go into every game believing -we will win it. Obviously we don’t win all of them, but we never -go into a game believing we cannot come out of it the winner.</p> - -<p>In order to have a winner, the team must have a feeling of -unity; every player must put the team first ahead of personal -glory. The boy who plays for us must be willing to make sacrifices. -Victory means team glory for everyone. Individual personal -glory means little if the team loses.</p> - -<h4><i>Must Be a Leader and a Good Student</i></h4> - -<p>In order to have winners your boys must be leaders both on -and off the field. They should be good students, too. As was -indicated previously, if your contract will give you sufficient -time to work with the “solid citizens,” they will stay with you -even if the going gets tough, and eventually they will be winners.</p> - -<h4><i>You Can’t See Into the Heart of a Boy</i></h4> - -<p>Most coaches take pride in their ability to pick out boys with -athletic ability. I am no exception. However, you can never be -absolutely certain about a boy because you cannot see what is -inside of his heart. If we could do this, we would never make -a mistake on a football player. We have seen it occur frequently -where a player was pitiful in his freshman year, and the coaches -almost give up on his ever improving. However, through determination, -hard work, pride and desire the boy would finally -develop and would play a lot of football before he graduated.</p> - -<p>My assistant coaches have a favorite story they like to tell -about a player we had at the University of Kentucky. We had -started our first practice session in the fall of 1948 when a -youngster walked out on the field. His appearance literally -stopped practice. He had on a zoot suit with the trouser legs -pegged so tightly I am certain he had difficulty squeezing his -bare feet through the narrow openings. His suspenders drew up -his trousers about six inches above his normal waist line. His -long zoot coat extended almost to his knees. His “duck tail”<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_15"></a>[15]</span> -hair style looked quite unusual. He was standing in a semi-slump, -and twirling a long chain around his finger when one of -my assistants walked over and asked him if he wanted someone. -His answer, “Yeah. Where’s the Bear?”</p> - -<p>He found me in a hurry. Our first impression was that he -would never be a football player, but he was issued a uniform -anyway. I figured he wouldn’t have the heart for our type of -football and would eliminate himself quickly from the squad. -To help him make up his mind in a hurry I instructed one of -the coaches assisting me to see that he got plenty of extra work -after practice. The boy’s name was difficult to pronounce, so -we started calling him “Smitty.”</p> - -<p>Despite “Smitty’s” outward appearance, he had the heart of -a competitor and the desire to show everyone he was a good -football player. He worked hard and proved his point. In his -senior year he was selected the outstanding player in the 1951 -Sugar Bowl game when we defeated the University of Oklahoma. -After graduation he played for several years with the New York -Giants as a fine defensive end. I shall always have the greatest -respect for him.</p> - -<p>Other coaches probably have had similar experiences where -a boy with questionable ability has made good. If a boy has -a great desire to play football, regardless of his ability, and you -work with him, he is likely to make tremendous progress toward -fulfilling his objective.</p> - -<h3>GOOD ORGANIZATION—A BIG FACTOR IN BUILDING WINNERS</h3> - -<p>Without good organization our thoughts or plans of any kind -would be absolutely useless. Good organization is a must if a -team is to operate at maximum efficiency. There are many plans -of organization that are good, and I am not saying mine is the -best, but I believe my plan is sound and this is what really -counts.</p> - -<p>It always has been my practice to observe people who are -successful in a particular field, and try to determine what makes -their operation successful. There is little originality remaining<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_16"></a>[16]</span> -in the field of coaching. Consequently we have gotten many -of our ideas from other people. As Frank Howard of Clemson -College put it, “If we get something from one team, it’s called -stealing; but if we get ideas from several different teams, it’s -called research.”</p> - -<h4><i>Use the Ant Plan</i></h4> - -<p>I borrowed my plan of organization from some ants in Africa. -I realize this sounds ridiculous and far fetched; nevertheless, -it’s the truth. It is interesting how it all came about.</p> - -<p>While I was in the Navy in Africa, one hot, humid afternoon -I was sitting under a tree feeling sorry for myself. I started to -watch some ants building an ant hill. At first I was amused, -but as I watched I became very interested. What at first appeared -to be confusion was actually a carefully organized plan as the -ants all worked toward their objective of building a home. The -longer I watched the more obvious it became that all of the -ants were working, many in small groups here and there. There -was no inactivity, no wasted motion. There was unity and there -was a plan. It appeared the ants had planned their work and -they worked their plan.</p> - -<p>With the ant plan in mind, we try to organize our practice -sessions so that we have everyone working and no one standing -around idle. We work in small groups and this eliminates inactivity. -As a result we feel that we can get more work done in a -shorter period of time. Consequently we believe the less time -a player spends on the practice field, the higher will be his -morale.</p> - -<p>I did not have to watch the ants to learn the value of teamwork -and cooperation, although this was evident in their activity. -The main lesson I learned from them was the value of small -group work in order to keep everyone busy.</p> - -<p>There are many other factors that must be taken into consideration -when organizing the program, and I shall discuss the -subject more fully in Chapters <a href="#CHAPTER_3">3</a> and <a href="#CHAPTER_10">10</a>. Planning and organization -are the backbone of a successful team. Planning a practice -so that you get maximum results from the players and the assistant<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_17"></a>[17]</span> -coaches requires a great deal of time. The importance of -this cannot be emphasized too greatly.</p> - -<h3>CONCLUSION</h3> - -<p>Winning theories vary from coach to coach, but our philosophy -toward building a winner consists of the following factors: -(1) a hard working staff that is dedicated to football; (2) -players with a genuine desire to excel, to “out-mean” the opponent, -and be in top physical condition; (3) a strong organization -and a sound plan; (4) mental toughness in both staff and -players; and (5) the full confidence of the school administration. -In addition, you must teach sound football. Your boys and your -staff must have confidence in your type of football. I shall discuss -our methods fully in later chapters.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_18"></a>[18]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_3">CHAPTER 3<br /> -<span class="smaller">Making the Most of the Coaching Staff</span></h2> - -</div> - -<p>I am a firm believer in the old saying, “A head coach is no -stronger than his assistant coaches.” In order for any head coach -to have a good program he must surround himself with a staff -of good assistant coaches. This does not mean that every coach -must have six or eight assistants. In some cases the head coach -may not have more than two or three assistants. The principles -are the same, however, regardless of the number of assistant -coaches. I have been fortunate in having an excellent group of -assistants every place I have coached, and I want to give credit -to them for any measure of coaching success I may have had -in the past.</p> - -<h3>ASSISTANT COACH: TYPE OF MAN</h3> - -<p>There are many characteristics I am seeking in an assistant -coach. I shall not attempt to list them in the order of importance -because I think they all belong at the <i>top</i> of the list. Briefly, the -desirable traits and characteristics I am seeking in an assistant -are as follows:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>1. He should be dedicated to the game of football.</p> - -<p>2. He should be willing to work hard and to make personal sacrifices.</p> - -<p>3. He should be an honest person.</p> - -<p>4. He should have a sound knowledge of football.</p> - -<p>5. He should have a great deal of initiative.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_19"></a>[19]</span></p> - -<p>6. He should be a sound thinker.</p> - -<p>7. He should be tough mentally.</p> -</div> - -<h4><i>A Dedicated Person, Hard Worker, Loyal</i></h4> - -<p>The first trait, “Be dedicated to the game of football,” is a -<i>must</i> for <i>all</i> coaches, assistants as well as head coaches. Don’t -ever try to fool yourself or anyone else. If you are not truly -dedicated to your work, and you dread spending many hours -every day working and planning on building a good football -team, then you are in the wrong business. I’ll guarantee there -is no easy way to develop a winning team. If it were an easy -task, all of us would be undefeated and “Coach of the Year.” -Unfortunately one team generally wins and the other loses, and -if it is the latter it doesn’t make a coach’s job any easier. If you -will look at the consistent winners, you will find behind them -a group of coaches who are dedicated 100% to their work.</p> - -<p>Regardless of whether it’s the college or high school level of -competition, there are coaches and teams that win year after -year. The real reason for this success, other than good material, -is the coaches of these particular teams are dedicated to the -extent that they “want” to do what is necessary to win. There is a -big difference between “wanting to” and “willing to” do something -to be a winner. Frankly, I don’t like the word “willing” -in connection with an assistant coach. First, if the coaches are -<i>not</i> willing, they should <i>not</i> be coaching. Coaching is not an -8 <span class="allsmcap">A.M.</span> to 5 <span class="allsmcap">P.M.</span> job. The assistant who is “willing” to work a little -extra is not the one I want on my staff. The assistant who -“wants” to do what is necessary in order to get the team ready -to play, regardless of the time element involved, is the man -whom I want to assist me.</p> - -<p>A head coach cannot expect his assistants to be dedicated -to their work, unless he leads by example. The head coach -must work harder, longer, and be more dedicated to his work -than any of his assistants, if he expects to have a good, hard-working -staff and winners.</p> - -<p>Another qualification I consider a must for all assistant -coaches is their 100% loyalty to the head coach’s plan. It is<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_20"></a>[20]</span> -very important for a coach and his staff to know they have -mutual trust and loyalty to each other. These characteristics -are obvious, and an assistant coach who does not possess them -commits professional suicide.</p> - -<h4><i>Initiative and Ambition</i></h4> - -<p>An assistant coach should have a great deal of initiative and -ambition. I prefer to have my assistants study the game all ways -and always. They should constantly try to improve themselves. -There is no corner on the brain market and a person advances -in his field through hard work and his own initiative.</p> - -<p>It is a must that all coaches be good “mixers.” They must be -able to get along with each other, the head coach, the players, -and the people in the community. On the college level a coach -must know how to recruit, and most of the time the successful -recruiter is a good mixer. He must sell your product—the school, -the team, the coaching staff, etc.—to athletes and their parents, -and his job will be easier if he has this type of personality.</p> - -<h4><i>Honesty and Integrity</i></h4> - -<p>It is an absolute must that all coaches be honest with themselves, -the people for whom they work, and the others with -whom they come in contact. If I cannot trust a person, I do not -want him around. Along this same line, we like our coaches -to be active in their church work. We emphasize to our players -the value of attending church, and we like our coaches to set -a good example for everyone.</p> - -<h4><i>A Sound Thinker With a Good Understanding of the Game</i></h4> - -<p>In order for a coach to be competent, he must be a sound -thinker and possess a good knowledge of the game of football. -I have mentioned this previously. I expect my assistants to -study, plan, discuss and try to come up with ideas that might -aid us in winning a football game. We are going to toss around -all ideas in our staff meetings before we adopt any of them, -but your brand of football can become stale and unprogressive -if the coaches do not study the game.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_21"></a>[21]</span></p> - -<h3>DIVISION OF COACHING DUTIES</h3> - -<p>Morale on a squad is very important. The morale of a coaching -staff is very important, too. I feel the latter group will influence -the former group, consequently I am vitally concerned -about my assistants having good morale. With this thought in -mind, I try to delegate duties and responsibilities so the assistants -enjoy their work. Each man is really a specialist, or he can do -some phase a little better than another coach. Therefore it’s -just common sense to permit him to work at the specialty -in which he is going to excel. He will not only have more enthusiasm -for his work, but his enthusiasm will be reflected in -the players’ work. There is no substitute for enthusiasm. Under -such conditions the players learn more quickly and the coaches -are able to do a better job of coaching.</p> - -<h4><i>Assistant Coaches Direct Group Work</i></h4> - -<p>I do not think it advisable for a head coach to do group work -with one of his assistants. If an assistant is directing a group and -the head man comes over to help out, he takes the lead away -from the assistant. As a result the assistant coach is likely to -lose his initiative—the very trait you want him to develop. -Secondly, the players are likely to give the head coach all of their -attention, and this isn’t fair to the assistant working with the -same group of boys. Thirdly, I do not think it is desirable to -suggest changes, make corrections or reprimand an assistant -on the field. I feel the proper time to get the matter straightened -out is after practice, and not while the players are around. I -always try to avoid situations which are not conducive to good -team and staff morale because you’ve got to have good morale -in order to build a winner.</p> - -<h4><i>The Coaching Specialist</i></h4> - -<p>I think it is important for my assistants to specialize in either -offensive or defensive football. I feel they can do a better job -of coaching if they devote most of their time and effort toward -one aspect or the other. We still want them to be cognizant of<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_22"></a>[22]</span> -the opposite phase, however, as the defensive coaches must -understand offensive football, and vice versa for the offensive -coaches. In fact, from time to time I will put an offensive coach -with the defense so he can learn more about this particular phase -of the game. I believe it would be advisable for a high school -coach, with possibly only a staff of two, to follow the same plan—one -offensive coach and the other on defense.</p> - -<p>Immediately after practice every day during the season I meet -with my staff. I have little patience with the assistant who wants -to hurry away from practice immediately. I want my staff members -to meet in the staff room so we can discuss all phases of -the day’s practice schedule while it is still fresh in our minds. -Evaluation of personnel goes on all the time. Therefore, I want -my assistants to list on the blackboard the work schedule for the -next day for their particular group of boys. In addition I want -their suggestions and comments as to the type of teamwork -needed. Now I am in a better position to do a more intelligent -job of setting up the practice schedule for the next day since I -have been made aware of our individual and team needs, -strengths and weaknesses. We have found this procedure very -helpful, and I encourage my assistants to express themselves. -I shall explain our procedures more fully in <a href="#CHAPTER_10">Chapter 10</a>.</p> - -<h4><i>Delegating Responsibility</i></h4> - -<p>The head coach must delegate responsibility to his assistants -in order to have a more effective plan of operation. The head -coach must let each assistant know what he expects from him. -An explanation of duties and responsibilities in the beginning is -likely to eliminate misunderstanding later on. Secondly, a person -with some responsibility is likely to do a better job than the -individual who doesn’t have any. I have found it gives the assistant -more confidence in himself and more pride in his work -if he has been given a certain amount of responsibility.</p> - -<p>As I mentioned previously in <a href="#CHAPTER_2">Chapter 2</a>, in order to get the -most from your staff, they must be completely sold on your -plan for building a winner. Of course, the head coach must believe -in his own plan 100%, along with the assistants, and he -cannot make any compromises if he expects to be successful.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_23"></a>[23]</span></p> - -<h4><i>A Good Coach Is a Good Teacher</i></h4> - -<p>We stress the point frequently that coaching is teaching of -the highest degree, and a good coach is a good teacher. It is not -what you and your assistants know about football that is going -to win the games, but rather what you are able to teach your -players. In order to give our coaches an opportunity to improve -their coaching techniques, we have them get up at staff meetings -and explain and demonstrate various points. The other coaches -will pretend they do not understand the coach who has the floor, -and he must explain and answer the questions to our satisfaction. -We have found this method gives the coaches a lot of confidence -and they do a better job of coaching on the field.</p> - -<h3>CONCLUSION</h3> - -<p>In order for the head coach to get the maximum from his -assistants, he must set a good example. Since others will follow -a leader who actually leads, rather than one who merely tells -what to do, I believe a head coach must work longer, harder, -and stay a jump ahead of his assistants and the other coaches in -the profession. He must be dedicated to the game of football, -well organized, sound in his thinking, and have the ability to -delegate authority and responsibility to his assistants if he expects -to build a successful program.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_24"></a>[24]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_4">CHAPTER 4<br /> -<span class="smaller">Defense: Our Kind of Football</span></h2> - -</div> - -<p>We believe <i>defense</i> is one of the most important phases of -football. As a matter of fact, we work on defense more than we -do on offense. We feel if we do not permit the opposition to -score, we will not lose the football game. While in reality most -teams actually score on us, we still try to sell our players on -the idea that if the opposition does not score we will not lose.</p> - -<p>If you expect to have a good defensive team, you must sell -your players on the importance of defensive football. Our players -are enthusiastic about defensive football. I believe we do a good -job of teaching defensive football because the staff and players -are sold on what we are trying to do. Defense is our kind of -football.</p> - -<h3>DEFENSIVE OBJECTIVES</h3> - -<p>The primary objective of defensive football is to keep the -opposition from scoring. We want our players to feel their ultimate -objective is to keep the opposition from crossing our goal -line.</p> - -<p>A more functional facet of the primary object is to keep the -opposition from scoring the “easy” touchdown, which is the -cheap one, the long pass or the long run for six points. While a -singular long run or a long completed pass may not actually -defeat us, it is very likely if either play breaks for the “easy” -touchdown we <i>will</i> be defeated.</p> - -<p>Secondly, our kicking game must be sound, which I shall<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_25"></a>[25]</span> -discuss fully in <a href="#CHAPTER_6">Chapter 6</a>. We must be able to kick the ball safely -out of dangerous territory. Providing we do this, and eliminate -the “easy” touchdown, we believe our opposition’s own offense -will stop itself 65% of the time through a broken signal, a penalty, -or some other offensive mistake. Therefore, if my boys are -aggressive while on defense, we’ll probably keep our opposition -from scoring about 25% of the time they have the ball. The remaining -10% will be a dog fight. Therefore, we must instill in -our defensive men a fierce competitive pride that each player -is personally responsible for keeping the opposition from scoring.</p> - -<h4><i>The Offensive-Minded Defense</i></h4> - -<p>Our next objective is to sell the players on the idea our defensive -unit can and will score for us. There are more ways to -score while on defense than on offense; consequently, the odds -favor the defense. If statistics are kept on the defensive team’s -performance, and the defensive team is given credit for all scores -made by running back a punt, recovering a fumble or any other -defensive maneuver where they either score or get the ball for -their offense inside of the opposition’s 25-yard line, which results -in a score, the players can be sold on the idea of the offensive-minded -defense.</p> - -<p>Previously I mentioned the importance of good morale in -building a winner. In order to sell a boy on defense you must -create good morale. Therefore, we sell our boys on the idea that -playing defense is the toughest assignment in football. We try -to see that our defensive players get most of the recognition and -favorable publicity. If our defense makes a goal line stand, and -we win the game, we try to give most of the credit to our defensive -players.</p> - -<h4><i>Sell Them On Defensive Football</i></h4> - -<p>We want to make our defensive players believe that when the -opposing team has the ball inside our 3-yard line they aren’t -going to score—they can’t score—they must not score! If a -team believes this, it’s almost impossible for the offense to score. -In 1950 our defensive unit prevented opposing teams from scoring<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_26"></a>[26]</span> -on 19 occasions from the 3-yard line. The morale of the -defensive players was outstanding. They thought it was impossible -for another team to score on them even though they had -only three yards to defend. I recall in our game with Oklahoma -University in the Sugar Bowl, the Sooners got down to our -3-yard line. We were caught with three or four of our best -players on the bench, and I was trying to get them back into -the game quickly. As Jim McKenzie, who had been replaced, -came off the field, he said, “Don’t worry, Coach, they will never -score on us.” And they did not score! When I see such evidence -as this, I know our players believe what we tell them, and “we -are in business!”</p> - -<p>I do not believe you can teach defensive football successfully -unless you are able to present a clear picture to your players of -what you are trying to accomplish. Our objective is to limit the -offense to as small an area as possible. By limiting their attack, -we can hem them in and catch them. We attempt to build a -fence around the ball, and around the offensive operation. I -want my players to have a good picture of exactly how we are -going to build this fence, and what we hope to accomplish, -both of which will be explained later.</p> - -<h4><i>Defense Is a Personal Challenge</i></h4> - -<p>Defense is a phase of football I have always considered very -interesting because every play is a personal challenge. When -a team is on defense, the players are challenging the offensive -players in relating to an area of ground or field. Every man on -defense should believe, “I am not going to let the offense score.” -If you expect to be a winner, either as a player or a coach, you -must believe in this philosophy 100%. Your play must be sound, -and you must believe in it.</p> - -<p>Offensive football is assignment football, while defense is -reaction football. One mistake on defense can cost a team a -football game. Consequently there cannot be errors on defense. -By being sound, and in order to eliminate errors, I mean you -must always have the strength of your defense against the -strength of the offense. The defensive players must be positioned<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_27"></a>[27]</span> -in such a way that the team as a whole can handle any situation -that might arise.</p> - -<h3>DEFENSIVE AXIOMS</h3> - -<p>There are numerous defensive alignments, just as there are -different points-of-view or theories toward how defense should -be played. Regardless of the differences and a coach’s particular -plan, the following “musts” are considered basic axioms if a defense -is to be sound:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>1. The defense <i>must not</i> allow the opponent to complete a -long pass for an “easy” touchdown.</p> - -<p>2. The defense <i>must not</i> allow the opponent to make a long -run for an “easy” touchdown.</p> - -<p>3. The defense <i>must not</i> allow the opposition to score by -running from within your 5-yard line.</p> - -<p>4. The defense <i>must not</i> allow the opposition to return a -kick-off for a touchdown.</p> - -<p>5. The defense <i>must not</i> allow the opposition to average more -than 20 yards per kick-off return.</p> - -<p>6. The defense <i>must</i> intercept two passes out of every 13 -passes attempted.</p> - -<p>7. The defense <i>must</i> average 20 yards per return on each interception.</p> - -<p>8. The defense <i>must</i> return three interceptions for touchdowns -per season.</p> - -<p>9. The defense <i>must</i> force the opposition to fumble the ball -on an average of three and one-half times per game.</p> - -<p>10. The defense <i>must</i> recover an average of two and one-half -fumbles per game.</p> -</div> - -<p>These 10 basic axioms are extremely important, and must be -applied if a team is to be sound defensively.</p> - -<h4><i>Defense—A Team Proposition</i></h4> - -<p>A good sound defense is one that has every player on defense -carrying out his assignment. Then it is impossible for the offense -to score. Note that I said <i>every</i> player, which makes defense a<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_28"></a>[28]</span> -team proposition and eliminates the individual defensive play. -By this I mean every defense is coordinated and a player just -doesn’t do what he wants to do. I do not mean suppressing an -individual’s initiative or desire to excel while on defense, as long -as the entire defense is a coordinated unit. We try to instill in -every boy that he is personally responsible to see that our -opposition does not score. When individual players and a team -accept this responsibility, I feel we are making progress and beginning -to build a winner.</p> - -<h4><i>Gang Tackling—A Defensive Must</i></h4> - -<p>During all phases of our defensive work we elaborate frequently -on the importance of gang tackling. We like to see -six or seven of our boys in on every tackle. Such tactics are not -only demoralizing to ball carriers and wear them down physically, -but represent sound football. It is difficult for the ball -carrier to break loose and score when half a dozen men are -fighting to get a piece of him.</p> - -<p>We want the first tackler to get a good shot at the ball carrier, -making certain he does not miss him. We want the other defenders -to “tackle the ball,” and make the ball carrier fumble -it so we can get possession of the football. We are trying to get -possession of the football any way we can. Frankly we want the -first man to the ball carrier merely to hold him up, and not let -him get away, so we can unload on him. You can punish a ball -carrier when one man has him “dangling,” and the others gang -tackle him hard. I am not implying we want our boys to pile -on and play dirty football merely to get a ball carrier out of -the game. First, we do not teach this type of football as it is a -violation of the rules and spirit of the game. Second, piling on -brings a 15-yard penalty. We cannot win when we get penalized -in clutch situations.</p> - -<h3>OUR DEFENSIVE NUMBERING SYSTEM AND TERMINOLOGY</h3> - -<p>After coaching for a number of years, and always trying to -find something that would make football easier to understand<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_29"></a>[29]</span> -for the average player, I came upon a system of defensive numbering -that has proven very valuable to me since then. In the -past I have used many different defenses. I always employed the -technique of giving each defense a name. Most of the time the -name had little in common with the defense, and this confused, -rather than helped, the players. After discussing the possibility -of the numbering system with my own and other college and -high school coaches, while at Texas A & M in 1956 I finally -come across a feasible plan for numbering defensive alignments. -I must give credit to O. A. “Bum” Phillips, a Texas high school -coach, for helping work out the solution as he experimented -with the numbering system with his high school football team.</p> - -<p>In the numbering of our defense now, we give each offensive -man a number, as well as the gaps between the offensive linemen. -<a href="#figure001">Figure 1</a> is an example of our defensive numbering system.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure001" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure001.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 1</span></p> -</div> - -<p>Accompanying each number is a particular “technique,” -which will be explained shortly. If a defensive player lines up -in a 2 position, he will play what we call a “2 technique”; a 3 -position plays a “3 technique,” etc. Therefore, from end to end -of the offensive line we can line-up our defensive men and each -position has a particular technique.</p> - -<p>Who calls the defense? How is it called and what does it -mean? Who is included in the call? Each linebacker calls the -defense for his particular side of the line. He controls his guard, -tackle and himself, but he does not control the end on his side -of the line. The latter is controlled by the defensive signal caller -in the secondary who gives a call for the 4- or 5-spoke defensive -alignment.</p> - -<p>Each linebacker calls two numbers. The first number tells -his guard where to line up and his accompanying defensive<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_30"></a>[30]</span> -technique. The second number gives the same information to -the defensive tackle.</p> - -<p>As an example, if the linebacker calls, “26,” the guard will -play a 2 technique and the tackle a 6 technique. If the caller -said, “59,” the guard would play a 5 technique and the tackle -a 9 technique. When the linebacker tells the guard and tackle -which techniques to play through his oral call, then he lines up -in a position to cover the remaining gaps. As an example, <a href="#figure002">Figure -2</a> illustrates a 26 call, and the linebacker must take a position -between his guard and tackle so he can fill the gap(s) not covered -by the other front defenders. You can see by this example -the linebacker is in a position to help out over the offensive -tackle position, and also on a wide play to his side of the line.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure002" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure002.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 2</span></p> -</div> - -<p><a href="#figure003">Figure 3</a> illustrates the position of the defensive right guard, -tackle and linebacker when the call is 59. The linebacker is now -in a position to help out on a play that is in the middle of the -line.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure003" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure003.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 3</span></p> -</div> - -<p>One point I failed to mention, if we are playing a 4-spoke -defense, which will be explained and illustrated shortly, we<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_31"></a>[31]</span> -assign one defender to play “head on” the offensive center, and -he does not figure in any of the calls. He lines up the same every -time, as is illustrated in <a href="#figure004">Figure 4</a>.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure004" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure004.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 4</span></p> -</div> - -<p>When we play a 5-spoke defense, which will also be explained -shortly, the two linebackers assign one player to the area inside -the offensive guards. As an example, if we are playing a 5-spoke -defense and the call on the right side is 59, the call on the left -side must be a one as the first digit, such as, <i>1</i>7, <i>1</i>6, <i>1</i>5. <a href="#figure005">Figure -5</a> illustrates a 59 call on the right, and a 17 call on the left, with -one man playing a 1 technique in order to keep from having a -large gap between the two guards.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure005" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure005.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 5</span></p> -</div> - -<p>You can quickly observe that by having our players learn -only a few numbers and their accompanying techniques, we can -line up in numerous defensive alignments merely by calling two -numbers. Figures <a href="#figure006">6</a> and <a href="#figure007">7</a> are examples of 59 and 39 defensive -calls, which are 4-spoke defenses with a man in a 0 technique, -and are commonly referred to as the Oklahoma and Eagle defenses, -respectively.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_32"></a>[32]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure006" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure006.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 6</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure007" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure007.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 7</span></p> -</div> - -<p><a href="#figure008">Figure 8</a> illustrates a 25 call, with a 0 technique, and is a -9-man front defensive alignment.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure008" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure008.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 8</span></p> -</div> - -<p><a href="#figure009">Figures 9-11</a> are 5-spoke defenses representing 26, 37, and -13 calls, which are commonly referred to as a wide tackle 6, a -split 6, and a gap 8 alignment, respectively.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure009" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure009.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 9</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_33"></a>[33]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure010" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure010.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 10</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure011" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure011.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 11</span></p> -</div> - -<p>These defenses, <a href="#figure006">Figures 6-11</a>, have the same call to each side. -Each side is actually independent of the other as far as the calls -are concerned. To eliminate any confusion, merely designate -which side (left) is to call first, and the other linebacker (right) -can adjust on his call accordingly so there is not a large gap in -the middle of the defensive line. The linebackers must be especially -aware of this if we are employing a 5-spoke defensive -alignment.</p> - -<p>The signal caller should never call a defense involving two -successive numbers, such as 2-3, 7-6, as this will leave too much -territory for him to try to cover (see <a href="#figure001">Figure 1</a>). The caller is -always responsible for having a man in, or capable of covering, -every gap.</p> - -<p>It is very simple for the defensive signal caller to change the -guard and tackle assignments even after he has given them a -position to line up in and its accompanying technique. The -caller merely adds a zero (0) or a one (1) to the end of the -number he has called. As an example, if he gives the call 37 -and he wants the players in the 3 technique to charge one-half -a man toward the inside, he will say, “30.” If he wants this defender -to charge one-half a man to the outside, he would say, -“31.” This second call is given to only one player at a time, but<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_34"></a>[34]</span> -he can change both of their techniques by saying, “31—71,” -or “30—70,” etc.</p> - -<h4><i>Advantages of a Defensive Numbering System</i></h4> - -<p>Our present method is the simplest one I know of for getting -players into various defenses quickly with a minimum amount -of talking. We feel it eliminates much confusion. We have found -the players take a great deal of pride in learning only a few -techniques, which they are able to execute well. We know it -makes our job easier as coaches, and we can do a better job -of coaching the boys. As a coaching point, when a coach talks -to a tackle, as an example, he talks in terms of a particular technique -(6, 7, etc.), and the player understands him immediately. -When the coaches are discussing plays, or in a staff meeting, we -identify the particular technique immediately, and everyone -understands each other. We have also found the method useful -when making out the practice schedule as I merely specify, -“Tackle coach work on 6 technique,” etc.</p> - -<p>Employing a defensive numbering system requires the defensive -signal callers to be alert. They do not merely call several -numbers. They must be aware of the tactical situation at all -times, and call a sound defense according to a tactical and strategical -planning. As an illustration, a good short yardage call -would be 13, and sound passing situation calls would be 36, -37, 39, 59 (see Figures <a href="#figure001">1</a>, <a href="#figure003">3</a>, -<a href="#figure006">6</a>, <a href="#figure007">7</a>, <a href="#figure010">10</a>, -<a href="#figure011">11</a>). I spend at least -several minutes every day with my defensive signal callers. It is -the linebackers’ responsibility to see that we line up in a sound -alignment every time.</p> - -<h3>PLAYING OUR DEFENSIVE TECHNIQUES</h3> - -<p>As illustrated in <a href="#figure001">Figure 1</a>, and mentioned earlier, our techniques -and defensive positions are numbered from 0-9 on both -sides of the defensive line, numbering from inside-out (with certain -exceptions noted, <a href="#figure001">Figure 1</a>). I now wish to explain in detail -each particular technique, although there is only a slight difference -between several of them. As an example, when playing the -2 technique, a defender lines up head on the offensive guard,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_35"></a>[35]</span> -and when playing a 4 technique he is head up on the offensive -tackle. Consequently these techniques are similar.</p> - -<h4><i>The 0 Technique</i></h4> - -<p>As illustrated in <a href="#figure012">Figure 12</a>, the defender lines up head on the -offensive center. Depending upon the situation, the distance he -lines up off the football will vary. On a short yardage situation, -he will line up close to the center’s head. On a long yardage -situation, normally he will be about one yard off the ball. He will -use either a three- or a four-point stance, with one foot staggered. -His technique is to play the center’s head with a quick hand -shiver on the snap of the ball. When he makes contact with the -center, he brings his back foot up so his feet are even with each -other. If the quarterback goes straight back to pass, the 0 technique -man is responsible for the draw play, and then he rushes -the passer. If it is a run instead of a pass play, he will keep the -center away from his blocking surface, not permitting himself -to be tied up in the middle of the line, and he will pursue the -ball taking his proper angle depending on the type of running -play.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure012" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure012.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 12</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>The 1 Technique</i></h4> - -<p>The main job of the player(s) employing the 1 technique is -to control the offensive splits, forcing the guards to keep their -splits to a minimum, as illustrated in <a href="#figure013">Figure 13</a>. He is also responsible -for keeping the center off of the defensive linebacker. -If both guards are playing in this technique, as illustrated in -<a href="#figure013">Figure 13</a>, only one will “slam” the center, and the other will -take a long step toward his guard, playing him from inside-out.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_36"></a>[36]</span> -He must always be aware of the trap coming from the inside, -however. If the play is a back-up pass, he is responsible for the -draw first, and rushing the passer second. If it is a running play, -he will slam the center or guard and then pursue the football.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure013" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure013.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 13</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>The 2 Technique</i></h4> - -<p>The 2 technique is similar to the 0 technique, and is illustrated -in <a href="#figure014">Figure 14</a>. One difference is the guard is head on the offensive -guard, instead of on the offensive center. The distance he lines -up off the ball in a staggered stance will be determined by the -tactical situation. On the snap of the ball he plays the guard -with a hand shiver, and immediately locates the football. If it -is a back-up pass and there is no man in a 0 or 1 technique, he -will look for the draw play first, and then rush the passer. If it -is a running play, he will look first toward the inside for a trap, -and then pursue the football.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure014" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure014.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 14</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>The 3 Technique</i></h4> - -<p>The 3 technique is similar to the 1 technique, and is illustrated -in <a href="#figure015">Figure 15</a>. The 3 man is responsible for keeping the -offensive tackle’s split cut down, and on occasion to keep the -offensive guard or tackle from blocking the defensive linebacker.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_37"></a>[37]</span> -He, too, lines up with the feet slightly staggered, and about one -foot off the ball. Depending upon the defense, when the ball is -snapped, he will play either the guard or tackle with a quick -flipper or shiver, preferably with the hands. He is to watch for -the trap at all times. If the play is a straight drop back pass, he -will rush the passer from the inside. If it is a running play, he -will pursue the football.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure015" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure015.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 15</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>The 4 Technique</i></h4> - -<p>The 4 technique man lines up head on the offensive tackle and -about one to one and one-half feet off the ball, and is illustrated -in <a href="#figure016">Figure 16</a>. He will have his feet slightly staggered, and on the -snap of the ball he is to play the offensive tackle with a quick -hand or forearm flipper. If it is a running play toward him, he -must whip the offensive tackle, be ready to stop the hand-off, -and help out on the off-tackle play. If it is a straight back pass, -he will rush the passer from the inside. If the play goes away or -to the far-side, he will control the offensive tackle and pursue -the football. On his angle of pursuit he should never go around -the offensive tackle, but pursue the football going through the -tackle’s head.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure016" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure016.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 16</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_38"></a>[38]</span></p> - -<h4><i>The 5 Technique</i></h4> - -<p>The 5 technique man lines up on the outside eye of the offensive -tackle, as illustrated in <a href="#figure017">Figure 17</a>, with the feet staggered -(outside foot back in most cases). On the snap of the ball he -employs a forearm flip charge into the tackle. As he makes contact, -his back foot is brought up even with his front foot. He has -75% off-tackle responsibility, and he should never be blocked in -by only one man. If it is a straight back pass, he should rush -the passer from inside-out. If the play comes toward him, he -should whip the tackle and make the play. He must be certain -to keep the offensive blocker in front of him at all times as the 5 -man will be eliminated from the play very easily if he tries to go -around his blocker. If the play goes away from him, he must -pursue the football. He is instructed not to cross the offensive -line of scrimmage when employing a 5 technique.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure017" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure017.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 17</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>The 6 Technique</i></h4> - -<p>The 6 technique player lines up head on the offensive end, as -illustrated in <a href="#figure018">Figure 18</a>. If the end splits too far, the 6 man is -to “shoot the gap.” He is primarily responsible for keeping the -offensive end from releasing quickly on passes, and he must keep -the end from blocking the linebacker. He is responsible for the -off-tackle play. Consequently he must not be blocked in or out. -The game situation will determine how far he lines up off the -ball, but it will usually vary from one to three yards. If the play -is a straight back pass, he is responsible for rushing the passer -from the outside-in. If the passer runs out of the pocket, the 6 -man must not permit him to get to the outside. He must either<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_39"></a>[39]</span> -tackle the passer or force him to throw the football. If the -play comes toward the 6 man, he whips the end with a flip or -shiver charge, and helps out both inside and outside. He never -crosses the line of scrimmage unless it is a back-up pass. If it is -an option play toward him, he must make the quarterback pitch -the ball or he must tackle the quarterback. If the flow goes away -from him, he trails the play. He should be as deep as the deepest -man in the offensive backfield so he can contain the reverse play -back to his side, not permitting the ball carrier to get outside -of him.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure018" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure018.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 18</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>The 7 Technique</i></h4> - -<p>The 7 technique player lines up splitting the inside foot of -the offensive end, as illustrated in <a href="#figure019">Figure 19</a>. He is responsible -for forcing the end to reduce his offensive split. We want him to -line up with his outside foot staggered, and he must never be -blocked out by the offensive end. He has 75% inside responsibility -and 25% outside responsibility. When the ball is snapped, he -uses a hand or forearm flipper charge on the offensive end and -brings his back foot up even with his front foot. His main responsibility -is to whip the offensive end, and to close the off-tackle -play. If the play is a straight drop back pass, he is the -outside rusher and he must not permit the quarterback to get -outside of him. If the play goes away from him, he is to trail -the ball carrier. He plays just like the trail or chase man on the -6 technique. He should be as deep as the deepest offensive backfield -man so he can contain any reverse play coming back to his -side of the line. He should not let such a play get outside of his -position.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_40"></a>[40]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure019" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure019.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 19</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>The 8 Technique</i></h4> - -<p>When we speak of a man playing an 8 technique, as illustrated -in <a href="#figure020">Figure 20</a>, we are speaking of a “true end,” or a defensive -end who lines up outside of the offensive end. The 8 man -will be from one and one-half to three yards outside of the offensive -end’s normal position, with his inside foot forward, and his -shoulders parallel with the line of scrimmage. If it is a straight -back pass, the defensive end, without taking his eyes off the -passer, will turn to his outside, and using a cross-over step will -sprint to his outside trying to get width and depth to play the -ball to his side. His depth should be 8-10 yards deep, similar to -a linebacker’s position covering the flat. He stops running when -the quarterback stops to set up. When the ball is thrown, he -sprints for the ball.</p> - -<p>If the play comes toward the 8 man, we want him to cross the -line of scrimmage about two yards, getting set with his inside -foot forward, shoulders parallel with the line of scrimmage, and -playing the outside blocker. He is the outside contain man, and -he must not permit the ball to get outside of him. He never -makes the quarterback pitch on option plays. If it is a running -pass toward him, he is the outside contain and rush man. If the -flow goes away from him, he must make sure it is not a reverse -play back to his side before he takes his proper angle of pursuit, -which is through the area where the defensive safety man lined -up originally.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure020" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure020.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 20</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_41"></a>[41]</span></p> - -<h4><i>The 9 Technique</i></h4> - -<p><a href="#figure021">Figure 21</a> illustrates where the defensive men line up when -playing a 9 technique, splitting the outside foot of the offensive -end. He should line up 14 inches off the line of scrimmage, with -most of the weight on his outside foot which is back. When the -ball is snapped, the 9 technique man will take a short step -with his inside foot toward the offensive end, and at the same -time he will deliver a hand or forearm shiver to the head of the -offensive end. If the offensive end blocks in and the play comes -toward him, the 9 man immediately looks for the near halfback -or the trapper expecting to be blocked by either offensive man.</p> - -<p>If a running play comes toward him and the quarterback is -going to option the football, he must make the quarterback pitch -the ball. If the quarterback is faking the ball to the fullback, the -9 man must “search” the fullback for the ball first. The 9 technique -man never crosses the line of scrimmage. If the offensive -play is a straight back pass, the 9 man delivers a blow to the end, -and drops back two or three yards looking for the screen or -short pass. He is in a position to come up and make the tackle -if the quarterback gets outside of your outside rusher and the -quarterback decides to run with the football. If the flow goes -away, he is the trail man and has the same responsibilities as the -6 and 7 technique men, which I explained previously. The most -important coaching point is that the man playing the 9 technique -must deliver a good blow to the offensive end on every -play.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure021" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure021.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 21</span></p> -</div> - -<h3>OUR DEFENSIVE STANCE</h3> - -<p>We are not too particular about the stance our defensive -players employ, but on the other hand we are not so indifferent -that we ignore how they line up defensively. We want them to<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_42"></a>[42]</span> -be comfortable, but at the same time the linemen must be in a -position so they can uncoil, make good contact, and be in a good -position so they can move quickly. We never permit a man to -take a stance in which he gets too extended and loses most of -his hitting power. There are a few basic techniques we insist our -defensive players use. These techniques vary to some extent from -position to position. The defensive stance for linemen, linebackers, -and the secondary is as follows:</p> - -<p><i>Guards</i>—The defensive stance our guards take is very similar -to the stance we use offensively. We like them to be in a four-point -stance with their feet even and spread about three inches -wider than their shoulders. The weight must be slightly forward, -and their tail slightly higher than their shoulders. Their back is -straight, and their shoulders are square. Their hands are slightly -outside of their feet, elbows relaxed, with thumbs turned in and -forward of the shoulders slightly.</p> - -<p><i>Tackles</i>—The defensive stance our tackles take is very similar -to the stance we use offensively. We want our tackles to use a -four-point stance, having their inside foot staggered back -slightly. Their feet should be a little wider than their shoulders. -The weight must be forward slightly, and the tail should be -slightly higher than the head. Just like the guards’ stance, we -want their back straight and their shoulders square. Their neck -must be relaxed, but their eyes must be focused on the man -opposite or on the ball. The hands are slightly outside of the -feet, elbows relaxed, and the thumbs turned in and forward of -the shoulders slightly.</p> - -<p><i>Ends</i>—The defensive ends line up with their inside foot forward -and perpendicular to the line of scrimmage. We want our -ends standing up in a good football position. The knees are -slightly bent, as is their body bent forward slightly at the waist. -They must have their eyes on the quarterback, but still be able -to see the offensive halfback and end closest to them on their -side. When the action starts toward an end, we want him to -come across the line and make contact with the outside blocker. -The shoulders should remain parallel with the line of scrimmage -upon contact with an offensive back.</p> - -<p><i>Linebackers</i>—We want our linebackers to be standing with<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_43"></a>[43]</span> -their feet even and parallel with each other. They should be in a -good football position—tail down, back straight, slight bend at -the waist, weight on the balls of the feet, knees bent, and coiled -to the extent that when a guard or tackle fires out on the linebacker -the defensive man can whip him. Our linebacker takes a -step forward with the inside foot toward the blocker who is firing -out at him. We want him to drop his tail and hit on the rise -when making contact. He then brings his back foot up even with -his forward foot so that he will be in a position to move laterally.</p> - -<p><i>Halfbacks</i>—Our defensive halfbacks line up in their regular -position which is three yards outside of the offensive end in -a 3-deep defense, and on the inside shoulder of the offensive -end in a 4-spoke defense. We want our halfbacks to have their -outside foot back with the inside foot pointing perpendicular to -the line of scrimmage. The outside foot is about 14″ behind the -front foot, and pointing out at a 45 degree angle. The halfback’s -knees should be flexed slightly, and he must be in a good football -position. His arms should be in a cocked position. He must -face the quarterback. His first step is backward and outward.</p> - -<p><i>Corner man</i>—The corner man lines up in his regular position -about four yards wide and two and one-half yards deep, with his -feet parallel and even about 18″ apart pointing directly toward -the offensive quarterback. He should be in a good football position, -weight on the balls of the feet, arms cocked, etc. He should -<i>not</i> rest his hands on his knees. From a good football position -he can rotate quickly and properly, or he can come forward -and meet the play if it comes toward him.</p> - -<p><i>Safety</i>—The safety man lines up a little deeper than the other -backs. He should face slightly the wide side of the field or the -strong side of the offensive backfield. He has his outside foot -back, and he is permitted to stand a little straighter than the other -deep backs. He, too, is in a good football position watching the -quarterback. His first step is backward and outward, and he -must be able to cover a pass from sideline to sideline.</p> - -<h3>OUR SURPRISE DEFENSE</h3> - -<p>We never send our boys into a football game without trying -to prepare them for every conceivable situation that might arise<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_44"></a>[44]</span> -during the contest. We must try to anticipate every situation, and -counteract with a sound defense. A situation might be very unusual, -and we cannot actually defense it properly until the coach -in the press box tells us exactly what the opposition is doing. -Then we can work out the proper defense on the sideline and -send it in. In the meantime the boys must have something they -can counteract with immediately or the opposition is likely to -score with its surprise offense. Consequently our signal caller -will yell, “<i>Surprise Defense</i>,” when he sees an unusual offensive -formation, and the boys will react accordingly. Our rules for -covering a spread or unusual offensive alignment are as follows:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>1. If one man flanks, our halfback will cover him.</p> - -<p>2. If two men go out, our halfback and end will move out and -cover them.</p> - -<p>3. If three men go out, our halfback, tackle and end move out -and cover them.</p> - -<p>4. If four offensive men go out, we put out the halfback, end -and tackle, and our linebacker goes out half-way. The alignment -for the linebacker would be a yard deeper and a yard wider -than he usually lines up.</p> - -<p>5. If five men go out on the offensive team, we put out our -halfback, end, tackle, linebacker half-way, and the defensive -guard. If they put more than five men out, we do not change our -alignment.</p> - -<p>6. If there is any doubt about how to meet strength with -strength, we start with the outside man and put a defender on -every other offensive man.</p> - -<p>7. The safety man will always play in the middle of the field -or in the middle of the eligible receivers.</p> - -<p>8. A defensive end must never be flanked by one offensive -man unless he can beat the flanker through the gap and into the -offensive backfield.</p> - -<p>9. A tackle should never be flanked by two offensive men -unless he can beat the nearest opponent.</p> - -<p>10. The initial charge of the players who are left on defense -is to the outside, unless there is a concentration of offensive -backs. Should the latter be the case, then the defensive charge -will be normal.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_45"></a>[45]</span></p> - -<p>11. The greater the offensive team splits its line, the farther -off the line of scrimmage the defenders must play.</p> -</div> - -<p><a href="#figure022">Figures 22-23</a> illustrate two examples of spread formations, -and the application of our <i>surprise defense</i> coverage rules.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure022" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure022.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 22</span></p> -</div> - -<p>The first offensive man who flanks to our right (<a href="#figure022">Figure 22</a>), -will be covered by our defensive right halfback. The second to -our right will be covered by our right end. The first man flanked -to our left will be covered by our offensive left halfback; the -second man out, by our left end; the third flanker, by our left -tackle; the fourth flanker will be covered by our left linebacker, -who will move out half-way. The fifth man flanked to our left -will be covered by our left guard. The remaining players will -meet strength with strength. Our right guard will play on the -outside shoulder of the offensive right guard, and the defensive -right tackle will play on the outside shoulder of the offensive -left guard, as illustrated in <a href="#figure022">Figure 22</a>.</p> - -<p>We instruct our defensive players to force the offensive -players to come to them. We do not want our men off the line -of scrimmage to penetrate, leaving gaps in the defense. We -want our men to be in a good football position so they can pursue -the ball quickly.</p> - -<p><a href="#figure023">Figure 23</a> illustrates another example of the application of -our <i>surprised defense</i> rules in covering a spread offense.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_46"></a>[46]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure023" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure023.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 23</span></p> -</div> - -<h3>OUR VICTORY DEFENSE</h3> - -<p>I think it is very important for a team to be able to go into -a “<i>Victory Defense</i>” when the occasion warrants its use; for example, -when you have a slim lead with little time remaining -before the termination of the first half or the game. We will go -into a 5-man line if we have the game won and our opponents -are not close to our goal line. Under such circumstances we can -afford to permit the opposition to get a first down or two, but -we cannot afford to let them complete the long pass or the long -run for a touchdown. We believe our victory defense is sound, -and we are playing sound defensive football when we employ it. -<a href="#figure024">Figure 24</a> illustrates the victory defense we used eight times in -one year, and we intercepted our opposition’s intended forward -pass on seven of the eight occasions.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure024" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure024.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 24</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_47"></a>[47]</span></p> - -<p>The individual and team duties and responsibilities when we -employ our <i>Victory Defense</i> are as follows:</p> - -<p><i>Middle Lineman</i>—Sole responsibility is to look for the screen -pass and/or for the draw play.</p> - -<p><i>Ends and Tackles</i>—Line up on the outside shoulder of the -offensive ends and tackles. If the offensive end(s) splits, we will -adjust on them with our three deep backs. We want our defensive -ends to shove the offensive ends to the inside, holding them up -if possible, and then look to the inside for a trap block or for a -screen pass. Should neither of these occur, the ends are to contain -the passer, not permitting the ball to get outside either of -their respective positions. They should play loose and proceed -with caution, rather than rushing hard into the offensive backfield.</p> - -<p>The defensive tackles should play back off the line of scrimmage -with their feet even and parallel. Each tackle must keep -his man in front of him, not permitting the offensive tackles to -block them in or out. When a pass develops, the tackles must -rush the passer, making certain to stay in front of the football.</p> - -<p><i>Linebackers</i>—Line up about six yards deep and at a spot -opposite where the defensive end ordinarily would line up. By -lining up wide, we hope to funnel the offense toward the middle -of our formation. By this I mean we want them to direct their -attack toward the inside and we don’t want them to turn the -corner, to get outside or to kill the clock by running out-of-bounds.</p> - -<p><i>Halfbacks and Safety</i>—We want our halfbacks to be at least -12 yards deep and well outside the offensive formation. We want -our safety man at least 12 yards deep and in the middle of our -defensive alignment. The three backs will play their regular -defense.</p> - -<p><i>Best Defensive Player</i>—The next step in setting up our <i>Victory -Defense</i> is to station our very best defensive football player -10 yards behind the middle safety man. His sole responsibility -is to keep the offensive team from scoring. He must always stay -between the ball and the goal line. We do not want him to come -forward and break up a pass. Nor do we want him coming up -to make the tackle. We want him to fight off blockers and make<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_48"></a>[48]</span> -certain the ball carrier does not score should our defense break -down and the opposition move downfield toward the goal line -with a long run or a completed pass. When the ball is thrown, -we want every man on the team to go for the ball <i>except</i> our -deepest man, our best defensive football player. He remains 10 -yards behind the ball at all times in case there is a tip and the -opponent might catch it and score. His sole responsibility is to -keep the opposition from scoring when we are using our <i>Victory -Defense</i>.</p> - -<h3>OUR GOAL LINE DEFENSE</h3> - -<p>Our goal line defense is very simple, and I am certain many -other coaches use the same goal line defense, as illustrated in -<a href="#figure025">Figure 25</a>. Perhaps there are a number of goal line defenses -that are better than ours, but we have faith and believe in our -goal line defense, and I believe this is 50% of the battle. When -we go into our goal line defense, we want our boys to be so sold -on what they are doing that they are not going to let the opposition -score. Each man is going to take it upon himself to see -that they do not score over his particular defensive area. Playing -goal line defense is a terrific challenge. There is not much territory -remaining, and the big questions are, “Who is going to -come out on top?” and “Who will end up with the ball when -the dust settles?” If we give our team a sound plan and teach -it to them well, and they believe in it and in us, we will do all -right.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure025" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure025.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 25</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_49"></a>[49]</span></p> - -<p><a href="#figure025">Figure 25</a> illustrates our goal line defense, and the individual -and team duties and responsibilities are as follows:</p> - -<p><i>Ends</i>—The defensive ends line up in a four-point stance as -close to the line of scrimmage as they can get, just shading the -outside eye of the offensive ends. On the snap of the ball the -defensive ends will charge low and hard through the tail of their -offensive ends, trying to get approximately one yard deep into -the offensive backfield. If the flow comes toward his side and -the quarterback has the football, the defensive end tries to force -the quarterback to pitch back to the off-halfback.</p> - -<p><i>Tackles</i>—The defensive tackles line up on the outside eye of -the offensive tackles, and they aim for a spot one yard deep in -the offensive backfield behind the inside foot of the offensive -tackles. Each tackle is responsible for the hand-off play to his -side, making the tackle or forcing the dive play to the inside so -our middle linebacker can make the tackle.</p> - -<p><i>Guards</i>—The defensive guards get their spacing by lining -up on each other, but theoretically they will line up on the inside -eye of the offensive guards. They are responsible for sealing-off -the middle of the line, and for keeping the offensive center from -blocking the middle linebacker. They aim for a spot about one -yard behind the offensive center’s position. They must get to this -spot using a low, hard submarine charge.</p> - -<p>As illustrated in <a href="#figure026">Figure 26</a>, if our six linemen carry out their -defensive assignments using a low, hard charge and get to their -predetermined spots, we will form a wall.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure026" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure026.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 26</span></p> -</div> - -<p><i>Middle Linebacker or Defensive Center</i> (see <a href="#figure025">Figure 25</a>)—He -is responsible for making any play that occurs between the offensive -tackles. He should make the tackle on a hand-off, on a<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_50"></a>[50]</span> -play up the middle, and help on the off-tackle play. On a back-up -pass, he will drop off covering a short zone. If the play starts -wide, the middle linebacker will pursue the football. He should -be one of the best defensive football players. <a href="#figure027">Figure 27</a> illustrates -the defensive position and responsibilities of the middle -linebacker on our goal line defense.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure027" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure027.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 27</span></p> -</div> - -<p><i>Inside Linebackers or Fullback and Right Halfback</i> (see <a href="#figure025">Figure -25</a>)—They are responsible for the off-tackle play and the -quick containing of the quarterback on the option play (<a href="#figure028a">Figure -28a</a>). If the flow goes away, they check for the counter play -before they pursue the football. On a running pass toward one -side or the other, as illustrated in <a href="#figure028b">Figure 28b</a>, one linebacker -will cover the flat and the other his hook spot. On a back-up -pass they will cover the short one-quarter zones or areas.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure028a" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure028a.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 28</span>a</p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_51"></a>[51]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure028b" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure028b.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 28</span>b</p> -</div> - -<p><i>Outside Linebackers or the Left Halfback and the Quarterback</i> -(see <a href="#figure025">Figure 25</a>)—They are responsible for the wide play. -They must not permit the play to get outside of them on their -particular side of the defensive alignment. When the offensive -play starts, both outside linebackers will “read” the offensive -end closest to them, and the flow of the offensive backs. It is -important they diagnose a running pass correctly, because the -offensive end to the on-side must be covered correctly if his -route is deep. (The outside linebacker must cover the deep man -whether it’s an end or a back.) If the play is away, the -backs will revolve toward it.</p> - -<p>The two inside and two outside linebackers (<a href="#figure025">Figure 25</a>) play -4-spoke pass coverage on all passes, which will be explained in -greater detail in <a href="#CHAPTER_5">Chapter 5</a>, “Pass Defense.” Our automatic -“Thunder,” which is very good versus this particular situation, -will also be explained later.</p> - -<h3>A SPLIT-T DEFENSE</h3> - -<p>There are a number of good defenses versus a T team with a -straight-up T backfield. I will go over several of the defenses -we have used more frequently than others. <a href="#figure029">Figure 29</a> illustrates -our 59 call or the Oklahoma 5-4 defense versus the T formation. -The individual and team duties and responsibilities are as follows:</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_52"></a>[52]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure029" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure029.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 29</span></p> -</div> - -<p><i>Ends</i>—The defensive ends play a 9 technique, and on this -particular defense both ends’ assignments and techniques will be -identical. They will not penetrate beyond the line of scrimmage -unless the flow is away. When the flow goes away, the off-side -defensive end becomes the trail man.</p> - -<p><i>Tackles</i>—The defensive tackles play a 5 technique, which I -discussed in detail earlier in the chapter. They will never cross -the line except on a straight drop back pass, and then both -tackles will rush the passer. Otherwise the tackles whip their -respective opponents (tackles) and pursue the football.</p> - -<p><i>Middle Guard</i>—The middle guard plays a 0 technique, always -alert for the screen pass or the draw play. On the snap of -the ball, the middle guard should whip the offensive center and -then go to the ball.</p> - -<p><i>Linebackers</i>—The inside linebackers will line up on the outside -eye of their respective offensive guards, and “read” through -them into the offensive backfield. If the offensive guards or -tackles fire out, the linebackers whip them and go to the football. -If the flow goes away, the off-side linebacker will check the -counter play, and then pursue the football. On a drop back pass -each linebacker will cover his short one-quarter pass zone or -area.</p> - -<p>The defensive secondary will play its regular 4-spoke defense, -and revolve on the plays after the offense shows what they are -going to do (or from a predetermined call, which will be explained<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_53"></a>[53]</span> -shortly). The 4-spoke secondary will be discussed and -illustrated in <a href="#CHAPTER_5">Chapter 5</a>, “Pass Defense.”</p> - -<p><a href="#figure030">Figure 30</a> illustrates our 27 call or a wide tackle 6 defensive -alignment versus the T formation.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure030" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure030.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 30</span></p> -</div> - -<p>We use a 6-2 alignment frequently because we can stunt easily -or we can play it straight versus a long yardage situation, and -we can jump from it into another defensive alignment without too -much difficulty. The linebackers control their particular units, -as I explained earlier. The individual and team duties and responsibilities -are as follows:</p> - -<p><i>Guards</i>—The guards will play a tough 2 technique, then -pursue the football. On a drop back pass they are responsible -for the screen pass in the middle, the draw play, and rushing -the passer.</p> - -<p><i>Tackles</i>—The tackles will play a tough 7 technique. They are -responsible for the off-tackle play to their respective side. If the -play goes away, the tackle is the trail man. On back-up passes, -the tackles rush the passer from the outside.</p> - -<p><i>Ends</i>—The defensive ends play an 8 technique, and they are -the contain men if the flow comes their way. If the ball goes<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_54"></a>[54]</span> -away, the off-end drops back and pursues through the area -where the safety lined up originally. On back-up passes they will -cover the short one-quarter pass areas or zones.</p> - -<p><i>Linebackers</i>—The linebackers line up on the inside eye of -the offensive tackles, and play their regular positions. If the play -comes toward them, the linebacker whips the blocker with a -flipper and plays the ball carrier. When flow is away, he checks -the counter play and then pursues the football. On pass plays -they will cover their short one-quarter pass zones.</p> - -<p><i>Secondary</i>—The defensive secondary will play their regular -3-deep coverage, which will be explained in the next chapter. -On wide-running plays the halfback must come up to the outside -and turn the play back inside. The safety man comes up to the -inside, playing inside-out, and the off- or far halfback revolves -and becomes the last safety man.</p> - -<p><a href="#figure031">Figures 31-34</a> illustrate several of our defensive stunts from -a 6-2 alignment which we have employed with success in the -past.</p> - -<p>In <a href="#figure031">Figure 31</a> the linemen pinch, sealing-off the inside, and -the linebackers cover outside.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure031" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure031.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 31</span></p> -</div> - -<p>In <a href="#figure032">Figure 32</a> the guards loop to the outside over the offensive -tackles, and the linebackers fill inside the offensive guard splits.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_55"></a>[55]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure032" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure032.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 32</span></p> -</div> - -<p><a href="#figure033">Figure 33</a> illustrates a simple X-pattern between the defensive -ends and tackles.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure033" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure033.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 33</span></p> -</div> - -<p><a href="#figure034">Figure 34</a> illustrates the tackles pinching, and the linebackers -replacing them at the line of scrimmage over the offensive ends.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure034" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure034.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 34</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_56"></a>[56]</span></p> - -<h3>OUR DEFENSE VERSUS AN UNBALANCED LINE</h3> - -<p>We do not adjust a great deal to an unbalanced line, and our -adjustments are relatively simple. We merely move our defensive -line over one whole man, and then revolve the secondary -toward the weak side, as illustrated in <a href="#figure035">Figure 35</a>.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure035" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure035.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 35</span></p> -</div> - -<p>When we do this, we carry out our same assignments, which -I have explained already. The only difference is that our middle -guard lines up on the offensive strong side guard, instead of on -the center. If we are playing a 3-deep defense, we would adjust -with our linemen. Then we consider the strong guard as the -middle of the offensive line (the center), and we play our -regular defense.</p> - -<h3>ADJUSTMENTS VERSUS BACKS AND ENDS FLANKED</h3> - -<p>When we have a defense called and the opposition comes out -and lines up with a back or an end out, we can play it one of -two ways. If it is a floater out or an end split, we will adjust -slightly with our secondary, and we will drop the defensive end -off the line a little. The remainder of the defensive linemen -will play the defense that has been called. If a flanker is put out -to one side or the other, we will revolve our 4-spoke secondary -toward him and leave the linemen in their regular positions, or<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_57"></a>[57]</span> -we will shift our line toward the flanker one whole man. These -adjustments will be explained and illustrated more fully in <a href="#CHAPTER_5">Chapter -5</a>, “Pass Defense.”</p> - -<p>In making our game plans, which will be discussed in <a href="#CHAPTER_10">Chapter -10</a>, “Planning For a Game,” we will always have a definite -call that our signal caller will use in the situations discussed -above relating to our adjustments versus backs and/or ends -flanked out. As an example, we may tell our signal caller to -shift our defense <i>away</i> from ends out and floaters, but shift -<i>toward</i> flankers and an unbalanced line. These calls will depend -upon the information we secure from scouting our opponents.</p> - -<h3>OUR DEFENSES VERSUS THE SINGLE WING OFFENSE</h3> - -<p>Defensing the single wing offense has always created problems -for us because we feel we must meet strength with strength, and -then we get hurt to the weak side. <a href="#figure036">Figures 36-37</a> illustrate two -defenses which we believe are sound, and we have used them -successfully against the single wing offense. Of course, personnel -makes the defense as we all know, and a linebacker like Jack -Pardee whom I had at Texas A & M made all of our defenses -sound.</p> - -<p><a href="#figure036">Figure 36</a> is a defense which I feel is especially good versus -the single wing offense. The duties of the defenders are as -follows:</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure036" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure036.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 36</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_58"></a>[58]</span></p> - -<p><i>Strong Side End</i>—The end lines up one to three yards outside -of the wingback, “reading” him and the offensive end. If -the flow comes toward him, the strong side end comes across -hard about three yards into the offensive backfield, and he turns -everything in, as he is the contain man. When he makes contact -with the outside blocker, the defensive end’s shoulders must be -parallel to the line of scrimmage. If the flow goes away from -him, he drops back and pursues the ball carrier. On a straight -drop back pass, he will cover the short one-quarter area.</p> - -<p><i>Strong Side Tackle</i>—He lines up on the outside eye of the -offensive end, and on the snap of the ball he charges through the -head of his man. He is to penetrate the offense about one yard. -If the flow goes away, he trails the play. On a straight drop back -pass he rushes from the outside.</p> - -<p><i>Strong Side Guard</i>—He lines up on the outside eye of the -offensive guard and on the snap of the ball he tries to penetrate -through the head of the guard, trying to seal-off the middle. If -the flow goes away, he will pursue the ball. On a straight drop -back pass he rushes from the inside.</p> - -<p><i>Weak Side Guard</i>—He has the same alignment and assignment -as his strong side guard, only he is on the other side of the -defensive line.</p> - -<p><i>Weak Side Linebacker</i>—He plays in front of the offensive -weak side end and keeps him from getting out quickly on a pass -play. If the flow comes toward him, the weak side linebacker -whips the end and then “plays football.” If the flow is away, he -will pursue the ball. On a straight drop back pass he will cover -the short flat one-quarter pass zone or area.</p> - -<p><i>Weak Side End</i>—He lines up about two yards outside of the -offensive weak side end. If the flow comes toward him, he will -come across the line playing his 8 technique, which I have explained -before. He cannot permit the play to get outside of his -position. When he makes contact with the blocker, his shoulders -must be parallel with the line of scrimmage. He will trail the -play if the flow goes away from him. He rushes the passer on a -drop back pass action.</p> - -<p><i>Middle Linebacker</i>—He lines up in front of the center. He -varies his position as at times he will be close, and other times<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_59"></a>[59]</span> -off the offensive center’s position. He keys the blocking back, -who is the offensive quarterback, and the middle linebacker goes -to the football. He drops back and covers the short one-quarter -area on drop back passes.</p> - -<p><i>Strong Side Linebacker</i>—He lines up approximately behind -the strong side tackle, and he reads the wingback, end and -quarterback. When the flow comes toward him, he comes up -and plays it tough. When the flow goes away from him he pursues -the football. He covers a short one-quarter area versus the straight -drop back pass.</p> - -<p><i>3-Deep Secondary</i>—They play their regular 3-deep coverage, -which will be discussed in detail in the next chapter.</p> - -<p><a href="#figure037">Figure 37</a> illustrates another of our 6-2 defensive alignments -versus the single wing offense. The individual assignments are -the same as those just described, except that the guards play -slowly.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure037" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure037.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 37</span></p> -</div> - -<p>We employ a number of defensive stunts when we play against -a single wing team. We have been quite successful in the past -with the stunts illustrated in <a href="#figure038">Figures 38-41</a>. There are other -stunts which may be used, of course, but we have found the -four stunts illustrated (<a href="#figure038">Figures 38-41</a>) satisfactory and adequate.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_60"></a>[60]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure038" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure038.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 38</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure039" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure039.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 39</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure040" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure040.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 40</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_61"></a>[61]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure041" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure041.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 41</span></p> -</div> - -<h3>CONCLUSION</h3> - -<p>There are many defenses that are good versus various offensive -formations. The important point is to have a defense you and -your players believe in, and which is sound in all respects. Each -player must take pride in himself and his defensive ability. He -must personally feel he is not going to permit the opposition -to score. He must accept it as a personal challenge to himself. -He must eliminate the long run and/or the long pass for the -“easy” touchdown, pursue relentlessly and tackle viciously in -order to be sound both individually and as a team while on -defense.</p> - -<p>Other phases of defensive football, such as defending against -the on-side kick and the field goal attempt, will be discussed in -detail in <a href="#CHAPTER_6">Chapter 6</a>, “Our Kicking Game.” The drills which we -use for our defensive ends, interior linemen, linebackers, the -secondary, and for the team will be illustrated in <a href="#CHAPTER_11">Chapter 11</a>. -Pass defense will be discussed in its entirety in <a href="#CHAPTER_5">Chapter 5</a>.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_62"></a>[62]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_5">CHAPTER 5<br /> -<span class="smaller">Pass Defense: Objectives and Tactics</span></h2> - -</div> - -<p>An intercepted pass will probably get the defensive team out -of a tight spot quicker than any other play in football. An intercepted -pass also can change the complexion of a game very -quickly. We recognize the fact that a team which is difficult to -pass against is a difficult team to defeat. Therefore, in order to -be “tough” defensively pass defense is one phase of football -which we <i>must</i> work on every day. If we can either eliminate a -team’s passing game or hold this phase of their offense to a -minimum gain, we will definitely have the edge over our opposition.</p> - -<p>Basically, good pass defense is merely being in the proper -position and going for the football when it is in the air. Our -most important coaching point is, “When the football is in the -air, <i>it belongs to us and we must get it</i>!” Pass defense requires -more individual desire by the players than any other phase of -the game of football. If a boy has tremendous desire and the -ability to play defensive football, you place him in a spot where -it is possible for him to intercept the pass if it comes near his -area, and you will have a winner.</p> - -<h3>PASS DEFENSE OBJECTIVES</h3> - -<p>Pass defense is so vital that one simple defensive mistake can -cost your team a football game. In order to have a good football -team, the play in the defensive secondary must be sound.</p> - -<p>The primary objective of pass defense is to keep the opponent<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_63"></a>[63]</span> -from scoring, and secondly, to get the football. We stress these -points all the time. On every play we want each player trying -to get possession of the football for our team.</p> - -<p>Pass defense consists of the following phases:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>1. Rushing the passer.</p> - -<p>2. Holding up the receivers.</p> - -<p>3. Covering the areas or zones.</p> -</div> - -<p>We have found it difficult to do a good job of <i>all</i> three of these -phases at the same time.</p> - -<h4><i>Rushing the Passer</i></h4> - -<p>Rushing the passer is a good element of surprise, especially -with an 8- or 9-man line. Overloading one side of the line is a -sound tactic, too, because you have more men rushing than the -offense has blocking, and the quarterback must get rid of the -ball quickly. If the quarterback has sufficient time to spot his -receivers, then throw to one of them when he breaks to get -open, it is difficult for the defense to cover the pass properly.</p> - -<p>The men rushing the passer must have their hands up high, -forcing the passer to release the ball higher than he does normally. -Such tactics keep the passer from throwing the fast, -straight, bullet-like pass, which is the hardest for the defenders -to break up. Secondly, the rushers with their hands high cause -the pass to remain in the air longer because of its upward -trajectory as it is released. Consequently this gives the defensive -secondary time to release from their areas and sprint to the -spot where the ball is descending.</p> - -<p>The man who has the outside rush, and whose responsibility -it is to contain, must get his hands high. He should <i>not</i> leap off -the ground in an effort to tackle the passer, as he must be in a -position to contain him in the event the passer tries to get out of -the pocket and/or runs with the football.</p> - -<p>When we are rushing the passer, we want our <i>players</i> to know -they <i>must not</i> permit the passer to throw the football. In a -definite passing situation when we decide to overload a zone -and rush more men than the opposition has blockers, we acknowledge<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_64"></a>[64]</span> -the fact we are sacrificing coverage in our secondary. -Therefore, we must put on a strong rush, and we cannot permit -the ball to be thrown.</p> - -<p><a href="#figure042">Figure 42</a> illustrates an overload on the right side of the -offensive line. Analyzing the illustration and assuming it is a -passing situation when we overload, if the opposition does throw -a drop back pass, we are in good shape because we have more -rushers than they have blockers. If the opposition runs to their -right, which would be our left, again we are sound defensively -because they are running into our strength. In other words, we -are 66⅔% correct before the play even starts. If the opposition -goes to their left (our right), we are not strong, but by our -right side hitting and sliding to the outside, as illustrated in -<a href="#figure042">Figure 42</a>, we will not be hurt.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure042" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure042.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 42</span></p> -</div> - -<p>There are many ways of rushing a passer, but we do not -expect to do a really good job of rushing unless we out-number -the blockers. Then, when we have a pass rush called, our boys -know they cannot permit the passer to throw the ball, as I cited -previously.</p> - -<h4><i>Holding Up Receivers</i></h4> - -<p>We work on detaining the receivers at the line of scrimmage, -but we probably do not devote enough time to this phase of pass -defense. The purpose of this defensive tactic is to give your linebackers<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_65"></a>[65]</span> -time to get to their defensive areas before the receivers -get to them. It also gives your defensive halfbacks time to get -their width and depth and get set up in their respective pass -coverage zones. We hold up receivers several different ways as -illustrated in <a href="#figure043">Figures 43-45</a>.</p> - -<p><a href="#figure043">Figure 43</a> illustrates the tackle playing head up on the offensive -end in order to detain him.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure043" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure043.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 43</span></p> -</div> - -<p><a href="#figure044">Figure 44</a> illustrates the defensive end and linebacker -pinching-off the offensive end, making it difficult for him to -release for a pass.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure044" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure044.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 44</span></p> -</div> - -<p><a href="#figure045">Figure 45</a> illustrates a third method of holding up an eligible -receiver, merely by placing the linebacker in front of the offensive -end so he can “whack” him as he releases from the line -of scrimmage.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure045" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure045.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 45</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_66"></a>[66]</span></p> - -<h4><i>Covering the Areas</i></h4> - -<p>We cover the areas on pass defense and not the eligible -receivers. We want our players to be in the middle of their areas -in a good football position, and as soon as the ball leaves the -passer’s hand, we want our boys to forget about everything else -<i>except intercepting the pass</i>. We want our defenders to play -<i>through</i> the receiver <i>for</i> the ball. They should never go around -the receiver, unless it is a short pass. They should go for the -ball at the highest point they can reach, and never catch the -ball low if they could have intercepted the pass at a greater -height. Our logic is that if a defender is waiting for the ball to -come down so he can handle it at his chest or waist, the intended -receiver has time to come in front of our defender and catch the -pass for a completion. Whereas if our defender will go back -when the ball is thrown, plant, and come toward the opponent’s -goal line intercepting the ball with arms and fingers extended -upward, the intended receiver can’t possibly take the ball away -from him. This, of course, would depend upon the type of pass -that was thrown.</p> - -<h3>OUR FIVE-SPOKE PASS DEFENSE</h3> - -<p>The 5-spoke or 3-deep, as it is commonly referred to at times, -is a very sound defense in the secondary. Let me explain exactly -what I mean by a 5-spoke defense. We compare the perimeter -of our defensive secondary to one-half of a wheel, which may -have 5 spokes or 4 spokes. The principles are basically the same, -as you will see shortly. I shall discuss the 5-spoke defense first, -however.</p> - -<p><a href="#figure046">Figure 46</a> illustrates our 5-spoke defense. At the end of each -of the imaginary spokes is a defender. The distance between -the defenders depends on their individual ability. The spokes -can be lengthened or shortened, but they should not be brought -closer together or there will be a vulnerable area in the defensive -secondary, as will be illustrated shortly. When the spokes of the -wheel are lengthened, the players automatically become farther -apart, depending upon the distance of the defenders from the -football.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_67"></a>[67]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure046" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure046.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 46</span></p> -</div> - -<p>As illustrated in <a href="#figure046">Figure 46</a>, there are defensive men stationed -at the ends of the spokes at points 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. The -defensive end located at 1 is able to cover the area from point -F to A; the halfback at point 2 can cover the area from A to B; -the safety at point 3 can cover the area from B to C; the halfback -at point 4 covers C to D; and the end at point 5 can cover the -area from D to E. If the length of the spokes is decreased, the -area to be covered will not be as great. Conversely, the longer -the spokes, the greater the area to be covered by the defensive -secondary. If we stretch a wire from F to A to B to C to D to E, -the area enclosed will represent the space in which we should -be able to contain our opponents, as illustrated in <a href="#figure046">Figure 46</a>.</p> - -<p>We want our players to assume that the half-wheel will revolve -clockwise and counter-clockwise, but the defenders must always -remain at their points at the end of the spokes keeping the same -relative distance from each other in order for the defense to be -sound. If the offensive team runs to their left, the wheel should -revolve to our right, counter-clockwise, as illustrated in <a href="#figure047">Figure -47</a>. It would be just the opposite if the play were run to our -left—revolve clockwise. If it were a running play up-the-middle, -the spokes of the wheel would be shortened as the defensive -men would converge on the ball carrier, keeping their same -proportionate relationship to each other.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_68"></a>[68]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure047" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure047.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 47</span></p> -</div> - -<p><a href="#figure048">Figure 48</a> illustrates a vulnerable area in the defensive secondary -as the result of the safety man being out of position versus -a back up pass. His course should be straight back, covering -the deep middle zone, so that he is approximately equidistant -from his halfbacks. Should the error occur, as illustrated in -<a href="#figure048">Figure 48</a>, our pass defense will not be sound.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure048" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure048.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 48</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_69"></a>[69]</span></p> - -<p>The length of the spokes will be determined by the distance -of the defenders from the passer. As an example, if the passer -goes back to throw off of a drop back action, the spokes would -stretch proportionately. The defenders would have time to cover -more distance if the passer is attempting to throw deep because -the ball must remain in the air longer in order to reach its -receiver. Conversely, if the passer attempts to throw a quick -pass from only a yard or so off the line of scrimmage, the receivers -will not have time to get deep, consequently the length -of the spokes will not be lengthened but will be shortened -proportionately as the defenders converge on the ball as it is -thrown.</p> - -<p><a href="#figure049">Figure 49</a> illustrates the initial depth and width of the ends -and the 3-deep secondary in the 5-spoke defensive alignment -when the ball is in the middle of the field between the hash -marks.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure049" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure049.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 49</span></p> -</div> - -<p><a href="#figure050">Figure 50</a> illustrates the width and depth of the ends and the -3-deep secondary in the 5-spoke alignment when the opposition -has the football on the defensive right hash mark and the wide -side of the field is to our left. It would be just the opposite if we<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_70"></a>[70]</span> -were on the defensive left hash mark and the wide side of the -field was to our right.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure050" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure050.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 50</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Keys for the 5-Spoke Defenders</i></h4> - -<p>Our 5-spoke defenders key as follows:</p> - -<p><i>Ends</i>—Our defensive ends look through the tail of the offensive -ends and read the whole backfield, especially the back -nearest to the defensive end.</p> - -<p><i>Halfbacks</i>—They look through the offensive end to their side -and read the whole backfield. It is very important that the halfbacks -know at all times where the football is; consequently, they -should watch the quarterback closely.</p> - -<p><i>Safety</i>—The safety looks through the center, reading the -quarterback and the whole offensive backfield. He, too, must -know where the football is at all times.</p> - -<p><i>Linebackers</i>—They line up on the tackle or guard, depending -upon the particular front alignment we are employing at -the time, and read the man in front of them. They should watch -the entire backfield, too.</p> - -<p><a href="#figure051">Figure 51</a> illustrates the positions and keys of the linebackers -and the 5-spoke defenders.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_71"></a>[71]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure051" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure051.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 51</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Dividing the Areas</i></h4> - -<p>We divide the areas in our defensive secondary into four -short one-quarters and three deep one-thirds. The short one-quarters -are covered by the ends and linebackers, and the halfbacks -and safety cover the three deep thirds, as illustrated in -<a href="#figure052">Figure 52</a>.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure052" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure052.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 52</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_72"></a>[72]</span></p> - -<p>Our short one-quarter areas extend back 16 yards from the -line of scrimmage because we are trying to force the passer to -throw the football higher to his receivers behind our front line. -We think that our linebackers can get back approximately 12-14 -yards, but we always tell them we want them to cover 16 yards -so they will hustle and work hard to get depth on their pass -coverage. If we said only 12 yards, they might only get back to -a depth of 10-12 yards, which would not be sufficiently deep to -cover their zones.</p> - -<p>If our inside linebackers drop back 16 yards and our corner -linebackers drop to 8 yards, if all four of these defenders are in -a football position and ready to move, they should be able to -touch any ball that is thrown in this area. There may be a ball -thrown in front of our linebackers, but a completed pass in this -area normally will not defeat us. We believe if the passer goes -back seven or eight yards, and our rushers can make him release -the ball at a higher angle over their extended arms and fingers, -it will be difficult for the passer to throw in front of the linebackers. -Consequently if they hustle and get to the depth I have -indicated, they should be in a good position to intercept any -ball thrown into their zone. We instruct our men in the short -“fourths” to tip the ball when possible, providing they cannot -intercept it, as one of our deep backs is likely to intercept a -deflected pass. Incidentally, at times we will not have a defender -in every “fourth,” or only two of the “fourths” will be covered. -At other times we’ll have an extra man in one of the “fourths.”</p> - -<p>After our linebackers get back to their positions, we want -them to assume a relaxed position with the feet almost together, -knees slightly bent, and ready to move in the direction indicated -by their keys. We adopted this stance after making a study of -Jackie Robinson’s relaxed and always ready-to-move position -on the baseball field. We do not want our players to waste time -and motion running in a circle getting to the football.</p> - -<p>We can play only three men back in the deep zones. Therefore, -we divide our deep zones into “thirds.” A pass should -never be completed in one of the deep zones if the line rushes -hard forcing the passer to release the ball higher than usual, -if the 3-deep men cover their zones properly, and if they see the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_73"></a>[73]</span> -ball leave the passer’s hand and hustle to intercept it. Of course, -teams do complete passes on us in these areas, but we do not -believe it should ever happen. Each of the 3-deep men is a -“guardian” of his particular area of the field, left, middle and -right one-third.</p> - -<p>The “thirds” will vary in size. As an example, if the football -is over on the offensive team’s left (our right) hash mark, the -defensive right halfback’s third would be smaller than the left -halfback’s one-third, as illustrated in <a href="#figure053">Figure 53</a>. The right halfback’s -one-third is smaller because of field position, and secondly -because the ball has a relatively shorter distance to travel if -thrown in this area of the field. Conversely, if the ball were -thrown in the left halfback’s area, the ball would be in the air -longer on a deep pass and both defender and receiver would -have farther to go to get to the ball. Therefore, the defensive -left halfback’s “third” would be larger and farther removed -from the ball on the opposite hash mark.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp92" id="figure053" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure053.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 53</span></p> -</div> - -<h3>OUR PASS COVERAGE</h3> - -<p>We normally want a man in every area on our pass coverage, -unless we decide for one reason or another not to cover one of -the “fourths,” as I indicated previously we sometimes do. The -defender <i>must</i> intercept or knock down any and all passes -thrown in his area. The defenders do not play man-to-man in<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_74"></a>[74]</span> -their areas, but each man covers a zone. If he will play in the -middle of his zone or area, when the ball is thrown he can go -to it. If a defender plays a man instead of his zone, the decoy -can take him out of his area permitting another receiver to -catch the ball. Then our defense is not sound. Therefore, we -stress zone coverage, and playing the ball—not the man.</p> - -<h4><i>Coverage of Straight Drop Back Pass</i></h4> - -<p>We consider a pass that is thrown from between the offensive -tackle positions as a straight drop back pass, as is illustrated in -<a href="#figure054">Figure 54</a>.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure054" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure054.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 54</span></p> -</div> - -<p><a href="#figure055">Figure 55</a> illustrates our coverage of the zones versus a -straight drop back pass. The defenders’ duties and responsibilities -are as follows:</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure055" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure055.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 55</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_75"></a>[75]</span></p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right End</i>—Turns to his outside, sprints back and -out to a depth of 10 yards. He then sets up and faces the -passer. He covers a short one-quarter zone. When the ball is -thrown, he sprints for it.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right Linebacker</i>—Using a cross-over step, he -turns to the outside and sprints back trying to get a depth of -12-14 yards. He must set up when the passer sets up. He keeps -his distance with his other linebacker to the inside. When the -ball is thrown, he sprints for it.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right Halfback</i>—His first step is backward and -outward, and he continues to go back covering his deep one-third -zone. He should not get closer than eight yards to the -sideline. When the ball is thrown, he sprints for it.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Safety</i>—He should favor the wide side of the field -when he retreats to cover his middle one-third zone. If no one -is coming into his area, he should favor the side with two receivers -out. When the ball is thrown, he sprints for it.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left Halfback</i>—His first step is backward and outward, -and he continues to go back covering his deep one-third -zone. He should never get closer than eight yards to the sideline. -When the ball is thrown, he sprints for it.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left Linebacker</i>—He turns to his outside and -sprints back, using a cross-over step, and tries to get a depth -of 12-14 yards. However, he must set up when the passer stops -and sets up. He keeps his distance with the linebacker to the -inside. When the football is thrown, he sprints for it.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left End</i>—He turns to his outside and sprints backward -and outward to a depth of 10 yards, and faces the passer. -He covers a short one-quarter zone. When the football is thrown, -he sprints for it.</p> - -<h4><i>Coverage of an Action Pass</i></h4> - -<p><a href="#figure056">Figure 56</a> illustrates our coverage versus an action pass. The -defenders’ duties and responsibilities are as follows:</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_76"></a>[76]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure056" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure056.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 56</span></p> -</div> - -<p><i>Defensive Right End</i>—He crosses the line of scrimmage and -contains the passer very quickly. He must make the passer throw -the football quickly. We do not want the passer to be able to -hit the deep receiver.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right Linebacker</i>—He plays the run first. After he -sees the offensive end releasing, and when he knows that a pass -is developing, he sprints out and covers the flat.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right Halfback</i>—His first step is back and out. -He starts off slowly at first, then covers faster and faster. He -will cover the deep one-third of the field on his side. He must be -as wide as the widest receiver, unless the receiver is within eight -yards of the sideline. Then he will play an inside-out position -on the receiver.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Safety</i>—His first step would be back and out, -favoring the wide side of the field. His area of responsibility is -the deep one-third of the field. He must always be as deep as -the deepest receiver. When the ball is thrown, he will sprint -for it.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left Halfback</i>—His first step will be back and out -when he sees the flow is going away from him. He should turn -to the inside and get depth as he covers his area of responsibility, -which is the deep one-third of his side of the field.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left Linebacker</i>—When he sees the flow going<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_77"></a>[77]</span> -away from him, he will play the counter first, then start to pursue -the football. When he sees a pass developing, he sprints back to -his spot and covers the short one-quarter zone.</p> - -<h4><i>Pass Defense Versus Broken Backfield (Straight Drop Back Pass)</i></h4> - -<p><a href="#figure057">Figure 57</a> illustrates our pass coverage of a straight drop back -pass when the offense has a broken backfield. The defenders’ -duties and responsibilities are as follows:</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure057" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure057.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 57</span></p> -</div> - -<p><i>Defensive Right End</i>—He should line up slightly wider, and -he goes back to his spot about 10 yards deep. He will get a little -greater width when a man is flanking him.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right Linebacker</i>—He should play a little looser, -but still cover his spot about 12-14 yards deep.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right Halfback</i>—He should line up slightly wider, -about one and one-half yards outside of the flank man. He will -still cover his regular one-third deep zone.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Safety</i>—He should line up in a position where he -will be in the middle of the eligible receivers. He will face out, -and he will cover the deep middle one-third of the field.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left Halfback</i>—His alignment does not change -and he has the same deep one-third area.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_78"></a>[78]</span></p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left Linebacker</i>—His alignment does not change -and he has the same short one-quarter area, which is about -12-14 yards deep.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left End</i>—His alignment and assignment does not -change. He will have the same width and depth, and cover the -short one-quarter area.</p> - -<h4><i>Pass Defense Versus Action Pass With Broken Backfield</i></h4> - -<p><a href="#figure058">Figure 58</a> illustrates our pass coverage of an action pass (to -our left) from a broken backfield. The defensive players’ duties -and responsibilities are as follows:</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure058" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure058.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 58</span></p> -</div> - -<p><i>Defensive Left End</i>—He plays a little wider than usual, and -he has one of two options depending upon which defense has -been called. He either rushes and contains the passer quickly -or he will drop off and cover the short flat area. When the latter -occurs, the tackle has the outside rush and contain responsibility -then in place of the defensive end.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left Linebacker</i>—He plays his regular position. -He plays the run first, but when he sees a pass develop, he covers -his short one-quarter area. If the defensive end is going to contain<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_79"></a>[79]</span> -the passer, the linebacker will check for the run first and -then cover the short flat.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left Halfback</i>—He lines up on the outside shoulder -of the widest man and on the snap of the ball he steps back and -out. He plays his regular position, and his area of responsibility -is the deep one-third to his side of the field.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Safety</i>—He lines up in the area where he will be -splitting the eligible receivers. His area of responsibility is the -deep middle one-third.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right Halfback</i>—His first step is toward his outside. -As soon as he sees the flow going away from him, however, -he turns and gets depth still covering the deep one-third area -to his side.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right Linebacker</i>—He will play the counter when -he sees the flow going away from him. When he sees a pass -develop, he will cover his short one-quarter area.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right End</i>—The back who is flanked out does not -alter the defensive right end’s responsibility. He will start pursuing -the ball until he recognizes a pass, then he will cover his -short one-quarter area.</p> - -<h4><i>Pass Defense Versus End Out</i></h4> - -<p>We cover the split end, illustrated in <a href="#figure059">Figure 59</a>, exactly the -same way that we would cover a back out. If the play is an -action pass away from the end out, we would cover it as we -cover a regular action pass.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure059" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure059.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 59</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_80"></a>[80]</span></p> - -<h4><i>Pass Defense Versus a Flanked Back and a Split End to Opposite Sides</i></h4> - -<p><a href="#figure060">Figure 60</a> illustrates our defensive alignment versus a flanked -back and a split end out to opposite sides. Our coverage depends -on whether it is an action or a straight back pass we are defending -against.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure060" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure060.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 60</span></p> -</div> - -<p><i>Versus the straight drop back pass</i>, we cover this like our -regular drop back coverage. Our ends drop off and cover their -short one-quarter areas, and the linebackers cover their short -one-quarter areas. The defensive halfbacks line up outside of -the widest man to their side unless he is closer than six yards -to the sideline. They cover their deep one-third area, always -staying as deep as the deepest receiver. The defensive safety man -would line up in a position splitting the eligible receivers. He -faces the wide side of the field, and as the receivers come downfield -he would cover the deep middle one-third of the field.</p> - -<p><i>Versus the action pass</i>, the ends play their regular defense -versus a man out toward them. If the flow comes toward the -end, he comes up containing the passer quickly forcing him to -throw the football. The end away from the action will start his -angle of pursuit through the area where the defensive safety man<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_81"></a>[81]</span> -lined up originally. When he sees a pass develop, he tries to get -back to the off-side one-third area. The defensive halfback on -the side of the action covers his deep one-third area, unless he -receives an oral signal from his safety man. The halfback away -from the side of the action takes his steps back and out, and -then sprints to a position where he can cover the off-two-thirds -of the field. He must get his width and depth first. The defensive -safety will start in the direction of the action, and then try to get -in a position so that he can cover the deep one-third of the field. -When he gets in this position, the defensive safety man gives an -oral signal which releases the defensive halfback to go up and -cover the short one-quarter area. If the safety cannot get in this -proper position, he does not give the signal and we have two -men covering the deep one-third area.</p> - -<h3>PASS DEFENSE BY POSITIONS</h3> - -<p><i>Defensive End</i> (Flow toward a defensive end)—After lining -up in his proper stance and position, when he sees the action -coming toward him he crosses the line of scrimmage approximately -two yards deep in the offensive backfield. His inside foot -should be forward, and his shoulders parallel to the line of -scrimmage, as he plays off the outside blocker. He must contain -the passer quickly. He cannot permit the passer to get outside -of his position. On certain defenses he will drop off and cover -the short flat, especially when a back is flanked to his side of -the field.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Ends</i> (Versus drop back pass)—After lining up -in his proper stance and position, when he recognizes a drop -back pass, he turns to his outside and sprints, using a cross-over -step, to a spot 10 yards deep. He never takes his eyes off the -passer. When the passer gets set to throw the ball, the defensive -end must stop and set up, even if he has only gotten five yards -deep. He must get into a good football position quickly, which -is tail down, head up, back straight, weight on the balls of the -feet, knees slightly bent and feet even. When the passer steps -in one direction as if to throw or fake the pass, we want the end -to start in that direction, even if he “takes the fake.” Should the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_82"></a>[82]</span> -latter occur and the passer not throw the football, then the end -must bring himself under control quickly and sprint for the -football when the passer releases it, regardless of where it is -thrown.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive End</i> (Flow away from a defensive end)—After -taking his proper stance and position and he recognizes the play -going away from him, he commences his angle of pursuit through -the area where the defensive safety man lined up originally. -When he sees a pass develop, he stops and still facing the passer -and wide side, he tries to get back into a position to help out in -the deep off-one-third. He gets as deep as he can and puts his -hands high. Consequently the passer must throw the ball high -and get it over him. Since the ball is thrown higher, it stays in -the air longer and gives our defensive halfback who is covering -that third of the field time to react and sprint for the football. -When the ball is thrown, the end must sprint for it.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Linebackers</i> (Versus straight drop back pass)—If, -after lining up in their proper position and stance, they recognize -the play as a straight drop back pass, the linebackers -will turn to their outside and by using a cross-over step they will -sprint back trying to get to a depth of 12-14 yards. They should -never take their eyes off the passer. As soon as he gets set to -throw, the linebackers should set up in a good football position -regardless of their depth at the time. The linebackers must take -the first passing fake of the quarterback or they will never be -able to knock down the short passes. When the ball is thrown, -they both must sprint to it.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Linebacker</i> (Flow pass toward a linebacker)—After -the linebacker has lined up in his proper stance and -position and recognizes the flow is coming toward him, he must -expect a running play first. The hole he must check will depend -upon the defense that has been called. After he has checked for -a run but sees a pass developing, he must turn to his outside and -sprint for his short one-quarter area using a cross-over step, or -he will sprint to the flat on his side and cover this area. He, too, -must get set when he sees the passer get set, and he takes the -first fake. If the ball is not thrown, he regains his balance, -position, etc., and sprints for the ball when it is thrown.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_83"></a>[83]</span></p> - -<p><i>Defensive Linebacker</i> (Flow away from the linebacker)—From -his proper stance and position when he observes the flow going -away from him, he steps in and checks the counter play and -then starts his pursuit for the football. When he recognizes a -pass developing, he will plant and try to get back to his short -one-quarter area by using a cross-over step. He will continue -to go back to his one-quarter area still facing the direction of -the flow. He is trying to get to a depth of 12-14 yards. However, -he must come under control and maintain a good position when -the quarterback gets set to pass. He then plays his regular pass -defense. He must try to maintain his proper distance between -his other linebacker as a short one-quarter area will be vulnerable -if they move too close together. When the ball is thrown, -he sprints for it.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Halfbacks</i> (Versus straight drop back pass)—After -the defensive halfbacks have lined up in their proper -stance and position and the ball is put into play, their first step -is back and out. Each halfback starts toward his deep one-third -zone as he sees the straight drop back pass develop. Although -they commence slowly, the longer the passer holds the ball, the -faster and deeper they cover their one-third areas. The deep men -do <i>not</i> take the passing fake, such as the ends and linebackers -must do. When the ball is put into the air in his area, the halfback -must sprint to intercept the pass. It is very important that -the halfbacks take the shortest and straightest line to the football -once it leaves the passer’s finger tips.</p> - -<p>The defensive halfback will never get closer than eight yards -to the sideline when he is covering a deep one-third of the field. -As he gets close to the sideline and the passer is still holding the -football, the defensive halfback will bend away for the sideline -but still remain in a position to see it.</p> - -<p>If the ball is thrown deep over his head, the halfback is permitted -to turn his back (whirl around) on the passer and go -after the football. We feel he can cover more ground and get -to the ball faster using the whirl around method than if he plants, -pivots, keeps his eye on the ball, and then goes after it. This is -the only time we will permit a 3-deep defender to take his eyes -off the football.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_84"></a>[84]</span></p> - -<p><i>Defensive Halfback</i> (Flow pass toward a defensive halfback)—After -the halfback has lined up in his regular position and he -recognizes an action pass or a running pass coming toward him, -he starts back and out. His area of responsibility is the deep -one-third to his side of the field. He must always be as deep as -anyone in his area, and he must be in a position so that he can -cover his whole zone. If the football comes into his zone, he is -responsible for it. He must play the ball at the highest possible -point he can reach it safely. He must not get closer than eight -yards to the sideline because this cuts down his ability to cover -the entire one-third, his responsibility. When the ball is thrown, -he must sprint for it.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Halfback</i> (Flow pass away from the halfback)—After -lining up in his proper position and stance and recognizing -the flow is starting away from him on the snap of the football, -his first step is back and out. He must get his width in case of -a roll-out pass. On his third step he will plant, pivot to his inside, -and get depth covering his one-third to his side of the field. Regardless -of flow or action his pass responsibility is the deep one-third -of the field that he lines up in.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Safety</i> (Versus straight drop back pass)—After the -safety has lined up in his proper position and stance and he -sees the ball has been put into play, his first step is back and -out, favoring the wide side of the field. He starts running slowly, -but the deeper he goes, the faster he runs. He cannot permit a -receiver to get behind him. He must be as deep as the deepest -receiver anywhere on the football field. His responsibility is the -deep middle one-third, and if the ball is thrown in his area, he -must play the ball and <i>not</i> the receiver. We instruct the safety -man to be deep enough so that he must come forward to play -the football in the air instead of running backward to play it. -If the ball is thrown in one of the deep one-third areas to his -right or left, he does <i>not</i> sprint for the ball. Instead he sprints -for a spot between the place where the ball will come down -and the opposition’s goal line. In case the opponent catches the -ball, he will be in a position to tackle the receiver. If the ball -is tipped into the air, the safety man should be in a position to<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_85"></a>[85]</span> -catch the ball. He must remember that he is the safety and it is -his duty to stop the opposition from scoring if they get past the -other 10 defensive men.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Safety</i> (Flow pass in any direction)—After the -safety has lined up in his proper position and stance and sees -the flow pass develop, his first step is back and out toward the -flow. His area of responsibility is the deep middle one-third of -the field, but he goes back facing or favoring the flow. He must -get as deep as the deepest receiver and be in a position to cover -the middle one-third, as well as be in a position to help out on -deep passes from sideline to sideline. He must remember he is -the safety, and he <i>must</i> prevent the touchdown regardless of -where the ball is thrown.</p> - -<p><i>All Defenders When the Ball Is Thrown</i>—When the ball is -thrown to any deep one-third area, the procedure is the same. -Let’s assume the play is a straight drop back pass and it is -thrown into our defensive right halfback’s one-third zone area, -as illustrated in <a href="#figure061">Figure 61</a>. If he is in the proper position, he -will give an oral signal while the ball is still in the air. His signal -tells the other defenders he is going to touch the football, and -they should get set in the event it is tipped into the air. The -safety will get between the halfback and the opposition’s goal -line. He should assume a good football position and be alert for -the tipped football from his halfback. The defensive ends, linebackers -and the other defensive halfback will be sprinting for -the football. When they hear the right halfback’s oral signal, -they will stop about five yards away from him, get into a good -football position, and watch for the tip. If our defender intercepts -the football, his teammates will turn around quickly and block -aggressively for him. The technique as I have described it is -illustrated in <a href="#figure061">Figure 61</a>.</p> - -<h3>ADVANTAGES OF THE 5-SPOKE PASS DEFENSE</h3> - -<p>The advantages of the 5-spoke pass defense are as follows:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>1. When playing a team that quick kicks frequently, we have a -man in position to field the kick without weakening our defense.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_86"></a>[86]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure061" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure061.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 61</span></p> -</div> - -<p>2. The 3-deep men only have one position to learn on defense. -The defensive right halfback is always the defensive right halfback, -etc.</p> - -<p>3. When the offense flanks backs and splits ends, it is easy -to adjust our defensive backs. Instead of revolving, they simply -loosen up or line up wider and still play their regular positions.</p> - -<p>4. There is always a defender in each of the deep one-third -areas without revolving into the areas.</p> - -<p>5. It is easier to cover the running pass because there is no -point of indecision.</p> - -<p>6. On a straight drop back pass, there is a defender in every -deep one-third area and one in every short one-quarter area.</p> - -<p>7. We can get fast containment versus the action pass because -ends line up in a wide position initially.</p> - -<p>8. It is easy to teach because we delegate a definite area of -responsibility on every occasion.</p> - -<p>9. It is a very good defense against the long pass because -of the deep centerfielder or safety man.</p> - -<p>10. Keying is cut to a minimum because there is no revolving -necessary in order to get a man in the deep safety position.</p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_87"></a>[87]</span></p> - -<h3>THE 4-SPOKE PASS DEFENSE</h3> - -<p>The 4-spoke or 2-deep defense is also a very good pass -defense. I believe it requires a little better athlete to play some -of the positions in a 4-spoke as compared to the 5-spoke defense. -I would probably be using the 4-spoke defense if it were not for -the fact that a number of teams we play quick kick frequently. -This was a major factor in my changing from the 4-spoke -defense which we used successfully at Texas A & M to the -5-spoke defense which we now use at the University of Alabama.</p> - -<h4><i>Advantages of the 4-Spoke Defense</i></h4> - -<p>The advantages of the 4-spoke defense are as follows:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>1. When playing a 9-man front, the extra man is always -where you need him.</p> - -<p>2. You can stunt a great deal in your secondary and give -the passer problems.</p> - -<p>3. It is a good defense against a Split-T offense.</p> - -<p>4. Tremendous pursuit can be obtained from this formation -because the linemen all play an outside technique.</p> - -<p>5. You can predetermine your rotation; consequently, you -remove any indecision.</p> - -<p>6. You use the same coverage with your goal line defense, -merely tightening up the defense and the secondary.</p> - -<p>7. You put quick pressure on the passer by using your 9-man -front advantageously.</p> - -<p>8. The defensive keys are definite.</p> -</div> - -<p>The principle of the 5-spoke pass defense and the 4-spoke -pass defense is basically the same with the exception you have -only four spokes or four men in the outer perimeter of your -secondary. The spokes run from an imaginary center with a -defender placed on the end of each spoke, as illustrated in -<a href="#figure062">Figure 62</a>.</p> - -<p>These spokes can all be lengthened or shortened, as was -explained previously for the 5-spoke defense. They must move -as a unit or team, however, or there will be vulnerable areas<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_88"></a>[88]</span> -in the secondary. We run an imaginary line from defender to -defender, considering the lines as a rubber band, as illustrated -in <a href="#figure063">Figure 63</a>. The rubber band can stretch, but it should not -break.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure062" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure062.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 62</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure063" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure063.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 63</span></p> -</div> - -<p>In <a href="#figure063">Figure 63</a> the spokes have lengthened, the rubber band -has stretched, and the defense is still sound. The defenders, -although they are farther apart, have all kept their proper -spacing with each other. Although they are farther apart, the -time that is required for the ball to travel the extra distance will -permit the defenders to cover the space between them.</p> - -<p>In <a href="#figure064">Figure 64</a> the defensive right halfback has taken the wrong -route, causing a large gap in the secondary and we are extremely -vulnerable should a pass be thrown into the area where -the rubber band has broken.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_89"></a>[89]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure064" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure064.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 64</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>The 4-Spoke Alignment</i></h4> - -<p><a href="#figure065">Figure 65</a> illustrates the depth and width of the secondary -defenders in the 4-spoke defensive alignment when the ball is -in the middle of the field between the hash marks. The defensive -corner man will line up about four yards wide and about two -and one-half yards deep. They key or read the offensive halfback -closest to them, and the nearest end. The reaction of the corner -man will be determined by his keys (offensive end and near -halfback). He will “read” the following situations:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>1. If the end blocks in and the backs come toward the corner -man, he should come up and contain the play quickly.</p> - -<p>2. If the end comes out and does not block and the backs -start toward the corner man, he should turn to his outside, -sprint back eight yards and get set to cover his short one-quarter -area.</p> - -<p>3. If the end comes out and does not block and the back -starts away from the defensive corner man, he should sprint -back and get in a position to cover the deep one-third zone.</p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure065" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure065.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 65</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_90"></a>[90]</span></p> - -<p>The deep backs or twin safeties line up on the inside shoulder -of the offensive ends about seven and one-half yards deep. They -should keep a relative position to each other. The safeties should -look through the offensive tackles to the halfbacks. The flow of -the offensive backs will determine largely the direction the -defensive safeties should go, who must react on the snap of the -ball. The twin safeties should react to the following situations:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>1. On a straight drop back pass, the safety starts deep to -his outside until he gets an oral signal from his corner man. This -signal sends him to the middle one-third area.</p> - -<p>2. If the football or the action of the offensive backs goes -away from the safety, he should go to the middle one-third zone.</p> - -<p>3. If the flow comes toward him, he covers the deep one-third -area to his side of the field.</p> -</div> - -<h4><i>4-Spoke Pass Coverage Versus Straight Drop Back Pass</i></h4> - -<p>Versus the straight drop back pass, as illustrated in <a href="#figure066">Figure 66</a>, -the linebackers, corner men and twin safeties will react as -follows:</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure066" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure066.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 66</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_91"></a>[91]</span></p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left Corner Man</i>—On the snap of the ball the -defensive corner man is in a position to observe both the end -and the halfback nearest to him. If the end releases and the halfback -is coming toward him, the corner man must turn to his -outside and sprint to a position eight yards deep. He sets up in -a good football position and covers his short one-quarter area. -He never takes his eyes off the passer, and should the ball be -thrown into his area he intercepts the pass.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left Halfback</i> (Safety)—After he lines up in his -proper position, the defensive halfback upon recognizing a -straight drop back pass developing, immediately looks to see -which side has two eligible receivers. He then starts to his outside -and goes deep, unless he receives an oral signal from his -corner man releasing him from his deep one-third area. As shown -in <a href="#figure066">Figure 66</a>, the defensive left halfback covers the deep one-third -area to his side of the field.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right Halfback</i> (Safety)—After lining up in his -proper position and stance, the defensive right halfback, upon -recognizing the drop back pass, covers the deep one-third zone. -Should he receive an oral signal from his corner man, he is -released from covering the deep one-third to his side and he -now covers the deep middle one-third. He should receive the -signal on his third or fourth step, if the corner man gives it. -The safety then plants his foot and turns to the inside, always -facing the passer, while he sprints to the middle one-third if he -is released from his other responsibility by his corner man.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right Corner Man</i>—On the snap of the ball, when -the defensive corner man observes the drop back pass developing, -and the end and halfback release to his side, he starts to -his outside in order to cover his short one-quarter area. If the -near halfback stays in and blocks, and only the end releases, -the corner man gives an oral signal to his safety, the defensive -right halfback, who covers the middle one-third, and the corner -man covers the deep one-third area on his side.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Linebackers</i>—The defensive linebackers play exactly -like the linebackers on a 5-spoke defense, which I explained -previously. The only difference is the area which they -line up in (see <a href="#figure055">Figure 55</a> and <a href="#figure066">Figure 66</a>). On the 4-spoke pass<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_92"></a>[92]</span> -defense the linebackers play the straight drop back pass and the -action pass exactly as they do on a 5-spoke defense, which I -explained previously.</p> - -<h4><i>4-Spoke Pass Defense Versus the Action Pass</i></h4> - -<p>Versus the action pass, as illustrated in <a href="#figure067">Figure 67</a>, the 4-spoke -defenders react as follows:</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure067" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure067.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 67</span></p> -</div> - -<p><i>Defensive Right Corner Man</i>—He lines up in his regular -position and observes the type of play developing. When he sees -the offensive end to his side releasing downfield and the action -is coming toward his side, he is alert for a pass. He then turns -to his outside and sprints to his short one-quarter area, which -is about eight yards deep. He should be in a good football position -so that he can cover his zone properly. He must try to stay -wider than the widest man in his area, unless he is closer than -six yards to the sideline.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right Halfback</i>—After lining up in his proper -position, when the action starts toward his side, he sprints to -his outside getting depth and tries to get into a position so that -he can cover the deep one-third area, as illustrated in <a href="#figure067">Figure 67</a>.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_93"></a>[93]</span> -He should be as deep as the deepest man in his area, and when -the ball is thrown, he plays the football and not the receiver.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left Halfback</i>—When he sees the flow going away -from him, upon receiving an oral signal he will turn to his inside -and start for an angle of pursuit through where the safety man -would have lined up if it were a 3-deep defense. On his third -or fourth step he should see a pass developing, and then he must -start for the deep middle one-third of the football field.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left Corner Man</i>—On the snap of the football as -the defensive left corner man sees the flow of the backs going -away from him, he immediately knows only one man can come -to his side as a receiver. Therefore, he must sprint back to cover -the deep one-third area, usually covered by his defensive left -halfback in a normal situation. He gives an oral signal to his -halfback, which releases him from his normal responsibility.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Linebackers</i>—The defensive linebackers play the -action pass on the 4-spoke defense exactly as they do on the -5-spoke defense, which was explained previously.</p> - -<h4><i>4-Spoke Pass Defense Versus the Roll-Out Pass</i></h4> - -<p><a href="#figure068">Figure 68</a> illustrates the 4-spoke pass defense versus the roll-out -pass. The box-wing defenders must react as follows:</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure068" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure068.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 68</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_94"></a>[94]</span></p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right Corner Man</i>—When the defensive right -corner man observes the near offensive end release and the flow -starts toward him, he sprints back to his area eight yards deep. -When he sees the quarterback roll away from him, as illustrated -in <a href="#figure068">Figure 68</a>, he turns to his inside and gets into a position so -he can cover the deep one-third of the field to his side. He must -react quickly as his responsibility changes from a short one-quarter -to a deep one-third pass coverage when the play starts -toward him and then the quarterback rolls away from his position.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Right Halfback</i>—On the snap of the ball if the -defensive right halfback sees an action pass coming in his direction, -he starts back and out to a position where he can cover -the deep one-third area to his side of the field. On about his -eighth or ninth step, he should be able to recognize a change in -the offense’s direction and the flow is going away from him. He -immediately turns to his inside and still watching the passer he -sprints to the deep middle one-third of the field. He, too, must -react very quickly and sprint in order to cover the deep middle -area. The time it takes him to react and change his direction will -be an important factor in determining whether or not he breaks -up the pass.</p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left Halfback</i>—When the defensive left halfback -sees the flow going away from him, he should receive an oral -signal from his corner man releasing him from his deep off-one-third -responsibility. After he hears his signal, he will sprint to -a position where he can cover the middle one-third area. As he -is running to his area, he observes that the quarterback is now -rolling out to his side. Therefore, the halfback must plant, pivot -and try to get into a position to cover the deep one-third area -on his side of the field. If he sees he can cover this area satisfactorily, -he will give an oral signal to his corner man which -tells the latter to go up and cover the short one-quarter area. -If he sees that he cannot get into a good football position to -cover his area, the defensive halfback will <i>not</i> give a signal. -Then we will have two men covering the deep one-third area, -and the short one-quarter area will not be covered in such a -situation.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_95"></a>[95]</span></p> - -<p><i>Defensive Left Corner Man</i>—By reading the offensive backs, -the defensive corner man observes the flow going away from -him. He immediately turns to his inside and yells an oral signal -to his defensive halfback, which tells the latter the corner man -will cover the deep off-one-third area. As he is sprinting toward -his area, he observes the quarterback reversing his action, and -the play is now coming toward him. He turns to his outside and -stays in a position to cover the deep left one-third (<a href="#figure068">Figure 68</a>) -until he hears an oral signal from his halfback releasing him from -his deep responsibility. If he does not hear a signal, he will -continue to go back and cover the deep one-third zone. If he -hears a signal, he is released from his deep responsibility, which -is now assumed by the halfback, and the corner man covers -his short one-quarter area. If the offense is going to complete -the pass, we want them to catch it in the short area rather than -in the deep zone. Therefore, the deep one-third coverage has -preference over the short one-quarter zone. At times we might -end up with two defenders in the same deep zone, but we would -rather do this than leave the deep zone uncovered. If this were -the case, then our defense would not be sound. Once again -our first objective of defensive football is to eliminate the “easy” -or “cheap” touchdown pass.</p> - -<h4><i>4-Spoke Coverage Versus a Flanker Set</i></h4> - -<p><a href="#figure069">Figure 69</a> illustrates a 4-spoke coverage versus a straight drop -back pass from a flanker set. As you can observe, the entire -perimeter of the defensive secondary is revolved to the left. If -the offense were strong to their left, our secondary would revolve -to our right versus a flanker set left.</p> - -<p>In <a href="#figure069">Figure 69</a> the <i>left corner man</i> goes up on the line of -scrimmage, and from his new position he carries out the same -assignment he would if he lined up in his normal position of -two and one-half yards deep and four yards wide. In his new -position he can contain a running play very quickly. If a straight -drop back pass developed, he would turn to his outside and -still cover his short one-quarter area.</p> - -<p>The <i>defensive left halfback</i> carries out the same assignment<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_96"></a>[96]</span> -by covering the deep one-third of the field to his side, but he -lines up outside of the flanker instead of on the inside shoulder -of the offensive end.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure069" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure069.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 69</span></p> -</div> - -<p>The <i>defensive right halfback</i> moves over and plays the safety -position. When the straight drop back pass develops, he covers -the deep middle one-third of the field. As he goes back to cover -his area, he faces toward the strong side of the offense.</p> - -<p>The <i>defensive right corner man</i> revolves from his regular -corner position back to a defensive halfback. He lines up about -three yards outside of his offensive end, and when the pass -develops, he covers the deep one-third of the field that he has -lined up in.</p> - -<p>The <i>linebackers</i> play their regular technique, sprinting to their -usual spots to play their regular pass defense.</p> - -<h4><i>Action Pass With a Flanker</i></h4> - -<p><a href="#figure070">Figure 70</a> illustrates 4-spoke coverage versus the action pass -from a flanker set.</p> - -<p>The defensive secondary again revolves to the strong side of -the offense, as illustrated in <a href="#figure070">Figure 70</a>. If we do not have a stunt -on in our secondary, which I shall cover later in this chapter, -our secondary would play it exactly as we do the straight back -pass, explained above. The <i>left corner man</i> reads his keys and -goes back to cover his spot. He must be ready to come up if the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_97"></a>[97]</span> -passer chooses to run with the football. The <i>left halfback</i> covers -the deep one-third to his side. The <i>right halfback</i>, who has -revolved to the middle, plays and covers the deep middle one-third. -The <i>right corner man</i>, who has also revolved back to the -defensive halfback position, covers the deep one-third to his -side of the field.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure070" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure070.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 70</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>4-Spoke Coverage Versus a Floater</i></h4> - -<p><a href="#figure071">Figure 71</a> illustrates 4-spoke coverage versus the straight back -pass from a floater set.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure071" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure071.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 71</span></p> -</div> - -<p>When the offense lines up in a floater set, illustrated in <a href="#figure071">Figure -71</a>, our secondary does not revolve but merely loosens up a -little. The defensive <i>corner man</i> to the side that the back is flanked<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_98"></a>[98]</span> -(our right) lines up a little wider and a little deeper. On the -snap of the ball, if a back-up pass develops, he drops off to -eight yards depth, and covers his one-quarter zone. The <i>defensive -right halfback</i> lines up wider and he still covers the deep one-third -area to his side. The <i>defensive left halfback</i> lines up in -approximately his regular position because he must be able to -cover the deep one-third zone to his side of the field. On this -particular play as he sees a back-up pass develop, and only one -receiver is out to his left, he anticipates receiving a quick release -signal from his corner man. Should this occur, he now covers -the deep middle one-third of the field. Otherwise he covers his -deep side zone, as indicated above. The <i>left corner man</i> lines -up in his regular position and sprints into a position to cover -the deep one-third area on his side of the field when he sees his -nearest offensive back blocking and only one receiver is coming -out to his side. He gives the defensive halfback a quick release -signal on about his second or third step.</p> - -<h4><i>Action Pass With a Floater</i></h4> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure072" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure072.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 72</span></p> -</div> - -<p><a href="#figure072">Figure 72</a> illustrates 4-spoke coverage versus the action pass -from a floater set. The entire secondary plays the action pass -exactly the same as a drop back pass if the action is toward the -back who is flanked. It would be played in a slightly different<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_99"></a>[99]</span> -manner if the action is away from the back who is flanked, as -illustrated in <a href="#figure072">Figure 72</a>. In such a situation the <i>left corner man</i> -would sprint to a position eight yards deep and set up immediately -to cover the short one-quarter zone. The <i>left halfback</i> -sprints to a position back and out so he can cover the deep one-third -of the field to his side. The <i>right halfback</i> plants, turns to -his inside, and sprints to a position to cover the deep middle -one-third of the field. The <i>right corner man</i> turns to his inside, -sprints back and out, and gets in a position to cover the deep -one-third of the field when the action starts away from him.</p> - -<h3>PREDETERMINED ROTATION</h3> - -<p>When identifying our different defenses, we decided to number -all of our 4-spoke defenses in the 40 series as far as the -secondary was concerned. I mentioned in a previous chapter that -we have a defensive signal caller for the secondary, as well as -for the defensive line. We decided that 4-spoke and 40 had -something in common (the 4’s), and would be easy for our -players to remember. Consequently a 4-spoke defense is in the -40 series.</p> - -<p>In addition, we gave our right and left corner men numbers. -Our objective was to eliminate indecision as the second digit, -when called, gave the corner man a definite responsibility, as -will be illustrated shortly. Therefore, it was possible for the -secondary to do a good job of rotation merely by watching the -flow of the offensive backs.</p> - -<p>As an example, let’s assume our defensive signal caller says, -“40,” which is our regular 4-spoke defense. Therefore, our -secondary will revolve according to the flow of the offensive -backs, and the corner men will read the end and halfback nearest -to them in order to ascertain whether they go up or drop back.</p> - -<p>However, we will do more than play a straight 40 defense. -By numbering our corner men, we can predetermine the rotation. -Our right corner man is given the even numbers 4 and 8, -and the left corner man the odd numbers 5 and 9. Therefore, -we can call 44, 45, 48 and 49 defenses from the 4-spoke alignment. -Now 44 and 48 mean two different things, as does 45 and<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_100"></a>[100]</span> -49. However, 44 and 45 are the same, only to opposite sides -of the line, and the same holds true for 48 and 49.</p> - -<h4><i>Defensive Calls 44-45 for Secondary Rotation</i></h4> - -<p>When our defensive signal caller calls, “44,” our secondary -will have a predetermined rotation to our right, <i>unless</i> the flow -of the offensive backs is to our left. Then we will play regular -and disregard the predetermined call. Let’s assume 44 was called -and the flow of the offensive backs was to our right. We have -already predetermined our rotation. Regardless of whether it is -a pass or a run, our defensive right corner man must come -across the line of scrimmage and contain the passer quickly, as -illustrated in <a href="#figure073">Figure 73</a>. Our defensive right inside linebacker -knows the corner will contain quickly, so he is now responsible -for the short one-quarter area the corner man usually covers -on a flow pass toward him (<a href="#figure073">Figure 73</a>). If the corner man was -hesitant before, he need not be under these conditions as he -knows he will contain without fail on a 44 predetermined call -when the flow is toward him.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure073" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure073.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 73</span></p> -</div> - -<p>If the flow was away from him on a 44 call, as illustrated in -<a href="#figure075">Figure 75</a>, the predetermined call is “off,” and he revolves back<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_101"></a>[101]</span> -and covers his regular position. Both situations would be reversed -if the call was “45.”</p> - -<p>Defensive call 44 is also good versus a straight back pass, -as illustrated in <a href="#figure074">Figure 74</a>. The same is true of defense 45. The -only thing that erases the predetermined call is when the flow is -away from the second digit called, i.e., away from 4 or 5.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure074" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure074.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 74</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure075" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure075.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 75</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_102"></a>[102]</span></p> - -<h4><i>Defensive Calls 48-49 for Secondary Rotation</i></h4> - -<p>We use the call 48 and 49 when we want a sure rotation, say, -to the wide side of the field. When our right corner man hears -“8” and the left corner man hears “9,” he knows he must go -across the line of scrimmage regardless of the flow of the play. -If the flow of the play is away from him, as illustrated in <a href="#figure076">Figure -76</a>, he will trail the play. If the play is a straight back pass, as -illustrated in <a href="#figure077">Figure 77</a>, he will rush the passer hard. <a href="#figure078">Figure 78</a> -illustrates the flow of the play coming toward the right corner -man. His job is to contain the play then. The remaining three -backs know they are going to go to a 3-deep secondary regardlessly.</p> - -<p>We ordinarily will use such a stunt only toward the wide -(right) side of the field (<a href="#figure076">Figure 76-78</a>). The element of surprise -is very good, and it eliminates indecision on the part of the -secondary.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure076" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure076.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 76</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_103"></a>[103]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure077" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure077.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 77</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure078" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure078.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 78</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Defensive Calls 38-39 for Secondary Rotation</i></h4> - -<p>Another predetermined rotation is 38 and 39, and is similar -to 48 and 49, respectively, as one corner man rushes regardless -of the situation. We use 38 or 39 when we do not wish to call -48 or 49. If the offense sets a flanker to one side, and we want -our secondary to revolve toward the flanker and the corner man<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_104"></a>[104]</span> -who is now up on the line of scrimmage to rush regardlessly, -we would call 38 or 39. The first digit, “3,” tells our secondary -to revolve to a 3-deep toward the flanker. The second digit, “8” -or “9,” indicates the right or left corner man, respectively, is -going to fire into the offensive backfield. <a href="#figure079">Figures 79-80</a> illustrate -call, “38,” versus a running play and a straight drop back pass, -respectively.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure079" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure079.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 79</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure080" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure080.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 80</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_105"></a>[105]</span></p> - -<h3>STUNTING IN THE DEFENSIVE SECONDARY</h3> - -<p>A team must be sound in its defensive secondary in order -to be a good football team. All of us use certain basic principles, -but we must be careful we do not “type” ourselves as this could -be very costly if the opponents pick up our maneuvers while -scouting our team.</p> - -<p>One of the basic principles we try to teach our quarterback -when we are discussing different phases of the passing game is -where <i>not</i> to throw the football. While we might not complete -the pass, as long as the opposition does not intercept it, we are -not in too bad a position. Everyone knows the effect an interception -can have on both the offensive and defensive teams.</p> - -<p>In order to do an intelligent job of telling our quarterbacks -where <i>not</i> to throw the ball, we must know the maneuvers of the -opponent’s defensive secondary on action passes and on drop -back passes. However, we always give our opponents credit for -being as smart or smarter than we are. They, too, teach their -quarterbacks where <i>not</i> to throw the ball. Consequently we try -to make their job even more difficult by using some stunts in -our secondary.</p> - -<p>After we started to experiment, we found these stunts were -actually serving a two-fold purpose. Not only was it confusing -the opponents but it was also helping us to eliminate some problems -of indecision that our corner men were having on certain -occasions. By giving each man a specific assignment and by -letting his assignment be determined by the flow of the offensive -back and not by keying different positions, this greatly reduced -our mistakes.</p> - -<p>When we are using a particular stunt in our secondary, we -never want to weaken our coverage at any point. To the contrary, -we think we are strengthening it when we stunt. We have -used four stunts successfully from time to time. We call our -stunts “Thunder,” “Robber,” “Gangster,” and “Lightning.” After -carefully analyzing these stunts, we came to the conclusion we -were usually having two or three men exchange assignments, -having defenders come from different angles, but still covering -all the regular areas.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_106"></a>[106]</span></p> - -<h4>“<i>Thunder</i>”</h4> - -<p>“Thunder” is the name we have given to a stunt that will be -between our defensive right halfback and right corner man, -which will constitute one team, and our defensive left halfback -and left corner man which will constitute a second team. Each -team will be completely independent of the other team. What -the stunt really amounts to is that the halfback and corner man -will exchange assignments completely unless the flow goes away -from them. For example, let’s say the offense runs an action -pass to their right side. With an action pass of this type, our -left corner man would ordinarily drop back eight yards deep -and cover the short flat area. With “Thunder” called, however, -he will turn to his outside and sprint back and cover the deep -one-third of the field to his side. The left defensive halfback, -who ordinarily would cover the deep area on this particular type -pass, will come forward and outside and cover the short area the -corner man would ordinarily cover. Not only have we given the -quarterback an entirely new picture to look at, but we have -strengthened our coverage by having our halfback come forward -through the hook zone, going to the flat area. “Thunder” is -illustrated in <a href="#figure081">Figure 81</a>.</p> - -<p>I mentioned earlier that one of the advantages of these stunts -was that it takes away any point of indecision for our corner men. -When we are using our regular coverage and the flow goes away -from our corner man, he will sprint to his outside and cover -the deep one-third area, but when the flow comes toward him -he has to key the offensive end and determine if he is blocking, -slamming, going down field to block or to catch a pass. The -action our corner man takes will largely depend upon the action -the offensive end takes. When we have “Thunder” called, the -corner man knows on the snap of the ball, regardless of what -kind of play the offense will run, he will sprint back and cover -the deep area to his side of the field. (<a href="#figure081">Figure 81.</a>)</p> - -<p>The signal caller in our secondary can call “Thunder” for -our right side only, left side only or both sides at the same time. -If he calls it for both sides at the same time, then the direction<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_107"></a>[107]</span> -in which the offense operates will determine which side of our -defensive secondary will play “Thunder.”</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure081" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure081.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 81</span></p> -</div> - -<h4>“<i>Robber</i>”</h4> - -<p>“Robber” is another of our stunts that serves a two-fold purpose -of eliminating indecision and is an element of surprise.</p> - -<p>Our “Robber” will be someone playing defensive right or left -halfback, depending upon our game plans. However, we will -<i>never</i> have “Robber” called on <i>both</i> sides at the same time.</p> - -<p>For example, let’s say our defensive left halfback will be -our “Robber,” as illustrated in <a href="#figure082">Figure 82</a>. On the snap of ball, -regardless of the flow, our left corner man will sprint back and -cover the deep third of the field to his side, our defensive right -halfback will cover the deep middle of the field, and our right -corner man will cover the deep one-third to his side of the -field. On the snap of the ball, our “Robber” can go anywhere -he thinks the opponents will run. This is a very good element -of surprise because we will get an additional defender at the -point of attack and he can be very reckless due to the fact that -he does not have any designated responsibility. We expect our -“Robber” to try to second-guess the opponent’s quarterback.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_108"></a>[108]</span> -When a pass play develops, he is in a very good position to break -up the short passes.</p> - -<p>We do not use this as a steady diet, but we gain considerably -by having the “Robber” pursue the ball recklessly.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure082" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure082.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 82</span></p> -</div> - -<h4>“<i>Gangster</i>”</h4> - -<p>“Gangster” is a stunt we particularly like with a 4-5 defense -or any 9-man front defense where our linebackers will line up -a little wider than ordinarily.</p> - -<p>This stunt will be performed by three men—a corner man, -linebacker, and halfback. For example, we will use our defensive -left side, as illustrated in <a href="#figure083">Figure 83</a>. On the snap of the ball, -regardless of the flow, our left corner man will sprint back and -cover the deep third area to his side of the field (the halfback -ordinarily covers this area). The left linebacker will cover the -short flat to his side of the field (the corner man ordinarily -covers this area). The left halfback will come forward and -cover the hook spot (the linebacker ordinarily covers this area). -The remaining backs will cover their regular area.</p> - -<p>The main advantage of this stunt is that by having our halfback -come forward we are in a good position to stop all short -passes in the hook zone. He is going forward and covering the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_109"></a>[109]</span> -same area our linebacker usually covers. Our linebacker has to -key, sprint back, and set up, before he can get ready to go -forward. You can see that we have definitely strengthened our -coverage at this point and it is equally sound in the other area. -We will only call “Gangster” to one side at a time.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure083" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure083.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 83</span></p> -</div> - -<h4>“<i>Lightning</i>”</h4> - -<p>“Lightning” is a stunt between our linebacker and corner man -only, and is illustrated in <a href="#figure084">Figure 84</a>. We first started using this -stunt for the sole reason of eliminating any point of indecision -for our corner man. It is a very simple stunt. As an example, if -the flow goes toward the side on which we have called “Lightning,” -the corner man will come across the line of scrimmage -very fast and contain the ball carrier. He does not have any pass -responsibility at all if the action comes toward him. The linebacker -to his side will cover the short flat area if a running pass -develops. Our corner man is coached to contain the passer so -fast that a receiver does not have time to get very wide and -our linebacker does not have any trouble covering the short -flat area. The remaining backs will cover their regular areas. -The call, “Lightning,” will be <i>off</i> if the flow goes away from the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_110"></a>[110]</span> -side we have called it on, or if a straight drop back pass develops.</p> - -<p>We can call “Lightning” on both sides at the same time.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure084" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure084.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 84</span></p> -</div> - -<p>We do not use a stunt on every play, but with our regular -coverage and using a stunt occasionally we can give the opposition’s -quarterback a number of problems. He is looking at a -number of different “pictures” when we employ these defensive -tactics. Secondly, we feel it helps us because any indecision our -corner men might have is eliminated when we stunt.</p> - -<h3>CONCLUSION</h3> - -<p>The basic principles of pass defense are: when the ball is in -the air, your secondary men must sprint for the football, play -through the receiver for the ball and not around him, and play -the football at the highest point possible. If your defenders will -apply these basic principles along with an aggressive attitude -that the ball belongs to the defenders when it is in the air, you -will have a good defensive secondary.</p> - -<p>In a later chapter I shall explain and illustrate our drills for -the defensive secondary.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_111"></a>[111]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_6">CHAPTER 6<br /> -<span class="smaller">Our Kicking Game Techniques</span></h2> - -</div> - -<p>The over-all kicking game is probably the most important -phase of football. In considering the work to be done on the -practice field, I probably place more emphasis upon the kicking -game than any other coach. I feel I cannot have a sound football -team unless we have an extremely sound kicking game. We -thought the kicking game was important during the period when -we played two-platoon football, but now it is more important -than ever before under the present rules governing the game of -football.</p> - -<h3>THE PUNTING GAME</h3> - -<p>I am certain our players are “sold” on the kicking game, and -take pride in it. If a player takes pride in something, he will do -it well. Incidentally, we work on our kicking game every Tuesday -during the regular season. Previously we waited until -Thursday to work on our kicking game, but we found our boys -were tired the day of the football game, probably as a result of -so much running on Thursday. We use the kicking together with -our kick-return game in our pre-season practice as a conditioner. -We feel we can get sufficient running from our kicking game -to get our players in good physical condition. At the same time -we are developing this important phase of the game.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_112"></a>[112]</span></p> - -<h4><i>The Punter</i></h4> - -<p>Instead of merely talking to our players about their individual -kicking game assignments, we go on the field and rehearse -everything over and over again. This is also true of any unusual -situations that might confront the punter at various times during -the game. We also time our punters. I believe it is possible to -over-coach the kickers, however, and this is not desirable. I -know from past experience. When we tried too thoroughly to -coach our kickers, we found we were probably doing more -harm than good. At least, we were not getting the desired results -in comparison to the amount of time we were devoting to their -instruction. As an illustration, I had Bob Gain at Kentucky, an -All-American tackle, who as a freshman was a terrific kick-off -man. By taking only three steps he could boot the ball out of -the end zone when he kicked-off. Unfortunately we over-coached -him and by the time he was a senior he would run 10 yards on -his approach, and could only kick the ball 35 yards on the -kick-off.</p> - -<p>Another illustration relates to Clayton Webb, a very fine -punter whom I had at the University of Kentucky. As a freshman -he could “hang” the ball in the air for a relatively long period -of time when he punted. Yet during his senior year I felt we -had coached him down to a 29.4-yard average on his punts. -Consequently we now do very little coaching of the kickers.</p> - -<p>We like to have our punters use the step-and-a-half method, -taking the first (half) step with the kicking foot, then a full -step with the non-kicking foot. We ask our punters to hold the -ball 18 inches in front of the hip over their kicking foot. We -watch our kickers closely, time them, and try not to over-coach -them if they are kicking well in practice. However, we do have -a meeting with our kickers to review every situation that might -confront them in a game. We want our punters to know what -to do under such conditions, always taking into consideration -the tactical situation. Merely talking about these problems is not -sufficient training for the punters. They must be placed in various -confronting situations and must have the opportunity to react<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_113"></a>[113]</span> -to them on the practice field if they are to perform with proficiency -in a game. An example will illustrate my point.</p> - -<p>One of my former assistants at the University of Kentucky -played under an extremely intelligent football coach, a Phi Beta -Kappa honors graduate. The coach had gone over many situations -on the blackboard, but had never taken time to actually -rehearse them under game-like conditions. This was a typical -situation: Assuming that a team had the lead in the game, if on -the third down that team was forced to kick from behind its -own goal line, should the punter receive a poor snap from his -center and be unable to kick, he should pick up the football and -either run with it or throw an incomplete forward pass. The -team was playing Michigan State, and the score was 7-6 in the -fourth quarter. The other team was backed up to its own 2-yard -line. The punter said that as he lined up to punt he knew exactly -what to do if he received a bad pass from his center. The pass -was poor, the punter picked up the ball and threw it up into -the stands. Unfortunately the play was not an incomplete forward -pass, but was ruled a safety as the ball went out of the -end zone <i>behind</i> the goal line, and Michigan State won, 8-7. -I am not criticizing the punter nor his coach as both are extremely -capable men, but merely citing what can occur if a -kicker is merely <i>told what</i> to do but is not given actual experience -under game-like conditions practicing it.</p> - -<p>Our procedure is to put the ball on our 2-yard line, inform -our kicker of what could occur, then give him the “works.” We -load up and rush hard, give him a bad pass, etc., and our punter -must react properly to the situation, always being cognizant of -the tactical situation.</p> - -<p>Since I have been coaching, one of the few punts we have -had blocked was at Texas A & M when we were playing Rice -Institute. The situation was as follows: third down, senior punter, -poor pass from center. Instead of attempting to run with the -ball, since we still had fourth down in which to kick, my punter -tried to kick then. The result was a blocked punt. In fairness to -the boy, I must assume the responsibility for the blocked punt. -We had not done a good job of coaching the punter since he<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_114"></a>[114]</span> -did not react to the situation properly. Nevertheless, the mistake -was costly.</p> - -<h4><i>The Center</i></h4> - -<p>The most important person in our kicking game is our center. -We believe if he can snap the ball back to our punter at a -distance of 13 yards with a perfect pass in six-tenths of a second, -we won’t get our kicks blocked. I believe about 98% of all -blocked kicks have resulted from imperfect passes from the -center to the kicker. Incidentally, as a coaching point, if the -center makes a poor pass, your kicker should inform him of this.</p> - -<p>In timing the center’s pass, we have had very few centers -who could snap the ball in less than six-tenths of a second. -I recall, however, there was a center at the University of Georgia -who could get the ball back to the kicker in four-tenths of a -second. This is the exception rather than the rule, however.</p> - -<p>We time our centers in their work every day. As a point of -interest, the coaches are not with the centers when we are timing -them. We put a defensive man over our centers as we want our -centers to pass the ball and then block a man, rather than keep -their heads down, watching the ball going back to the punter.</p> - -<h4><i>Timing the Punter</i></h4> - -<p>We want our punters to get the ball away within one and -three-tenths seconds from the time the ball hits their hands on -the pass from center, until their foot makes contact with the -ball. Gene Henderson, one of my kickers at Texas A & M, -could get the ball away in one second. Babe Parella at Kentucky -could also get the ball away in a second when punting. Here -once again these are more exceptions than the rule.</p> - -<p>I stated previously we wanted our kickers to use the step-and-one-half -method of punting. We are not too concerned -if he doesn’t follow this method, <i>providing</i> he kicks well. Nor -are we too concerned about his method of holding and dropping -the ball and other individual techniques, <i>providing</i> he kicks well -and gets the ball away in one and three-tenths seconds or less. -If our kicker is a 3-step kicker, who kicks well and can get the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_115"></a>[115]</span> -ball off in the prescribed time limit, we merely move him back -an extra yard. Frankly, we don’t believe we’ll ever get a kick -blocked if the center gets the ball back in six-tenths of a second -or less, and the kicker’s time does not exceed one and three-tenths -seconds (total time of one and nine-tenths seconds), -<i>providing</i> the defensive men are bumped and not permitted to -have a straight run directly at the kicker.</p> - -<p>When talking about the punting game, one must realize the -importance of the length of time the ball is in the air <i>over</i> the -field of play. We want our kicker to be able to kick the ball in -such a manner that it will remain up in the air and <i>over</i> the -playing field for a period of four seconds or more. Consequently -a kick of four seconds’ duration in flight will be about a 40-yard -punt. We are not interested in an 80-yard punt, as we cannot -adequately cover such a long kick. The following example will -illustrate my point.</p> - -<p>I had a player at one time who could literally kick the football -a country mile. Yet his kicking was very erratic. I recall -he kicked the football 78 yards <i>out-of-bounds</i> in a game against -Tennessee, and later in the fourth quarter he kicked the ball 80 -yards <i>over</i> the end zone line. In another football game, he kicked -the ball 70 yards, <i>out-kicking his coverage</i>, and the opposition -returned it for the game-winning touchdown against us. My point -is that he was too good a kicker for us. The <i>average net gain</i> -is the most important thing in punting, not the total distance -the punter kicks the ball. A punt 40 yards from the line of -scrimmage with no return is a 40-yard kick. A 60-yard punt -returned 50 yards is a net punt of 10 yards. We are interested -only in the <i>net gain</i> of the play.</p> - -<p>If the kicked ball can remain in the air for four seconds and -if it takes one and nine-tenths seconds to get the punt away, -there is a total period of time of five and nine-tenths seconds -expended. If our linemen block for one second on the line before -releasing to cover the punt, they will have approximately four -and nine-tenths seconds to cover the ball. A fast lineman can get -downfield a good distance in four and nine-tenths seconds, -though I don’t know of anyone who can cover 60 or 70 yards -in this period of time. As you can see, this sort of thing allows<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_116"></a>[116]</span> -a team time to get the ball, set up a wall, get a couple key blocks -and run one back for a long gain or a touchdown merely because -the punter has out-kicked his coverage. Therefore, we are not -interested in how far the punter kicks the ball, but we are vitally -interested in how far the opposition returns our punts. I shall -discuss this particular phase of the kicking game in greater -detail shortly.</p> - -<h4><i>Practicing the Punting Game</i></h4> - -<p>During the regular scheduled practices, we work on our defensive -kicking game at least one period two days a week, and -sometimes three days a week. These periods never have a time -limit, and they are our last drill. Our reasoning is two-fold. -First, the boys are tired and in order to get proper execution -and coverage we insist they give that “little extra,” which I feel -is so important in order to build a winner. Secondly, the boys -know there is no time limit and we are going to work on this -phase of our football program until we do it to my satisfaction. -Therefore, they strive extra hard to get perfect execution and -coverage so we can end practice. We feel if the boys can learn -to execute the kicking game perfectly while they are tired, they -will do it perfectly during the actual game.</p> - -<h3>OUR SPREAD PUNT FORMATION</h3> - -<p>Before discussing the techniques of our spread punt, I would -like to tell you how we adopted it. I related previously that -Tennessee defeated my 1946 Kentucky team with a punt return. -In 1947 a number of teams hurt us badly by returning our -punts. In 1948 the University of Mississippi ran back punts for -258 yards and two touchdowns.</p> - -<p>Our Mississippi game bothered me a great deal. At the time -we were using only the tight punt formation. I was searching -for another type of formation which would give us better coverage. -I had never used the spread punt, but we had played against -Tulane and Vanderbilt, both of whom had employed spread -punt. Woody Woodard, while at Southern Methodist University, -had an exceptionally fine punting game, and I was considering<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_117"></a>[117]</span> -changing to his system. However, while coming back from -Chicago one weekend with “Scrappy” Moore of the University -of Chattanooga, he sold me on trying the spread punt. He gave -me his spread punt blocking rules. I adopted them, and since -1949 we have used the spread punt formation. The results have -been very favorable as far as we are concerned. As an illustration, -we made a study of our punting game and we found that -during the season we went for eight games without having our -punts returned one inch. For the entire season our punts were -returned only one and four-tenths yards. During our 1950 season, -the average yards returned per game from our punts was four-tenths -of a yard, and we recovered five mishandled punts. The -following season our opponents returned our punts for an average -of one and four-tenths yards per punt, and we recovered -three mishandled punts. Since we tie our kicking game in with -our defensive game very closely, you can see that spread punt -coverage has been much more satisfactory for us than the tight -punt formation and coverage which we employed prior to 1949. -I shall discuss our spread punt coverage shortly.</p> - -<h4><i>Spread Punt Line Splits</i></h4> - -<p>The main advantage of using spread punt formation is that -the defensive team has a difficult time holding up your coverage. -A team can cover its punt much wider. If a team can spread its -men across the field as they are covering a kick, it is very hard -for the receiving team to return the ball for a sizeable gain.</p> - -<p>The splits in our offensive line are determined largely by the -size of the men. We want our guards to be split about one and -one-half yards from the center. These splits also will be determined -by the physical size of our backfield men whom we -place in the gaps to each side of the center, two yards deep. If -the back is a small man, then the guard will cut down his split -to approximately one yard. Conversely, if the back is a large -person, the guard can widen his split to approximately one and -one-half yards. Our tackles will split from their guards one and -one-half to two yards. Each tackle must be able to block the -second man outside of his guard. Our ends can split out as far<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_118"></a>[118]</span> -as they wish, providing they can block back all the way to the -tackle if a situation arises warranting it. The ends usually split -out about two yards, as illustrated in <a href="#figure085">Figure 85</a>.</p> - -<p>Our up-backs line up in the seams between the guard and -center, about two yards deep, as was explained previously. The -personal protector will line up five yards deep, and will be on -the right side for a right-footed kicker, and on the left side for -a left-footed kicker. His depth will be 13 yards. The type of -spread punt we employ is illustrated in <a href="#figure085">Figure 85</a>.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp75" id="figure085" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure085.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 85</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Spread Punt Blocking Rules</i></h4> - -<p>We do not believe a defensive lineman will ever get a straight -run at the spot where the kicker’s foot meets the football if our -players occupy their proper positions, unless the defensive man -comes from the outside of our protection. For this reason, we -feel it is not necessary for our players to block for more than a -second before going down under the punt. Our players are -instructed to count, “One thousand and three,” then release -downfield covering the kick.</p> - -<p>The rules which our players use in protecting our punter<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_119"></a>[119]</span> -apply to the blocking of any man who is within one yard of the -line of scrimmage. We do not feel an opposing player can block -a kick if he is more than one yard off the line of scrimmage, even -though we do not block him. Our spread punt blocking rules -are as follows:</p> - -<p><i>Center</i>—The center should make a perfect pass to the kicker, -snap up his head quickly, and cover the kick immediately. We -do not want him to block anyone.</p> - -<p><i>Guards</i>—Our guards will block the first man to their outside, -and they must keep their inside foot stationary. If a guard steps -laterally with his inside foot as he blocks, he will leave a hole -through which a defensive man can sprint and block the kick. -After he has blocked the first man to his outside for a period of -one second, which I explained above, he covers the kick downfield.</p> - -<p><i>Tackles</i>—If there are two men lined up between the tackle -and his adjacent guard, he will block to his inside. If there are -not two men between his position and his adjacent guard, he -will block the first man to his outside. After he has blocked for -one second, he will cover the kick.</p> - -<p><i>Ends</i>—Each end will block the first man to his outside, <i>unless</i> -there are two defensive men between him and his adjacent tackle. -If there are two men between his guard and tackle, he will block -the first man to his inside.</p> - -<p><i>Up-Backs</i>—The up-backs block anyone coming over their -territory between the guard and center. If no one comes through -their territory, they delay slightly and cover the kick.</p> - -<p><i>Personal Protector</i>—He looks up and down the line for the -most dangerous man to the kicker, and then blocks him as he -rushes.</p> - -<p>These spread punt blocking rules apply to any defense and -provide the most protection at the spot where the ball will be -kicked. The basic principle for the linemen in carrying out their -assignments is never to move the inside foot. If the lineman -makes contact with the defensive man and throws him off-balance, -then he can cover the kick immediately. The up-backs -take a good stance with a wide base and uncoil at anyone coming<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_120"></a>[120]</span> -through the inside gaps. The personal protector can use any -type of block he wishes, but we prefer the butt block or the -cross-body block when protecting the kicker.</p> - -<h4><i>Spread Punt Coverage</i></h4> - -<p>We want the first man down under the punt to dive at the -safety man’s Adam’s apple, really “unloading” on him if possible. -He may leave his feet if necessary in order to accomplish -his objective. For illustrative purposes, <a href="#figure086">Figure 86</a>, let’s assume -that our center is the first man down under the punt. We want -him to try to beat the football down the field, and tackle the -safety man high when he touches it, or force the safety man to -fair catch the football. We want our guards to go down and -assume positions indicated in <a href="#figure086">Figure 86</a>. Our left end and right -tackle will go down and set up five yards outside of the safety -man, and five yards away from him. We set our right end out -about 10 yards, and he is our “sprinter.” His assignment is to -sprint straight for the safety man, and force the safety to fumble -the ball, if possible. His line of direction has a second purpose, -too. Since he is in an excellent position to catch the football -should the punter fake the punt and pass, the defense must -adjust to him and cannot merely permit him to run a diagonal -course downfield every time we have a punting situation. If the -defense continuously ignores him and doesn’t adjust to him when -he covers punts, sooner or later we are going to hit him with -the pass for a sizeable gain.</p> - -<p>It is not possible for a coach to get the type of coverage on -kicks, as illustrated in <a href="#figure086">Figure 86</a>, unless he stresses the fact to -his players that it is extremely important for them to spread -out in order to maintain proper positions in “spreading the net” -for the receiver. They must sprint at top speed in covering kicks. -We do not want our left end and right tackle to make any tackles -in our punt coverage, as they merely turn the runner into the -other men. We want our six men to go down and get set in a -football position three yards from the football and then guard -the safety man. In assuming a good football position, we mean -a position in which the player’s eyes are on the safety man, his<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_121"></a>[121]</span> -tail is down, back straight, and his feet apart. If we have six -men down on the safety man, guarding him, he will have no -place to run. We want to drive the safety man back and forth, -searching for a place to turn upfield, and then we’ll move in on -him. We refer to this as our <i>One-Six Formation</i>. We want our -up-backs to go downfield and take the positions of linebackers -behind our six-man coverage, as illustrated in <a href="#figure086">Figure 86</a>. They -must be in a position to defend against the return up the middle. -We want our personal protector and punter to take halfback -positions to the outside behind the one-six-two coverage formation -(<a href="#figure086">Figure 86</a>).</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure086" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure086.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 86</span></p> -</div> - -<p>We spend a great deal of time giving our players practice in -executing their assignments on blocking and covering from -spread punt formation. I can assure you that merely talking -about their assignments and responsibilities will not obtain the -desired results. I think we do a good job of covering punts simply -because we work on this important phase of the kicking game -so much.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_122"></a>[122]</span></p> - -<p>As I mentioned previously, we do our kicking work last, -not setting a definite time limit on it. When our players are -covering punts, we blow a whistle and everyone stops. We want -to find the players in their proper positions when covering the -kick. If they are not covering to our satisfaction, we merely do -it over and over again until we get the type of coverage we -want. The boys actually put the pressure on each other to get -perfect coverage, consequently we generally spend about 10 -minutes instead of 20 minutes covering punts.</p> - -<h3>OUR TIGHT PUNT FORMATION</h3> - -<p>The only time we kick from a tight punt formation is when -we are backed up inside of our own 3-yard line and it is impossible -for us to kick from a spread formation since our kicker -cannot get the sufficient depth of 13 yards which we think is -necessary. Therefore, we always tell our quarterback we should -<i>never</i> kick the ball from behind our own 3-yard line. His objective -is to get us out to at least the 3-yard line so we can employ -spread punt. Assuming we can’t get out to the 3-yard line, then -we will have to use tight punt formation. When we are definitely -going to kick the ball out-of-bounds as we do on occasion, -we kick from tight formation.</p> - -<p>Because I feel we cannot cover the kick very well from tight -punt formation, the quarterback will always designate in the -huddle the direction the punter is going to kick the ball—“Punt -from tight punt; kick to our right.” This tells our linemen in -which direction they should sprint after they have blocked their -men. It also affects the blocking assignments of our ends. <a href="#figure087">Figure -87</a> illustrates our tight punt formation and coverage on a kick -to our right. Our blocking rules are as follows:</p> - -<p><i>Interior Linemen</i>—Our interior linemen will line up in a -tight formation with very little splits. They all have one blocking -rule—inside gap N/T over, which means they will block a man -if he is in their inside gap; if there is no one playing that position, -they will block the man playing over them. They must all -block for one and one-half counts, when using the tight punt, -then release and cover the kick quickly.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_123"></a>[123]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp88" id="figure087" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure087.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 87</span></p> -</div> - -<p><i>Ends</i>—The ends will be split out about two yards, and they -have definite assignments. If the quarterback indicates in the -huddle the kick will be to the right, then the right end does not -have a blocking assignment but he must cover the kick immediately. -He must get good width and make certain the ball -carrier does not get outside of him. The end playing the position -on the opposite side will block the defensive end. If the kick -is to the left side, the ends merely exchange assignments.</p> - -<p><i>Up-Backs</i>—They will line up about two yards deep and in -positions behind their respective offensive tackles. Their assignment -is to keep their inside foot in place and block the first man -who shows outside of our offensive tackle. They must make the -defensive man come to them. They are going to protect their -area.</p> - -<p><i>Personal Protector</i>—He lines up about one and one-half -yards behind the right up-back, and his assignment is to block -the second man outside of our offensive tackle or the first man -outside of our up-back. When he makes contact with the defensive<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_124"></a>[124]</span> -man, he forces him to his outside. He, too, must keep his -inside foot in place. If we are going to kick the ball to our left -after the ball has been snapped, he will cross over and block -the first man who shows outside of our left up-back. He covers -wide to the side he blocks on.</p> - -<p><i>Kicker</i>—The kicker is back nine yards, and after he kicks -he immediately covers to the side opposite he kicked the ball.</p> - -<p>The tight punt coverage is practically the same as we use on -our spread punt, but the linemen are so close together it is -difficult for them to cover wide. Our center cannot leave quite -as quickly as on spread punt and we hold our blocks a little -longer. Otherwise everything is the same on the two punt formations.</p> - -<h3>OUR QUICK KICK FORMATION</h3> - -<p>The quick kick is a tremendous offensive weapon which we -now employ frequently, depending upon our particular opponent. -We think the quick kick has helped us win a few football -games in the past, and I suspect it will continue to aid us in -the future if we execute it properly. Consequently we will continue -to spend time practicing and coaching the quick kick. -Since we quick kick frequently, this makes our short passing -game more effective as our opponents must play their safety man -deeper than usual.</p> - -<p>We try not to tip-off when we intend to quick kick. We try -to make the formation look exactly like our regular running formation. -One slight difference is that we line up our backs slightly -deeper than usual and slightly to their right, as illustrated in -<a href="#figure088">Figure 88</a>, if the left halfback is quick kicking.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure088" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure088.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 88</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_125"></a>[125]</span></p> - -<h4><i>Quick Kick Rules and Coverage</i></h4> - -<p>Our quick kick rules and coverage are very simple, and are -as follows:</p> - -<p><i>Ends, Guards and Tackles</i>—They block the man on their -inside gap, and if no man is there, they block the man over -them. They are trying to form a completely new line of scrimmage -on their first charge about one yard straight ahead. It is -very important these six men penetrate the defense on their -initial charge, in order to give the kicker adequate room to -kick the football.</p> - -<p><i>Center</i>—The center’s first responsibility is to make a good -snap to the person who is going to kick the football. Then he -blocks the man in the off-gap—no one there, blocks man over -him. As an example, if we have a right-footed kicker, the center -will block to his left, as illustrated in <a href="#figure088">Figure 88</a>. If the kicker is -left-footed, the center would block to his right.</p> - -<p><i>Quarterback</i>—The quarterback acts as if he is going to receive -a hand-back pass from his center. However, he takes a -wider leg spread than usual in order to permit the center to pass -the ball directly through the quarterback’s legs to his left halfback -(<a href="#figure088">Figure 88</a>). His blocking rule is to block the on-gap, i.e., -the right gap for a right-footed kicker, as illustrated in <a href="#figure088">Figure 88</a>, -and the left gap for a left-footed kicker.</p> - -<p><i>Right Halfback</i>—He has no blocking assignment as he covers -the quick kick immediately.</p> - -<p><i>Fullback</i>—He will move over to his right slightly, and his -assignment is to block the first man who shows outside of our -offensive right end. He will step up to meet him, giving the -kicker adequate room to kick the ball.</p> - -<p><i>Left Halfback or Kicker</i>—He lines up a little deeper than -usual and moves over about a foot to his right. When the kicker -catches the football, he will rock his weight back to his right -foot, leaving his left foot in place, and pivoting his body to the -right. He then takes a step with his left foot in about a 45 -degree angle to the sideline, and at the same time he will drop -the ball (pointing straight down the field) and kick the ball -trying to make contact with it over the arch of his right foot.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_126"></a>[126]</span> -After he hits the football, he legswings toward the goal line. This -action will make the ball go end-over-end and cause it to continue -rolling toward the goal line upon hitting the ground.</p> - -<p>The quick kick must come as a complete surprise to the -defense or it will not be effective. If the defense knows you are -going to quick kick, it will be more effective to employ spread -punt and kick the football. You would get better protection and -coverage from spread formation, though the element of surprise -is not present.</p> - -<h3>OUR PUNT RETURN</h3> - -<p>We have never done what I would consider an outstanding -job of returning our opposition’s punts. One reason for this is -that it is awfully easy to overlook this particular phase of the -kicking game. I am planning to devote more time on punt returns -from now on.</p> - -<p>We feel about punt returns about the same as we do pass -defense—you must either rush or return, and it is difficult to -accomplish both at the same time. Therefore, we try to do one -or the other, depending upon the game situation.</p> - -<p>We use a punt return to our left and one to our right, and a -return up the middle to keep the kicking team honest. All of -these returns have proven satisfactory from time to time.</p> - -<h4><i>Punt Return Left</i></h4> - -<p>When we are going to return the punt left or right, we line -up in a strong side defense. Consequently there is no indication -of whether we are returning the punt right or left, or rushing -the punter trying to block the punt.</p> - -<p><a href="#figure089">Figure 89</a> illustrates our punt return left. Our return rules are -as follows:</p> - -<p><i>Left End</i>—He comes across the line of scrimmage about five -yards deep into the offensive backfield, and makes certain the -kicker does not get outside of him in the event the latter tries -to run with the ball. After he sees the kicker punt the football, -he turns and swings in behind his right guard in forming the -wall. He will be the fourth man in line and he must keep his<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_127"></a>[127]</span> -proper distance from his guard. The length of the kick will -determine how far downfield he will go before he sets up. He -blocks anyone who is in his area trying to break through the -wall.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure089" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure089.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 89</span></p> -</div> - -<p>We have an imaginary post three yards outside of our defensive -left end, and we want all of our players to swing wide and -go around this spot before going back downfield. If all of the -players do this, our entire line will be running in approximately -the same path and our wall will be set up correctly.</p> - -<p><i>Left Tackle</i>—As soon as he crosses the line of scrimmage, -he will turn to his left, go around the imaginary post, and head -quickly downfield becoming the first man in the wall. His block -will be a key one, springing loose the safety man. His depth -depends on the distance the punter kicks the ball.</p> - -<p><i>Middle Guard</i>—He follows the same course as the left tackle. -He will be the second man in the wall, and he must maintain -the proper distance between the first man and himself. When he -gets into position, he will block anyone who is in his area trying -to break through the wall.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_128"></a>[128]</span></p> - -<p><i>Right Guard</i>—Same course as the left tackle, only he follows -the middle guard around the imaginary post and back downfield -becoming the third man in the wall. He should keep his -proper distance from our middle guard.</p> - -<p><i>Right Tackle</i>—He will rush the punter from the outside, -making certain the punter actually kicks the ball. Then turning -to his left, he will swing wide, as illustrated in <a href="#figure089">Figure 89</a>, becoming -the fifth man in the wall. He must keep his proper distance -from our defensive left end who will be the fourth man, -as I explained previously.</p> - -<p><i>Right End</i>—He will rush the kicker from the outside making -certain he actually kicks the ball. He will then turn to his left, -and start around the imaginary post. He will be the sixth man -in the wall, and he should maintain a proper distance between -his right tackle and himself.</p> - -<p><i>Right Linebacker</i>—The right linebacker will come back to -his outside and block the most dangerous pursuer threatening -the safety man. He usually blocks the offensive left end as he -covers the punt downfield.</p> - -<p><i>Left Linebacker</i>—He will come back fast to his outside, and -his responsibility is to block out the offensive right end. The -others are blocking toward the wide side of the field. He is the -only man blocking toward the sideline.</p> - -<p><i>Halfbacks</i>—They will handle the short kick to their side of -the field. Otherwise they are personal protectors for the safety -man if he fields the kick. They block the most dangerous pursuer -who is in a position to tackle our receiver.</p> - -<p><i>Safety</i>—It is very important that the ball is handled in the -air and not permitted to strike the ground and bounce around. -Assuming the safety man catches the football, he should start -straight up the field in order to give his wall time to form and -to draw the pursuers into the middle toward him. Then he swings -in behind his wall on the sideline.</p> - -<h4><i>Our Middle Punt Return</i></h4> - -<p>Our return up the middle is very similar to our man-to-man -kick-off return (<a href="#figure094">Figure 94</a>), in that we assign one man to block<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_129"></a>[129]</span> -one man at the line of scrimmage. Each defensive man is supposed -to stay with his offensive man, as illustrated in <a href="#figure090">Figure 90</a>. -We use the same defensive alignment as when we are going to -return the ball to our right or left (<a href="#figure090">Figure 90</a>).</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure090" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure090.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 90</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure091" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure091.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 91</span></p> -</div> - -<p>If we want to be in a balanced defensive alignment, and we -know they have a slow offensive lineman, we will line up in a -straight 6-2 defense. <a href="#figure091">Figure 91</a> illustrates our alignment and -hold-up return if we know the offensive center is slow. We merely -let him go, and our interior linemen and linebackers hold-up the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_130"></a>[130]</span> -offensive ends, tackles and guards. Our ends rush the kicker -from the outside, making certain he kicks the football. The -interior linemen and linebackers use the same techniques our -offensive backs use when they are protecting the passer. When -they feel they are losing their men, then they will go into a cross -body block. Our halfbacks will be the personal protection for -the safety man. The safety will field the ball in the air and start -upfield. If he sees a hole, he will break for it on our middle -return.</p> - -<h3>OUR KICK-OFF AND ITS COVERAGE</h3> - -<p>The kick-off is a very important phase of the defensive kicking -game because of the number of times it is used in a game. -As you know, the kick-off comes at the start of the game, at -the beginning of the second half, and after a team has scored. -It is a terrific advantage to get a deep kick-off with good coverage, -and tackle the ball carrier inside of his 20-yard line. It is -important to eliminate the long run on the kick-off return for -several reasons. First, a long run has a demoralizing effect on -the kicking team, and gives the receiving team both a psychological -and a strategical advantage. With respect to the latter -point, if the receiving team gets beyond its 30-yard line, it can -open up with its entire offensive attack immediately. Conversely, -if the kicking team keeps the receiving team deep in its own -territory, the receiving team is forced to run a limited offense, -punt the ball or gamble in order to get out of its own territory.</p> - -<h4><i>Two Types of Kick-Offs</i></h4> - -<p>We employ two different kinds of kick-offs, depending upon -the particular opponent we are playing. As an illustration, if we -know the opposition has two dangerous runners playing deep, -we will kick the ball in such a manner that it strikes the ground -and bounces around making it difficult for either man to control. -This tactic also gives us time to cover the kick properly. On -the other hand, if our scouting report reveals the safeties are -only fair runners, then we will kick the ball high in the air and -end-over-end. Of course, if we had a place kicker who could<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_131"></a>[131]</span> -boot the ball out of the end zone every time, our kick-off strategy -would be simple and our problem would be solved. Kickers with -such ability are difficult to locate.</p> - -<p>I suppose our coverage on the kick-off is like that of most -other football teams. We want our men back five yards from the -ball in a 3-point stance, all facing toward the football. Our -quarterback stands one yard to the side of the ball and a yard -off the ball on the 39-yard line with his arms raised ready to -give the starting signal to the men watching him. When the -kicker approaching the football gets to a point where the men -covering the kick-off cannot get off-side, the quarterback will -drop his arms as a signal for the men to start forward together. -We want everyone but the safeties to cover the kick quickly. -Each man is to protect his own area, and then go to the cut-off -point. We instruct our ends to be certain no one gets outside -of them.</p> - -<p>We have two safeties not including the quarterback. If the -ball is kicked down the middle, the quarterback is the safety. If -the ball is kicked to our right, our quarterback and left halfback -will be safeties. If the ball is kicked to our left, the quarterback -and our right halfback will be safeties, as illustrated in <a href="#figure092">Figure -92</a>. When our safeties drop out, our other men will converge -slightly to close the gaps. The safety men cover slowly, and -should always be in a position to tackle the ball carrier before -he can score.</p> - -<p><a href="#figure092">Figure 92</a> illustrates the fullback kicking the ball. If a player -other than the fullback is the kick-off man, he and the fullback -would merely exchange places in the line up.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure092" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure092.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 92</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_132"></a>[132]</span></p> - -<p>It is very important that our men going down to cover the -kick-off keep their proper distance from the men on each side -of them. If we have two men covering the kick close together, -a good block by the receiving team could eliminate both of them, -and then our coverage would not be sound.</p> - -<h3>OUR KICK-OFF RETURN</h3> - -<p>I explained previously the advantages of returning the kick-off. -I like to get this psychological and strategical “jump” on our -opposition when we receive the kick-off; consequently, we attach -much importance and significance to returning the kick-off. -We work hard on our returns. We want a good return so -that if we must surrender the ball by punting to the opposition, -we’ll give it to them back in their 3-down zone. By this I mean -they must make a first down in their first three plays or they -will be forced to kick the ball back to us on the fourth down. -If we get a poor return and cannot move the ball and must punt -it from deep in our own territory, we might give the ball to -them immediately in their 4-down zone. Now we have increased -their chances of scoring by 25% merely because we did not get -a good kick-off return.</p> - -<h4><i>Our Kick-Off Return Right</i></h4> - -<p><a href="#figure093">Figure 93</a> illustrates our kick-off return to our right with the -men on the receiving team blocking their “numbers” downfield, -as indicated. Each man on the kicking team is numbered from -one through seven from the outside-in, except the last four men -on the opposite side of the kicking line, i.e., the men on our -extreme left in <a href="#figure093">Figure 93</a>. If we know from scouting reports -who the safety man will be, we do not give him a number. If -we don’t know who the safety man is, we instruct our players—if -your man turns out to be a safety, regardless of where you -line up, then you will block the first man to your inside. The -deep back who does not receive the ball will head upfield and -block the most dangerous man threatening the ball carrier.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_133"></a>[133]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure093" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure093.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 93</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Our Middle Kick-Off Return</i></h4> - -<p>We think our middle kick-off return is very simple and actually -takes very little work to perfect it. What we are trying to -accomplish is to wall off the opposition in a solid line. This gives -our ball carrier time to pick up speed and we let him break -where the hole opens up.</p> - -<p>In our alignment, illustrated in <a href="#figure094">Figure 94</a>, our front line is -about 12 yards in front of our back line. When the ball is kicked, -our front line will drop back six yards and get into a good -football position, keeping their eyes on the men they are going -to block. When we are using this type of return, we commence -counting from the outside-in on both ends of the line. The end -men are not blocked because we know they are taught to stay -outside. If our scouting report shows they converge and other -men cover the outside, then we will change our assignments -to handle the situation.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_134"></a>[134]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp93" id="figure094" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure094.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 94</span></p> -</div> - -<p>We want our blockers to use the same block that our backs -use when protecting the passer. We want them to remain on -their feet until they feel they are losing their man. Then they -go into a crotch block. The deep back who does not field the -ball will get in front of the ball carrier and lead interference. -The back who receives the kick-off will start straight up the -field attempting to gain as much yardage as possible. When he -sees daylight in the line in front of it, he breaks for the opening -at his discretion.</p> - -<p>If the kicking team places the football on the hash mark to -kick-off and we are employing a middle return, we will count the -end man closest to the football and block him, and disregard -the two farthest men from the ball on the opposite end of the -line.</p> - -<h3>OUR ON-SIDE (SHORT) KICK</h3> - -<p>The on-side kick, i.e., legal short kick, is one of the best -weapons a team can have when you must gain possession of -the ball after a touchdown. We work on the on-side kick, practicing -it every week. If an on-side kick helps us to win one<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_135"></a>[135]</span> -football game, then it is well worth all the time we have spent -on it.</p> - -<p>Previously I mentioned our 1955 game with Rice where we -were behind 12-0, with three minutes remaining to play in the -game. We scored on a running play, kicked the extra point, and -with the score 12-7 we still needed a touchdown to win the -football game. Having rehearsed the on-side kick during the -week, as we lined up for the kick-off, we knew our strategy -would be a short kick. We recovered the ball successfully on the -on-side kick, then scored with a long pass, and converted the -point-after-touchdown, making the score 14-12. Rice attempted -to get back into the game by passing as time was running out. We -intercepted a pass, scored again, and won the game 20-12. You -can see why we are firm believers in the on-side kick.</p> - -<p><a href="#figure095">Figure 95</a> illustrates our on-side kick to the left. We line up -in our regular kick-off alignment. When the kicker approaches -the ball, instead of driving through with the toe of his kicking -shoe, he kicks the football with his instep. He merely tries to -get a piece of the ball, sort of punching it left or right so we -can go down and cover it quickly. The end, tackle and center -(<a href="#figure095">Figure 95</a>) do not try to recover the ball, but try to wedge -in front of it and wall off the area so the men on the receiving -team cannot get possession of the football. Our halfback comes -down fast and his assignment is to recover the football (behind -the wall). When we kick the ball to the left, as illustrated in -<a href="#figure095">Figure 95</a>, the quarterback will swing in behind the halfback -in the event he misses recovering the ball and the opposition -is trying to advance the kick-off.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure095" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure095.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 95</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_136"></a>[136]</span></p> - -<p>We also try an on-side kick down the middle with the tackles -and guards (see <a href="#figure095">Figure 95</a>) forming a wall in front of the kicker, -who tries to recover the football.</p> - -<p>When we try an on-side kick to our right, the principles are -the same with our end, guard and tackle forming the wall while -the right halfback tries to recover the ball.</p> - -<h3>DEFENDING AGAINST AN ON-SIDE KICK</h3> - -<p>We also work on defending against the on-side (short) kick -because we know the opposition will attempt to use it against us. -The last year I was at Kentucky, we were playing Cincinnati -and I knew they would attempt an on-side kick. I sent 11 players -into the game with the sole responsibility of recovering the -kick and not permitting Cincinnati to get the football. I wish -I could report that we were successful, but Cincinnati recovered -its on-side kick. However, our boys at least knew we had worked -on defending against the on-side kick and we were not surprised -when the opposition used it.</p> - -<p>When we are expecting an on-side kick, we want to get our -best ball handlers up close to the restraining line so they can -field the ball. <a href="#figure096">Figure 96</a> illustrates our receiving alignment defending -against the on-side kick. Our halfbacks and quarterback -are at the 45-yard line, with the fullback deep and the -ends in their usual alignment. We put our five interior linemen -close to the restraining line for two reasons. First, we do <i>not</i> -want them to handle the football. Second, we want them to block -or wall off for the man who is going to field the ball. Our quarterback -is our surest ball handler so we place him in the middle, -hoping he will be the one to field the ball. Note the halfbacks -are inside of the end men on the restraining line in front of them. -If the ball is kicked to our left, our front men sprint quickly to -a point in front of the football where they can block the men -on the kicking team before they can recover the football. The -halfback on the left side is instructed <i>not</i> to try to advance the -football, but merely to fall on it and get possession of the football. -The quarterback and right halfback swing in behind the -left halfback in the event he mishandles the football. If the kick<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_137"></a>[137]</span> -were to our right, the right halfback would handle the ball with -the other two backs backing up the right halfback. If the ball -is kicked down the middle, we want the quarterback to fall on -the ball, with the two halfbacks swinging in behind him in the -event he mishandles the ball. Our five front men would block -in front of the ball for their quarterback.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure096" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure096.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 96</span></p> -</div> - -<h3>OUR EXTRA POINT AND FIELD GOAL PROTECTION</h3> - -<p>Our extra point and field goal protection are the same with -the exception that on the latter we must cover the kick. Our -point-after-touchdown and field goal attempt blocking rules are -as follows:</p> - -<p><i>Center</i>—Our center’s main responsibility is to make a perfect -snap to the holder, and then he braces himself and holds his -ground. We actually try to get our center to grab the ground -with his hands so that he cannot be knocked backwards. Should -the latter occur, the center would leave a hole in the line. The -center must hold his ground, and he should keep both feet -stationary.</p> - -<p><i>Guards, Tackles, Ends</i>—The other six linemen have exactly -the same blocking rules. The guards and tackles do not take -splits, so the line from tackle to tackle will be tight. The ends -will split approximately six inches. None of these men can move -their outside foot. It must remain stationary. They will line up -looking in at the football. On the snap of the ball, the guard will -step with his inside foot toward the center. He will put his head -in front of the center’s leg, with his neck firm against it. The<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_138"></a>[138]</span> -guard must keep his outside leg stationary as the tackle will put -his head and neck firmly against the guard’s leg. The end will -use the same technique putting his neck against the tackle’s -outside leg. We are trying to build a solid wall so the opposition -cannot penetrate it and get to our kicker. We are trying to force -the opponents to rush from the outside, rather than permitting -them to rush inside.</p> - -<p><i>Up-Backs</i>—The up-backs line up about a yard deep and a -yard inside our offensive ends. They are in a position where -they can reach out and touch the tail of our end on their respective -sides. The up-back’s assignment is to keep his inside foot -in place and force the rushers to go wide. He cannot move his -inside foot, and he must not be knocked down. On a field goal -attempt he has wide responsibility to his side of the field. He -will leave as soon as he hears the thud of the ball.</p> - -<p><i>Holder</i>—The holder lines up about six yards and one foot -deep and his responsibility is to place the ball on the tee in a -good position, permitting our kicker to get his foot into the ball.</p> - -<p><a href="#figure097">Figure 97</a> illustrates our place kicking formation. The whole -operation for the extra point or field goal attempt should take -only one and three-tenths seconds. If it takes longer than this, -it is likely the kick will be blocked.</p> - -<p>We have our extra point and field goal kickers out 20 minutes -early every day practicing their specialties. We have a set -of goal posts approximately one-half as wide as the regulation -width that our kickers practice kicking through.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure097" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure097.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 97</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_139"></a>[139]</span></p> - -<h3>DEFENDING AGAINST A FIELD GOAL ATTEMPT</h3> - -<p>When we are trying to rush a field goal attempt, we never -rush from both sides at the same time, and we always play our -3-deep pass coverage. The only exception is that our safety will -line up a little deeper so he can handle the ball if the situation -warrants it. We are always as conscious of the fake field goal -attempt and pass as we are of the actual place kick.</p> - -<p>We only rush from one side at a time, and it will probably -be our right side if the kicker is right-footed. We overload to -that side, as illustrated in <a href="#figure098">Figure 98</a>, trying to get one of our -fastest ends in there to block the attempted place kick.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure098" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure098.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 98</span></p> -</div> - -<h3>CONCLUSION</h3> - -<p>I think the kicking game is very important as it is tied in -closely with our defensive football. You must be sound in all -phases of the kicking game, as neglecting any one phase can -cost you a football game. In order to have a winner, our kicking -game must be sound.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_140"></a>[140]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_7">CHAPTER 7<br /> -<span class="smaller">Our Offensive Running Game</span></h2> - -</div> - -<p>The number one objective of offensive football is to score. If -we cannot score, then the only alternative is to kick. We never -want to surrender the ball to our opposition outside of the -4-down zone other than by kicking it to them. We cannot possibly -win the tough football games if we lose the football by -fumbles, interceptions, blocked kicks, or anything else other -than by kicking the ball to our opponents.</p> - -<h3>BASIC PRINCIPLES AND REQUIREMENTS OF OFFENSIVE FOOTBALL</h3> - -<p>Offense is based on two primary principles, running with -and/or passing the football. They go hand in hand and complement -each other in all respects. A team must pass sufficiently -in order to keep the opposition from putting all of its strength -on or relatively close to the line of scrimmage. A team also -must be able to advance the football with its ground game so -the opposition does not have to defend against only one phase -of the game, the passing attack.</p> - -<p>The main requirements for playing offensive football are: -(1) explosive speed, and (2) a real desire to carry out the -specific assignment, whether it be to block, run or fake. Offense -is a game of skill and perfection, and many hours must be spent -working on it.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_141"></a>[141]</span></p> - -<h4><i>A Sound Offense</i></h4> - -<p>A sound offense is one in which each play is designed to gain -ground, and if executed perfectly there is a good possibility for -a long gain and/or scoring a touchdown. If the offense is going -to operate at maximum efficiency, the bad play must be eliminated -completely. The <i>bad</i> play is one that does not gain yardage. -If the offense is based on the 4-yard per play or short thrust -offense, such as Oklahoma has used so successfully in the past -under Bud Wilkinson, it is clear to see how a bad play can -stymie the offensive attack.</p> - -<p>The sound attack also utilizes the best personnel available, -such as the best ball carriers carrying the ball, the best blockers -for blocking, and so on. If you will analyze your offensive attack, -you are likely to learn this does not always occur. The -best blocker might be carrying the ball more often than your -best ball carrier, who in turn might not be a strong blocker.</p> - -<p>We had a fine team at Texas A & M in 1956, but when I look -back over the season I now realize I did not utilize my backs to -maximum efficiency. Our quarterback, Roddie Osborne, was a -very fine football player, and like the great ones he enjoyed -running with the football. Roddie did a terrific job of running -with the ball, but we had other outstanding backs, such as All-American -John Crow, All-American Jack Pardee, and Lloyd -Taylor, a great competitor. When the season was over and we -tabulated our final statistics, we found Roddie had carried the -ball nearly as many times as the combined carries of Crow, -Pardee, and Taylor.</p> - -<p>In order to maintain maximum results with the offense, it -must be presented to the squad so they all have a complete -understanding of what you are trying to accomplish and how -it is going to be done. Unless the players have a thorough picture -and understand the reasoning behind your offensive attack, -maximum efficiency is impossible.</p> - -<p>I firmly believe that the simpler the offense, the better. The -fewer things a boy has to do and remember, the better he will -execute the fundamentals you have taught him. If executed well, -the player will have more confidence in what he is doing and his<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_142"></a>[142]</span> -own ability. Consequently the greater the chance the offensive -attack has of being successful.</p> - -<h3>OUR OFFENSIVE TERMINOLOGY</h3> - -<p>To be sure that we are all talking the same “language” and -can understand each other readily, we have adopted the following -offensive terminology:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p><i>Flow</i>—Direction in which most of the backs start.</p> - -<p><i>On-Side</i>—Lineman on side of point of attack.</p> - -<p><i>Off-Side</i>—Lineman on side away from point of attack.</p> - -<p><i>Near Back</i>—Halfback on side of flow.</p> - -<p><i>Far Back</i>—Halfback away from side of flow.</p> - -<p><i>On-Back</i>—Of the two remaining backs in the backfield, the -back toward call.</p> - -<p><i>Off-Back</i>—Of the two remaining backs in the backfield, the -back away from call.</p> - -<p><i>Point of Attack</i>—Spot where ball crosses the line of scrimmage.</p> - -<p><i>Over</i>—Defensive man over any part of the offensive man.</p> - -<p><i>Cut Off</i>—Shoot the head and shoulder past the defensive -man, destroying his correct pursuit angle to the football.</p> - -<p><i>Set</i>—Fake pass protection block.</p> - -<p><i>Slam</i>—Entertain defensive man with shoulder and forearm.</p> - -<p><i>N/T</i>—No one there.</p> - -<p><i>Position Lateral</i>—Getting self in position to receive lateral -from the man with the football.</p> - -<p><i>Covered</i>—Designates offensive man with a defensive man -over him on L.O.S.</p> - -<p><i>L.B.</i>—Linebacker.</p> - -<p><i>M.L.B.</i>—Middle linebacker.</p> - -<p><i>L.O.S.</i>—Line of scrimmage.</p> - -<p><i>Man on L.O.S.</i>—Defensive man down in 3- or 4-point stance -on the line of scrimmage.</p> - -<p>“<i>6</i>”—Right end.</p> - -<p>“<i>7</i>”—Left end.</p> - -<p><i>Club</i>—A vicious running head and shoulder block attacking -the defensive man’s upper extremities from the blind side.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_143"></a>[143]</span> -This block is used in the area approaching the point of attack.</p> - -<p><i>Color</i>—First man approached with different color jersey.</p> - -<p><i>Motion</i>—Back leaving before snap of the ball.</p> - -<p><i>Ice</i>—Receiver going to outside or inside and becoming a -possible receiver after making his block or when no one shows. -Yell “Ice” when open.</p> - -<p><i>Trail Junction Blocker</i>—Ball carrier straddling the outside -leg of junction blocker. Stay close to him.</p> - -<p><i>Pursuer</i>—Defensive man pursuing the ball carrier.</p> - -<p><i>Gap</i>—Space between two offensive men.</p> - -<p><i>Flare</i>—Call to tell a back to run a flare route.</p> - -<p><i>Drive Man</i>—Man who does the driving on a two-on-one -block.</p> - -<p><i>Post Man</i>—Man who stops the progress of the defensive man -on a two-on-one block.</p> - -<p><i>Odd Defense</i>—Offensive guards not covered.</p> - -<p><i>Even Defense</i>—Offensive guards are covered.</p> - -<p><i>Box Defense</i>—Only two deep men in the secondary.</p> - -<p><i>3-Deep Defense</i>—Three deep men in the defensive secondary.</p> - -<p><i>9-Man Front</i>—Box defense.</p> - -<p><i>8-Man Front</i>—Three deep defense.</p> - -<p><i>Position Ball</i>—Bring ball immediately into belly, elbows in, -ball in fingers.</p> - -<p><i>Drive Block</i>—A vicious head and shoulders block and turn -opponent.</p> - -<p><i>Climb Block</i>—A brutal drive block.</p> - -<p><i>Chop Block</i>—Open field block on men in the secondary by -throwing your body (extended) at his throat.</p> - -<p><i>Crack Back</i>—A vicious low reverse body block.</p> - -<p><i>Groin Block</i>—A low drive block with upward action aimed -at defensive man’s groin.</p> - -<p><i>Fill</i>—Protect the area to your inside.</p> - -<p><i>Shoot Out</i>—Springing from your original stance, hitting on -your hands and feet running (used to get downfield).</p> - -<p><i>Against the Grain</i>—Direction in the secondary opposite the -flow.</p> - -<p><i>On Linebacker</i>—Denotes (on-side L.B. N/T M.L.B.).</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_144"></a>[144]</span></p> - -<p><i>Position</i>—Getting to a spot between the man you are to -block and the ball carrier.</p> - -<p><i>Roll Back</i>—Position and block defensive man from blind side.</p> - -<p><i>Eagle</i>—Call to tackle and guard to switch assignments.</p> - -<p><i>Head On</i>—Man nose on nose.</p> -</div> - -<p>We want all of our players and coaches to understand and -use our offensive terminology. One or two words either explains -the descriptive action we want or identifies some segment of the -offense or the opposition’s defense. The terms are simple, meaningful -and descriptive.</p> - -<h3>OUR OFFENSIVE STANCE</h3> - -<p>The offensive stance is very important. It is difficult enough -trying to attain maximum results when they are lined up in their -proper stance, but it puts your players at a distinct disadvantage -and handicaps them greatly if you permit them to assume a -stance that is improper and incorrect. Therefore, we put first -things first, and try to coach our players always to take the -proper stance.</p> - -<h4><i>Offensive Stance for Linemen</i></h4> - -<p>The stance for the linemen, with the exception of the center, -is basically the same, with allowances being made for various -physical characteristics, which vary from individual to individual. -The inside foot is forward, the feet staggered in an arch to -toe relationship. The tackles and ends exaggerate the stagger -from heel to toe since they are further removed from the center -and quarterback.</p> - -<p>The feet should not be spread wider than the individual’s -shoulders, with the weight of the body concentrated on the balls -of the feet. The heels should be slightly in, with the cleats on -the heel of the forward foot almost touching the ground. The -ankles should be bent slightly. The knees should be bent slightly -more than 90 degrees, and turned slightly in. The tail is even -or a little higher than the shoulders, and splitting the forward -and rear heels. The back is straight, shoulders square, neck<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_145"></a>[145]</span> -relaxed, and eyes open keeping the defensive linebacker in line -of sight. The hands are placed down slightly outside of the feet, -elbows relaxed, and thumbs in and slightly forward of the -shoulders.</p> - -<h4><i>Offensive Stance for Center</i></h4> - -<p>The center lines up in a left-handed stance with the feet even -and slightly wider than the shoulders. The weight is on the balls -of the feet, heels turned slightly in, with the cleats on the heels -of the shoes almost touching the ground. The knees are slightly -in and bent a little more than 90 degrees. The tail is slightly -higher than the shoulders and about two inches in front of the -heels. The center places his left hand inside his legs down from -between his eye and ear almost directly under the forehead, with -the fingers spread and the thumb turned slightly in. The shoulders -are square, the back is straight, the neck is relaxed, and the eyes -looking upward. His right hand grasps the football like a passer. -He should reach out as far as possible without changing his -stance. The center is coached to place the ball on his tail as -quickly as possible with a natural turn of the arm. He should -drive out over the ball with his head coming up and tail down, -keeping his shoulders square as he makes his hand-back to the -quarterback.</p> - -<h4><i>Quarterback’s Stance</i></h4> - -<p>The quarterback is coached to get into a football position -with the feet slightly wider than the shoulders, weight on the -balls of the feet, heels and knees turned slightly in, knees bent -slightly, and a natural bend at the waist in order to be in a good -position to receive the ball from the center as he snaps the ball -on the hand-back. The elbows must be bent and in close to the -body.</p> - -<p>The quarterback’s right hand goes up in the center’s crotch. -He turns it slightly to the right. At this spot he applies pressure -with the hand to his center’s tail. The left hand must be in a -comfortable position, making slight contact with the right hand,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_146"></a>[146]</span> -and it is used to trap the ball and to assist the right hand in taking -the football from the center.</p> - -<h4><i>Halfback’s Stance</i></h4> - -<p>The feet of the halfback should not be wider than the shoulders, -and staggered in a heel to toe relationship with each other. -The weight should be on the balls of the feet, but will vary -slightly depending upon the direction the halfback must move -in carrying out his particular assignment. With the snap of the -ball he should throw himself in the direction he is going, and -he should not use a cross-over step.</p> - -<p>His knees should be bent a little beyond 90 degrees, with the -knees and heels turned slightly in, and the tail a little higher -than the shoulders. The halfback’s shoulders should be square, -with his head and eyes in a position to see the defensive linebacker -on the opposite side from him. The inside hand should -be down, slightly forward and inside of the knee with the -thumb turned a little to the inside. The body weight should be -forward slightly.</p> - -<h4><i>Fullback’s Stance</i></h4> - -<p>The fullback lines up with the feet even and a little wider -than his shoulders. The cleats on the heels of his shoes should -touch the ground. The heels and knees are turned slightly in -with the weight on the balls of the feet. The head and eyes are -in a relaxed position, but where they can see the second man -standing outside of the offensive end. The hands are directly in -front of each foot with the thumbs turned in. The shoulders are -square, the back is straight, the tail is directly above the heels, -with the weight slightly forward, but not to such an extent he -cannot start quickly in a lateral direction to either side.</p> - -<h3>OFFENSIVE LINE SPLITS</h3> - -<p>The use of intelligent line splits by the offensive guards, -tackles and ends must be mastered in order to realize the full -potential of our basic offensive attack. Without proper line splits, -it is impossible for the offense to function at 100% efficiency.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_147"></a>[147]</span> -Therefore, we must present line split theory and coach our linemen -in such a way they will have a clear understanding of why -and when we want to move in, out or remain stationary. Mastering -the intelligent use of line splits is one of the most important -single duties of the offensive linemen. (The other is a quick -offensive charge together on the starting count.)</p> - -<h4><i>The Pre-Shift Position</i></h4> - -<p>When the linemen leave the huddle and come up to the line -of scrimmage in a pre-shift position (hands on knees in a semi-upright -stance), the basic split rule for the guards is to split -one full man. The tackles and ends will split slightly more than -one full man. As the linemen go down into their offensive -stance, each man (except the center) will move in, out or -remain stationary, depending upon the particular defensive -alignment and the individual’s split rules.</p> - -<h4><i>Our Basic Split Rules</i></h4> - -<p>Our offensive basic split rules are as follows:</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Even Defense</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Guards—full man; don’t move.</p> - -<p>2. Tackles—man over you, split one-half man. If no one is -there, use a common sense split which would be to cut the -split down on a wide play and take a maximum split on an -inside play.</p> - -<p>3. Ends—Line up a little over a full man split, and use the -common sense split rule which would depend upon the play. -Never move more than one-half man either way.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Odd Defense</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Guards—Take a full man split, but never so wide that if -a man should jump into the gap between the guard and center, -you could not cut him off. After taking the proper split, then -apply the common sense split rule.</p> - -<p>2. Tackles—If there is no inside linebacker:</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_148"></a>[148]</span></p><div class="blockquote"> - -<p>(a) Wide play called—split in one-half man.</p> - -<p>(b) Inside play called—fake split and don’t move. -Inside linebacker: Split out one-half man.</p> -</div> - -<p>3. Ends—Take good wide splits and apply common sense -rule, never split more than one-half man either way.</p> - -<p>In order to split intelligently it is important to determine first -of all if the defensive man will move with you when you move -(<a href="#figure099a">Figure 99a</a>), or whether he is keeping his spacing on his -own defensive man (<a href="#figure099b">Figure 99b</a>). You are attempting to determine -as quickly as possible if your defensive man is taking -a variable or a static position. <a href="#figure099a">Figures 99a-b</a> illustrate variable -and static spacing, respectively, by the defensive linemen.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure099a" style="max-width: 18.75em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure099a.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 99</span>a</p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure099b" style="max-width: 18.75em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure099b.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 99</span>b</p> -</div> - -<p>Do not ever emphasize that you are splitting to get good -blocking angles, but you split in order to isolate a defender. If -the defender splits when the offensive man splits, you can isolate -him. If his split is static, a good blocking angle will be the result. -Your linemen should <i>never</i> split merely to get the angle, however. -It will also help the linemen if they have a clear picture -of where the ball crosses the line of scrimmage (the critical -point of attack), and from where the ball is being thrown on -a pass play. Then, too, there is no set rule that will cover all -defensive situations and the offensive men must be able to apply -the common sense split rule along with the basic split rule.</p> - -<p><a href="#figure100">Figure 100</a> illustrates the pre-shift position of the right side -of the offensive line and the application of the guard’s, tackle’s, -and end’s split rules. From the pre-shift stance and position, the -offensive men are allowed to split one-half man either way, according -to the defense. The inside always must be protected. A -defensive man must not be allowed to penetrate or shoot the -inside gap as he is likely to stop the offensive play for a loss.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_149"></a>[149]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure100" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure100.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 100</span></p> -</div> - -<p>If the defensive man will move with the offensive man, then -the offense should be able to isolate one man and the point of -attack should be directed toward him. <a href="#figure101a">Figures 101a-b</a> illustrate -the center’s man and the offensive right tackle’s man being isolated -respectively, and the critical point of attack being directed -at the isolated defenders.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure101a" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure101a.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 101</span>a</p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure101b" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure101b.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 101</span>b</p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_150"></a>[150]</span></p> - -<p>It is very important for the offensive lineman to know his -main objective in proper line splitting is either (1) to spread -the defense out, or (2) to isolate a man. The main objective is -<i>never</i> to split in order to get a good blocking angle. This latter -misconception can destroy any advantage we gain by splitting -the line.</p> - -<h3>OUR SNAP COUNT</h3> - -<p>In order for a team to operate at maximum efficiency offensively -all of the players must get off with the ball at the same -time. They must uncoil as a unit and strike the opposition as -quickly as possible. The only advantage the offense has over -the defense is the former knows where the play is going and -when the ball will be snapped. In order to maintain this advantage -the offense must strike quickly as a unit. Should the -defense penetrate the offense or the offense not get off on the -ball together, the offense loses its advantage over the defense.</p> - -<p>The offense’s advantage hinges on its ability to get off on the -ball together. Whether or not the offense can do this well will -depend upon their first initial movement, which in turn depends -upon the snap count.</p> - -<p>At one time or another I believe we have used just about -every imaginable snap count. We have found that our line gets -off better as a unit, without leaning, and hits quicker when we -employ a sound snap count. The quarterback can say what he -likes if we are going on the first sound. While in the huddle, -the quarterback will give the play and then cue the action with -the first sound, second sound or the third sound. We use the -same word for our sound snap count, but the emphasis is placed -on the first, second or third sound. For example, if the quarterback -calls, “24 on the second sound,” the team lines up in its -offensive position, and the quarterback says, “Go!” Since this -is the first sound, the ball is <i>not</i> centered. Then the quarterback -commands, “Go!” for the second sound, the ball is centered -and the team moves as a unit. The quarterback can wait between -his first and second commands since our snap count is -non-rhythmic. Such a measure not only keeps the defense off -guard, but it also keeps the offense constantly alert.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_151"></a>[151]</span></p> - -<h4><i>Automatics</i></h4> - -<p>It is not my purpose to discuss the automatic versus the non-automatic -systems of signal calling. In the former the quarterback -can use the automatic system or change the play at the -line of scrimmage. In the latter he runs the play that was called -in the huddle and does not change it at the line of scrimmage. -There are advantages and disadvantages to both systems. A -strong argument that is advanced for the non-automatic system -is that it gives the linemen time to analyze their block and mentally -pick out the person they are supposed to block as they approach -the line of scrimmage. The people who favor the non-automatic -system maintain they have fewer broken signals, and -fewer bad plays than the teams using the automatic play change.</p> - -<p>While I am not stressing the merits of one system over the -other, frankly, I would never send my players into a football -game without several plays which could be automaticked at the -line of scrimmage. It is just common sense to realize certain -plays are not good against certain defenses, and it is useless in -most instances to run a play directly toward the strength of a -defense when you need to gain yardage in order to sustain your -offensive drive. Therefore, we always have a trap play, an end -sweep, and a look pass as our automatics. Since they are few -in number, our automatics are easy to learn and they allow the -quarterback to change his play at the line of scrimmage if he -wishes to do so.</p> - -<p>Our automatic system is very simple, and there is very little -confusion when we change our plays. As an example, while we -are in the huddle, the quarterback will call play, “18,” and the -players will break from the huddle and go to the line of scrimmage. -After the quarterback gets the players down into their -offensive positions and he sees he wants to change the play -on automatic, he will repeat the original play, “18.” This will -alert the players, and they know the next number they hear will -be the new play that will be run instead of play 18. After the -quarterback has repeated the original play, and has called another -number, “24,” as an example, everyone on the offensive<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_152"></a>[152]</span> -team knows the new play will be 24, and the snap count always -remains the same.</p> - -<h4><i>Faking the Automatic</i></h4> - -<p>If the quarterback wishes to fake an automatic so the opponents -cannot catch on to what he is doing, this can be done -very simply. As an example, let’s say the quarterback called the -play, “30,” in the huddle. At the line of scrimmage he decided -to fake or dummy the automatic. At the line he will say any -number other than the one he called in the huddle. This notifies -the boys it is a fake automatic and they will not pay any attention -to the next number he calls as they are going to run -the play which the quarterback called originally in the huddle.</p> - -<p>By using this two number system we can always play the -automatic or fake it, and it is impossible for the opponents to -catch on because they do not know the play the quarterback -called in the huddle originally. It is impossible to use the -automatic if the quarterback has elected to run the play on the -<i>first</i> sound. The majority of the time when we are going on the -first sound we will be hitting fast and straight away, and an -automatic will not be necessary. If the quarterback thinks there -is any chance he might want to change the play for any particular -reason, he would <i>not</i> run the play on the first sound.</p> - -<h3>THE OFFENSIVE HUDDLE</h3> - -<p>The entire offensive operation starts with the huddle; therefore, -it is very important to insist that proper huddle techniques -are carried out properly. It is not too important the way the men -are spaced or lined up in forming the huddle, as long as everyone -can see, hear, and get to their proper offensive positions -with as little confusion as possible. It is a must, however, for the -quarterback to use the proper techniques in calling his plays and -in controlling the huddle.</p> - -<h4><i>The Quarterback Controls the Team</i></h4> - -<p>A quarterback should never allow any talking in the huddle, -unless he asks a question and wants specific information. Therefore,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_153"></a>[153]</span> -he should stand out of the huddle until it is completely -formed. This will give any player an opportunity to come and -give specific information to the quarterback without talking in -the huddle.</p> - -<p>The quarterback should not just call a signal, but on certain -occasions he should make a few extra comments while in the -huddle. He should be forceful, and above all he must be confident. -The team will run the play the way the quarterback calls -it. Occasionally he should single out the man called on to make -the key block and inform him the team is depending upon him. -After the quarterback has called the play, and someone wants -to check the signal, the quarterback should not merely repeat -the signal but the entire play over again.</p> - -<p>The quarterback must know the tactical situation at all times. -If a substitute comes into the game, the quarterback should always -ask if there are any instructions from the coach. The -quarterback must always be conscious of the 25 seconds between -plays, and he should use it to his advantage, whether to -speed up or slow down the game. Training the quarterback will -be discussed in greater detail in <a href="#CHAPTER_9">Chapter 9</a>.</p> - -<h3>THE QUARTERBACK’S TECHNIQUES</h3> - -<p>I spoke previously of the quarterback’s stance. It is very important -for him to take the same stance every time. The center -must know where to place the ball every time. Centers and -quarterbacks should work with each other frequently giving -them as much practice as possible. Each center or quarterback -has particular traits, and by the centers and quarterbacks working -with each other they get to know one another better, thus -eliminating bad exchanges between them.</p> - -<p>The quarterback should have his head up and always look -straight ahead, while observing the defense at all times. He -should be as comfortable and as relaxed as possible, and he -should never look down when receiving the ball from his center.</p> - -<h4><i>Taking the Snap-Back</i></h4> - -<p>On the snap of the ball, the quarterback should dip his hips -so his hands will follow the tail of the center as he charges.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_154"></a>[154]</span> -This technique will also help the quarterback push off. The -quarterback will take the ball with his right hand, using the left -as a trapper, as was explained previously. He should make certain -he has the ball, and he should not fight it, before withdrawing -his hands from the center’s crotch. As soon as the -quarterback has possession of the ball, he should bring it into -his “third hand,” his stomach. Such a procedure will help prevent -a fumble. He then wants to push off and execute his techniques -as quickly as possible.</p> - -<p>The quarterback must always be cognizant of the fact he -cannot score without the ball; consequently, he wants to make -certain he has possession of it before pulling out of there. If he -gets in a big hurry, he is likely to drop the ball to the ground. -I have seen this occur many times.</p> - -<h4><i>After Receiving the Snap</i></h4> - -<p>After receiving the snap, the quarterback will operate in one -direction or the other by using a pivot or a cross-over step. The -theory and techniques are basically the same.</p> - -<p>First, the quarterback must know the defensive alignment -as this will determine how far he should pivot, or if he needs -to take a position step. After he has recognized the defense and -he has taken the first short jab step or pivot step, he should -have the ball in close to his body until he is ready to hand-off.</p> - -<p>The head is the first part of the body around if using the -pivot step, and also the first to move in the direction the quarterback -is taking if the cross-over step is used. After the head is -pointed in the right direction, the steps can be adjusted to avoid -running into the ball carrier. The quarterback should not wave -his arms or his body up and down as he should maintain the -same level throughout the entire operation. The quarterback -should never flash (show) the football; he always operates under -control.</p> - -<h4><i>Making the Exchange</i></h4> - -<p>It is important for the quarterback to know each man with -whom he must make an exchange, including his speed, strong<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_155"></a>[155]</span> -and weak points. He should look at the target, the far hip, of -the man to whom he is going to hand the football, and he should -be very quick with the exchange. He should try to make the -hand-off with the same motion he would use if he were dealing -cards quickly.</p> - -<h4><i>Quarterback Faking</i></h4> - -<p>The faking of the quarterback is very important. He should -always remember to carry out his fakes realistically. Incidentally -we sometimes give the ball to the man who is supposed to be -doing the faking. We have found it helps our faking as the man -is not certain whether or not the quarterback is going to give the -ball to him.</p> - -<p>When attempting a fake, it is very important for the quarterback -to look at the man he is faking to, and not merely swing -his arms in a half-hearted fake. He should go through the same -motions he uses when he actually gives the ball to the faker. -His fakes must be realistic for the offense to be effective. The -quarterback should remember he never stops moving while on -offense, except when faking to set up a drop back pass.</p> - -<h3>BALL CARRYING TECHNIQUES</h3> - -<p>Every team wins or loses a great percentage of its games due -to the manner in which the backs and ends carry the football. -All players, not only the backs, should be drilled in the proper -mechanics and techniques of carrying a football properly as it -is possible on occasions an interior lineman will have an opportunity -to run with the ball.</p> - -<p>The outstanding characteristics or strength of each ball carrier -is likely to be different as one might possess outstanding speed, -another is a nifty, shifty runner, and the third is solid on his -feet, possesses power, and is capable of running over the opposition. -Every ball carrier must utilize his natural talents, and -should practice diligently to become as versatile as possible. Regardless -of the individual style of a runner, the most important -point is for him to hold on to the football and not fumble it.</p> - -<p>Good habits, careful handling, and the execution of proper<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_156"></a>[156]</span> -techniques will prevent fumbles on ball exchanges. When a player -has the ball in his possession and fumbles it, he has committed -the unpardonable sin in my estimation. The ball carrier should -remember to have one point of the football in the palm of his -hand with the fingers around the end of the ball, and gripping -it tightly. The other end should be in the crook of his arm, -which should force the football up close to his body.</p> - -<p>If the football is carried properly, and the ball carrier is determined -to hang on to it, the football should never be lost due -to a fumble. The ball is the most valuable object on the football -field. Consequently if the ball carrier fails to hang on to the -ball, he is letting down his entire team. Once a player has control -of the ball and fumbles it, this is no accident. It is either carelessness -or lack of courage. I can’t build a winner with this type -of player. In a close game a fumbled ball can be the deciding -factor in winning or losing.</p> - -<p>A ball carrier should remember his primary objective is to -gain ground; if possible, to score. Therefore, he should move -directly toward the opposition’s goal line as quickly as possible, -unless there is a definite reason for doing otherwise. There are -always exceptions to the rules, and a ball carrier may not be -running toward the opposition’s goal because he might be trying -to make better use of a blocker, dodge an opponent, get to the -opening, time the play properly, or he might have some other -valid reason. There will be times when top speed and the correct -direction will not be sufficient to get the job done.</p> - -<h4><i>Open Field Running Techniques</i></h4> - -<p>When a ball carrier is in the open field, he should always keep -the tackler guessing. He should not tip-off whether he is going -to try to outrun him, run through him, or dodge him, until he is -close enough to the tackler to give him the fake and then get -by him. The ball carrier should never concede he is down, and -he should always keep fighting to gain ground until the whistle -stops the play.</p> - -<p>The ball carrier should always realize and know exactly where -he is on the field, and just what he must do in order for the play<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_157"></a>[157]</span> -to be successful. In a majority of cases, a ball carrier should -be concerned only with running for a touchdown.</p> - -<h4><i>The Importance of Proper Mental Attitude</i></h4> - -<p>The basic difference between ordinary and great athletes is -mental attitude. As far as football players are concerned, the -ordinary ball carrier will try to make a touchdown, but he will -be satisfied with a five or six yard gain. The champion athlete, -the All-American back, is dissatisfied when he fails to score. -He is always going for the opposition’s goal line. The ball carrier -actually does not succeed in his objective unless he runs for a -touchdown on every play (except for occasional tactical situations), -and he should never be made to feel he has accomplished -his objective unless he scores.</p> - -<p>A ball carrier must be made to realize when he does a poor -job of carrying the ball, the effort of the other 10 men has been -wasted. The ball carrier must always be aware of the yardage -necessary for a first down and for a touchdown. When the ball -carrier has possession of the football, he must realize he has the -control of the game in his hands.</p> - -<h3>OUR BLOCKING TECHNIQUES</h3> - -<p>Blocking techniques are basically the same for all linemen. -The blocks the backs are called upon to execute are basically -the same, too. Therefore, we will not discuss the techniques of -each position, but merely discuss techniques and procedures as -a whole.</p> - -<h4><i>The Drive Block</i></h4> - -<p>The drive block or the one-on-one block was developed primarily -for a fast hitting attack, and is one that we use on many -occasions. All blocks consist of the following steps: (1) the approach, -(2) the contact, and (3) the follow through.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Approach</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Approach with short, controlled step. First step should be<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_158"></a>[158]</span> -with the outside foot, and it should not go beyond the forward -foot. The knees should be bent at this time.</p> - -<p>2. Split the opponent’s course with the first step, and aim the -nose guard at the middle of the opponent’s target.</p> - -<p>3. Keep the eyes on the target at all times.</p> - -<p>4. Uncoil off the forward foot. Do not duck the head during -the uncoil.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Contact</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Strike a jarring blow with the forehead.</p> - -<p>2. Bring the head up as contact is made. (The body will -follow the head; this will help arch the back.)</p> - -<p>3. The drive should be forward, then upward. The object is -to knock the opponent off-balance, thus depriving him of his -traction; this will make him easy to move out of the play.</p> - -<p>4. Bring the feet up fast with short, choppy, digging steps, -but still keeping the knees bent.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Follow Through</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Stay on feet with the knees still bent and keep driving.</p> - -<p>2. Keep the feet well spread and under the body.</p> - -<p>3. Charge through the opponent.</p> - -<p>4. Keep the body between the opponent and the path of the -ball carrier.</p> - -<p>The most important single step in the drive block is keeping -the feet driving the instant contact is made.</p> - -<h4><i>The Reverse Shoulder Block</i></h4> - -<p>This block is used primarily when the blocker already has -position on a hard charging lineman.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Approach</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Aim the far shoulder for the opponent’s far hip. This will -help allow for the opponent’s charge.</p> - -<p>2. Shoot the head and shoulders in front of the defensive man.</p> - -<p>3. This movement must be sharp and on a straight line.</p> - -<p>4. Take a short positive step with the inside foot.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_159"></a>[159]</span></p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Contact</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Uncoil off the near foot.</p> - -<p>2. Strike a good blow on the opponent’s hip, squeezing with -the neck and head in the stomach.</p> - -<p>3. Bring inside foot up to help cut off penetration.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Follow Through</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Bring the legs up fast and keep them driving.</p> - -<p>2. The charge of the defensive man will put the blocker in -a perfect blocking position.</p> - -<p>3. Keep the body weight into opponent.</p> - -<p>4. If and when the opponent attempts to spin out, go into a -crab position around the outside thigh to prevent pursuit.</p> - -<h4><i>Blocking Linebackers</i></h4> - -<p>The percentage of time the offense can block the linebackers -will determine to a great extent how successful the offense will -be. If the linebackers are blocked, the defense will usually break -down.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Approach</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Get off on snap of the ball.</p> - -<p>2. Whenever possible release to the inside to block an inside -linebacker; to the outside when blocking an outside linebacker.</p> - -<p>3. Stay low, don’t run in a circle, but take the shortest route -to the linebacker.</p> - -<p>4. Get to the point of attack in position to block before the -linebacker can get there to defend it.</p> - -<p>5. Keep your body between the linebacker and the ball -carrier.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Contact</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Split the linebacker right down the middle with initial -block.</p> - -<p>2. Thrust the body forward and upward, hit the linebacker -on the rise and elevate the shoulders on contact.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_160"></a>[160]</span></p> - -<p>3. Strike the blow with a low fundamental position, hit with -forehead and forearm.</p> - -<p>4. Make contact off top of the feet. Keep the feet underneath -the blocker, thus making it impossible for the blocker to follow-through -properly if he lunges or leaves his feet before or while -making contact.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Follow Through</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. As soon as contact is made with the linebacker, continue -the leg drive. The initial blow should knock him off balance -and the leg drive should keep him this way.</p> - -<p>2. Keep the weight into the linebacker.</p> - -<p>3. Gain position follow through. The blocker should continue -to strive for position to eliminate any possibility of the linebacker -being in on the tackle downfield.</p> - -<h4><i>Downfield Blocking</i></h4> - -<p>The approach of the downfield block will vary with the play -called and position of the defensive secondary men. The approach -we will discuss will be centered around attacking the -defensive halfback.</p> - -<p>The downfield block is a definite characteristic of all good -football teams, and it is virtually impossible to have many long -runs without good downfield blocking.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Approach</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Release rapidly on the line of scrimmage.</p> - -<p>2. Sprint shallowly just beyond the line of scrimmage.</p> - -<p>3. When approaching the designated person to block, aim -for a spot in front of his original position; this eliminates running -behind the halfback when he comes up to make the tackle.</p> - -<p>4. The blocker must have a clear concept of the point of -attack and the prescribed path of the ball carrier.</p> - -<p>5. The blocker should make the defensive man commit himself -before he starts to make contact.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Contact</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Once the defensive man has committed himself in a specific -direction, the blocker then starts his contact.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_161"></a>[161]</span></p> - -<p>2. The blocker will get as close as possible to the defensive -man (about two yards) and spring off his inside foot, thus swinging -his outside elbow and arm toward the head of the opponent. -This will cause a lifting motion and make it possible for the -blocker to extend the entire length of his body in a horizontal -position.</p> - -<p>3. The blocker must aim his body at the opponent’s throat, -trying to make contact with his hip.</p> - -<p>4. The defensive man will not allow him to hit him in the -throat, but by aiming there he may hit him around the knees.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Follow Through</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. The follow through will consist of keeping the body extended -as long as possible and jumping up and trying to make -another block.</p> - -<h4><i>The Post-Lead Block</i></h4> - -<p>The post-lead block, or two-on-one block, is used to insure -the blocking of the most dangerous defensive man, and at the -same time give the ball carrier the feeling of confidence that -he can concentrate his efforts on whipping the one defensive -man to the inside or outside of the man being double-teamed. -With this in mind, the blockers are more conscious of turning -the defensive man away from the play rather than drive him -straight down the field. By using this same method, it makes it -possible to cut off the pursuit.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Approach</span>:</h5> - -<h6>(Post Man)</h6> - -<p>1. Drive straight at the defensive man with a short controlled -step. First step is with the outside foot.</p> - -<p>2. Aim the nose guard at the middle of the target.</p> - -<p>3. Keep the eyes on the target at all times.</p> - -<p>4. Uncoil off the forward foot.</p> - -<h6>(Drive Man)</h6> - -<p>1. Take a position step with the inside foot and then a good -step with the outside foot to get squared away.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_162"></a>[162]</span></p> - -<p>2. From this new position aim the nose guard at the middle -of the opponent and use as an apex. From this position the -middle of the opponent would be below the armpit and just -above the waist.</p> - -<p>3. Keep eyes on target all the way.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Contact</span>:</h5> - -<h6>(Post Man)</h6> - -<p>1. Strike a good blow with the forehead.</p> - -<p>2. Drive straight through the opponent to stop his charge.</p> - -<p>3. Hit on the rise and keep the pressure applied, keeping the -knees bent at all times.</p> - -<h6>(Drive Man)</h6> - -<p>1. Strike a jarring blow with the forehead below the armpit -of the opponent.</p> - -<p>2. After good contact, slide head past body and continue -applied pressure with the inside shoulder.</p> - -<p>3. Keep the tail down, head up, and feet under the body.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Follow Through</span>:</h5> - -<h6>(Post Man)</h6> - -<p>1. After good contact and feet are well up under the body, -turn the tail toward the drive man.</p> - -<p>2. Keep pressure applied, feet moving in short, choppy steps, -and drive man down the line.</p> - -<h6>(Drive Man)</h6> - -<p>1. Keep pressure with shoulder and neck, and do not let man -spin out to outside.</p> - -<p>2. Keep the tail to inside and do not allow defensive man -to split.</p> - -<p>3. Keep feet moving in short, choppy steps and move man -down the line.</p> - -<p>4. Force defensive man into pursuit to help eliminate it.</p> - -<h4><i>The Trap Block</i></h4> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Approach</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. It is important to take the same stance as if going straight<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_163"></a>[163]</span> -ahead, but just before the ball is snapped, the weight is shifted -to the outside foot.</p> - -<p>2. Take a quick, short, 6-inch step with inside foot and -point toe directly toward spot to be trapped.</p> - -<p>3. Never raise the body up. Stay down and in a semicoiled -position.</p> - -<p>4. Drive off the forward foot, still taking short steps.</p> - -<p>5. Anticipate the person to be trapped, to be filling the inside -or floating in the hole.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Contact</span>: (see below)</h5> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Follow Through</span>:</h5> - -<p>The contact and follow through are exactly the same as on -our drive block, which I explained previously.</p> - -<h4><i>The Pass Protection</i> (<i>Drop back pass</i>)</h4> - -<p>This technique is used by the guards and tackles when protecting -the passer on a straight dropback pass. It is good to go -from a pre-shift position when using this type of block.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Approach</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Take a short step backwards with the inside foot, then a -longer step backwards with the other foot.</p> - -<p>2. While doing this, turn the tail slightly to the inside and -remember the inside gap must be protected.</p> - -<p>3. After the second step backwards, the blocker should be -in a good football position (tail down, head up, knees bent, back -straight, and the body in a cocked position ready to strike a -blow).</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Contact</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Look at the man to be blocked, make him come to the -blocker. When close enough, spring and butt him with the forehead, -trying to make contact with him at the numbers.</p> - -<p>2. After contact is made and the charge of the offensive man -has been stopped, the blocker will take a step back, regain his -football position and make contact again.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_164"></a>[164]</span></p> - -<p>3. At all times the blocker will be forcing the defensive man -to the outside.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Follow Through</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. When the blocker sees that he can no longer strike a blow -with his head, due to the position of the defensive man, he will -fake a blow with his head, then slide it and his body in front -of the defensive man.</p> - -<p>2. He will lock him with his leg and at the same time apply -pressure with his body.</p> - -<p>3. At all times the blocker will be in a crab position and -working his feet around to force the defensive man to the outside, -thus keeping him away from the passer.</p> - -<h4><i>The Crack Back Block</i></h4> - -<p>This block is used primarily by the ends when they are blocking -an inside linebacker. It can also be used by anyone who -might be blocking directly in front of the ball carrier.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Approach</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Release from line of scrimmage as quickly as possible and -run straight at linebacker.</p> - -<p>2. Aim slightly above the knees of the linebacker.</p> - -<p>3. Get within a yard and a half before going into block.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Contact</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Throw outside arm with a quick, jerky motion in front -of linebacker. This quick motion will cause the head and shoulder -to get in front of defensive man.</p> - -<p>2. Release off of inside foot to start block.</p> - -<p>3. Make good solid contact with the outside hip just above -the defensive man’s knees.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Follow Through</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. After contact is made, go into a four-point position with -the arms extended, and tail high into the air.</p> - -<p>2. Work the feet around and force the defensive man to go -in front of blocker’s head.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_165"></a>[165]</span></p> - -<p>3. Do not let defensive man get out behind the blocker’s feet -because this will allow him to pursue the ball from a proper -angle.</p> - -<p>4. Keep tail up and feet working.</p> - -<h4><i>The Junction Block</i></h4> - -<p>This block is used primarily by the fullback when he is blocking -a true end or a corner man on a wide play.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Approach</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Aim for a spot about a yard in front and outside of man -to be blocked.</p> - -<p>2. Run low and hard at spot.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Contact</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Extend the head and shoulders in front of and past the -defensive man. (The blocker’s head is pointing downfield.)</p> - -<p>2. The blocker will use his inside leg and hip to catch the -outside leg and hip of the defensive man.</p> - -<p>3. The blocker will then have his head and shoulders past -the defensive man and his inside leg firmly against the outside -leg of the defensive man, with his hands down and his tail up.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Follow Through</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Force defensive man to go inside by keeping feet moving -and driving downfield.</p> - -<p>2. Do not extend body and fall flat on the ground.</p> - -<p>3. Do not let man spin to blocker’s outside.</p> - -<p>4. Keep pressure on defensive man as long as possible.</p> - -<h4><i>The Roll Block</i></h4> - -<p>This block is used when a small back, in particular, is trying -to block a true end or corner man on the ground.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Approach</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. Aim for a spot about a yard in front and outside of the -man to be blocked.</p> - -<p>2. Run low and hard at spot.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_166"></a>[166]</span></p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Contact</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. With the head pointed at the outside hip of the defensive -man, the blocker will get about a yard and a half from him. As -the blocker springs, he will drop his inside shoulder and turn -his head down and to the outside.</p> - -<p>2. The blocker will hit the outside leg of the defensive man -with the part of his shoulder pad that covers the scapula of his -inside shoulder.</p> - -<h5><span class="smcap">Follow Through</span>:</h5> - -<p>1. After contact has been made with the back of shoulder, -the blocker will roll to his inside and give a corkscrew effect.</p> - -<p>2. Stay as high as possible (around the knees) and make -two or three complete rolls in the corkscrew fashion, trying to -knock the legs out from under the defensive man.</p> - -<p>3. At all times the blocker must keep his head pointing -downfield or no less than a 60 degree angle.</p> - -<h3>NUMBERING THE DEFENSIVE ALIGNMENTS</h3> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure102a" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure102a.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 102</span>a</p> -</div> - -<p>In making our blocking rules or assignments for all of the -players versus all different defensive alignments, there are several -factors to take into consideration. The rules must be simple, -and secondly, they must be brief. We have used several different -kinds of rules, such as, “Inside gap, over, linebacker,” and -others. This was a good method, but it amounted to quite a bit -of memory work for the players because the majority of the -blocks were all different and the players were required to learn -a number of different sequences. Trying to adhere to the theory, -“the simpler, the better,” we started numbering the defensive -men as illustrated in <a href="#figure102a">Figure 102a</a> versus the 5-4 defensive alignment;<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_167"></a>[167]</span> -<a href="#figure102b">102b</a> versus the wide tackle 6; <a href="#figure102c">102c</a> versus the gap 8 -defense; and <a href="#figure102d">Figure 102d</a> versus the Eagle defense.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure102b" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure102b.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 102</span>b</p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure102c" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure102c.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 102</span>c</p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure102d" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure102d.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 102</span>d</p> -</div> - -<p>We start counting with the man over the center and number -him zero, and from there go both left and right numbering every -man within two yards of the line of scrimmage, as illustrated in -<a href="#figure102a">Figures 102a-b-c-d</a>. We also number the men in the secondary. -We do this by merely continuing with our numbering beyond -the end lineman in the direction the ball is going to go, as -illustrated in <a href="#figure103a">Figure 103a</a> versus the Oklahoma 5-4 defense, -and <a href="#figure103b">Figure 103b</a> versus the wide tackle 6-2 defensive alignment.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_168"></a>[168]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure103a" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure103a.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 103</span>a</p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure103b" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure103b.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 103</span>b</p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Application of Our Blocking Rules</i></h4> - -<p>By numbering the defensive men it is simple when making -out the blocking rules to assign each man a number, and the -offensive man merely learns which numbered man he will block. -There will be certain plays in which a particular position must -have one or two options. As an example, a rule might read, -“#3 unless outside, then, #2.”</p> - -<p>The following are examples of blocking rules by numbers:</p> - -<h5><i>Regular Block</i>—straight ahead</h5> - -<table> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-E</td> - <td>#3</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-T</td> - <td>#2</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr"><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_169"></a>[169]</span>On-G</td> - <td>#1</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">C</td> - <td>#0, off-side</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-G</td> - <td>#1</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-T</td> - <td>#5</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-E</td> - <td>#6</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h5><i>Trap Block</i>—</h5> - -<table> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-E</td> - <td>#3</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-T</td> - <td>L.B.</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-G</td> - <td>Slam man #1 or #2, N/T #0</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">C</td> - <td>Off-side</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-G</td> - <td>Trap</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-T</td> - <td>1st outside guard</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-E</td> - <td>#6</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h5><i>Counter Block</i>—</h5> - -<table> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-E</td> - <td>#6</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-T</td> - <td>#2</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-G</td> - <td>#1</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">C</td> - <td>#1, N/T #0, N/T off-side</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-G</td> - <td>#1</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-T</td> - <td>#2</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-E</td> - <td>#3</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<p>By using this particular method it is also very easy to incorporate -the backs into the blocking scheme. When using the -back to the side the ball is going, in order to have a backfield -man block a particular defensive player, we merely add two -zeroes to the number which has been assigned to the defender, -and the back gets this man. As an illustration, if we want our -halfback to block the #3 defensive man, the halfback’s block is -300; and the #4 man, the block would be called 400. Several -complete illustrations would be as follows:</p> - -<h5><i>300 Block</i>—</h5> - -<table> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-E</td> - <td>#6</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-T</td> - <td>#5<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_170"></a>[170]</span></td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-G</td> - <td>#1</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">C</td> - <td>#0, N/T off-side</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-G</td> - <td>#1</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-T</td> - <td>#2</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-E</td> - <td>slam #3, then #5</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">H.B.</td> - <td>#3</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h5><i>400 Block</i>—</h5> - -<table> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-E</td> - <td>#6</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-T</td> - <td>#5</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-G</td> - <td>#1</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">C</td> - <td>#0, N/T off-side</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-G</td> - <td>#1</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-T</td> - <td>#2</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-E</td> - <td>#3</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">H.B.</td> - <td>#4</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h5><i>Under Block</i>—</h5> - -<table> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-E</td> - <td>#6</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-T</td> - <td>#5</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-G</td> - <td>#1</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">C</td> - <td>#0, N/T off-side</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-G</td> - <td>#1</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-T</td> - <td>#2</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-E</td> - <td>#3</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">H.B.</td> - <td>#4</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<h5><i>Over Block</i>—</h5> - -<table> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-E</td> - <td>#6</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-T</td> - <td>#5</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">Off-G</td> - <td>#1</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">C</td> - <td>#0, N/T off-side</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-G</td> - <td>1st man on line of scrimmage</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-T</td> - <td>2nd man on line of scrimmage</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">On-E</td> - <td>3rd man on line of scrimmage</td> - </tr> - <tr> - <td class="tdr">H.B.</td> - <td>1st inside linebacker</td> - </tr> -</table> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_171"></a>[171]</span></p> - -<h3>ATTACKING THE DEFENSIVE ALIGNMENT</h3> - -<p>Probably like many other football teams, we have too much -offense. However, in order to do an intelligent job of planning -our attack versus the numerous defensive alignments, one must -have sufficient offense since not all plays are good against all -defenses.</p> - -<p>Regardless of one’s offense, the first approach is to establish -a good sound middle attack that is based on the trap, fullback -hand-off, and a pass off of the same action. Unless a team can -force the defense to respect the inside power and force the -defensive linebackers and guards to stay “at home,” it is almost -an impossibility to perfect the outside attack. After we establish -the inside attack, then we want to run far enough inside the -defensive end to cut down his quick containment. The next step -then is to perfect the wide attack and the corner passes, in order -to have a well-rounded offense. Bootleg passes, reverses, and an -occasional trick play are also needed in order to keep the defense -“honest,” and to make the above-mentioned plays more effective.</p> - -<h3>GOING WIDE</h3> - -<p>It is an offensive <i>must</i> for a team to be able to go wide and -to get the long gainer. Occasionally all of us get a good gainer -from the inside attack, but most long gainers are from passes or -some form of wide attack.</p> - -<p>Previously we operated on the assumption if we could gain -four yards on each play we would score with a sustained drive. -Statistics will prove a team will generally stop itself by some -error, or the defense will stop the offense, before the attack -can make four consecutive first downs or gain 50 yards, a -majority of the time. Consequently a team must perfect its wide -game.</p> - -<p>There are several ways of going wide, but regardless of the -manner attempted, the defensive end or corner man must be -eliminated either by blocking him, optioning him, or throwing -the football over his area.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_172"></a>[172]</span></p> - -<h4><i>The Run-Pass Option</i></h4> - -<p>When trying to get wide against a corner man, the run or -pass option is one of the best methods to employ. <a href="#figure104">Figure 104</a> -illustrates the on-guard blocking #1, on-tackle #2, and the -fullback blocking the #3 man. The near halfback and the on-end -will run their pass routes. The #4 man is not blocked, and -the passer is going to option from him. As soon as the passer -has possession of the ball, he watches the #4 man. If he comes -up to tackle the passer, the latter throws to the open receiver. -If the #4 man drops back to play pass defense, the passer is -instructed to turn upfield and run with the football. If our passer -feels he can gain at least four yards on the play, we want him -to run with it most of the time. The play is much better against -a team that uses a 9-man front than against an 8-man front -alignment.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure104" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure104.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 104</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>The Quarterback Option</i></h4> - -<p>There are several kinds of option plays, but the one designed -to get wide is the two-way option, in which the quarterback -either keeps or pitches to the far halfback, depending upon the -reaction of the defensive man from whom he is optioning.</p> - -<p>The blocking rules on the quarterback option play are very -simple, as illustrated in <a href="#figure105">Figure 105</a>. The offensive guard and<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_173"></a>[173]</span> -tackle to the on-side block their numbers, respectively. The on-end -will block to his inside, N/T (No One There) halfback, and -the fullback will block the #4 man with a junction block. The -quarterback must watch his man all the time in order for the -play to turn the corner successfully. He <i>must</i> option the #3 -man and <i>not</i> permit the latter to option the quarterback.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure105" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure105.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 105</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>The Three-Way Option</i></h4> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure106" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure106.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 106</span></p> -</div> - -<p>The other option play, illustrated in <a href="#figure106">Figure 106</a>, is the three-way -option with the quarterback playing the #4 defender. This -option is in the same series with the outside belly play. The -quarterback has the option of (1) giving the ball to the fullback,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_174"></a>[174]</span> -who will hit off-tackle, (2) keeping the ball himself, after faking -the fullback off-tackle, or (3) faking the off-tackle play and -optioning off of the #4 man by pitching back to the far back -running wide, after the defender plays the quarterback. The -on-guard blocks #1, on-tackle #2, on-end #5. The fullback -is responsible for making #3 tackle him, and the quarterback -must watch #4 man.</p> - -<h4><i>Changing Offensive Blocking Assignments at the Line</i></h4> - -<p>Since there are numerous defensive alignments and we cannot -always anticipate where our opponents will line up, and due -to the inherent limitations of the number rule blocking system, -we use a <i>change-off</i> for our blockers. As an example, <a href="#figure107">Figure -107</a> illustrates a defensive alignment where the offensive tackle -could not block his man (#2) on a play going wide. Therefore, -the offensive tackle merely calls, “Tiger,” or any other code -name, and this alerts the end that he and the tackle are exchanging -blocking assignments (<a href="#figure107">Figure 107</a>).</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure107" style="max-width: 15.625em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure107.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 107</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp93" id="figure108" style="max-width: 15.625em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure108.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 108</span></p> -</div> - -<p><a href="#figure108">Figure 108</a> illustrates an exchange of blocking assignments -between the tackle and guard, as the code, “Eagle,” has been -called by the tackle. Ordinarily the guard’s block is #1 and the -tackle’s block is #2, but as <a href="#figure108">Figure 108</a> illustrates, it would be -difficult for the guard to sustain his block on a play going wide. -Therefore, “Eagle,” or any other appropriate code word, changes -the blocking assignments between the guard and tackle. On -certain occasions the center and guard can exchange assignments, -too, by using a code call.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_175"></a>[175]</span></p> - -<h3>CONCLUSION</h3> - -<p>My objective has been to present each phase of our offensive -running game, which can be utilized against the various defensive -alignments. Our offensive passing game will be discussed -in <a href="#CHAPTER_8">Chapter 8</a>. My philosophy is to keep the offense simple, be -sound in our coaching, and never settle for anything less than -perfection in its execution!</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_176"></a>[176]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_8">CHAPTER 8<br /> -<span class="smaller">Our Offensive Passing Game Techniques</span></h2> - -</div> - -<p>The passing game is one of the two main weapons of offensive -football. In order for your passing game to be successful, you -must sell this phase of football to your players, and then have -good protection, good receivers, and a good passer. These essentials -of a good passing game go hand-in-hand, and no combination -of any two is any value without the third.</p> - -<h3>THE PASSER</h3> - -<p>It is beyond the wildest expectation of any optimist to hope -for a good passing game without a good passer. Therefore, select -an individual who has the natural ability to throw. There are -certain things one can and cannot teach a passer.</p> - -<p>It was my good fortune to have Vito “Babe” Parilli at Kentucky, -one of the finest natural passers in modern-day football. -Since his motion was natural, we coached him very little, other -than on the basic mechanics of grip, holding the ball, etc. I feel -it is possible to over-coach the passers, just like the kickers.</p> - -<h4><i>The Grip</i></h4> - -<p>Assuming a boy has natural throwing ability, the first coaching -point to teach is the grip. It is generally preferred for the -passer to grip the ball with the point of his little finger touching -almost in the center of the lace. We feel if the points of any -of his other fingers touch the lace, he will be gripping the ball<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_177"></a>[177]</span> -in the center (the roundest part of the football), consequently -limiting his ability to get a good grip of it. A passer definitely -cannot throw the ball properly if he grips it with the point of the -forefinger, middle or third finger touching the lace. The grip is -very important. The passer should not grip the ball as tightly -in inclement weather as he ordinarily does under more ideal -playing conditions.</p> - -<p>When employing the T formation, the quarterback is required -to fake with the football, and then set up to pass. Therefore, he -must always bring the football back into his stomach after every -fake. When the quarterback’s forearms are touching his hips -in a relaxed position, he is able to keep the football closer to -his body and it is easier to hide. During the faking of the ball, -the quarterback should shift his entire weight toward the back, -rather than toward the extension of the arms and the extended -football. This, too, is very helpful to aid in hiding the football -after the faking is completed.</p> - -<p>The quarterback should be ready to throw the football the -instant he gets back and sets up. The ball should be held with -both hands until the passer is ready to release it or fake a release. -This procedure will insure the passer of being in a relaxed -position, which is vitally important. After the passer has set up -to throw the ball, it should be in a cocked position by the passer’s -ear. This position enables the passer to save time as he prepares -to release the football.</p> - -<h4><i>The Release and Delivery</i></h4> - -<p>Releasing and delivering the football are next. If the passer -has learned the grip and how to hold the football as explained -elsewhere, then the release and delivery will come more easily. -The passer must release the ball with a snap of the wrist. Very -few passers have a good, natural wrist snap. Consequently there -are few good natural passers. The wrist snap can be developed -by drills, and we use several different types.</p> - -<p>In delivering the football, which is actually part of the release, -the passer, except in rare instances, should step <i>toward</i> the intended -receiver as he throws the football. Not only will the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_178"></a>[178]</span> -passer be more accurate, but he will be going in the correct -direction to cover his pass in case of an interception, when he -steps and throws in the same direction. If he steps in one direction -and attempts to throw in another or attempts to throw across his -body, the passer is throwing from an awkward position and -throwing against his own weight.</p> - -<h4><i>The Footwork</i></h4> - -<p>Perfecting the passer’s footwork is very important. He must -know the spot from which he is going to throw the ball prior -to his actual passing. It is especially important for the protecting -line and backs to know the spot from which the passer is going -to throw. They cannot do an intelligent job of protecting him -unless they know and unless he makes certain he actually throws -from that spot. When throwing from the pocket, the passer must -retreat straight back, set up as quickly as possible, and stay -inside the pocket formed by his linemen and remaining backs.</p> - -<p>The running or optional pass is one of the best passes in -modern-day football. It should be perfected by those teams who -base their attack partially on wide plays. There are no definite -rules or steps for the passer on the running pass, because all -athletes are a little different. What might be right and proper for -one passer on his fifth and sixth steps would be wrong and -improper for another passer due to individual differences. Nevertheless, -the passer should have the ball up and in a position -ready to throw it by the time he reaches a spot directly behind -the area where his offensive end lined up originally. He should -start upfield as quickly as possible. This not only makes the -play more effective, but it also puts him in a position to run -if the defensive man drops back to cover the pass (see <a href="#figure104">Figure -104</a>).</p> - -<h4><i>Individual Passing Principles and Techniques</i></h4> - -<p>Passing is one phase of football in particular that needs constant -practice and close attention. It is also one phase which -is overlooked and underworked by teams that do not have natural -passers. The following individual principles and coaching points<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_179"></a>[179]</span> -should prove helpful in teaching a boy with natural throwing -ability how to be a better passer:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>1. Push off with the left foot (right-handed passer).</p> - -<p>2. Hide the ball on the way back to set up.</p> - -<p>3. Set up quickly.</p> - -<p>4. Get at least seven yards deep on most drop back passes.</p> - -<p>5. Be under control when you set up, and be sure to be in a -good position to throw the football.</p> - -<p>6. Look straight downfield.</p> - -<p>7. Stay in your pocket while throwing.</p> - -<p>8. Keep the arm cocked, and the ball high at all times.</p> - -<p>9. Step in the direction of your pass.</p> - -<p>10. Throw the ball out-of-bounds or hold it if no receiver -is open.</p> - -<p>11. Know the pass routes.</p> - -<p>12. Know the receivers.</p> - -<p>13. Know the weak and the strong defenders.</p> - -<p>14. Know when to drive the ball or pull the string on it.</p> - -<p>15. Don’t throw interceptions.</p> -</div> - -<h3>PASS ROUTES</h3> - -<p>A good passing game is based on the following primary objectives:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>1. To flood an area, that is, to have more receivers in a particular -area than there are defenders.</p> - -<p>2. To get a one-on-one situation, and let the offensive man -outmaneuver the defensive man by using various cuts or patterns.</p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Flooding An Area</i></h4> - -<p>Flooding an area is perhaps the easiest and surest way of -having a receiver open or in a position to catch the ball. The -basic thinking in this particular type of passing game is to assign -two or three receivers to a particular area, as illustrated in <a href="#figure109">Figures -109-111</a>, making it impossible for one or even two defenders -to cover the receivers if they stay spread out and run their -routes properly.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_180"></a>[180]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure109" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure109.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 109</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp93" id="figure110" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure110.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 110</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_181"></a>[181]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure111" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure111.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 111</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Offensive Pass Cuts</i></h4> - -<p>There are numerous offensive sets a team can employ in -order to force the opposition to cover using a man-on-man -coverage. When using different sets and formations, I think it is -more advisable to teach all of the eligible receivers pass cuts, -rather than having them classified under pass patterns which -would affect the whole team. As an example, the quarterback -could call a formation that would set the left halfback right -and split the left end out. He could then call a pass pattern to -his right which would be a pattern to flood a particular zone, -and at the same time call a particular cut for the left end who -will try to outmaneuver the defensive right halfback—who might<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_182"></a>[182]</span> -be forced to cover him alone. <a href="#figure112">Figures 112-115</a> illustrate several -individual pass cuts, such as, sideline, deep, out, drive, circle, -stop, Z-in and Z-out.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure112" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure112.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 112</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure113" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure113.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 113</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure114" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure114.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 114</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure115" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure115.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 115</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_183"></a>[183]</span></p> - -<h3>PASS RECEIVING</h3> - -<p>A football team can have a great passer and good cuts and -patterns, but unless the receivers do their jobs correctly the -passing game is of little value. The pass receiving phase is broken -down into the following six basic maneuvers: (1) the release, (2) -the approach, (3) faking, (4) running, (5) catching the ball, -and (6) running with the ball.</p> - -<h4><i>Release</i>:</h4> - -<p>To be a good and consistent receiver, the first prerequisite is -clearing the line of scrimmage. A good receiver should never -be held up at the line of scrimmage. He must work on this important -phase of the passing game in order to perfect it. Every time -an end releases downfield on running plays, he should -experiment on techniques which will aid him later on pass plays. -No two defenders are the same. What is successful against one -might not be successful against another defender.</p> - -<h4><i>Approach</i> (Man-for-man coverage):</h4> - -<h5>Straight Line Approach:</h5> - -<p>1. Run at three-fourths speed.</p> - -<p>2. Run at a specific point of the defender’s body.</p> - -<p>3. Force the defender back, attempting to get him to turn -in the opposite direction of your final break.</p> - -<p>4. Make a good fake and step in the opposite direction of -your final break.</p> - -<h5><i>Weave Approach</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. Run at three-fourths speed.</p> - -<p>2. Run an irregular course.</p> - -<p>3. Through the change of direction force the defender to -change his feet.</p> - -<p>4. The number of weaves will be determined by the cuts -called and the depth in which the ball is to be caught.</p> - -<p>5. Give the impression that each weave is to be the final cut.</p> - -<h4><i>Faking</i> (types):</h4> - -<p>1. Head fake—accompanied by a short jab step in the opposite -direction of the final break.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_184"></a>[184]</span></p> - -<p>2. Roll step—fake one way and roll off back foot directly -toward the defender.</p> - -<p>3. Change of direction.</p> - -<p>4. Hook.</p> - -<p>5. Hook and go.</p> - -<h4><i>Run</i> (immediately after faking to receive the ball):</h4> - -<p>1. Run under control and relaxed.</p> - -<p>2. By running three-fourths speed, the receiver is able to -adjust to poorly thrown balls.</p> - -<p>3. Keep the arm action parallel to the leg action, until ready -to catch the ball.</p> - -<p>4. While running, turn only the neck and head. If the body -is turned at the waist, the receiver will be slowed down considerably.</p> - -<h4><i>Catching the Ball</i>:</h4> - -<p>1. Relax completely as the ball comes toward the receiver. -Relax particularly the fingers.</p> - -<p>2. Follow the ball with the eyes all the way into the hands.</p> - -<p>3. Catch the ball in and with the hands.</p> - -<p>4. Never attempt to trap the ball next to the body.</p> - -<p>5. Eliminate all thought from the mind except catching the -football. All great receivers concentrate to such a degree they -are actually unaware of the presence of the defenders.</p> - -<p>6. A ball thrown directly at chest level or higher should be -caught with the thumbs in. If the ball is thrown below the chest -level, the thumbs should be turned out.</p> - -<p>7. Always try to get the body in front of the ball on short -passes.</p> - -<p>8. A ball thrown on the outside and away from the receiver -should be caught with the thumbs out.</p> - -<p>9. When attempting to catch a long pass, never allow the -inside arm to be in a position to blind you from seeing the -football.</p> - -<p>10. Catch the ball and tuck it away before running with it.</p> - -<p>11. Every pass thrown to a receiver belongs to him, and he -should exert every effort to catch it.</p> - -<p>12. If the receiver cannot possibly catch the football, he<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_185"></a>[185]</span> -should not permit the opponent to catch it. This is a cardinal -rule.</p> - -<h4><i>Running</i> (after catching the ball):</h4> - -<p>1. As soon as the ball is caught, take it firmly in the hand, -tuck it under the arm, and most important, do not fumble.</p> - -<p>2. Drop the inside shoulder expecting immediate contact.</p> - -<p>3. Turn upfield to score.</p> - -<h3>CONCLUSION</h3> - -<p>Offense is based on two primary principles, running with -and/or passing the football. The passing and running games -supplement and complement each other. Neither phase is of -particular value, however, unless the quarterback knows when, -where, why and how to use each phase, along with the kicking -game. Training the quarterback will be discussed in <a href="#CHAPTER_9">Chapter 9</a>.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_186"></a>[186]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_9">CHAPTER 9<br /> -<span class="smaller">Training the Quarterback</span></h2> - -</div> - -<p>All outstanding football teams have two distinct characteristics -in common—a great fighting spirit and a great quarterback. -A smart, capable quarterback is the greatest single asset -a football team can possess. Success in a football game is determined -mainly by the selection of plays. Poor selection of plays -will destroy team morale and nullify the finest of teamwork.</p> - -<p>Quarterback generalship is simply the application of good -common sense. It consists of two parts—knowing what to do -and making the team do it. If a team has confidence in its quarterback, -it is likely the plays selected will be successful. If a -team does not have confidence in its quarterback, it is likely the -plays will not be successful. The “right” quarterback inspires -confidence. One manner in which the quarterback builds confidence -is through the selection of proper plays. I do not mean -to imply the “right” quarterback can grab-bag any play and -make it work. If he is wrong frequently as the result of his grab-bag -selection of plays, his teammates will lose confidence in him.</p> - -<h3>THREE TYPES OF QUARTERBACKS</h3> - -<p>There are basically three types of quarterbacks. There is the -quarterback who makes positive mistakes, due to his total disregard -for the basic principles of generalship. He does not know -his offense, and has little understanding and knowledge why his -plays are not effective. He is unaware of what the defense is -doing. Generally he calls plays quickly—any play to get the -team out of the huddle. He destroys team morale and spirit. His -team generally loses badly. He is not coachable. I cannot build<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_187"></a>[187]</span> -a winner with this type of quarterback, and I consider him -highly undesirable.</p> - -<p>The quarterback who works to avoid mistakes is a second type -of individual. He does what he is told and taught, but from a -tactical and mechanical standpoint only. Generally he lacks -initiative. He tends to be conservative in his quarterbacking. His -errors and mistakes are not the glaring, positive type, as in the -first case cited. Although he is not brilliant in his quarterbacking, -he is dependable.</p> - -<p>The third type of quarterback is the one every coach is seeking. -He directs his team to maximum results. He is a student of -the game. He is logical in his thinking, and bold in his action -when necessary to win the football game. He is confident, which -in turn gives his team confidence in him and the offense. He is -a winner through preparation, and he will give you winners -through his action and leadership. Unfortunately there are few -such quarterbacks of this particular type. Consequently you -must take what you have and develop what you’ve got. Regardless, -however, a good quarterback must be a natural leader, be -smart, have initiative and resourcefulness, be unselfish, have a -good voice, and good mechanical ability. If your quarterback -either lacks the ability to select the proper plays, or does not -have the natural ability to inspire your team to do its best on -every play, it is not likely you will have a winner.</p> - -<p>From time to time I have been blessed with smart quarterbacks—and -we have had winners then. I attribute much of this -success to my backfield coaches who have spent considerable -time with the quarterbacks teaching them the what, when, why -and how of offensive football, and a knowledge of defensive -football so they can do an intelligent job of field generalship. -As I indicated previously, without proper play selection it is -almost impossible to win the tough football games.</p> - -<h3>FIELD POSITION</h3> - -<p>Of the many factors that go into selecting a play, probably -the most important single factor is field position. To aid our -quarterback in his play selection, we divide the field into different<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_188"></a>[188]</span> -areas and zones, as illustrated in <a href="#figure116">Figure 116</a>. Each zone -is given a name, and there are some very important “musts” -concerning each area.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp62" id="figure116" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure116.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 116</span></p> -</div> - -<p>We divide the field into the following areas and zones, with -the most important coaching points listed as follows:</p> - -<h4><i>The “Must” Zone</i> (Goal Line to 3-Yard Line)</h4> - -<p>In this zone we <i>must</i> move the ball out at least to the 3-yard -line so it will be possible to kick from spread formation. Our<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_189"></a>[189]</span> -kicker stands back 13 yards deep when we kick from our spread -kick formation.</p> - -<h4><i>The Three-Down Zone</i> (3-Yard Line to 25-Yard Line)</h4> - -<p>1. Normally we will kick on third down with five yards or -more to go.</p> - -<p>2. We <i>must</i> make a first down with three plays.</p> - -<p>3. We do not like to punt while in this zone. If we can hold -the football until we get past the 25-yard line, we can put the -opposition in their three-down zone with a 40-yard kick.</p> - -<p>4. Run trap plays.</p> - -<p>5. Anticipate a goal line defense occasionally.</p> - -<h4><i>The First Down Zone</i> (20-Yard Line to 40-Yard Line)</h4> - -<p>We must make a first down so we can continue to control -the ball when we reach the Free Wheeling Zone.</p> - -<h4><i>The Free Wheeling Zone</i> (40-Yard Line to 40-Yard Line)</h4> - -<p>1. Easiest part of the field to score from.</p> - -<p>2. Go into our game planned offense.</p> - -<p>3. It is a guessing game until you make a good gain, then -you should be a play ahead of the defense. Once you gain this -advantage, keep the pressure on the defense.</p> - -<h4><i>The Scoring Zone</i> (40-Yard Line to 20-Yard Line)</h4> - -<p>1. Try to score with a trick play or a scoring play which you -have set up.</p> - -<p>2. You may use a play the scouting report indicates should -work.</p> - -<p>3. Figure on four downs to make the 10 yards.</p> - -<h4><i>The Gut Zone</i> (20-Yard Line to 4-Yard Line)</h4> - -<p>1. Must “out gut” them.</p> - -<p>2. Do not lose ground.</p> - -<p>3. Try to get five yards or more on first down.</p> - -<p>4. Pass on first down or waste down.</p> - -<p>5. Must maintain control of the football.</p> - -<h4><i>The Self-Scoring Zone</i> (4-Yard Line to Goal Line)</h4> - -<p>1. Minimum handling of the football.</p> - -<p>2. Score yourself if you have a play per yard.</p> - -<p>3. Do not pull linemen.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_190"></a>[190]</span></p> - -<p>4. Give the football to the best ball carrier.</p> - -<p>5. Must score.</p> - -<h4><i>Our Three MUSTS</i>:</h4> - -<p>Our quarterback must continuously remind our team of three -very important principles affecting our offense, which are as -follows:</p> - -<p>1. We <i>must not</i> get a penalty.</p> - -<p>2. We <i>must not</i> break an offensive signal.</p> - -<p>3. We <i>must</i> get our men (blocks).</p> - -<p>After your quarterback is thoroughly familiar with the zones -and their relationship to each other, then you can do an intelligent -job of instructing and teaching him which plays should -be run in the various zones. Consequently he will have a better -understanding of field position.</p> - -<h3>RECOGNIZING AND ATTACKING DEFENSES</h3> - -<p>When working with our quarterbacks “picking” a defense, -we never tell them to attack the opposition’s weakness but merely -to run away from their strength. The only time your quarterback -really needs to know how to recognize a defense and its strengths -and weaknesses is when he is changing plays at the line of scrimmage. -Otherwise your quarterback will call specific plays in -certain zones or areas according to your scouting report and -game plans.</p> - -<p>There are two basic defensive alignments, which are <i>even</i> and -<i>odd</i>. If there are defensive men playing over our guards, we -call this an <i>even</i> defense. If there are no defensive men playing -over our offensive guards, we call this an <i>odd</i> defense.</p> - -<p>With respect to the secondary, there are two alignments. They -are <i>3-deep</i> and <i>box</i>. If there is a safety man, it is a <i>3-deep</i> secondary -and an 8-man defensive front. If there is no safety man, it is -a <i>box</i> defense and there are nine men in close proximity to the -line of scrimmage, or a 9-man front.</p> - -<h4><i>Recognizing and Attacking an 8-Man Front</i></h4> - -<p>After the quarterback has determined whether the defense is -odd or even, and the secondary is 3-deep or box, he should then -look and determine the number of men who are playing outside<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_191"></a>[191]</span> -of his offensive end. By doing this he can determine if the -strength of the defense is inside or outside. If there are two or -more men outside of his offensive end, as illustrated in <a href="#figure117">Figure -117</a>, the strength of the defense is wide. Consequently the quarterback -should run inside plays, away from the strength of the -defense. As illustrated in <a href="#figure117">Figure 117</a>, by looking through the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_192"></a>[192]</span> -inside and outside lanes it is easy to see these defenses are -fundamentally the same.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp60" id="figure117" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure117.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 117</span></p> -</div> - -<p>You can definitely run against an 8-man front, as illustrated -in <a href="#figure117">Figure 117</a>, because by splitting properly the defense has only -two men outside of the offensive ends. Consequently you can -run wide. Or the defense must have four men or less inside your -end, in which event you can run inside with your basic offensive -attack.</p> - -<p>The defensive team playing a gap 8 defense, as illustrated in -<a href="#figure118">Figure 118</a>, is trying to get penetration by shooting the gaps. -The quarterback must recognize what the opposition is attempting -to do, and he must eliminate the bad play. Consequently -he should work slightly off the line of scrimmage in order to -avoid being tackled before he can hand-off. The strength of the -defense is inside. Consequently the quarterback must run the -corners. The game situation and field position will determine -which play the quarterback will call. The quarterback should -never throw a counter pass or a back up pass versus the gap 8 -defense because all the defenders cannot be blocked. He stands -a better chance of scoring if he selects a corner pass. The block -or action pass is very good because it helps to eliminate the -bad play.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure118" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure118.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 118</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Recognizing and Attacking a 9-Man Front</i></h4> - -<p>If it is not a 3-deep secondary, then it is a 9-man front. All -9-man fronts are basically the same, as I have illustrated in <a href="#figure119">Figure -119</a>.</p> - -<p>The quarterback wants to run at the man who is isolated in -the defense, and in most cases it is the defensive man over the -offensive center’s area. The attack can go wide, too, but the -offensive team must do an intelligent job of splitting in order<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_193"></a>[193]</span> -to draw the defense in tight. If the offensive guards take wide -splits and the defensive men move out with them, the defensive -man over the center will be isolated and the quarterback can -direct his attack toward the middle.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure119" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure119.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 119</span></p> -</div> - -<p>The corner passes versus a 9-man front, with the quarterback -exercising his option of running or passing, are excellent because -of the pressure exerted on the corner man. If he drops off -to cover an area for the pass, the quarterback must run with -the football. If he rushes to contain the passer, the short flat is -open for a pass.</p> - -<p>It is very important to teach your quarterbacks the different -defenses, and the strength of each defensive alignment. As I -mentioned previously, we teach the quarterbacks to run away -from the strength of the various alignments. The quarterback -must also be aware of the fact that he does not have to whip -the entire defense, but only the weak area in the defense. If a -defensive man is isolated or if there is not a defensive man on -the line in a particular area, we consider this the weak part of -a defensive alignment.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_194"></a>[194]</span></p> - -<h4><i>Playing the Game on a Blackboard</i></h4> - -<p>We have a number of meetings with our quarterbacks going -over strategy and game situations and drilling them in the principles -of quarterbacking and field generalship. It is difficult to -expect a quarterback to make the correct decision at a critical -time in a game unless he has been drilled to react to such a -situation. With this in mind, for years I have used the procedure -of having our quarterback coach and the quarterbacks play a -game of football on the blackboard.</p> - -<p>In order to explain our procedure more clearly, let’s assume -it is early September and we are preparing for our opening game -with the University of Georgia. We have been drilling our quarterbacks -daily on the defenses we expect Georgia to use in -various parts of the field. We have been drilling them on how -to attack these particular defenses with our offense. With this -basic information, we are now ready to work with the quarterbacks -at the blackboard playing our football game.</p> - -<p>A coach goes to the blackboard and draws a diagram of a -football field, along with the defenses we expect Georgia to use -on the hash mark, in the middle of the field, on the goal line, -and in a short yardage situation. On the board the coach will -also list the backfield personnel, so the quarterback will have an -opportunity to use his men properly. To digress for a second: -the quarterback uses the wrong judgment if he calls for sweeps -with a slow backfield, does not employ the best blocker to block, -etc. The quarterback must know his offensive personnel thoroughly.</p> - -<p>The coach then explains to the quarterbacks, who are observing -what he is writing on the blackboard, the condition of the -field, wind, and the other tactical factors. It is now time to play -the game with a particular quarterback.</p> - -<p>The coach will select a quarterback and say, for example, -“Georgia kicked-off to us and we returned the ball to the 25-yard -line on the right hash mark.” The coach will plot the position -on the diagram. The quarterback will then take into consideration -the defensive alignment we expect Georgia to employ in this -particular section of the field, and the quarterback must call a<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_195"></a>[195]</span> -play accordingly. If he makes what the coach considers a good -call, the coach will say, “You made four yards on the play. It is -now second and six.” If the quarterback makes a bad call, the -coach will say, “You lost three yards on the play,” and he will -explain why the call was a poor one. If the quarterback takes -too long in calling his play, he receives a five yard penalty. When -the quarterback makes a very good call, the coach gives him -a long gain or a touchdown.</p> - -<p>By using this game, a quarterback can learn to call plays by -anticipating defenses in areas all over the football field. He also -learns to use his personnel properly. We have found this game -at the blackboard has helped our quarterbacks tremendously.</p> - -<p>While one quarterback is playing the game, the other quarterbacks -are listening. If the boy at the board fails to make a first -down, he must punt, and the coach appoints another quarterback -to take over. After each play the coach will plot the position -of the ball on the diagram, and the players learn to know -which defenses to expect. We have found, with other things being -equal, the quarterback who has the mental ability to sustain -the ball for a long drive and a touchdown will usually be your -best quarterback.</p> - -<p>We also spend quite a bit of time going over situations. The -coach will cite a specific situation, and then say, “What would -you do in this situation?” The situations are usually the clutch -ones, and should the quarterback select the wrong answer in -the game it is likely to lose the contest. Even though you drill -the quarterbacks there is no fool-proof method of making certain -they will always make the right decision. The following example -will illustrate my point.</p> - -<p>Early in September during our 1959 season, our backfield -coach, Phil Cutchin, was going over situations with our quarterbacks -and said, “We are playing the University of Houston (our -second game). We are ahead by six points. There are five minutes -remaining to play. We are on our own 18-yard line. It is a -first-and-10 situation, and Houston is playing a 5-4 defense. -What would you do?” One quarterback said quickly, “Coach, -I would throw a corner pass into the sideline.” Phil answered, -“Yes, and they would intercept the pass, return it for a touchdown,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_196"></a>[196]</span> -kick the extra point, and we would lose the game, 7-6.” -The quarterback saw his mistake and said he was glad we had -gone over this particular situation.</p> - -<p>Three weeks later the same quarterback was faced with almost -the identical situation, except that we were ahead by three points. -The other factors were the same as previously cited. What did -the quarterback do? He threw the corner pass into the sideline, -and Houston intercepted it. Fortunately Houston did not score! -The point I am trying to make is your quarterbacks will still -make mistakes even after you have worked with them.</p> - -<h3>THE QUARTERBACK’S GUIDE</h3> - -<p>In order for a quarterback to be outstanding, he must be -cognizant of certain pertinent information relating to his offense, -the opposition’s defense, tactical and strategical information, and -the principles of quarterbacking and field generalship.</p> - -<h4><i>Offensive, Defensive and Tactical Information</i></h4> - -<p>The following information is of value and significance to the -quarterback:</p> - -<h5><i>Information a Quarterback Must Know About His Own Offense</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. Know your teammates thoroughly, including your best -ball carrier, your best blocker, best pass receiver, best faker, etc.</p> - -<p>2. Know all of your plays and everyone’s blocking assignments.</p> - -<p>3. Know where every receiver is on every pass pattern.</p> - -<p>4. Know your best play and pass against every defense.</p> - -<p>5. Know and understand how each play fits into a series.</p> - -<p>6. Know and remember the plays that are working—keep -running them.</p> - -<p>7. Know the reasons for the proper line splits.</p> - -<p>8. Know the plays the players have the most confidence in.</p> - -<p>9. Know the best plays for special situations—draw, screen, -etc.</p> - -<p>10. Know how to stop the clock.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_197"></a>[197]</span></p> - -<h5><i>Information a Quarterback Must Know About the Defense</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. What defense are they playing?</p> - -<p>2. Who is making the tackles?</p> - -<p>3. Are they stunting their defenses?</p> - -<p>4. What type of pass coverage do they use?</p> - -<p>5. Do the linebackers run through?</p> - -<p>6. Are the ends crashing?</p> - -<p>7. Who is tackling the passer?</p> - -<p>8. Who is the best defensive man?</p> - -<p>9. Which man can we isolate?</p> - -<p>10. How quickly does the secondary revolve?</p> - -<h5><i>Information a Quarterback Must Know About the Game</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. Time left to play is a big factor.</p> - -<p>2. Time outs left.</p> - -<p>3. Weather and field condition.</p> - -<p>4. Know which down it is at all times.</p> - -<p>5. Field position.</p> - -<p>6. What yard line the ball is on.</p> - -<p>7. Which zone the ball is in.</p> - -<h4><i>Game Strategy</i></h4> - -<p>The following game strategy information is of value and -significance to the quarterback:</p> - -<h5><i>General Information</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. Always know score, time to play, yards to go and down.</p> - -<p>2. Know your field zones, and avoid giving the ball to the -opposition in the 4-down zone.</p> - -<p>3. You are playing for a victory, but remember a tie is better -than a defeat.</p> - -<p>4. Know your own personnel and each man’s capabilities.</p> - -<p>5. Know all there is to know about your opponents by studying -scouting reports and movies.</p> - -<p>6. Know your offense, including the blocking assignments.</p> - -<p>7. Be able to recognize any defensive alignment.</p> - -<p>8. Understand the importance of field position.</p> - -<p>9. Know when not to pass.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_198"></a>[198]</span></p> - -<p>10. Know when to kick.</p> - -<p>11. Use the wind intelligently.</p> - -<p>12. Know when not to try for a score.</p> - -<h5><i>When To Kick</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. When in doubt.</p> - -<p>2. Normally for every touchdown lead you have, you should -kick a down earlier.</p> - -<p>3. Kick early with a strong wind or against a weak offense. -From 40 to 40-yard line, kick straight away and high. Inside -40-yard line kick out of bounds.</p> - -<p>4. When score is even, or you are ahead, always make safe -kick to 3-down zone.</p> - -<p>5. Kick early on a wet field; let the opponents handle the ball.</p> - -<h5><i>When Not To Pass</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. When the opponent expects a pass.</p> - -<p>2. When you have two downs to make six yards or less.</p> - -<p>3. In your own territory, just before half-time.</p> - -<p>4. When backed up and you are ahead.</p> - -<h5><i>Type Of Pass To Throw</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. On long yardage, throw short passes or to third man out. -Draws, screens.</p> - -<p>2. On first down, play passes.</p> - -<p>3. On waste downs, play passes, long passes, and screens.</p> - -<p>4. When time is short, throw near sideline.</p> - -<p>5. When in doubt, throw optional passes.</p> - -<h5><i>On Wet Field</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. Play conservatively and kick early.</p> - -<p>2. No difficult ball handling.</p> - -<p>3. Avoid bad places on field, also wide plays and cut backs.</p> - -<p>4. Do not be afraid to pass.</p> - -<p>5. Doubt the wisdom of a quick kick.</p> - -<h5><i>When Not To Try For Score</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. Just before half time, behind your own 40-yard line.</p> - -<p>2. When you are running clock out.</p> - -<p>3. When you are preparing to give a safety.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_199"></a>[199]</span></p> - -<p>4. When you have one down to make first down—go for -first down.</p> - -<h5><i>When To Try To Score In One Play</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. When you have mental edge on opponent following a -block kick, a recovered fumble, or an intercepted pass in the -opponent’s territory.</p> - -<p>2. Just before half-time in the opponent’s territory.</p> - -<p>3. On waste down in opponent’s territory.</p> - -<p><i>When To Run Your Best Ball Carrier Behind Best Blockers</i>:</p> - -<p>1. When you must have a first down.</p> - -<p>2. In four down zone going in for a score.</p> - -<p>3. Clutch down in danger zone, coming out.</p> - -<p>4. Save your best ball carrier in the free wheeling zone.</p> - -<p>5. Do not use him first play after a long run.</p> - -<h5><i>What To Do On Clutch Down</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. Fake and give.</p> - -<p>2. Some kind of an optional play.</p> - -<p>3. Best ball carrier behind best blocker.</p> - -<p>4. Waste man effectively.</p> - -<p>5. When trying to save time, tell ball carrier to go out of -bounds.</p> - -<h5><i>Scoring Area</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. Waste man effectively.</p> - -<p>2. Best ball carrier behind strongest blockers.</p> - -<p>3. First down inside three—run ball yourself. No ball handling.</p> - -<p>4. Make sure that on fourth down you will have the ball in -the middle of the field where you can try any type of a scoring -play.</p> - -<h5><i>What To Run on Waste Down</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. Safe, long gainers.</p> - -<p>2. Fake-give, or optionals are normally effective.</p> - -<h5><i>When To Speed Up Offense</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. When you are behind.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_200"></a>[200]</span></p> - -<p>2. Inside the opponent’s 15-yard line.</p> - -<p>3. When you have the wind to your back.</p> - -<h5><i>When To Slow Down Your Offense</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. When you are trying to kill time.</p> - -<p>2. Just before the half in your own territory and you are -ahead.</p> - -<p>3. Fourth quarter, if more than one touchdown ahead.</p> - -<p>4. When the wind is against you.</p> - -<h5><i>Free Wheeling Zone</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. Try for long gainer.</p> - -<p>2. Use sideline intelligently.</p> - -<p>3. Use wind intelligently.</p> - -<p>4. Use best ball carrier as decoy.</p> - -<p>5. Utilize various formations.</p> - -<p>6. Try long gainer on first down and second down and go -for first down on third down.</p> - -<p>7. Call trick plays that have been set up earlier.</p> - -<p>8. Try to keep ball in middle of field.</p> - -<h5><i>Quarterbacks Must Remember</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. Poor field position calls for conservative plays.</p> - -<p>2. When you are ahead and the game is drawing to a close, -play slowly, conservatively, and very deliberately.</p> - -<p>3. When you are behind and the game is drawing to a close, -play faster, be more reckless, and get the ball out of bounds to -stop the clock.</p> - -<p>4. When you are in scoring territory, you <i>must</i> score. Any -yardage gained without scoring is of slight value only.</p> - -<p>5. Any yardage you make deep in your own territory which -does not serve to get the team into the free wheeling zone is of -slight value.</p> - -<p>6. If you are ahead by 11 points and there is not more than -five minutes remaining to play and there is a strong wind against -you, it is smart to take a safety instead of trying to punt out -from inside your 10-yard line.</p> - -<p>7. Time works with you when you are ahead; against you -when your team is behind in score.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_201"></a>[201]</span></p> - -<p>8. Figure what the defense would normally expect in any -given situation, and then do the opposite.</p> - -<p>9. If a play fails, you must know why.</p> - -<h5><i>Tips for Quarterbacks</i>:</h5> - -<p>1. You must have genuine confidence in yourself and your -ability.</p> - -<p>2. You must have the confidence and respect of your team.</p> - -<p>3. You must have personality and leadership; then exercise it.</p> - -<p>4. You must know the ability of your own personnel.</p> - -<p>5. Play the percentages for ultimate team victory. Consequently -you must study scouting reports and have a clear picture -of the game plan. You must be able to recognize defenses immediately, -and be able to direct your attack away from the -strength of the defense. You should think with the defensive -signal caller by putting yourself in his place. Remember it is a -guessing game until you make a gain. After a gain you should -be one play ahead of the defense.</p> - -<p>6. Eliminate bad plays as they will defeat us. Any play that -does not gain is a bad play. Only a fumble or a penalty can stop -our offense if you eliminate the bad plays.</p> - -<p>7. Run more offensive plays by getting out of the huddle -quickly.</p> - -<p>8. After a penalty or a time out, have your play called and -the team ready to play at the line of scrimmage. Do not follow -this procedure when trying to run out the clock.</p> - -<p>9. Try to score in one play after a break in an effort to -demoralize the defense. Should you follow this procedure several -times and not be successful, discontinue it; otherwise, you will -demoralize your own team.</p> - -<p>10. <i>Never</i> try to score just before the half from deep in your -own territory. Run out the clock and get a fresh start the second -half.</p> - -<p>11. When you are behind, <i>never</i> try to score in one play. -Play the game as if it were a tie contest; otherwise, you can be -out of the game before you realize it.</p> - -<p>12. Normally we like to pass on first down and on a waste<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_202"></a>[202]</span> -down. On short yardage, throw play passes. On long yardage, -throw in front of the deep men.</p> - -<p>13. First down is your important call. If you make five yards -or more, you have the advantage. If you fail to make four yards, -the defense has the advantage.</p> - -<p>14. On clutch downs and short yardage, run fake gives because -the defense must go to the first fake under such circumstances.</p> - -<p>15. Remind your line to tighten up on the goal line, and do -not call plays that require linemen to pull as the defense may -break through and throw us for a loss.</p> - -<p>16. Do not pull a play out of the hat. If you are in doubt, -run an option run-pass.</p> - -<p>17. We will rehearse weekly every situation possible, such as -saving time, killing time, giving up a safety, side line offense, -etc., so that you will automatically make the right decisions in -the game.</p> - -<h3>CONCLUSION</h3> - -<p>It is virtually impossible for a quarterback to know and do -everything correctly. However, a coach must work with his -quarterback, and the individual must spend many additional -hours studying and preparing himself so he will be able to -handle any situation that arises. It is an absolute must for your -quarterback to be well prepared if you expect to have a successful -football team. If you are rebuilding a football team, it is -very important for you to pick your quarterback first, find out -what he can do well, and then build your offense around him.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_203"></a>[203]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_10">CHAPTER 10<br /> -<span class="smaller">Planning for a Game</span></h2> - -</div> - -<p>Planning for any phase of football is important, but planning -for a particular game is vitally important. I tell my players our -staff will study, prepare and plan one hour for every minute -the players are on the practice field. Then we actually spend -this much time in our practice and game preparation. The -typical fan has little conception of the amount of time we spend -planning for a single football game.</p> - -<h3>OUT-OF-SEASON PLANNING</h3> - -<p>Our planning commences in early summer when I assign each -assistant coach to a particular game opponent for the coming -season. If we do not have as many coaches as we have football -games, several assistants will have to double up and prepare for -two opponents.</p> - -<p>Each coach will secure as many movies as possible on his -particular opponent and break-down the films. He also familiarizes -himself with the returning personnel, and studies each player’s -characteristics, strengths and weaknesses. The coach will -observe the returning quarterback’s movements in particular, -looking for tip-offs. Does he look at his receiver all the way -downfield? Does he have a favorite pass route? Does he have a -favorite receiver? Does he favor action or drop back passes? -Does he like to operate to his left or right? Such information, -along with additional scouting information, helps us get a “book” -on the quarterback.</p> - -<p>It is important to know the opposition’s strongest and weakest -positions on offense and defense. The coach looks at the films,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_204"></a>[204]</span> -and attempts to get as much reliable and valid information as -possible from them. Then when the coach (scout) sees his -opposition in the fall he will do a better job of scouting them -because he is familiar with the offense, defense, and the returning -personnel.</p> - -<h3>IN-SEASON PLANNING</h3> - -<p>During the season we like to see an opponent play at least -three times. We feel we can do a better job of planning after -we have a fairly clear understanding of what our opponents are -likely to do. We want to have a fairly definite idea of what our -opposition will do offensively in the following situations:</p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>1. First down and 10 yards to go.</p> - -<p>2. Second down and long yardage.</p> - -<p>3. Second down and short yardage.</p> - -<p>4. Third down and long yardage.</p> - -<p>5. Third down and short yardage.</p> - -<p>6. Fourth down and short yardage.</p> - -<p>7. Unusual and special situations.</p> -</div> - -<p>Conversely, we want to find out what our opposition will do -defensively versus the above situations.</p> - -<p>In order to give you a run-down of our procedures, let’s consider -a typical week preceding Saturday’s game.</p> - -<h4><i>Sunday’s Schedule</i></h4> - -<p>The coaching staff will meet together early Sunday morning -and go over the film of Saturday’s game. While the assistant -coaches are studying and grading the film, I will meet with the -assistant coach who scouted the team we will be playing this -coming Saturday. In addition to receiving a thorough scouting -report from him, I want his recommendations offensively and -defensively of what we should do against the opponent. The -scout will then complete his report as he will present it to the -squad members on Monday night.</p> - -<p>In the meantime the other assistant coaches have completed -their grading of the film, and then we discuss personnel. As the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_205"></a>[205]</span> -result of game performance, we commence to make plans as -to the personnel we will be using in the upcoming game.</p> - -<h4><i>Monday’s Schedule</i></h4> - -<p>On Monday morning the scout will give his report to our -entire staff. He then answers questions relating to the opponent -we will be playing on Saturday. After we have fully discussed -the opposition from every aspect, our defensive coaches will -have a separate meeting and make plans to set up the defenses -which they would like to use. The offensive coaches have a -similar meeting, and map out their strategy versus all of the -various defenses the opposition has used in various situations. -We recognize the fact that some plays are good only against -certain defenses and not all plays are successful against all -defenses. Therefore, we try to limit our offense to the best possible -plays against our opposition’s anticipated defenses. Of -course, we must have a valid, reliable, comprehensive scouting -report in order to make our plans. We also understand and -recognize the fact that some teams will change practically their -entire offensive system from game to game. However, this gives -such teams only one week to perfect a new “favorite” series, -and this is almost an impossible feat.</p> - -<p>All of our coaches will meet together again around 10:30 -<span class="allsmcap">A.M.</span>, with the defensive coaches making their recommendations -for Saturday’s opponent. The strategy is discussed at length before -a decision is reached. Let me digress for just a second to -say that once we have made our decisions, we will stick with -them tenaciously for fear of confusing our players by changing -defenses later in the week.</p> - -<p>The procedure is repeated again, this time with the offensive -coaches. All coaches, regardless of position or whether they -specialize in offense or defense, will enter the discussion. We -have found following such a procedure helps us do a better job -of coaching, and some of our best suggestions relating to offense -have come from our defensive coaches, and vice versa, defensive -suggestions have come from the offensive coaches. We are always -open to suggestions!</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_206"></a>[206]</span></p> - -<p>After we have made our plans, we can then make out our -work schedule for Monday afternoon. Although I usually make -out the remainder of the schedule for the week each night after -practice, you can see the necessity of waiting until Monday in -order to make out the day’s work schedule.</p> - -<p>After lunch we will have a short squad meeting. First, we go -over last Saturday’s game discussing both the good and bad -points. Then we will inform the squad of our plans for this -coming Saturday’s game, and change assignments, make adjustments, -etc., at this time.</p> - -<p>The boys who do not have late afternoon classes meet at -3:30 <span class="allsmcap">P.M.</span>, and we go over last week’s game movie. Each coach -will sit with the players whom he has graded and discuss their -performance in the film. If time permits, we like to have the -ends and backs meet in one group and the interior linemen in -another group for separate viewings of the film. We feel such -a practice is highly desirable and eliminates the confusion that -generally occurs when all of the players view the game film at -the same time.</p> - -<p>On Monday and Friday our regular practice commences at -5:30 <span class="allsmcap">P.M.</span>, since our boys take their laboratory classes on these -two days. It is impossible to set up a practice schedule if key -personnel are absent due to late labs every day of the week.</p> - -<p>The boys who played in Saturday’s game will be out in sweat -clothes for approximately 45-50 minutes. They will stretch and -loosen up, before we spend most of the time learning and -rehearsing the defenses they will be using for this coming Saturday’s -opponent. Our procedure is to have the “red shirts” come -out of the huddle and line up in the different offensive formations -we expect to face, and our defense will adjust accordingly. -For the last 15 minutes of the session a scrub team will run -the opposition’s favorite plays about half speed so the regulars -will have an opportunity to familiarize themselves with the offense. -Then the boys in sweat clothes take several short sprints -and we send them to the showers.</p> - -<p>The boys who did not play in last Saturday’s game have a -good workout emphasizing and practicing fundamentals. At<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_207"></a>[207]</span> -times we terminate Monday’s practice session with a short scrimmage -against the freshman squad.</p> - -<p>After a late dinner on Monday night, we have another squad -meeting where the scout will give a complete oral report to the -players on our upcoming opponent. He will discuss personnel, -favorite plays, passes, defenses, kicking game, and any additional -pertinent information relating to the opposition. He then -hands out a comprehensive typed scout report to the squad -members. Frankly, I do not believe a boy can do an intelligent -job of playing without studying his scouting report.</p> - -<h4><i>Tuesday’s Schedule</i></h4> - -<p>We will have a staff meeting early on Tuesday morning in -order to set up the practice schedule for the afternoon. A typical -Tuesday practice session will last approximately one hour and -35 minutes, plus the last period which does not have a specific -time limit for the reasons I explained previously.</p> - -<p>Our schedule is generally set up so that the first five minutes -the linemen will be firing out and hitting the big sled or seven -dummies, and the backs will be having a fumble drill or working -on stance and starts. Our exercises and agility drills precede this -drill for the linemen and backs.</p> - -<p>The second period will usually be 20 minutes in duration, -which will vary from week to week according to our needs. A -typical period will have our first team secondary working on -pass defense against a scrub team who will be throwing the opponent’s -passes. At the same time, in another area we will have -our first and second team guards and tackles working on -defensive techniques. Our backs will be divided into two groups. -One group will work on our polish drill, and the other on the -secondary drill. Our third and fourth lines will be working as -teams on blocking.</p> - -<p>At the termination of the previously mentioned 20 minute -period, we exchange the backs and linemen, and the coaches -repeat the drills again with their new groups.</p> - -<p>Our next period will be working on individual techniques by<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_208"></a>[208]</span> -positions for approximately 15 minutes’ duration. During this -time our coaches generally work on weaknesses or correct errors -which they observed in last Saturday’s game film. Or they will -work by positions on recommendations which were made at -Monday’s coaches’ meeting.</p> - -<p>Our team drills and “team learning” are next on Tuesday’s -practice schedule. The first and third teams will work on our -offense for Saturday’s game. The first team will run about three -plays to one compared to the third team. During this time the -second team will work on defense against the scrub team, which -will be running the opposition’s plays and passes. At the termination -of 20-25 minutes the first and second teams will change -around, with the first team working on defense, and the second -and third teams working on offense. This period continues for -20-25 minutes.</p> - -<p>The first and second teams will work on the kicking game -next. As I stated previously, we use our kicking game as a -conditioner and at the same time doing something functional -with respect to perfecting our protection and coverage. When -they do it properly, normally this phase of the practice schedule -lasts 10-12 minutes. If not executed to our satisfaction, the -period is longer in duration. While the first two units are working -on their kicking game, the third team will usually be working -on their defensive play. After completing their 20 minutes’ defensive -drill, they must have their kicking game practice.</p> - -<p>After we have set up Tuesday afternoon’s schedule we will -amend offensive and defensive plans if necessary. We generally -spend the remainder of Tuesday morning evaluating player personnel.</p> - -<p>After lunch we will have a short squad meeting for about -15-20 minutes if we have amended our offensive or defensive -plans or if we are going to make any changes of any nature -involving the offense or defense.</p> - -<p>Some time after lunch and before our specialists take the -field at 3:10, with our regular scheduled practice commencing -at 3:30 <span class="allsmcap">P.M.</span>, our defensive coach will meet with our defensive -signal callers and our offensive coach will meet with our quarterbacks,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_209"></a>[209]</span> -and go over defensive and offensive plans and strategy, -respectively.</p> - -<p>After practice we will have a brief staff meeting again and -we will review our entire practice schedule. At this time I want -my assistant coaches to make recommendations for the next day -as I want to work on the schedule at night for the following -day. I discussed our procedures in <a href="#CHAPTER_3">Chapter 3</a>.</p> - -<h4><i>Wednesday’s Schedule</i></h4> - -<p>The procedure is the same as previously—staff meeting and -set up the afternoon’s practice schedule, which will be about -one hour and 30 minutes, excluding the last drill which is not -timed.</p> - -<p>After setting up the exercises and the agility drills, we will -have our linemen firing out, the same as on Tuesday, and the -backs will be polishing plays.</p> - -<p>The next 25 minute period will be first team on defense -against the scrub team, and they will practice defense over the -field. The scrub team will run the opposition’s plays and tendencies, -and the defense is full speed with the exception of tackling -the ball carrier. During this time, on another field our second -and third teams will be running our offense versus the opposition’s -defenses.</p> - -<p>During the next period the first and second teams will exchange -and repeat the same drills listed above.</p> - -<p>The next period will usually be 20 minutes’ duration with the -third team working on defense over the field, and the first and -second teams working on special situations such as quick kicks, -passes, etc.</p> - -<p>The next period will be devoted to our kicking game. We -also usually have a few goal line drives on Wednesday.</p> - -<p>Our Wednesday’s practice schedule will vary more than the -other days because we spend about 20 minutes on group drills -and about six minutes full speed on goal line defense, and -phases of this nature.</p> - -<p>After Wednesday’s schedule is completed and out of the way,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_210"></a>[210]</span> -the staff will usually go to the projection room and view films -of this week’s opponent.</p> - -<p>After lunch we will again have a short meeting and inform -the squad of any changes we have made or plan on making. -We will also discuss the previous day’s practice.</p> - -<p>The defensive signal callers and the quarterbacks will meet -separately with their respective coaches for about 20 minutes, -which is our usual procedure daily during the football season.</p> - -<p>After Wednesday evening’s dinner we have a squad meeting -and go over the film of the opponent we will be playing on -Saturday.</p> - -<h4><i>Thursday’s Schedule</i></h4> - -<p>Thursday morning we will again have an early staff meeting -and we set up the afternoon practice schedule first.</p> - -<p>After five minutes of firing out for the linemen as units, and -the backs working on stance and starts or a quick fumble drill, -we will have three 25 minute periods where we will stress learning -and perfection more than body contact.</p> - -<p>We will have three different groups working at the same -time. The first unit will be working on offense versus the opposition’s -defenses, over the field. The second unit will be working -on their defenses versus the opposition’s offense, being run -by the scrubs over the field. The purpose of this is to check -our defensive signal caller to see that he is calling the correct -defense in various sections of the field. In a third area we will -have the third team working on all phases of the kicking game, -such as quick kicks, spread punt, punt returns, on-side kick, etc.</p> - -<p>At the termination of the 25 minute period, the teams will -change. The first unit will go to the defensive drill; the second -unit to the kicking drill; and the third unit will go to offense.</p> - -<p>When the second 25 minute period has terminated, we will -change for the third period. Following such a procedure gives -each unit 25 minutes of offense, of defense, and on the kicking -game. Then we send the players to the showers because we do -not want them to leave their game on the practice field and be -tired on Saturday.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_211"></a>[211]</span></p> - -<p>After Thursday’s schedule is set, the staff will spend the -remainder of the morning discussing the progress which has -been made to date in preparation for our forthcoming opponent. -We also discuss personnel at this time.</p> - -<p>After lunch we will have a very short meeting, merely taking -time to discuss or review our defensive game plans. Our defensive -signal callers and quarterbacks will meet as usual, as I -mentioned previously. Our regular practice session will commence -at 3:30 <span class="allsmcap">P.M.</span></p> - -<p>The coaches meet after practice, as is our usual procedure. -We do not meet with the squad on Thursday evening after dinner, -however.</p> - -<h4><i>Friday’s Schedule</i></h4> - -<p>Since Friday’s practice schedule will not be longer than 30 -minutes’ duration, we do not have to spend much time in setting -it up. We will work as a group and have a short, snappy workout -in sweat clothes, going over all of the situations that are likely -to occur during the game. After we rehearse kick-offs, returns, -on-side kicks, and a couple of goal line drives, we send the boys -in. As I stated previously, due to Friday afternoon labs, our -practice session will commence at 5:30 <span class="allsmcap">P.M.</span></p> - -<p>A typical Friday evening dinner menu, if we are playing on -Saturday afternoon, would be as follows:</p> - -<ul> -<li>Tomato soup</li> -<li>Fruit cocktail cup</li> -<li>14 ounce choice sirloin strip, medium well done</li> -<li>One-half baked potato mashed, topped with American cheese</li> -<li>Green beans</li> -<li>Assorted bread (but no hard French bread)</li> -<li>One pint of milk or iced tea</li> -<li>Vanilla ice cream, one dip.</li> -</ul> - -<p>After dinner we will go to a movie as a group or we go some -place where we will all be together. At 10 <span class="allsmcap">P.M.</span> the team will -return from the movie to the dormitory or hotel where they are -staying. Lights will go out and players will be in bed by 10:20 -<span class="allsmcap">P.M.</span> the night before a game.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_212"></a>[212]</span></p> - -<h4><i>Saturday’s Schedule</i></h4> - -<p>On Saturday morning the football managers will telephone -the players in their rooms at 8:30 <span class="allsmcap">A.M.</span> The boys who want -coffee or juice will be served at 9 <span class="allsmcap">A.M.</span> The pre-game meal will -be served at 10 <span class="allsmcap">A.M.</span>, and will consist of the following:</p> - -<ul> -<li>11-12 ounce choice sirloin strip, well done</li> -<li>Green peas</li> -<li>Dry toast, two slices (no butter)</li> -<li>Honey</li> -<li>Hot tea (no cream).</li> -</ul> - -<p>We will have a squad meeting at 10:30 <span class="allsmcap">A.M.</span>, and leave for -the stadium at 12:10 <span class="allsmcap">P.M.</span>, preparing to meet our opposition at -2 <span class="allsmcap">P.M.</span> During the squad meeting we will go over all tricky situations -that might arise during the game. After the meeting the -defensive and offensive coaches will meet with the signal callers -and quarterbacks respectively, and review our final game plans.</p> - -<p>After we arrive at the stadium, we send our passers out to -warm up about 31 minutes before game time, and the backs -and ends will come out about 26 minutes before game time. -Our linemen start warming up about 30 minutes before the -game. As 2 <span class="allsmcap">P.M.</span> approaches, we always feel we are ready and -we have done the very best we can to get ready for our particular -opponent.</p> - -<p>I failed to mention a procedure we follow which we think -is highly desirable. During the week of the game, the assistant -coach who scouted Saturday’s opponent lives in the football -dormitory with the players. From 7:30-10:00 <span class="allsmcap">P.M.</span> nightly, -when we do not have squad meetings, he will show films of the -opposition in the dormitory. He will answer questions and give -the players any information they are seeking on our opposition. -We find our players do a better job when they understand <i>why</i> -we ask them to do something. On the field many times we do -not have the time to explain <i>why</i>. The assistant in the dormitory -does have the time to explain <i>why</i> and as a result the players do -a more intelligent and better job of playing.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_213"></a>[213]</span></p> - -<h3>GRADING THE GAME FILM</h3> - -<p>Grading the game film is a very definite part of our planning. -If we do not know who is doing what during a game, we can’t -do an intelligent job of planning and coaching. I am sold on -our grading system, and we feel that through the study of films -we can determine who to play, and also who <i>not</i> to play, in -critical situations. Knowing this information in advance has won -a number of football games for us.</p> - -<p>Our procedure for grading films is for one coach to take one -position and grade every player in that position offensively and -defensively. It is possible for a player to get one of three possible -scores, plus (+), minus (-), or ungradable (U), on each -play. Our criteria is as follows:</p> - -<p><i>Plus</i> (+)—If the boy carries out his assignment and gets his -job done properly, his coach will give him a plus. His technique -of execution might not be the way he was taught, but we are -concerned with the fact either he did or did not do his job.</p> - -<p><i>Minus</i> (-)—If the player failed to carry out his assignment -and/or his man “whipped” him, then he is graded minus (for -the particular play).</p> - -<p><i>Ungradable</i> (<i>U</i>)—If a player is not shown in the picture or -he does not have the opportunity to help out on the play, he is -ungradable and would receive (U). An example would be the -defensive right end when the play goes away from him and in -all probability he will not have an opportunity to take part in -the play.</p> - -<p>After getting a grade for each play, like symbols are added -together, and the total number of offensive (or defensive) plays -participated in to determine percentages. Divide the sum total -of plus and minus signs into the total number of plus signs in -order to arrive at the percentage of plays that got the job done. -We have found that a player must grade at least 61% on offense -and on defense in order to be a winning football player.</p> - -<p>We grade the offense and defense separately. If a player consistently -makes a good grade on defense and a poor grade on -offense, we know either we have to play him only on defense -or we must give him more offensive work.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_214"></a>[214]</span></p> - -<p>We have several other expressions, which we have borrowed -from baseball terminology, that we use in our grading system. -They are as follows:</p> - -<p><i>RBI</i>—Stands for runs batted in, and means something extra -good, such as intercepting a pass, causing or recovering a fumble, -blocking a punt, throwing a key block—a real clutch play. These -are what we call the “big plays” and they are the ones that win -the tough games for you. If your team does not make many -big plays, you will not win many tough games. We place a great -deal of emphasis on the big play. Frankly, we would rather -have a boy make three or four RBI’s, even though his grade -is only 50-55%, rather than have a boy get 65-68% and never -make any big plays.</p> - -<p><i>Errors</i>—If a player busts an assignment, gets a penalty, misses -a tackle in open field, permits a receiver to get behind him, -fumbles the ball, or commits some act of a similar negative -nature, we consider this bad and he is given an error. A player -who consistently makes two or three errors per game simply -cannot play for us. His play will cost you more ball games than -you will ever win with him. Consequently, we watch the errors -column very closely when we are grading film.</p> - -<h3>CONCLUSION</h3> - -<p>Coaching football is a race against time. Time lost on the -practice field can never be regained. We attempt to utilize every -minute possible in preparing for our opponents and our practice -sessions.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_215"></a>[215]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_11">CHAPTER 11<br /> -<span class="smaller">Our Drills</span></h2> - -</div> - -<p>There are many good football drills. Since we place a great -deal of emphasis on defensive football, it is only natural our -drills for the most part emphasize individual and team defensive -techniques.</p> - -<h3>DRILLS FOR THE SECONDARY</h3> - -<p>The following drills are used to teach individual and team -techniques for the defensive secondary:</p> - -<h4><i>Defensive Cuts Drill</i> (6-8 men):</h4> - -<p>With a defensive man standing in a good football position, -the coach will move the ball back and forth, and the player -will plant, pivot to the inside and sprint in the direction the -coach is pointing the football. He will then throw the football -and the defensive man will sprint to catch it. The Defensive -Cuts Drill is illustrated in <a href="#figure120">Figure 120</a>.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure120" style="max-width: 15.625em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure120.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 120</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Intercept Drill</i> (8-10 men):</h4> - -<p>Eight or 10 secondary men will line up behind each other.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_216"></a>[216]</span> -One player at a time will run toward the coach who will throw -the football directly at the player, or to either side of him. The -defensive man should intercept the pass, as illustrated in <a href="#figure121">Figure -121</a>.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure121" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure121.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 121</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Tip Drill</i> (8-10 men):</h4> - -<p>Following the same line up and procedure described previously -for the Intercept Drill, instead of the player catching -the football he tips it back to another player who is training -him, who intercepts the pass. The Tip Drill is illustrated in -<a href="#figure122">Figure 122</a>.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure122" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure122.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 122</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Running the Line Drill</i> (6-8 men):</h4> - -<p>A defensive man will line up straddling a line about 35 yards -long, facing the coach. On a command from the coach, the -player will start backwards using a cross-over step but keeping -his eyes and head on the coach. He will try to change direction -as many times as possible, always using a cross-over step, keeping -his eye on the coach (passer), as he zigzags properly from -one side to the other down the 35-yard line. (Running the Line -Drill is not illustrated by diagram.)</p> - -<h4><i>Covering Third-and-Fourths Drill</i> (2 complete defensive -secondaries):</h4> - -<p>The entire secondary can be set up in a 4-spoke or 5-spoke<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_217"></a>[217]</span> -defense, as illustrated in <a href="#figure123">Figure 123</a>. A coach, simulating a -passer, will stand facing the unit. He will simulate either an -action pass or a drop back pass, and the men must react properly -to the simulated backfield action. When the ball is thrown, all -defenders must sprint for it. The ball is placed on either hash -mark and in the middle of the field and a full offensive backfield -may or may not be used to establish flow for the defensive -secondary’s proper reaction.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure123" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure123.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 123</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Dog Fight Drill</i> (For defensive halfbacks and corner men) -(6-8 men):</h4> - -<p>Place a defensive halfback or corner man in his regular position. -A pass receiver runs a direct route in front of the defensive -man’s regular position. A coach or passer throws the ball, and -we want the defender to play full speed through the receiver -for the football, as illustrated in <a href="#figure124">Figure 124</a>. It is merely one-on-one -and gives both the receiver and defender practice fighting -for the ball.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure124" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure124.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 124</span></p> -</div> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_218"></a>[218]</span></p> - -<h4><i>Dog Fight Drill for Safety Man</i> (8 men):</h4> - -<p>We put a safety man in the middle of the field and receivers -on each hash mark. On a signal from the coach, the receivers -start down the field and the passer drops back with the football. -The safety man must stay in the middle of the field as he gets -depth in order to be in a position to cover both receivers. When -the ball is thrown, the safety man sprints full speed for the -interception, as illustrated in <a href="#figure125">Figure 125</a>.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp85" id="figure125" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure125.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 125</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Outside Drill</i> (15-25 men):</h4> - -<p>We set up a skeleton offensive unit of ends, center and a -complete backfield versus the defensive ends and secondary, as -illustrated in <a href="#figure126">Figure 126</a>. The offense works full speed running -its outside plays and passes, and the defense is drilled in stopping -the wide attack.</p> - -<h4><i>Big Tip Drill</i> (2 complete secondaries):</h4> - -<p>The entire defensive perimeter is used in our Big Tip Drill, -illustrated in <a href="#figure127">Figure 127</a>. A coach will establish flow by running -to his left or right simulating backfield action, and the defense -must react and rotate accordingly. The coach will then pass -the ball, simulating an action pass, and the defender nearest to -intercept the ball will yell an oral signal indicating he is going -to tip it. The other defenders get in a good football position, -and look for the tip. As the first man tips the ball, the defender<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_219"></a>[219]</span> -nearest to it will intercept it and return the pass. The others will -head downfield as blockers.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure126" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure126.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 126</span></p> -</div> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure127" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure127.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 127</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Tackling Drill in the Secondary</i> (8-10 men):</h4> - -<p><a href="#figure128">Figure 128</a> illustrates a drill which we use on the sideline, -teaching our backs to utilize the sideline properly as the “twelfth -man.” The dots represent shirts which are placed six yards from -the sideline. The defensive tackler (T) gets in a good football -position, which I have described previously, and makes the ball -carrier come to him. The ball carrier may take any course or -use any individual tactic he wishes to evade the tackler, as long -as he stays inside of the six-yard area. We do not want the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_220"></a>[220]</span> -tackler to meet the ball carrier head on, but we want him to -approach his man from an angle, keeping leverage on the ball -carrier in order to force him out of bounds. The tackler should -keep his head in front of the ball carrier, and should try to butt -the football with his helmet.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp50" id="figure128" style="max-width: 18.75em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure128.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 128</span></p> -</div> - -<h3>DRILLS FOR THE DEFENSIVE ENDS</h3> - -<p>The following drills are used to teach individual and team -techniques for the defensive ends:</p> - -<h4><i>Peel-Off Drill</i> (10-12 men):</h4> - -<p><a href="#figure129">Figure 129</a> illustrates a good drill to teach reaction and to -protect his area, which we use for our defensive ends. The end<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_221"></a>[221]</span> -assumes his normal defensive position. The first backfield blocker -attempts to block the end, then the second, and finally the third -blocker. As soon as the first man leaves, the second starts, and -then the third blocker leaves, giving the defensive end experience -in playing one blocker at a time but in rapid succession.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure129" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure129.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 129</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>“Reading” Drills</i> (8-12 men):</h4> - -<p><a href="#figure130">Figure 130</a> illustrates a “Reading” Drill which we use for -our defensive ends. The end has to play properly the block of -the offensive end, pulling guard, on-side halfback and/or the -fullback. These are the situations he will face in a game. This -drill teaches quick reaction and play recognition for the defensive -ends.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp83" id="figure130" style="max-width: 15.625em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure130.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 130</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>All Secondary Drills</i>:</h4> - -<p>Since we consider our ends as part of our defensive secondary, -as I explained previously, they will take part in all of the -drills explained and illustrated in <a href="#figure120">Figures 120-128</a>, if feasible.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_222"></a>[222]</span></p> - -<h3>DRILLS FOR THE DEFENSIVE INTERIOR LINEMEN</h3> - -<p>The following drills are used to teach individual and team -techniques to the interior linemen:</p> - -<h4><i>Butt Ball Drill</i> (8-10 men):</h4> - -<p>An offensive man is given a football and told to run a straight -line laterally back and forth, carrying the ball on the side he is -moving toward. The defensive man must be in a good football -position moving back and forth with the offensive man, butting -the football with his forehead. He bounces back and forth and -keeps butting the football trying to knock it out of the ball -carrier’s arm. The tackler’s head should be up and his back -straight. (The Butt Ball Drill is not illustrated by diagram.)</p> - -<h4><i>4-on-1 Drill</i> (6-8 men):</h4> - -<p><a href="#figure131">Figure 131</a> illustrates four offensive blockers playing one -defensive man. The coach stands behind the defensive player, -and indicates by hand signal the starting count and the blocking -assignments of the offensive men. The defensive man must react -to the various blocks—double team, wedge, trap, etc., and fights -pressure.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp93" id="figure131" style="max-width: 15.625em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure131.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 131</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>A & M Wave Drill</i> (9-12 men):</h4> - -<p>On a signal, the offensive men will uncoil on the defensive -men, illustrated in <a href="#figure132">Figure 132</a>. The defenders must control the -blockers with their hands and forearms, locate the ball and -pursue in the direction the coach points or runs with the football.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_223"></a>[223]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp83" id="figure132" style="max-width: 15.625em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure132.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 132</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>3-on-3 Drill</i> (16-24 men):</h4> - -<p>The offense runs a hand-off to the right or left halfback, or -to the fullback. The coach, standing behind the defensive team, -indicates which back will carry the football. The defensive man -varies his techniques from head on, inside, outside or linebacker. -If the play is in one defensive man’s area, he must whip -his blocker and make the play. The other two defenders take -proper pursuit angles on the ball carrier. The drill is full speed -both ways, and we do not want the men stopping until they hear -a whistle. <a href="#figure133">Figure 133</a> illustrates our alignment for the 3-on-3 -drill.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure133" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure133.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 133</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Middle Drill</i> (14-25 men):</h4> - -<p>The middle drill is similar to the previous drill, only the interior -linemen are used offensively and defensively, as illustrated -in <a href="#figure134">Figure 134</a>. The defensive alignments are changed around -and the offense runs all situations. At times we use the down -marker and chains simulating down and distance when doing -this drill.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_224"></a>[224]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure134" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure134.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 134</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>7-Man Spin-Out Drill</i> (8-12 men):</h4> - -<p><a href="#figure135">Figure 135</a> illustrates a player moving from a good defensive -position hitting the sled, spinning out, and hitting every -other pad on the machine. If moving to the right, we want the -players to hit the sled with the right shoulder, keep a tight arc, -spin out correctly, and deliver a good blow to the alternate pad. -We drill the players right and left as we want to give them practice -spinning out both ways.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure135" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure135.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 135</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Circle Drill</i> (5-7 men):</h4> - -<p>One player gets in the middle of a circle about five yards in -diameter in a good football position. On a signal from the coach -the middle man starts moving his feet, body crouched, pivoting -slowly. The coach will call out a boy’s name who is on the -outside of the circle, who will rush in facing the defender and -deliver a shoulder blow. The defender should step with the foot -closest to the rusher and deliver a forearm shiver or shoulder -blow to the man. He should play only two or three men, and -then get out of the circle, permitting another of the men to move -to the middle. <a href="#figure136">Figure 136</a> illustrates our circle drill.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_225"></a>[225]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure136" style="max-width: 15.625em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure136.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 136</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Leverage Drill</i> (8-12 men):</h4> - -<p><a href="#figure137">Figure 137</a> illustrates our Leverage Drill and we have two -groups going at the same time in opposite directions. Four blockers -are lined up one behind the other, with the defensive man -lined up on the outside shoulder of the blocker facing him. On -a command by the coach, the defender must play the first blocker -with a shiver and the other blockers one at a time with the -forearms, shoulders and hands as he retreats and reacts, not -permitting himself to be hooked from the outside and blocked in.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure137" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure137.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 137</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Explode Drill</i> (9 men):</h4> - -<p>The offensive men will line up with their inside knee on the -ground, and the defensive man in the gap between the two offensive -men, as illustrated in <a href="#figure138">Figure 138</a>. The defensive player -will explode and uncoil on his count with his tail down, head -up, and feet moving after bringing them up under him after his -initial contact. The coach will give him a hand signal, and the -defensive man must spin out properly, ending up in a good football -position. It is important for the defensive man to get under<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_226"></a>[226]</span> -the offensive men on his initial charge. We also let the blockers -go full speed and teach the defensive man to react from a -two-on-one block.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure138" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure138.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 138</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Defensive Reaction Drill</i> (14-18 men):</h4> - -<p>With the interior linemen from tackle to tackle, we place -defensive men head on the center and tackles, as illustrated in -<a href="#figure139">Figure 139</a>. A coach will stand behind the defensive men, facing -the offensive men, and give hand signals indicating starting -count and blocking patterns. The defensive men must react and -pursue the football properly.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure139" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure139.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 139</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Alabama Wave Drill</i> (8-12 men):</h4> - -<p>Four men line up facing a coach, in a good football position, -feet moving as illustrated in <a href="#figure140">Figure 140</a>. The coach points to -his right and the players using a cross-over step must react in -that direction. He then points in another direction and the players -stop, plant and start in this direction as quickly as possible. -The drill is not only a good conditioner, but teaches quickness, -too.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_227"></a>[227]</span></p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure140" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure140.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 140</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Rushing the Passer Drill</i> (12-16 men):</h4> - -<p>Using the two-man Crowther sled, two defenders explode -into the machine with a good hard blow on the snap of the -football, spin out laterally, and rush the passer playing through -two blockers (X), as indicated in <a href="#figure141">Figure 141</a>. The defensive -men must hit with the inside shoulder before spinning out to -play through the blockers at the side and rear of the sled.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp64" id="figure141" style="max-width: 18.75em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure141.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 141</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Gauntlet Drill</i> (10-12 men):</h4> - -<p>We are primarily concerned with the tacklers in this drill. -Two rows of jerseys five yards apart is the area the ball carrier -(X) is permitted to run with the football. The tacklers (T) are -five yards apart one behind the other. The ball carrier tries to -get by the tackler, and the coach is checking on the latter’s -football position—bend at the knees, back straight, hit on the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_228"></a>[228]</span> -rise, and follow-through. If the coach stands behind the ball -carrier, he will be in the best position to observe the tacklers, -making certain they do not close their eyes on contact, etc. -<a href="#figure142">Figure 142</a> illustrates our Gauntlet Drill.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp33" id="figure142" style="max-width: 14.0625em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure142.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 142</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Defensive Bucker</i> (4-6 men):</h4> - -<p>The individual Bucker Drill, not illustrated by diagram, is -used when we work in small groups. It teaches the correct form -for delivering a blow with the hands, shoulders or forearms. A -coach or manager moves the ball to simulate the start of a play, -and the defensive man reacts and moves quickly on the sight -of the ball.</p> - -<h3>DRILLS FOR THE LINEBACKERS</h3> - -<p>The following drills are used to teach individual and team -techniques to our linebackers:</p> - -<h4><i>All Secondary Drills</i>:</h4> - -<p>Since our linebackers are a part of our defensive secondary, -every drill relating to pass defense mentioned and illustrated -previously, are also used for our linebackers.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_229"></a>[229]</span></p> - -<h4><i>Eye-Opener Drill</i> (8-12 men):</h4> - -<p><a href="#figure143">Figure 143</a> illustrates four large dummies, a line of ball carriers -(O) and a line of tacklers (X). The ball carrier either -fakes at one hole and goes through the next one, or goes through -the first hole trying to beat the tackler. The linebacker tries to -keep leverage on the ball carrier, trying to meet him in the hole. -The tackler must be careful he does not over-run the ball carrier.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure143" style="max-width: 31.25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure143.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 143</span></p> -</div> - -<h4><i>Eye-Closer Drill</i> (12-15 men):</h4> - -<p><a href="#figure144">Figure 144</a> illustrates our Eye-Closer Drill with the offense -running its middle attack and the linebackers in particular reacting -to every situation they are likely to encounter in a game.</p> - -<div class="figcenter illowp100" id="figure144" style="max-width: 25em;"> - <img class="w100" src="images/figure144.jpg" alt="" /> - <p class="caption"><span class="smcap">Figure 144</span></p> -</div> - -<p>The linebackers also take part in the following drills which -I have discussed and illustrated previously:</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_230"></a>[230]</span></p> - -<div class="blockquote"> - -<p>1. Defensive Bucker Drill.</p> - -<p>2. Gauntlet Drill.</p> - -<p>3. Middle Drill.</p> - -<p>4. Pursuit Drill.</p> - -<p>5. Wave Drill.</p> - -<p>6. Peel-Off Drill.</p> -</div> - -<h3>DEFENSIVE DRILLS FOR THE TEAM</h3> - -<p>When we have defensive drills for our entire team, it is usually -three-quarters full speed, or as we commonly refer to it, full -speed except for tackling.</p> - -<p>We also have drills in which our linemen run half-speed and -the defensive secondary, full speed. At times one side of the line -will be full speed and the other half-speed. The offense is operating -full speed and does not know which side of the defensive -line is full speed and which side is half-speed.</p> - -<p>Our game condition scrimmages are about the only time our -entire defensive unit will play full speed, with the exception of -full speed goal line defensive scrimmages occasionally. We learn -and rehearse our defenses as a team, but seldom scrimmage full -speed as a team.</p> - -<h3>CONCLUSION</h3> - -<p>We think our drills are functional in nature, and this is why -we use them. I cannot see the value of employing drills which -are not functional and which do not adhere to the individual -and team techniques we will use in a game. We want to drill -and rehearse the players in practice the way we want them to -perform in a game.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_231"></a>[231]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_12">CHAPTER 12<br /> -<span class="smaller">Those Who Stay Will Be Champions</span></h2> - -</div> - -<p>Quitting comes easy for many people. Many do not want to -pay the price to be a winner. It requires little effort to be a loser—and -anyone who tries can be most successful. The “solid -citizens” who finish my “course” will be better men as a result -of having stuck it out. The boy who sets his mind to do what -is required of him in order to be a winner is not only the type -of boy we are looking for, but he will get the most from the -program. Those who stay will be champions and will become -winners not only on the football field but in life itself.</p> - -<p>Walter D. Wintle’s poem about a person’s state of mind has -a great deal of meaning to it. We have the poem posted in -various places throughout our building so our boys can read it -from time to time. The poem is as follows:</p> - -<h3><i>It’s All in a State of Mind</i></h3> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> - <div class="stanza"> - <div class="verse indent0">If you think you are beaten, you are;</div> - <div class="verse indent0">If you think you dare not, you won’t;</div> - <div class="verse indent0">If you like to win, but don’t think you can,</div> - <div class="verse indent0">It’s almost a cinch you won’t.</div> - </div> - <div class="stanza"> - <div class="verse indent0">If you think you’ll lose, you’re lost;</div> - <div class="verse indent0">For out in the world you’ll find</div> - <div class="verse indent0">Success begins with a fellow’s will;</div> - <div class="verse indent0">It’s all in a state of mind.</div><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_232"></a>[232]</span> - </div> - <div class="stanza"> - <div class="verse indent0">For many a game is lost</div> - <div class="verse indent0">Ere even a play is run,</div> - <div class="verse indent0">And many a coward fails</div> - <div class="verse indent0">Ere even his work is begun.</div> - </div> - <div class="stanza"> - <div class="verse indent0">Think big and your deeds will grow,</div> - <div class="verse indent0">Think small and you’ll fall behind;</div> - <div class="verse indent0">Think that you <i>can</i> and you <i>will</i>;</div> - <div class="verse indent0">It’s all in a state of mind.</div> - </div> - <div class="stanza"> - <div class="verse indent0">If you think you are out-classed, you are;</div> - <div class="verse indent0">You’ve got to think high to rise;</div> - <div class="verse indent0">You’ve got to be sure of yourself before</div> - <div class="verse indent0">You can ever win a prize.</div> - </div> - <div class="stanza"> - <div class="verse indent0">Life’s battles don’t always go</div> - <div class="verse indent0">To the stronger or faster man,</div> - <div class="verse indent0">But sooner or later, the man who wins</div> - <div class="verse indent0">Is the fellow who thinks he can.</div> - </div> -</div> -</div> - -<p>We must inspire our boys to the degree they think and know -they are capable of doing what it takes to win. Teaching the -boys how to accomplish this is extremely gratifying and one of -the rewards of coaching.</p> - -<p>From time to time I have been asked, “Coach, what has been -your greatest thrill as a football coach?” Trying to single out -the “greatest thrill,” or even one of my greatest thrills as a coach, -is very difficult for me to do. The game of football has been -thoroughly rewarding to me.</p> - -<p>I recall one thrill in particular, the day our 1956 team at -Texas A & M defeated the University of Texas, 34-21, in Austin. -You like to win ’em all, but the real thrill is the story behind -this particular game.</p> - -<p>It actually started in the spring of 1954 when I first went -to Texas A & M. The Aggies had not won the Southwest Conference -Championship in 15 years. We hoped to remedy this -situation in time, so we commenced our building program that -spring.</p> - -<p>In the fall we took our players to Junction, a small place in -South Texas, for pre-season training. The work was hard and -the weather was hot, and many boys dropped by the wayside. -Many did not want to pay the price to be a winner.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_233"></a>[233]</span></p> - -<p>That fall I imagine those who had not remained for early -season practice felt they had made a wise decision since we won -only one football game. Those who stayed, although beaten in -every game except one, seemed more determined than ever to -prove their point. They fought their hearts out in every game -and although beaten they won the admiration and respect of -everyone for their courage. While it was disappointing to lose, -I felt deep down in my heart if those boys stayed, they would -be champions by the time they were seniors.</p> - -<p>The following year we had a good team, but we lost the final -game of the season to the University of Texas, and with it we -lost the Conference Championship. So close, yet so far was the -elusive championship and a victory over Texas.</p> - -<p>From the beginning of the 1956 season the determination of -the senior group was evident. Consequently we went into the -final game of the season with Texas in Austin, undefeated. There -was more to it than just a mere football game. The Aggies had -not beaten the University of Texas in Austin for a period of 33 -years. In fact they had never beaten Texas in Memorial Stadium, -the site of the 1956 battle.</p> - -<p>The afternoon of November 29, 1956 could mean a great deal -to this group of boys who started setting their sights at Junction -in 1954. The public was aware of the fact these boys could -win the Southwest Conference Championship, have an undefeated -season, and break the “jinx” at Memorial Stadium. -They probably were not aware the stakes were higher. These -boys had a chance to prove to themselves that they were men; -they could and would do what it takes, no matter how tough it -may be, to become champions.</p> - -<p>The greatest thrill was not in the final score, 34-21. The -thrill was watching those boys work, grow, develop and rise -from a season in 1954 where they won only one game to an -undefeated season in 1956. These boys paid the price to become -champions. They were champs then, and they will always be -champions, because they know, understand, and are willing to -do what they must do to be successful. The boys who started -at Junction as sophomores are as follows: Don Watson, Lloyd -Hale, Jack Pardee, Gene Stallings, Bob Keith, Dennis Goehring,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_234"></a>[234]</span> -Dee Powell and Bobby Lockett. As for the boys who dropped -out because the going was too tough, who can remember their -names?</p> - -<div class="poetry-container"> -<div class="poetry"> - <div class="stanza"> - <div class="verse indent0">... For out in the world you’ll find</div> - <div class="verse indent0">Success begins with a fellow’s will;</div> - <div class="verse indent0">It’s all in a state of mind....</div> - </div> -</div> -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_235"></a>[235]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="Index">Index</h2> - -</div> - -<ul> - -<li class="ifrst">A & M wave drill, <a href="#Page_222">222-223</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Action pass:</li> -<li class="isub1">coverage of, <a href="#Page_75">75-77</a></li> -<li class="isub1">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_78">78-79</a></li> -<li class="isub1">from flanker set, 4-spoke coverage versus, <a href="#Page_96">96-97</a></li> -<li class="isub1">from floater set, 4-spoke coverage versus, <a href="#Page_98">98-99</a></li> -<li class="isub1">4-spoke pass defense against, <a href="#Page_92">92-93</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Africa, <a href="#Page_16">16</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Against the grain, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Aggies, <a href="#Page_232">232</a>, <a href="#Page_233">233</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Agility drills, <a href="#Page_209">209</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Alabama wave drill, <a href="#Page_226">226-227</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Ant plan, <a href="#Page_16">16-17</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Assistant_coach">Assistant coach, <a href="#Page_203">203</a>, <a href="#Page_204">204</a>, <a href="#Page_212">212</a></li> -<li class="isub1">group work, <a href="#Page_21">21</a></li> -<li class="isub1">responsibility, <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li> -<li class="isub1">specialist, <a href="#Page_21">21-22</a></li> -<li class="isub1">type of man, <a href="#Page_18">18-20</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Automatics, <a href="#Page_151">151-152</a></li> -<li class="isub1">faking, <a href="#Page_152">152</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Backs:</li> -<li class="isub1">flanked out, defense adjustments versus, <a href="#Page_56">56-57</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in victory defense, <a href="#Page_47">47</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Bad play, <a href="#Page_141">141</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Ball carrying techniques, <a href="#Page_155">155-157</a></li> -<li class="isub1">mental attitude and, <a href="#Page_157">157</a></li> -<li class="isub1">open field running, <a href="#Page_156">156-157</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Baltimore Colts, <a href="#Page_3">3</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Baseball terminology, <a href="#Page_214">214</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Berry, Ray, <a href="#Page_3">3</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Best defensive player, in victory defense, <a href="#Page_47">47-48</a></li> - -<li class="indx">“Big plays,” <a href="#Page_214">214</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Big tip drill, <a href="#Page_218">218-219</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Blocked kicks, <a href="#Page_114">114</a>, <a href="#Page_115">115</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Blocking techniques, <a href="#Page_157">157-166</a></li> -<li class="isub1">blocking linebackers, <a href="#Page_159">159-160</a></li> -<li class="isub1">crack back block, <a href="#Page_164">164-165</a></li> -<li class="isub1">downfield, <a href="#Page_160">160-161</a></li> -<li class="isub1">drive block, <a href="#Page_157">157-158</a></li> -<li class="isub1">junction block, <a href="#Page_165">165</a></li> -<li class="isub1">pass protection, <a href="#Page_163">163-164</a></li> -<li class="isub1">post-lead block, <a href="#Page_161">161-162</a></li> -<li class="isub1">reverse shoulder block, <a href="#Page_158">158-159</a></li> -<li class="isub1">roll block, <a href="#Page_165">165-166</a></li> -<li class="isub1">trap block, <a href="#Page_162">162-163</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Box defense, <a href="#Page_143">143</a>, <a href="#Page_190">190</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Bucker drill, <a href="#Page_228">228</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Butt ball drill, <a href="#Page_222">222</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Butt block, <a href="#Page_120">120</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Center, <a href="#Page_114">114</a></li> -<li class="isub1">extra point and field goal blocking rules, <a href="#Page_137">137</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in goal line defense, <a href="#Page_49">49-50</a></li> -<li class="isub1">offensive stance for, <a href="#Page_145">145</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in quick kick formation, <a href="#Page_125">125</a></li> -<li class="isub1">spread punt blocking rules, <a href="#Page_119">119</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Champions, <a href="#Page_231">231-234</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Chop block, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Church, <a href="#Page_20">20</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Circle drill, <a href="#Page_224">224-225</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Clemson College, <a href="#Page_16">16</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Climb block, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Club, <a href="#Page_142">142-143</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Coach">Coach:</li> -<li class="isub1">assistant (<i>see</i> <a href="#Assistant_coach">Assistant coach</a>)</li> -<li class="isub1">backfield, <a href="#Page_187">187</a>, <a href="#Page_195">195-196</a></li> -<li class="isub1">dedication, <a href="#Page_10">10</a></li> -<li class="isub1">defensive, <a href="#Page_21">21-22</a>, <a href="#Page_208">208</a>, <a href="#Page_212">212</a></li> -<li class="isub1">head (<i>see</i> <a href="#Head_coach">Head coach</a>)</li> -<li class="isub1">high school, <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li> -<li class="isub1"><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_236"></a>[236]</span>long term contract, <a href="#Page_9">9-10</a></li> -<li class="isub1">mental toughness, <a href="#Page_10">10</a></li> -<li class="isub1">necessity of a plan, <a href="#Page_11">11</a></li> -<li class="isub1">offensive, <a href="#Page_21">21-22</a>, <a href="#Page_205">205</a>, <a href="#Page_208">208</a>, <a href="#Page_212">212</a></li> -<li class="isub1">qualifications, <a href="#Page_10">10</a></li> -<li class="isub1">quarterback, <a href="#Page_194">194</a></li> -<li class="isub1">staff, <a href="#Page_11">11</a></li> -<li class="isub1">and winning team, <a href="#Page_9">9-11</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Coaching">Coaching:</li> -<li class="isub1">division of duties, <a href="#Page_21">21-23</a></li> -<li class="isub1">over-coaching kickers, <a href="#Page_112">112</a></li> -<li class="isub1">rewards of, <a href="#Page_232">232</a></li> -<li class="isub1">teaching and, <a href="#Page_23">23</a></li> -<li class="isub1">(<i>see also</i> <a href="#Planning_for_a_game">Planning for a game</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Color, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Conerly, Charlie, <a href="#Page_2">2</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Corner man:</li> -<li class="isub1">defensive stance, <a href="#Page_43">43</a></li> -<li class="isub1">left, defensive:</li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke pass defense versus action pass, <a href="#Page_93">93</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from flanker set, <a href="#Page_96">96-97</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from floater set, <a href="#Page_99">99</a></li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke pass coverage versus straight drop back pass, <a href="#Page_91">91</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from flanker set, <a href="#Page_95">95</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from floater set, <a href="#Page_98">98</a></li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke pass defense versus roll-out pass, <a href="#Page_95">95</a></li> -<li class="isub1">right, defensive:</li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke pass defense versus action pass, <a href="#Page_92">92</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from flanker set, <a href="#Page_97">97</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from floater set, <a href="#Page_99">99</a></li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke pass coverage versus straight drop back pass, <a href="#Page_91">91</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from flanker set, <a href="#Page_96">96</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from floater set, <a href="#Page_97">97-98</a></li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke pass defense versus roll-out pass, <a href="#Page_94">94</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Cotton Bowl, <a href="#Page_3">3</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Courage, example of, <a href="#Page_4">4-7</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Covered, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Covering third-and-fourths drill, <a href="#Page_216">216-217</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Crack back, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Crack back block, <a href="#Page_164">164-165</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Cross-body block, <a href="#Page_120">120</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Crow, John, <a href="#Page_141">141</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Cutchin, Phil, <a href="#Page_195">195</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Cut off, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Dedication:</li> -<li class="isub1">coach, <a href="#Page_10">10</a></li> -<li class="isub1">players, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Defenders, pass defense by, <a href="#Page_85">85</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Defense">Defense, <a href="#Page_24">24-61</a></li> -<li class="isub1">axioms, <a href="#Page_27">27</a></li> -<li class="isub1">errors, <a href="#Page_26">26</a></li> -<li class="isub1">gang tackling, <a href="#Page_28">28</a></li> -<li class="isub1">goal line, <a href="#Page_48">48-51</a></li> -<li class="isub1">importance of belief in, <a href="#Page_61">61</a></li> -<li class="isub1">limiting offense, <a href="#Page_26">26</a></li> -<li class="isub1">numbering system, <a href="#Page_28">28-34</a></li> -<li class="isub2">advantages of, <a href="#Page_34">34</a></li> -<li class="isub1">objectives, <a href="#Page_24">24-27</a></li> -<li class="isub1">offensive-minded, <a href="#Page_25">25</a></li> -<li class="isub1">pass (<i>see</i> <a href="#Pass_defense">Pass defense</a>)</li> -<li class="isub1">personal challenge, <a href="#Page_26">26-27</a></li> -<li class="isub1">philosophy of, <a href="#Page_26">26</a></li> -<li class="isub1">reaction football, <a href="#Page_26">26</a></li> -<li class="isub1">scoring, <a href="#Page_25">25</a>, <a href="#Page_26">26</a></li> -<li class="isub1">signal callers, <a href="#Page_33">33</a>, <a href="#Page_34">34</a></li> -<li class="isub1">6-2 alignment, <a href="#Page_53">53-56</a></li> -<li class="isub1">split-T, <a href="#Page_51">51-55</a></li> -<li class="isub1">stance, <a href="#Page_41">41-43</a></li> -<li class="isub1">surprise, <a href="#Page_44">44-46</a></li> -<li class="isub1">team proposition, <a href="#Page_27">27-28</a></li> -<li class="isub1">techniques, playing of, <a href="#Page_34">34-41</a></li> -<li class="isub1">versus backs and ends flanked, <a href="#Page_56">56-57</a></li> -<li class="isub1">versus single wing offense, <a href="#Page_57">57-61</a></li> -<li class="isub1">versus unbalanced line, <a href="#Page_56">56</a></li> -<li class="isub1">victory, <a href="#Page_46">46-48</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Defensive alignment:</li> -<li class="isub1">attacking, <a href="#Page_171">171</a></li> -<li class="isub1">even, <a href="#Page_190">190</a></li> -<li class="isub1">numbering, <a href="#Page_166">166-171</a></li> -<li class="isub1">odd, <a href="#Page_190">190</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Defensive bucker drill, <a href="#Page_228">228</a>, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Defensive coach, <a href="#Page_21">21-22</a>, <a href="#Page_208">208</a>, <a href="#Page_212">212</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Defensive cuts drill, <a href="#Page_215">215</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Defensive ends, drills for, <a href="#Page_220">220-221</a></li> - -<li class="indx"><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_237"></a>[237]</span>Defensive football (<i>see</i> <a href="#Defense">Defense</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Defensive interior linemen, drills for, <a href="#Page_222">222-228</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Defensive reaction drill, <a href="#Page_226">226</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Defensive secondary:</li> -<li class="isub1">drills for, <a href="#Page_215">215-220</a></li> -<li class="isub1">stunting in, <a href="#Page_105">105-110</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Desire to excel, <a href="#Page_13">13</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Dietzel, Paul, <a href="#Page_2">2</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Dog fight, <a href="#Page_25">25</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Dog fight drill, <a href="#Page_217">217</a></li> -<li class="isub1">for safety man, <a href="#Page_218">218</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Downfield blocking, <a href="#Page_160">160-161</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Drills, <a href="#Page_215">215-230</a></li> -<li class="isub1">for defensive ends, <a href="#Page_220">220-221</a></li> -<li class="isub1">for defensive interior linemen, <a href="#Page_222">222-228</a></li> -<li class="isub1">defensive, for team, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li> -<li class="isub1">functional, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li> -<li class="isub1">for linebackers, <a href="#Page_228">228-230</a></li> -<li class="isub1">for secondary, <a href="#Page_215">215-220</a></li> -<li class="isub1">(<i>see also under</i> Name of Drill)</li> - -<li class="indx">Drive block, <a href="#Page_143">143</a>, <a href="#Page_157">157-158</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Drive man, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Eagle, <a href="#Page_144">144</a></li> - -<li class="indx">“Easy” touchdown, <a href="#Page_24">24</a>, <a href="#Page_25">25</a>, <a href="#Page_27">27</a>, <a href="#Page_61">61</a></li> - -<li class="indx">8-man front, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> -<li class="isub1">recognizing and attacking, <a href="#Page_190">190-192</a></li> - -<li class="indx">8 technique, <a href="#Page_40">40</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Ends">Ends:</li> -<li class="isub1">blocking rules:</li> -<li class="isub2">extra point and field goal, <a href="#Page_137">137-138</a></li> -<li class="isub2">spread punt, <a href="#Page_119">119</a></li> -<li class="isub2">tight punt formation, <a href="#Page_123">123</a></li> -<li class="isub1">defense versus single wing offense, <a href="#Page_58">58</a></li> -<li class="isub1">defensive stance, <a href="#Page_42">42</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in 5-spoke defense, <a href="#Page_70">70</a></li> -<li class="isub1">flanked out, defense adjustments versus, <a href="#Page_56">56-57</a></li> -<li class="isub1">goal line defense, <a href="#Page_49">49</a></li> -<li class="isub1">left, in punt return, <a href="#Page_127">127-128</a></li> -<li class="isub1">left, defensive:</li> -<li class="isub2">coverage of action pass from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_78">78</a></li> -<li class="isub2">coverage of straight drop back pass, <a href="#Page_75">75</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_78">78</a></li> -<li class="isub1">pass defense by, <a href="#Page_81">81-82</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in quick kick formation, <a href="#Page_125">125</a></li> -<li class="isub1">right, in punt return, <a href="#Page_128">128</a></li> -<li class="isub1">right, defensive:</li> -<li class="isub2">coverage of action pass, <a href="#Page_76">76</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_79">79</a></li> -<li class="isub2">coverage of straight drop back pass, <a href="#Page_75">75</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_77">77</a></li> -<li class="isub1">6-2 alignment, <a href="#Page_53">53-54</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in split-T defense, <a href="#Page_52">52</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in victory defense, <a href="#Page_47">47</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Errors, <a href="#Page_24">24</a>, <a href="#Page_26">26</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Even defense, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Explode drills, <a href="#Page_225">225-226</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Extra-point, blocking rules, <a href="#Page_137">137-138</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Eye-closer drill, <a href="#Page_229">229</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Eye-opener drill, <a href="#Page_229">229</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Far back, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Field goal:</li> -<li class="isub1">blocking rules, <a href="#Page_137">137-138</a></li> -<li class="isub1">defending against attempt, <a href="#Page_139">139</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Field position, <a href="#Page_187">187-190</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Fighting spirit, <a href="#Page_186">186</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Fill, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Films, of game, <a href="#Page_203">203</a>, <a href="#Page_204">204</a>, <a href="#Page_206">206</a>, <a href="#Page_212">212</a></li> -<li class="isub1">grading, <a href="#Page_213">213-214</a></li> - -<li class="indx">First down zone, <a href="#Page_189">189</a></li> - -<li class="indx">5-spoke defense, <a href="#Page_31">31</a>, <a href="#Page_32">32</a>, <a href="#Page_33">33</a>, <a href="#Page_66">66-73</a></li> -<li class="isub1">(<i>see also</i> <a href="#five-spoke">5-spoke pass defense</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx" id="five-spoke">5-spoke pass defense:</li> -<li class="isub1">advantages of, <a href="#Page_85">85-86</a></li> -<li class="isub1">dividing the areas, <a href="#Page_71">71-73</a></li> -<li class="isub1">principle of, <a href="#Page_87">87</a></li> - -<li class="indx">5 technique, <a href="#Page_38">38</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Flanker set:</li> -<li class="isub1">4-spoke coverage versus straight drop back pass from, <a href="#Page_95">95-96</a></li> -<li class="isub1">4-spoke coverage versus action pass from, <a href="#Page_96">96-97</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Flare, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Flooding an area, <a href="#Page_179">179-181</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Flow, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Football:</li> -<li class="isub1"><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_238"></a>[238]</span>American way of life, <a href="#Page_3">3-4</a></li> -<li class="isub1">intrinsic values of, <a href="#Page_4">4-7</a></li> -<li class="isub1">winning, theory of, <a href="#Page_8">8-17</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Four Horsemen, <a href="#Page_1">1</a></li> - -<li class="indx">4-on-1 drill, <a href="#Page_222">222</a></li> - -<li class="indx">4-spoke defense, <a href="#Page_30">30-31</a></li> -<li class="isub1">(<i>see also</i> <a href="#four-spoke">4-spoke pass defense</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx" id="four-spoke">4-spoke pass defense:</li> -<li class="isub1">advantages of, <a href="#Page_87">87-89</a></li> -<li class="isub1">alignment, <a href="#Page_89">89-90</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in 40 series, <a href="#Page_99">99</a></li> -<li class="isub1">principle of, <a href="#Page_87">87</a></li> -<li class="isub1">versus action pass, <a href="#Page_92">92-93</a></li> -<li class="isub2">from flanker set, <a href="#Page_96">96-97</a></li> -<li class="isub2">from floater set, <a href="#Page_98">98-99</a></li> -<li class="isub1">versus flanker set, <a href="#Page_95">95-97</a></li> -<li class="isub1">versus floater set, <a href="#Page_97">97-99</a></li> -<li class="isub1">versus roll-out pass, <a href="#Page_93">93-95</a></li> -<li class="isub1">versus straight drop back pass, <a href="#Page_90">90-92</a></li> -<li class="isub2">from floater set, <a href="#Page_97">97-98</a></li> - -<li class="indx">4 technique, <a href="#Page_35">35</a>, <a href="#Page_37">37</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Free wheeling zone, <a href="#Page_189">189</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Fullback:</li> -<li class="isub1">in goal line defense, <a href="#Page_50">50-51</a></li> -<li class="isub1">offensive stance for, <a href="#Page_146">146</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in quick kick formation, <a href="#Page_125">125</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Fumbling, <a href="#Page_27">27</a>, <a href="#Page_28">28</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Gain, Bob, <a href="#Page_112">112</a></li> - -<li class="indx">“Gangster,” <a href="#Page_108">108-109</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Gang tackling, <a href="#Page_28">28</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Gap, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Gap 8 alignment, <a href="#Page_32">32</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Gauntlet drill, <a href="#Page_227">227-228</a>, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Gilmer, Harry, <a href="#Page_2">2</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Gipp, George, <a href="#Page_3">3</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Goal line defense, <a href="#Page_48">48-51</a></li> -<li class="isub1">challenge of, <a href="#Page_48">48</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Goehring, Dennis, <a href="#Page_233">233</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Going wide, <a href="#Page_171">171-174</a></li> -<li class="isub1">change-off for blockers, <a href="#Page_174">174</a></li> -<li class="isub1">quarterback option, <a href="#Page_172">172-173</a></li> -<li class="isub1">run-pass option, <a href="#Page_172">172</a></li> -<li class="isub1">three-way option, <a href="#Page_173">173-174</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Grange, Red, <a href="#Page_1">1</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Groin block, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Guards">Guards:</li> -<li class="isub1">blocking rules:</li> -<li class="isub2">for extra point and field goal, <a href="#Page_137">137-138</a></li> -<li class="isub2">for spread punt, <a href="#Page_119">119</a></li> -<li class="isub1">defense versus single wing offense, <a href="#Page_58">58</a></li> -<li class="isub1">defensive stance, <a href="#Page_42">42</a></li> -<li class="isub1">goal line defense, <a href="#Page_49">49</a></li> -<li class="isub1">middle:</li> -<li class="isub2">in punt return, <a href="#Page_127">127</a></li> -<li class="isub2">in split-T defense, <a href="#Page_52">52</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in quick kick formation, <a href="#Page_125">125</a></li> -<li class="isub1">right, in punt return, <a href="#Page_128">128</a></li> -<li class="isub1">6-2 alignment, <a href="#Page_53">53</a></li> -<li class="isub2">versus single wing offense, <a href="#Page_59">59</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Gut zone, <a href="#Page_189">189</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Hale, Lloyd, <a href="#Page_233">233</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Halfbacks">Halfbacks:</li> -<li class="isub1">defensive, pass defense by, <a href="#Page_83">83-84</a></li> -<li class="isub1">defensive stance, <a href="#Page_43">43</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in 5-spoke defense, <a href="#Page_70">70</a></li> -<li class="isub1">left:</li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke coverage versus action pass from floater set, <a href="#Page_99">99</a></li> -<li class="isub2">in goal line defense, <a href="#Page_51">51</a></li> -<li class="isub2">in quick kick formation, <a href="#Page_125">125-126</a></li> -<li class="isub1">left, defensive:</li> -<li class="isub2">coverage of action pass, <a href="#Page_76">76</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_79">79</a></li> -<li class="isub2">coverage of straight drop back pass, <a href="#Page_75">75</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_77">77</a></li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke pass defense versus action pass, <a href="#Page_93">93</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from flanker set, <a href="#Page_97">97</a></li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke pass defense versus roll-out pass, <a href="#Page_94">94</a></li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke pass coverage versus straight drop back pass, <a href="#Page_91">91</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from flanker set, <a href="#Page_95">95-96</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from floater set, <a href="#Page_98">98</a></li> -<li class="isub1">offensive stance for, <a href="#Page_146">146</a></li> -<li class="isub1"><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_239"></a>[239]</span>in punt return, <a href="#Page_128">128</a></li> -<li class="isub1">right:</li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke coverage versus action pass from floater set, <a href="#Page_99">99</a></li> -<li class="isub2">in goal line defense, <a href="#Page_50">50-51</a></li> -<li class="isub2">in quick kick formation, <a href="#Page_125">125</a></li> -<li class="isub1">right, defensive:</li> -<li class="isub2">coverage of action pass, <a href="#Page_76">76</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_79">79</a></li> -<li class="isub2">coverage of straight drop back pass, <a href="#Page_75">75</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_77">77</a></li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke pass defense versus action pass, <a href="#Page_91">91-92</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from flanker set, <a href="#Page_97">97</a></li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke pass defense versus roll-out pass, <a href="#Page_94">94</a></li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke pass coverage versus straight drop back pass, <a href="#Page_91">91</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from floater set, <a href="#Page_96">96</a>, <a href="#Page_98">98</a></li> -<li class="isub1">6-2 alignment, <a href="#Page_54">54</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in victory defense, <a href="#Page_47">47</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Head_coach">Head coach, <a href="#Page_18">18</a>, <a href="#Page_23">23</a></li> -<li class="isub1">delegation of responsibility, <a href="#Page_22">22</a>, <a href="#Page_23">23</a></li> -<li class="isub1">example, <a href="#Page_19">19</a></li> -<li class="isub1">group work, <a href="#Page_21">21</a></li> -<li class="isub1">(<i>see also</i> <a href="#Coach">Coach</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Head on, <a href="#Page_144">144</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Henderson, Gene, <a href="#Page_114">114</a></li> - -<li class="indx">High school coach, plan for, <a href="#Page_22">22</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Holder, in extra point and field goal attempt, <a href="#Page_138">138</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Howard, Frank, <a href="#Page_16">16</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Huddle, offensive, <a href="#Page_152">152-153</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Ice, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Inspiration, <a href="#Page_232">232</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Intercept drill, <a href="#Page_215">215-216</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Intercepting passes, <a href="#Page_27">27</a>, <a href="#Page_62">62</a>, <a href="#Page_66">66</a>, <a href="#Page_105">105</a></li> - -<li class="indx">“It’s All in a State of Mind,” <a href="#Page_231">231-232</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Junction block, <a href="#Page_165">165</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Keith, Bob, <a href="#Page_233">233</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Kicker:</li> -<li class="isub1">blocking rules for tight punt formation, <a href="#Page_124">124</a></li> -<li class="isub1">over-coaching, <a href="#Page_112">112</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in quick kick formation, <a href="#Page_125">125-126</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Kicking, in defensive football, <a href="#Page_24">24-25</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Kicking_game_techniques">Kicking game techniques, <a href="#Page_111">111-139</a></li> -<li class="isub1">extra point blocking rules, <a href="#Page_137">137-138</a></li> -<li class="isub1">field goal attempt:</li> -<li class="isub2">blocking rules, <a href="#Page_137">137</a></li> -<li class="isub2">defense against, <a href="#Page_139">139</a></li> -<li class="isub1">kick-off, and its coverage, <a href="#Page_130">130-137</a></li> -<li class="isub1">kick-off return, <a href="#Page_132">132-134</a></li> -<li class="isub1">on side (short) kick, <a href="#Page_134">134-136</a></li> -<li class="isub2">defending against, <a href="#Page_136">136-137</a></li> -<li class="isub1">place kicking formation, <a href="#Page_138">138</a></li> -<li class="isub1">punting, <a href="#Page_111">111-116</a></li> -<li class="isub1">punt return, <a href="#Page_126">126-130</a></li> -<li class="isub1">quick kick formation, <a href="#Page_124">124-126</a></li> -<li class="isub1">spread punt formation, <a href="#Page_116">116-122</a>, <a href="#Page_126">126</a></li> -<li class="isub1">tight punt formation, <a href="#Page_122">122-124</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Kick-off, <a href="#Page_27">27</a>, <a href="#Page_130">130-137</a></li> -<li class="isub1">coverage, <a href="#Page_130">130</a></li> -<li class="isub1">types, <a href="#Page_130">130-132</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Kick-off return, <a href="#Page_27">27</a>, <a href="#Page_132">132-134</a></li> -<li class="isub1">middle, <a href="#Page_133">133</a></li> -<li class="isub1">right, <a href="#Page_132">132</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">L.B., <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">LeBaron, Eddie, <a href="#Page_2">2</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Left end (<i>see under</i> <a href="#Ends">Ends</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Left halfback (<i>see under</i> <a href="#Halfbacks">Halfbacks</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Left tackle (<i>see under</i> <a href="#Tackles">Tackles</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Leverage drill, <a href="#Page_225">225</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Lewis, Tommy, <a href="#Page_3">3</a></li> - -<li class="indx">“Lightning,” <a href="#Page_109">109-110</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Linebackers:</li> -<li class="isub1">blocking by offense, <a href="#Page_159">159-160</a></li> -<li class="isub1">defensive:</li> -<li class="isub2"><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_240"></a>[240]</span>4-spoke defense versus action pass, <a href="#Page_93">93</a></li> -<li class="isub2">4-spoke pass coverage versus straight drop back pass, <a href="#Page_91">91-92</a></li> -<li class="isub2">pass defense by, <a href="#Page_182">182-183</a></li> -<li class="isub1">defensive stance, <a href="#Page_42">42-43</a></li> -<li class="isub1">drills for, <a href="#Page_228">228-230</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in 5-spoke defense, <a href="#Page_70">70</a></li> -<li class="isub1">4-spoke coverage versus straight drop back pass from flanker set, <a href="#Page_96">96</a></li> -<li class="isub1">inside, in goal line defense, <a href="#Page_50">50-51</a></li> -<li class="isub1">left, in punt return, <a href="#Page_128">128</a></li> -<li class="isub1">left, defensive:</li> -<li class="isub2">coverage of action pass, <a href="#Page_76">76-77</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_78">78-79</a></li> -<li class="isub2">coverage of straight drop back pass, <a href="#Page_75">75</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_78">78</a></li> -<li class="isub1">middle:</li> -<li class="isub2">in goal line defense, <a href="#Page_49">49-50</a></li> -<li class="isub2">defense versus single wing offense, <a href="#Page_58">58</a></li> -<li class="isub1">outside, in goal line defense, <a href="#Page_51">51</a></li> -<li class="isub1">right, in punt return, <a href="#Page_128">128</a></li> -<li class="isub1">right, defensive:</li> -<li class="isub2">coverage of action pass, <a href="#Page_76">76</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_79">79</a></li> -<li class="isub2">coverage of straight drop back pass, <a href="#Page_75">75</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_77">77</a></li> -<li class="isub1">6-2 alignment, <a href="#Page_54">54</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in split-T defense, <a href="#Page_52">52</a></li> -<li class="isub1">strong side, defense versus single wing offense, <a href="#Page_59">59</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in victory defense, <a href="#Page_47">47</a></li> -<li class="isub1">weak side, defense versus single wing offense, <a href="#Page_58">58</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Linemen:</li> -<li class="isub1">blocking techniques, <a href="#Page_157">157</a></li> -<li class="isub1">defensive interior, drills for, <a href="#Page_222">222-228</a></li> -<li class="isub1">interior, blocking rules for tight punt formation, <a href="#Page_122">122</a></li> -<li class="isub1">middle, in victory defense, <a href="#Page_47">47</a></li> -<li class="isub1">offensive stance for, <a href="#Page_144">144-145</a></li> -<li class="isub1">spread punt blocking principle for, <a href="#Page_119">119</a></li> -<li class="isub1">warm up time, <a href="#Page_212">212</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Line splits, <a href="#Page_146">146-150</a></li> -<li class="isub1">basic rules, <a href="#Page_147">147-150</a></li> -<li class="isub1">pre-shift position, <a href="#Page_147">147</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Lipscomb, Gene “Big Daddy,” <a href="#Page_2">2</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Lockett, Bobby, <a href="#Page_234">234</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Long term contract, value of, <a href="#Page_9">9-10</a></li> - -<li class="indx">L.O.S., <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">McKenzie, Jim, <a href="#Page_26">26</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Man on L.O.S., <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Meals, pre-game, <a href="#Page_211">211</a>, <a href="#Page_212">212</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Michigan State University, <a href="#Page_113">113</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Middle drill, <a href="#Page_223">223-224</a>, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li> - -<li class="indx">M.L.B., <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Moore, “Scrappy,” <a href="#Page_117">117</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Morale:</li> -<li class="isub1">coaching squad, <a href="#Page_21">21</a></li> -<li class="isub1">for defense, <a href="#Page_25">25</a>, <a href="#Page_26">26</a></li> -<li class="isub1">squad, <a href="#Page_21">21</a></li> -<li class="isub1">team, <a href="#Page_186">186</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Motion, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">“Must” zone, <a href="#Page_188">188-189</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Nagurski, Bronco, <a href="#Page_2">2</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Near back, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">New York Giants, <a href="#Page_2">2</a>, <a href="#Page_15">15</a></li> - -<li class="indx">9-man front, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> -<li class="isub1">recognizing and attacking, <a href="#Page_192">192-194</a></li> - -<li class="indx">9 technique, <a href="#Page_41">41</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Notre Dame University, <a href="#Page_3">3</a></li> - -<li class="indx">N/T, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Numbering system for defense, <a href="#Page_28">28-34</a></li> -<li class="isub1">advantages of, <a href="#Page_34">34</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">O’Brien, Davy, <a href="#Page_2">2</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Odd defense, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Off-back, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Offense">Offense:</li> -<li class="isub1">advantages over defense, <a href="#Page_150">150</a></li> -<li class="isub1">assignment football, <a href="#Page_26">26</a></li> -<li class="isub1">main requirements of, <a href="#Page_140">140</a></li> -<li class="isub1">mistakes, <a href="#Page_25">25</a></li> -<li class="isub1"><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_241"></a>[241]</span>objective, <a href="#Page_140">140</a></li> -<li class="isub1">primary principles of, <a href="#Page_140">140</a></li> -<li class="isub1">sound, <a href="#Page_141">141-142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Offensive coach, <a href="#Page_21">21-22</a>, <a href="#Page_205">205</a>, <a href="#Page_208">208</a>, <a href="#Page_212">212</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Offensive football (<i>see</i> <a href="#Offense">Offense</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Offensive-minded defense, <a href="#Page_25">25</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Offensive_passing_game_techniques">Offensive passing game techniques, <a href="#Page_176">176-185</a></li> -<li class="isub1">passer, <a href="#Page_176">176-179</a></li> -<li class="isub1">pass receiving, <a href="#Page_183">183-185</a></li> -<li class="isub1">pass routes, <a href="#Page_179">179-182</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Offensive_running_game">Offensive running game, <a href="#Page_140">140-175</a></li> -<li class="isub1">attacking defensive alignment, <a href="#Page_171">171</a></li> -<li class="isub1">ball carrying techniques, <a href="#Page_155">155-157</a></li> -<li class="isub1">basic principles of, <a href="#Page_140">140</a></li> -<li class="isub1">blocking techniques, <a href="#Page_157">157-166</a></li> -<li class="isub1">going wide, <a href="#Page_171">171-174</a></li> -<li class="isub1">huddle, <a href="#Page_152">152-153</a></li> -<li class="isub1">line splits, <a href="#Page_146">146-150</a></li> -<li class="isub1">numbering defensive alignments, <a href="#Page_166">166-171</a></li> -<li class="isub1">quarterback’s techniques, <a href="#Page_153">153-155</a></li> -<li class="isub1">requirements of, <a href="#Page_140">140</a></li> -<li class="isub1">snap count, <a href="#Page_150">150-152</a></li> -<li class="isub1">stance, <a href="#Page_144">144-146</a></li> -<li class="isub1">terminology, <a href="#Page_142">142-144</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Off-side, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">On-back, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">One-six formation, <a href="#Page_121">121</a></li> - -<li class="indx">1 technique, <a href="#Page_35">35-36</a></li> - -<li class="indx">On linebacker, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">On-side, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">On-side (short) kick, <a href="#Page_134">134-136</a></li> -<li class="isub1">defending against, <a href="#Page_136">136-137</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Organization, in building winning team, <a href="#Page_15">15-17</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Osborne, Roddie, <a href="#Page_141">141</a></li> - -<li class="indx">O technique, <a href="#Page_35">35</a></li> - -<li class="indx">“Out-mean,” <a href="#Page_13">13</a>, <a href="#Page_17">17</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Outside drill, <a href="#Page_218">218</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Over, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Owens, Jim, <a href="#Page_2">2</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Pardee, Jack, <a href="#Page_6">6</a>, <a href="#Page_57">57</a>, <a href="#Page_141">141</a>, <a href="#Page_233">233</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Parella, Babe, <a href="#Page_114">114</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Parilli, Vito “Babe,” <a href="#Page_176">176</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Pass_coverage">Pass coverage, <a href="#Page_73">73-81</a></li> -<li class="isub1">of action pass, <a href="#Page_75">75-77</a></li> -<li class="isub2">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_78">78-79</a></li> -<li class="isub1">of end out, <a href="#Page_79">79</a></li> -<li class="isub1">of flanked back and split end out to opposite sides, <a href="#Page_80">80-81</a></li> -<li class="isub1">of straight drop back pass, <a href="#Page_74">74-75</a></li> -<li class="isub2">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_77">77-78</a></li> -<li class="isub1">zone coverage, <a href="#Page_74">74</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Pass cuts, <a href="#Page_181">181-182</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Pass_defense">Pass defense, <a href="#Page_62">62-110</a></li> -<li class="isub1">coaching point, <a href="#Page_62">62</a></li> -<li class="isub1">5-spoke, or 3-deep, <a href="#Page_66">66-73</a></li> -<li class="isub2">advantages of, <a href="#Page_85">85-86</a></li> -<li class="isub1">4-spoke pass defense, <a href="#Page_87">87-89</a> (<i>see also</i> <a href="#four-spoke">4-spoke pass defense</a>)</li> -<li class="isub1">individual effort in, <a href="#Page_62">62</a></li> -<li class="isub1">objectives, <a href="#Page_62">62-66</a></li> -<li class="isub1">pass coverage, <a href="#Page_73">73-81</a> (<i>see also</i> <a href="#Pass_coverage">Pass coverage</a>)</li> -<li class="isub1">phases:</li> -<li class="isub2">covering areas, <a href="#Page_63">63</a>, <a href="#Page_66">66</a></li> -<li class="isub2">holding up the receivers, <a href="#Page_63">63</a>, <a href="#Page_64">64-65</a></li> -<li class="isub2">rushing the passer, <a href="#Page_63">63-64</a></li> -<li class="isub1">by positions, <a href="#Page_81">81-85</a></li> -<li class="isub1">predetermined rotation, <a href="#Page_99">99-104</a></li> -<li class="isub1">principles of, <a href="#Page_110">110</a></li> -<li class="isub1">stunting in the defensive secondary, <a href="#Page_105">105-110</a></li> -<li class="isub1">versus action pass with broken backfield, <a href="#Page_78">78-79</a></li> -<li class="isub1">versus broken backfield, <a href="#Page_77">77-78</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Passer">Passer, <a href="#Page_176">176-179</a></li> -<li class="isub1">footwork, <a href="#Page_178">178</a></li> -<li class="isub1">grip, <a href="#Page_176">176-177</a></li> -<li class="isub1">passing principles and techniques, <a href="#Page_178">178-179</a></li> -<li class="isub1">release and delivery, <a href="#Page_177">177-178</a></li> -<li class="isub1">rushing of, <a href="#Page_63">63-64</a></li> -<li class="isub1">warm up time, <a href="#Page_212">212</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Passes (<i>see under</i> Name)</li> - -<li class="indx">Passing, principles and techniques, <a href="#Page_178">178-179</a></li> -<li class="isub1">(<i>see also</i> <a href="#Passer">Passer</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Passing game:</li> -<li class="isub1"><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_242"></a>[242]</span>essentials of, <a href="#Page_176">176</a></li> -<li class="isub1">primary objectives, <a href="#Page_179">179</a></li> -<li class="isub1">(<i>see also</i> <a href="#Offensive_passing_game_techniques">Offensive passing game techniques</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Pass protection, <a href="#Page_163">163-164</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Pass receiving, <a href="#Page_183">183-185</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Pass routes, <a href="#Page_179">179-182</a></li> -<li class="isub1">flooding an area, <a href="#Page_179">179-181</a></li> -<li class="isub1">offensive pass cuts, <a href="#Page_181">181-182</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Pass rush, <a href="#Page_64">64</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Peel-off drill, <a href="#Page_220">220-221</a>, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Penalties, piling on, <a href="#Page_28">28</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Personal protector:</li> -<li class="isub1">spread punt blocking rules, <a href="#Page_119">119</a>, <a href="#Page_120">120</a></li> -<li class="isub1">tight punt formation blocking rules, <a href="#Page_123">123-124</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Phillips, O. A. “Bum,” <a href="#Page_29">29</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Piling on, penalty for, <a href="#Page_28">28</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Place kick, blocking, <a href="#Page_139">139</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Place kicking formation, <a href="#Page_138">138</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Planning, <a href="#Page_16">16</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Planning_for_a_game">Planning for a game, <a href="#Page_203">203-214</a></li> -<li class="isub1">grading game film, <a href="#Page_213">213-214</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in-season planning, <a href="#Page_204">204-212</a></li> -<li class="isub1">out-of-season planning, <a href="#Page_203">203-204</a></li> -<li class="isub1">week preceding game, <a href="#Page_204">204-212</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Players:</li> -<li class="isub1">dedication, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li> -<li class="isub1">desire to excel, <a href="#Page_13">13</a></li> -<li class="isub1">leaders, <a href="#Page_14">14</a></li> -<li class="isub1">physical condition, <a href="#Page_13">13</a></li> -<li class="isub1">“solid citizens,” <a href="#Page_10">10</a>, <a href="#Page_14">14</a>, <a href="#Page_231">231</a></li> -<li class="isub1">traits necessary, <a href="#Page_12">12</a></li> -<li class="isub1">type, <a href="#Page_11">11</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Point of attack, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Position, <a href="#Page_144">144</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Position ball, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Position lateral, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx" id="Post-lead_block">Post-lead block, <a href="#Page_161">161-162</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Post man, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Powell, Dee, <a href="#Page_234">234</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Practice, <a href="#Page_206">206</a>, <a href="#Page_207">207-209</a>, <a href="#Page_210">210</a>, <a href="#Page_211">211</a></li> -<li class="isub1">time essential, <a href="#Page_214">214</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Punt (<i>see under</i> <a href="#Kicking_game_techniques">Kicking game techniques</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Punter, <a href="#Page_112">112-114</a></li> -<li class="isub1">timing of, <a href="#Page_114">114-116</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Punting, <a href="#Page_111">111-116</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Punt return, <a href="#Page_126">126-130</a></li> -<li class="isub1">left, <a href="#Page_126">126-128</a></li> -<li class="isub1">middle, <a href="#Page_128">128-130</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Pursuer, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Pursuit drill, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Quarterback:</li> -<li class="isub1">characteristics of, <a href="#Page_187">187</a></li> -<li class="isub1">faking, <a href="#Page_155">155</a></li> -<li class="isub1">field position, <a href="#Page_187">187-190</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in goal line defense, <a href="#Page_51">51</a></li> -<li class="isub1">greatest asset, <a href="#Page_186">186</a></li> -<li class="isub1">guide for, <a href="#Page_196">196-202</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in huddle, <a href="#Page_152">152-153</a></li> -<li class="isub1">making the exchange, <a href="#Page_154">154-155</a></li> -<li class="isub1">offensive stance for, <a href="#Page_145">145-146</a></li> -<li class="isub1">option, <a href="#Page_172">172-173</a></li> -<li class="isub1">passing, <a href="#Page_105">105</a></li> -<li class="isub1">playing game on blackboard, <a href="#Page_194">194-196</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in quick kick formation, <a href="#Page_125">125</a></li> -<li class="isub1">after receiving snap, <a href="#Page_154">154</a></li> -<li class="isub1">recognizing and attacking defenses, <a href="#Page_190">190-196</a></li> -<li class="isub1">stance, <a href="#Page_153">153</a></li> -<li class="isub1">taking snap-back, <a href="#Page_153">153-154</a></li> -<li class="isub1">team confidence in, <a href="#Page_186">186</a></li> -<li class="isub1">techniques, <a href="#Page_153">153-155</a></li> -<li class="isub1">tips for, <a href="#Page_201">201-202</a></li> -<li class="isub1">training of, <a href="#Page_186">186-202</a></li> -<li class="isub1">types of, <a href="#Page_186">186-187</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Quick kick formation, <a href="#Page_124">124-126</a></li> -<li class="isub1">surprise element, <a href="#Page_126">126</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">RBI, <a href="#Page_214">214</a></li> - -<li class="indx">“Reading” drill, <a href="#Page_221">221</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Receivers, holding up, <a href="#Page_64">64-65</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Reverse shoulder block, <a href="#Page_158">158-159</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Rice Institute, <a href="#Page_3">3</a>, <a href="#Page_5">5</a>, <a href="#Page_6">6</a>, <a href="#Page_113">113</a>, <a href="#Page_135">135</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Right end (<i>see under</i> <a href="#Ends">Ends</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Right guard (<i>see under</i> <a href="#Guards">Guards</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Right halfback (<i>see under</i> <a href="#Halfbacks">Halfbacks</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Right tackle (<i>see under</i> <a href="#Tackles">Tackles</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">“Robber,” <a href="#Page_107">107-108</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Robinson, Jackie, <a href="#Page_72">72</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Rockne, Knute, <a href="#Page_1">1</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Roll back, <a href="#Page_144">144</a></li> - -<li class="indx"><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_243"></a>[243]</span>Roll block, <a href="#Page_165">165-166</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Roll-out pass, 4-spoke pass defense against, <a href="#Page_93">93-95</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Rose Bowl, <a href="#Page_1">1</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Rotation, predetermined, <a href="#Page_99">99-104</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Running game (<i>see</i> <a href="#Offensive_running_game">Offensive running game</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Running the line drill, <a href="#Page_216">216</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Run-pass option, <a href="#Page_172">172</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Rushing the passer drill, <a href="#Page_227">227</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Safety man:</li> -<li class="isub1">defensive:</li> -<li class="isub2">coverage of action pass, <a href="#Page_76">76</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_79">79</a></li> -<li class="isub2">coverage of straight drop back pass, <a href="#Page_75">75</a></li> -<li class="isub3">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_77">77</a></li> -<li class="isub2">pass defense by, <a href="#Page_84">84-85</a></li> -<li class="isub1">defensive stance, <a href="#Page_43">43</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in 5-spoke defense, <a href="#Page_70">70</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in punt return, <a href="#Page_128">128</a></li> -<li class="isub1">6-2 alignment, <a href="#Page_54">54</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in victory defense, <a href="#Page_47">47</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Scoring, on defense, <a href="#Page_25">25</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Scoring zone, <a href="#Page_189">189</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Scout, <a href="#Page_204">204</a>, <a href="#Page_207">207</a></li> -<li class="isub1">(<i>see also</i> <a href="#Coaching">Coaching</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Scout report, <a href="#Page_207">207</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Scrimmages, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Secondary:</li> -<li class="isub1">alignments, <a href="#Page_190">190</a></li> -<li class="isub1">defensive, drills for, <a href="#Page_215">215-220</a></li> -<li class="isub1">6-2 alignment, <a href="#Page_54">54</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in split-T defense, <a href="#Page_52">52-53</a>, <a href="#Page_54">54</a></li> -<li class="isub1">3-deep, defense versus single wing offense, <a href="#Page_59">59</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Secondary rotation, defensive calls for, <a href="#Page_100">100-104</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Self-scoring zone, <a href="#Page_189">189-190</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Set, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">“7,” <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Seven Blocks of Granite, <a href="#Page_1">1</a></li> - -<li class="indx">7-man spin-out drill, <a href="#Page_224">224</a></li> - -<li class="indx">7 technique, <a href="#Page_39">39</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Shoot out, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Signal callers, <a href="#Page_34">34</a>, <a href="#Page_35">35</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in adjustments versus backs and ends flanked, <a href="#Page_57">57</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Signal calling, automatic versus non-automatic, <a href="#Page_151">151-152</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Single wing offense, defense versus, <a href="#Page_57">57-61</a></li> - -<li class="indx">“6,” <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">6 technique, <a href="#Page_38">38-39</a></li> - -<li class="indx">6-2 alignment, <a href="#Page_53">53-56</a></li> -<li class="isub1">versus single wing offense, <a href="#Page_59">59</a>, <a href="#figure037"><i>Fig. 37</i></a></li> - -<li class="indx">Slam, <a href="#Page_142">142</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Snap count, <a href="#Page_150">150-152</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Sooners, <a href="#Page_2">2</a>, <a href="#Page_26">26</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Southern Methodist University, <a href="#Page_116">116</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Southwest Conference Championship, <a href="#Page_232">232</a>, <a href="#Page_233">233</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Split, <a href="#Page_6">6</a>, <a href="#Page_32">32</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Split-T defense, <a href="#Page_51">51-55</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Spread punt formation, <a href="#Page_116">116-122</a>, <a href="#Page_126">126</a></li> -<li class="isub1">advantages, <a href="#Page_117">117</a></li> -<li class="isub1">blocking rules, <a href="#Page_118">118-120</a></li> -<li class="isub1">coverage, <a href="#Page_120">120-122</a></li> -<li class="isub1">line splits, <a href="#Page_117">117-118</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Staff meetings, <a href="#Page_22">22</a>, <a href="#Page_23">23</a></li> -<li class="isub1">(<i>see also</i> <a href="#Planning_for_a_game">Planning for a game</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Stagg, Amos Alonzo, <a href="#Page_2">2</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Stallings, Gene, <a href="#Page_6">6</a>, <a href="#Page_233">233</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Stance:</li> -<li class="isub1">defensive, <a href="#Page_41">41-43</a></li> -<li class="isub1">(<i>see also under</i> <a href="#Offensive_running_game">Offensive running game</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Straight drop back pass:</li> -<li class="isub1">coverage of, <a href="#Page_74">74-75</a></li> -<li class="isub2">from broken backfield, <a href="#Page_77">77-78</a></li> -<li class="isub1">from flanker set, 4-spoke coverage versus, <a href="#Page_95">95-96</a></li> -<li class="isub1">from floater set, 4-spoke coverage versus, <a href="#Page_97">97-98</a></li> -<li class="isub1">4-spoke pass coverage versus, <a href="#Page_90">90-92</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Strategy, planning of, <a href="#Page_205">205</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Sugar Bowl, <a href="#Page_15">15</a>, <a href="#Page_26">26</a></li> - -<li class="indx">“Surprise defense,” <a href="#Page_44">44-46</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst" id="Tackles">Tackles:</li> -<li class="isub1">defense versus single wing offense, <a href="#Page_58">58</a></li> -<li class="isub1"><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_244"></a>[244]</span>defensive stance, <a href="#Page_42">42</a></li> -<li class="isub1">extra point and field goal blocking rules, <a href="#Page_137">137-138</a></li> -<li class="isub1">goal line defense, <a href="#Page_49">49</a></li> -<li class="isub1">left, in punt return, <a href="#Page_127">127</a></li> -<li class="isub1">right, in punt return, <a href="#Page_128">128</a></li> -<li class="isub1">6-2 alignment, <a href="#Page_53">53</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in split-T defense, <a href="#Page_52">52</a></li> -<li class="isub1">spread punt blocking rules, <a href="#Page_119">119</a></li> -<li class="isub1">in victory defense, <a href="#Page_47">47</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Tackling drill in the secondary, <a href="#Page_219">219-220</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Tackling, gang, <a href="#Page_28">28</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Taylor, Lloyd, <a href="#Page_6">6</a>, <a href="#Page_141">141</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Teaching, coaching and, <a href="#Page_23">23</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Team:</li> -<li class="isub1">drills, <a href="#Page_208">208</a></li> -<li class="isub2">defensive, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li> -<li class="isub1">“learning,” <a href="#Page_208">208</a></li> -<li class="isub1">unity, <a href="#Page_14">14</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Teamwork, defense and, <a href="#Page_27">27-28</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Texas A & M, <a href="#Page_29">29</a>, <a href="#Page_57">57</a>, <a href="#Page_87">87</a>, <a href="#Page_113">113</a>, <a href="#Page_114">114</a>, <a href="#Page_141">141</a>, <a href="#Page_232">232</a></li> -<li class="isub1">1955 football team, <a href="#Page_5">5-6</a></li> - -<li class="indx">3-deep defense, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Three down zone, <a href="#Page_189">189</a></li> - -<li class="indx">3-on-3 drill, <a href="#Page_223">223</a></li> - -<li class="indx">3 technique, <a href="#Page_36">36-37</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Three-way option, <a href="#Page_173">173-174</a></li> - -<li class="indx">“Thunder,” <a href="#Page_51">51</a>, <a href="#Page_106">106-107</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Tight punt formation, <a href="#Page_122">122-124</a></li> -<li class="isub1">blocking rules for, <a href="#Page_122">122-124</a></li> -<li class="isub1">kicking from, <a href="#Page_122">122</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Time schedules, pre-game, <a href="#Page_211">211-212</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Timing:</li> -<li class="isub1">centers, <a href="#Page_114">114</a></li> -<li class="isub1">for extra point, <a href="#Page_138">138</a></li> -<li class="isub1">for field goal attempt, <a href="#Page_138">138</a></li> -<li class="isub1">punters, <a href="#Page_114">114-116</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Tip drill, <a href="#Page_216">216</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Touchdowns:</li> -<li class="isub1">“easy,” <a href="#Page_24">24</a>, <a href="#Page_25">25</a>, <a href="#Page_27">27</a>, <a href="#Page_61">61</a></li> -<li class="isub1">interceptions and, <a href="#Page_27">27</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Trail junction blocker, <a href="#Page_143">143</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Trap block, <a href="#Page_162">162-163</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Tulane University, <a href="#Page_116">116</a></li> - -<li class="indx">“Twelfth man,” <a href="#Page_219">219</a></li> - -<li class="indx">2-deep defense (<i>see</i> <a href="#four-spoke">4-spoke pass defense</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Two-on-one block (<i>see</i> <a href="#Post-lead_block">Post-lead block</a>)</li> - -<li class="indx">Two-platoon football, <a href="#Page_111">111</a></li> - -<li class="indx">2 technique, <a href="#Page_34">34</a>, <a href="#Page_36">36</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Unbalanced line, defense versus, <a href="#Page_56">56</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Unity, feeling of, <a href="#Page_14">14</a></li> - -<li class="indx">University of Alabama, <a href="#Page_87">87</a></li> - -<li class="indx">University of Chattanooga, <a href="#Page_117">117</a></li> - -<li class="indx">University of Cincinnati, <a href="#Page_136">136</a></li> - -<li class="indx">University of Georgia, <a href="#Page_114">114</a>, <a href="#Page_194">194</a></li> - -<li class="indx">University of Houston, <a href="#Page_195">195</a>, <a href="#Page_196">196</a></li> - -<li class="indx">University of Kentucky, <a href="#Page_14">14</a>, <a href="#Page_112">112</a>, <a href="#Page_113">113</a>, <a href="#Page_114">114</a>, <a href="#Page_116">116</a>, <a href="#Page_136">136</a>, <a href="#Page_176">176</a></li> - -<li class="indx">University of Mississippi, <a href="#Page_116">116</a></li> - -<li class="indx">University of Oklahoma, <a href="#Page_15">15</a>, <a href="#Page_26">26</a>, <a href="#Page_141">141</a></li> - -<li class="indx">University of Tennessee, <a href="#Page_115">115</a>, <a href="#Page_116">116</a></li> - -<li class="indx">University of Texas, <a href="#Page_232">232</a>, <a href="#Page_233">233</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Up-backs:</li> -<li class="isub1">extra point and field goal blocking rules, <a href="#Page_137">137-138</a></li> -<li class="isub1">spread punt blocking rules, <a href="#Page_119">119-120</a></li> -<li class="isub1">tight punt formation blocking rules, <a href="#Page_123">123</a></li> - -<li class="indx">U. S. Navy, <a href="#Page_16">16</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Vanderbilt University, <a href="#Page_116">116</a></li> - -<li class="indx">“Victory defense,” <a href="#Page_46">46-48</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Watson, Don, <a href="#Page_6">6</a>, <a href="#Page_233">233</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Wave drill, <a href="#Page_230">230</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Webb, Clayton, <a href="#Page_112">112</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Wide tackle, <a href="#Page_32">32</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Wilkinson, Bud, <a href="#Page_2">2</a>, <a href="#Page_141">141</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Winning:</li> -<li class="isub1">intrinsic value of, <a href="#Page_4">4</a></li> -<li class="isub1">theory of, <a href="#Page_8">8-17</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Wintle, Walter D., <a href="#Page_231">231</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Woodard, Woody, <a href="#Page_116">116</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Wright, Jimmy, <a href="#Page_6">6</a></li> - -<li class="ifrst">Zone coverage, <a href="#Page_74">74</a></li> - -<li class="indx">Zones, <a href="#Page_187">187-190</a></li> -</ul> - -<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BUILDING A CHAMPIONSHIP FOOTBALL TEAM ***</div> -<div style='text-align:left'> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will -be renamed. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. -</div> - -<div style='margin-top:1em; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE</div> -<div style='text-align:center;font-size:0.9em'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE</div> -<div style='text-align:center;font-size:0.9em'>PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person -or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the -Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when -you share it without charge with others. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work -on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the -phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: -</div> - -<blockquote> - <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most - other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions - whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms - of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online - at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you - are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws - of the country where you are located before using this eBook. - </div> -</blockquote> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg™ License. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format -other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain -Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -provided that: -</div> - -<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'> - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation.” - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ - works. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. - </div> -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right -of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread -public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state -visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. -</div> - -</div> -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e1d967e..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure001.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure001.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 57dc857..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure001.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure002.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure002.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c6b503f..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure002.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure003.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure003.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ddf8393..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure003.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure004.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure004.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c000256..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure004.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure005.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure005.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 067decd..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure005.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure006.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure006.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e97ec58..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure006.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure007.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure007.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ecae0da..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure007.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure008.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure008.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f3f7088..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure008.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure009.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure009.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index dddef36..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure009.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure010.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure010.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4269789..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure010.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure011.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure011.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1a2576a..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure011.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure012.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure012.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b9e8c2b..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure012.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure013.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure013.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b4234a9..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure013.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure014.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure014.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5db57b3..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure014.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure015.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure015.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 69f8ce4..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure015.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure016.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure016.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index bdc0a96..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure016.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure017.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure017.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 573cf1b..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure017.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure018.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure018.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f15e51a..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure018.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure019.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure019.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 497c856..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure019.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure020.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure020.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 72c6947..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure020.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure021.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure021.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c7dad9c..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure021.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure022.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure022.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2ee996e..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure022.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure023.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure023.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c7cb312..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure023.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure024.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure024.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 15edd08..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure024.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure025.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure025.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e1820da..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure025.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure026.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure026.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 20fb49e..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure026.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure027.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure027.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e709054..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure027.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure028a.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure028a.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2e10993..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure028a.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure028b.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure028b.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6b96bce..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure028b.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure029.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure029.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0441e53..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure029.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure030.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure030.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c6a3a25..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure030.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure031.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure031.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index bebee05..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure031.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure032.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure032.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 18fe521..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure032.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure033.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure033.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index bebcbe4..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure033.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure034.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure034.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d27f80a..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure034.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure035.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure035.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 562213e..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure035.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure036.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure036.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3563020..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure036.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure037.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure037.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e288c7c..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure037.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure038.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure038.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index aa82236..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure038.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure039.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure039.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9f1abf4..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure039.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure040.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure040.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9e7af7f..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure040.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure041.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure041.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ba4c50b..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure041.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure042.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure042.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a230a8a..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure042.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure043.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure043.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fee53a9..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure043.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure044.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure044.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index affb9cc..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure044.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure045.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure045.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 634ab3c..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure045.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure046.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure046.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7590859..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure046.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure047.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure047.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 42b03f7..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure047.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure048.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure048.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index accdb76..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure048.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure049.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure049.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f467ac6..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure049.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure050.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure050.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1b86ca3..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure050.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure051.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure051.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a02bfe1..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure051.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure052.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure052.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3bd82c4..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure052.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure053.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure053.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index b0eb387..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure053.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure054.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure054.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fb2c2c2..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure054.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure055.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure055.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2433e7a..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure055.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure056.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure056.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ed6f05c..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure056.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure057.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure057.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 79ff838..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure057.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure058.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure058.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5fa6f79..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure058.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure059.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure059.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a7ccb36..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure059.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure060.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure060.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index dcd7991..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure060.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure061.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure061.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5f89496..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure061.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure062.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure062.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e387c0d..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure062.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure063.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure063.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 12a1e5a..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure063.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure064.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure064.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0b0badd..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure064.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure065.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure065.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3d408de..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure065.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure066.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure066.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ae04697..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure066.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure067.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure067.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0ab4483..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure067.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure068.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure068.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 15323ba..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure068.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure069.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure069.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 47182b9..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure069.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure070.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure070.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 23c4149..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure070.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure071.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure071.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 0a63e20..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure071.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure072.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure072.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d8f15fe..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure072.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure073.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure073.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3b62412..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure073.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure074.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure074.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c5b71dd..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure074.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure075.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure075.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index bafc86a..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure075.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure076.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure076.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d673f46..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure076.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure077.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure077.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a901432..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure077.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure078.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure078.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a7a2cd5..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure078.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure079.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure079.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 80fe525..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure079.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure080.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure080.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 54ffbdf..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure080.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure081.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure081.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 1ba4893..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure081.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure082.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure082.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9e31b19..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure082.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure083.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure083.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f4117fb..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure083.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure084.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure084.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 963daf9..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure084.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure085.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure085.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f3f6dd3..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure085.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure086.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure086.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c5fba6d..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure086.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure087.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure087.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 96c5281..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure087.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure088.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure088.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5de6ccf..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure088.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure089.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure089.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index fd5503a..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure089.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure090.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure090.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 27f3bc0..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure090.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure091.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure091.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 38844fa..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure091.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure092.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure092.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8dfc20e..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure092.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure093.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure093.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a9601a2..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure093.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure094.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure094.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 10e9682..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure094.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure095.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure095.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 054f1e2..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure095.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure096.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure096.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6e8ac75..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure096.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure097.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure097.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a516293..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure097.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure098.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure098.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 06cacc3..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure098.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure099a.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure099a.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d06bd2c..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure099a.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure099b.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure099b.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5b8dabf..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure099b.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure100.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure100.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4736d27..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure100.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure101a.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure101a.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2d66e7f..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure101a.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure101b.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure101b.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 30d3626..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure101b.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure102a.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure102a.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 81d934b..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure102a.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure102b.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure102b.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index edf9cfa..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure102b.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure102c.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure102c.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2dddee2..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure102c.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure102d.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure102d.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index ac3ded6..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure102d.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure103a.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure103a.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 47c8ccb..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure103a.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure103b.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure103b.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7d51c79..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure103b.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure104.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure104.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 3632100..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure104.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure105.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure105.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2a13849..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure105.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure106.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure106.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2503d39..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure106.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure107.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure107.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 51abd2f..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure107.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure108.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure108.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e0d7ca4..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure108.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure109.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure109.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7ad3291..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure109.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure110.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure110.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c1dafb6..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure110.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure111.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure111.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index e071d45..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure111.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure112.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure112.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 78d43f2..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure112.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure113.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure113.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 37fe1c7..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure113.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure114.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure114.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 30ee5b5..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure114.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure115.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure115.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6afbc01..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure115.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure116.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure116.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 7ee9aff..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure116.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure117.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure117.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 14baf73..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure117.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure118.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure118.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 222819f..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure118.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure119.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure119.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 34c1499..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure119.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure120.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure120.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 88db2cb..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure120.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure121.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure121.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 664324b..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure121.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure122.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure122.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f64a2c3..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure122.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure123.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure123.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6c7d2bc..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure123.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure124.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure124.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 9c9bc39..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure124.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure125.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure125.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c3446e3..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure125.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure126.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure126.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 821cece..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure126.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure127.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure127.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 81bcad0..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure127.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure128.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure128.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 630f671..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure128.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure129.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure129.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index f3ca002..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure129.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure130.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure130.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a333f11..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure130.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure131.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure131.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 41c367a..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure131.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure132.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure132.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d62cc55..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure132.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure133.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure133.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 2dc7f2c..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure133.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure134.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure134.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d2e7fd2..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure134.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure135.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure135.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 389ad50..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure135.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure136.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure136.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6b48008..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure136.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure137.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure137.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8a00626..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure137.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure138.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure138.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 84b0abb..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure138.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure139.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure139.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a0114d8..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure139.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure140.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure140.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index a2491f6..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure140.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure141.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure141.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 8be5f57..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure141.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure142.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure142.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d35b9e2..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure142.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure143.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure143.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index d4d9dae..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure143.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/68466-h/images/figure144.jpg b/old/68466-h/images/figure144.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index cba26d2..0000000 --- a/old/68466-h/images/figure144.jpg +++ /dev/null |
